�rs1on

G eometric
Dimensioning
and Tolerancing
Ninth Edition

;;�-i�
���
APPROVED PUBLICATION

by
David A. Madsen
President, Madsen Designs Inc.
www.madsendesigns.com
Faculty Emeritus
Former Department Chairperson
Drafting Technology
Autodesk Premier Training Center
Clackamas Community College, Oregon City, Oregon
Autodesk Learning Member
Director Emeritus, American Design Drafting Association

David P. Madsen
President, Engineering Drafting & Design, Inc.
Vice President, Madsen Designs Inc.
Computer-Aided Design and Drafting Consultant and Educator
Autodesk Developer Network Member
SolidWorks Research Associate
American Design Drafting Association Member

Publisher
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.
Tinley Park, Illinois
www.g-w.com
 ■

~rs1on

Copyright © 201 3
by
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.

Previous editions copyright 2009, 2003, 1999, 1995, 1988,

1984, 1982, 1977
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, stored,
or transmitted in any form or by any electronic or mechanical
means, including information storage and retrieval systems, without
the prior written permission of The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.

Manufactured in the United States of America.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 2012007642

ISBN 978-1-60525-938-3

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-12-17 16 15 14 13 12

The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc. Brand Disclaimer: Brand names, company names, and
illustrations for products and services included in this text are provided for educational purposes o nly
and do not represent or imply endorsement or recommendation by the author or the publishe r.
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc. Safety Notice: The reader is expressly advised to carefully read,
understand, and apply all safety precautions and warnings described in this book or that might also be
indicated in undertaking the activities and exercises described herein to minimize risk of personal injury
or injury to others. Common sense and good judgment should also be exercised and applied to help
avoid all potential hazards. The reader should always refer to the appropriate manufacturer's technical
information, directions, and recommendations; then proceed with care to follow specific e quipment
operating instructions. The reader should understand these notices and cautions are not exhaustive.
The publisher makes no warranty or representation w hatsoever, either expressed or implied, including
but not limited to equipment, procedures, and applications described or referred to herein, their quality,
performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. The publisher assumes no responsibility
for any changes, errors, or omissions in this book. The publisher specifically disclaims any liability
whatsoever, including any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages
resulting, in whole or in part, from the reader's use or reliance upon the information, instructions,
procedures, warnings, cautions, applications, or other matter contained in this book. The publisher
assumes no responsibility for the activities of the reader.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Madsen, David A.
Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing/by David A. Madsen, David P. Madsen.
p.cm.
Includes index.
ISBN 978-1-60525-938-3
1. Engineering drawings--Olmensioning. 2. Tolerance (Engineering). I.
Madsen, David P. 11. Title.
T357 .M218 2013
620' .0045--dc23 2012007642

2
 .
~rs1on

Introduction
~~
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing provides you with the complete
fundamentals of geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) concepts as
published in the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standard for
engineering drawing and related documentation practices. The standard is titled
ASME Y14.5-2009 Dimensioning and Tolerancing. In this text, this standard is referred
to as ASME Y14.5 or ASME Y14.5-2009. Drawings based on th.is standard should
have a general note that states: DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER
ASME Y14.5-2009. The examples in this text are based on the ASME Y14.5 standard.
All drawings in this text are drawn using third-angle projection.
Other Y14.5 documents include ASME Y14.5.1M Mathematical Definition of
Dimensioning and Tolerancing Principles and ASME Y14.5.2 Certification of Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerancing Professionals. ASME Y14.41 Digital Product Definition Data
Practices is a standard that establishes requirements for applying GD&T directly to
the computer-aided design (CAD) model.
The standards documents that control general dimensional tolerances found in
the title block and in general notes are ASME Y14.1 Drawing Sheet Size and Format for
inch applications and ASME Y14.1M Metric Drawing Sheet Size and Format for metric
applications. Engineering change applications are recommended by the document
ASME Y14.35M Revision of Engineering Drawings and Associated Documents.
Additional standards documents that relate to drafting practices include ASME
Y14.3 Multiview and Sectional View Drawings, ASME Y14.100 Engineering Drawing
Practices, and ASME Yl4.4M Pictorial Drawing.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers headquarters is located at Three
Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990. The ASME Web site is www.asme.org.

American Design Drafting Association (ADDA)

Approved Publication

covers topics and related material, as stated in the ADDA Curriculum

,.-of-
The content of this text is considered a fundamental component to ~ ~ l]~
the design drafting profession by ADDA International. This publication
"''°"'' '"""'TI"
Certification Standards and the ADDA Professional Certification Examination
Review Guides. Although this publication is not conclusive, with respect to
ADDA standards, it should be considered a key reference tool in pursuit of a
professional career. For more information about the ADDA Drafter Certification
Examination and becoming a certified drafter, go to www.adda.org.

3
 .
trs1on

Purpose
The goal of this text is to guide you through a logical sequence of learning
activities and to use this knowledge in a skill-building format.
• It is important for you to have a solid foundation in the understanding
of dimensioning and tolerancing terms, definitions, and concepts before
beginning a study of geometric dimensioning and tolerancing.
• The geometric dimensioning and tolerancing concepts are introduced to you
in a methodical manner to help ensure that you have full understanding
of every basic concept as you build knowledge toward more advanced
applications.
• The concepts are covered in an easy-to-learn sequence.
• The text progresses using a format that allows you to become comfortable
with the concepts as you build understanding from one chapter to the next.
• The basics of interpreting and applying geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing practices should be mastered before advanced topics, such as
designing and inspecting for GD&T, are covered.
• GD&T is approached in this text as an easy-to-understand subject rather than
something complex and difficult.

To the Student
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing is for Manufacturing Technology
students, Drafting Technology students, and professional upgrade training.
Everything you need is in this text.

For Manufacturing Technology students:

• Chapter tests reinforce the previously learned topics. The chapter tests can
be used as open- or closed-book tests, or they can be used for content review.
Test answers can be written on the textbook pages.
• Print reading exercises are provided following every chapter. This gives you
the opportunity to read prints illustrating the geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing concepts related to the chapter. Answers to the print reading
exercises can be written on the textbook pages.
• The prints are actual industry drawings that were created using computer-
aided design and drafting (CADD).
• Computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) concepts are introduced.
• A comprehensive final exam is provided to solidify the learning that has
been conducted throughout the course of study. Final exam answers can be
written on the textbook pages unless otherwise specified by your instructor.

For Drafting Technology students:

• Chapter tests reinforce the previously learned topics. Test answers can be
written on the textbook pages.
• The print reading exercises are optional, but can be considered helpful in
understanding more about the information provided in prints. Answers to
the print reading exercises can be written on the textbook pages.

4
 ■

trs1on

• Numerous drafting problems are presented as pictorial illustrations

or design layouts. This requires that you determine the correct views,
dimensions, and geometric dimensioning and tolerancing placement.
• Drafting problems range from basic to advanced.
• Drafting problems can be completed using manual or computer-aided
design and drafting techniques. GD&T is a natural for CADD applications.
Appendix A of this text explains how GD&T is applied using the tools of a
CADD system.
• Symbols are detailed throughout the text to demonstrate proper drafting
standards.
• Drafting rules and standards are emphasized for proper applications.
• A comprehensive final exam is provided to solidify the learning that has
been conducted throughout the course of study. Final exam answers can be
written on the textbook pages unless otherwise specified by your instructor.

Organization
This text is organized in a manner that is similar to the organization of topics in
ASME Y14.5-2009. The following summarizes the chapter sequence and coverage of
related topics in ASME Y14.5-2009:
Chapter 1: Dimensioning and Tolerancing
• Definitions and general dimensioning applications.
• General tolerancing and related principles.
Chapter 2: Introduction to Symbols and Terms
• Symbology and related terminology.
Chapter 3: Datums
• Datum symbols, terminology, and applications.
Chapter 4: Material Condition and Material Boundary
• Material condition symbols, terminology, and applications.
Chapter 5: Form Tolerances
• Form tolerances and applications.
Chapter 6: Orientation Tolerances
• Orientation tolerances and applications.
Chapter 7: Location Tolerances (Part I)
• Introduction to location tolerances and applications.
Chapter 8: Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition
• Location tolerances and virtual condition applications.
Chapter 9: Profile Tolerances
• Profile tolerances and applications.
Chapter 10: R1mo11t Tolerances
• Runout tolerances and applications.

5
 ■

trs1on

New to This Edition

• Expanded coverage and examples of features that have size and features that do
not have size.
• Updated information related to the datum reference frame concept.
• Expanded datum definition.
• Updated information about the symmetry line.
• Additional information about the independency symbol.
• Expanded content, examples, and calculations provided for MMC, LMC, RFS,
MMB, LMB, and RMB.
• Added bilateral position tolerance example.
• Expanded examples and calculations showing how far off center two features
can be when position tolerance is used to control coaxiality.
• Added non-uniform profile example.
• Clarified profile tolerance and sharp comers.
• Enhanced circular and total runout description and examples.
• Expanded chapter tests and print reading problems.
• New concepts added to the final exam.
• Updated actual industry drawing.
• Added new drawing problems.

GD&T Assessment and Testing Website

David A. Madsen, coauthor of this book, has codeveloped a dynamic GD&T
assessment and testing website to be used in conjunction with this text. The
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Study Zone (www.draftingzone.com/
studyzone) is designed to help you gain an understanding of GD&T through an
array of illustrated study resources. It contains challenging Study Questions that
test knowledge of specific areas of GD&T. The comprehensive GD&T Practice Exams
test your overall GD&T knowledge and ultimately, readiness for ASME's GDTP
Certification. This website is independent of Goodheart-Willcox Publisher.

Acknowledgments
We would like to give special thanks to the people who gave professional
technical and industry support for this edition and past editions of Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerancing:
• Patrick J. Brennan, Mechanical Engineering, Nuclear Fuel Handling,
General Electric Canada, Inc.
• Gary E. Garnier, Mechanical Design Engineer, Los Gatos, CA
• Dav id L. King, Technical Training Service, Lecturer, Trainer, and
Consultant, Clinton, CT
• James R. Larson, Ingersoll Milling Machine Company
• Keith McDonald, Documentation Supervisor, FUR Systems, Inc.
• George Schafer, Manager Engineering Services, NACCO Material
Handling Inc.
Special thanks to Anthony J. Panozzo for his technical support and contribution
of Appendix A3, Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks.

6
 ■

trs1on

Special Acknowledgment
Special acknowledgment is given to Dennis Alan Schwartz for his extensive
review and support for the revision of this textbook using the ASME Y14.5-2009
standard. Dennis is the Director of Engineering Services at Wright Medical
Technology, Inc. in Arlington, Tenn. Wright Medical Technology is a global
manufacturer and distributor of orthopedic products. Dennis is responsible for all
U.S. engineering drawings and CAD models and manages engineering changes
required on drawings. Dennis has more than 35 years of mechanical design and
drafting experience. Dennis is an American Design Drafting Association (ADDA)
Certified Drafter, and an American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Certified Senior Level GD&T Professional. Dennis is a member of the ADDA Board
of Directors. Dennis holds a Master of Science degree in Operations Management
from the University of Arkansas, and a Bachelor of Science degree in Management
from Christian Brothers University in Memphis, Tenn.

About the Authors

David A Madsen is the president of Madsen Designs Inc. (www.madsendesigns.com)
and an Authorized Autodesk Author. David is Faculty Emeritus of Drafting
Technology and the Autodesk Premier Training Center at Clackamas Community
College in Oregon City, Oregon. David was an instructor and department
Chairperson at Clackamas Community College for nearly 30 years. In addition to
community college experience, David was a Drafting Technology instructor at
Centennial High School in Gresham, Oregon. David is a former member of the
American Design Drafting Association (ADDA) Board of Directors and was honored
by the ADDA with Director Emeritus status at the annual conference in 2005. David
has extensive experience in mechanical drafting, architectural design and drafting,
and building construction. David holds a Master of Education degree in Vocational
Administration and a Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Education. David is the
coauthor of Architectural Auto CAD, Architectural Desktop and its Applications,
Architectural Drafting Using Auto CAD, Auto CAD and Its Applications: Basics,
Advanced, and Comprehensive, AutoCAD Essentials, and other textbooks in the
areas of architectural drafting, mechanical drafting, engineering drafting, civil
drafting, architectural print reading, and mechanical print reading.
David P. Madsen is the president of Engineering Drafting & Design, Inc., the vice
president of Madsen Designs Inc. (www.madsendesigns.com), an Authorized Autodesk
Author, and a SolidWorks Research Associate. Dave provides drafting and design
consultation and training for all disciplines. Dave has been a professional design
drafter since 1996 and has extensive experience in a variety of drafting, design, and
engineering disciplines. Dave has provided drafting and computer-aided design
and drafting instruction to secondary and postsecondary learners since 1999 and
has considerable curriculum, program coordination, and development experience.
Dave holds a Master of Science degree in Educational Policy, Foundations, and
Administrative Studies with a specialization in Postsecondary, Adult, and Continuing
Education; a Bachelor of Science degree in Technology Education; and an Associate
of Science degree in General Studies and Drafting Technology. Dave is the author
of Inventor and its Applications and coauthor of Architectural Drafting Using
Auto CAD, and Auto CAD and Its Applications: Basics and Comprehensive, and
other textbooks in the areas of architectural drafting, mechanical drafting, engineering
drafting, civil drafting, architectural print reading, and mechanical print reading.
7
 .
~rs1on

Expanded Conte~ s
?"
Chapterl
Dimensioning and Tolerancing . ..... . . . .. . . . . ... ..... 13
Dimensioning Units. . . . . . . . . . 14
Fundamental Dimensioning Rules . 16
Definitions Related to Tolerancing . 18
Tolerancing Fundamentals . . . . . 21
Single Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) . . 24
Least Material Condition (LMC). . 25
Extreme Form Variation . . 27
Basic Fits of Mating Parts. . 28
Clearance Fit. . 29
Allowance . 29
Clearance. . . . 30
Force Fit . . . . 30
Chain Dimensioning . 31
Baseline Dimensioning . . 31
Direct Dimensioning . . . 32
Alternate Dimensioning Practices. . 32
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing for CADD/CAM . 37
Chapter 2
Introduction to Symbols and Terms .......... . . . ... . .. . 51
Dimensioning Symbols . . . . . . . . . .52
Dimensioning and Tolerancing Templates . . 54
Datum Feature Symbols . . . . . . .55
Datum Target Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Geometric Characteristic Symbols . . . . . . .58
Material Condition and Material Boundary Symbols. .58
Feature Control Frame .59
Basic Dimensions . 61
Additional Symbols .. . 62

8
 .
~rs1on

Chapter3
Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . ....... . .... ... ...... 77
Datums . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Datum Feature Symbol. . . . . . . . . . 78
Datum Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
The Datum Reference Frame Concept . 82
Datum Target Symbols .. . 88
Partial Datum Surface. . . . 99
Coplanar Surface Datums . 99
DatumAxis . . . . . . . . 102
Movable Datum Target Symbols and Datum Target Points 108
Movable Datum Target Symbols and Datum Target Spheres. 109
Datum Center Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
The Center of a Pattern of Features as the Datum Axis . 113
Applying a Translation Modifier to a Datum Reference 114
Using a Contoured Surface as a Datum Feature . . . 116

Chapter4
Material Condition and Material Boundary . . .. .. 133
Features of Size . . . . . 135
Conventional Tolerance. 138
Limits of Size. . . . . . . 138
Perfect Form Boundary . 140
Regard.less of Feature Size (RFS) and
Regardless of Material Boundary (RMB) . 141
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) . 144
Least Material Condition {LMC) . . . . . . . . . 147
Primary Datum Feature, RMB . . . . . . . . 151
Secondary and Tertiary Datum Feature, RMB . 153
Datum Precedence and Material Condition .. 154
Placing the MMB value in the Feature Control Frame 157
Material Condition Analysis and Applications 158
Material Boundary Calculation Examples . . . . . . . 159
Chapter 5
Form Tolerances .. 177
Straightness Tolerance 178
Flatness Tolerance. 185
Circularity Tolerance . 189
Free State Variation .. 190
Cylindricity Tolerance 194
Applying Form Control to a Datum Feature . 195

9
 .
~rs1on

Chapter6
Orientation Tolerances .. 201
Orientation Tolerances ... 202
Parallelism Tolerance . . . . 202
Perpendicularity Tolerance. 210
Combination of Parallelism
and Perpendicularity Tolerances. 219
Angularity Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . 220
Application of Orientation Tolerances
at RFS, MMC, and Zero Tolerance at MMC. 223
Chapter 7
Location Tolerances (Part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 231
Positional Tolerance. . . . . . . . 232
Locating Multiple Features . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Positional Tolerancing of Coaxial Features .. 255
Positional Tolerancing of Nonparallel Holes. 261
Locating Slotted Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Positional Tolerancing of Spherical Features. 266
Chapters
Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition . . . . . . . . 281
Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . 282
Projected Tolerance Zone. 292
Virtual Condition . . . . . 295
Concentricity Tolerance. . 300
Positional Tolerancing for Coaxiality . 301
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Chapter9
Profile Tolerances ..... .. . . . .. . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 315
Profile Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Non-Uniform Profile Tolerance Zone . . 327
Specifying Basic Dimensions in a Note . 335
Combination of Geometric Tolerances 335
ChapterlO
Runout Tolerances ... ..... . . . . .... . . . . 343
Runout Tolerances. . . . . . . . . 343
Combination of Geometric Tolerances 351
Specifying Independency. . . . . . . . 352

10
 .
~rs1on

Final Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... . . ... . . ... 359

Drafting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 387
Prints for Print Reading Exercises . ..... . . ....... . .. ... 431
SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING print from FLIR Systems, Inc. . . . . . 433
BRACKET print from Safety Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
HUB-STATIONARY, ATU print from FUR Systems, Inc. . . 435
PEDAL-ACCELERATOR print from Hyster Company. . 436
MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)-FRAME ASSY 3
AXIS HP print from FUR Systems, Inc. . . . . 437
HYDRAULIC VALVE print from DIAL Industries . 438
COVER, CAGE-INNER AZ DRIVE
print from FLIR Systems, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . 439
DOUBLE V-BLOCK print from Britt Technologies . 440
PLATE-TOP MOUNTING print from FLIR Systems, Inc. . . 441
B.H.-TOP print from Bell Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS print from FLIR Systems, Inc. . . 443
PLATE-BOTTOM WEDGED, ADJUSTABLE
PARALLEL (HP) print from FLIR Systems, Inc.. . 444
BRACKET ASSY-EL GIMBAL print from FLIR Systems, Inc. . 445
FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD.
print from Wright Medical Technology .. . 446
FEMORAL BEVEL CUTTER
print from Wright Medical Technology .. . 447
CEMENT RESTRICTOR
print from Wright Medical Technology . . . 448
SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK
print from Wright Medical Technology . . . 449
STANDARD REAMER GUIDE
print from Wright Medical Technology .. . 450
Appendices
Appendix A-Applying GD&T with CADD . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Al-Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD. . . . . . . . . . 453
A2-Using GD&T Tools in Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
A3-Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 471
Appendix B-Symbol Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Bl- Dimensioning Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
B2-Datum Feature and Datum Target Symbols . . . . . . . 480
B3-Material Condition and Material Boundary Symbols . . 481
B4-Feature Control Frame . . . . . . . . 482
BS-Geometric Characteristic Symbols . . 483
B6-Geometric Tolerancing Symbols . . . 484
11
 .
~rs1on

Appendix C-Reference Material ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Cl-Decimal Equivalents and Tap Drill Sizes .. 486
C2-Decimal, Fractional, Letter,
Wire Gage, and Millimeter Equivalents 487
C3---Tap Drill Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
C4-Metric Tap Drill Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
CS-Area, Temperature, Weight, and Volume Equivalents. 491
C6---Length and Square Area Conversions. 492
C7-Natural Trigonometric Functions 493
CS-Standard Gage Sheet Steel . 495
C9-Triangle Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
ClO-Metric Coordinate to Positional Tolerance Conversion 497
C11-Inch Coordinate to Positional Tolerance Conversion. 498
C12-Positional Tolerance Zone Analysis .. 499
C13---Geometric Tolerances Quick Reference . . 500
Glossary. 501
Index ... 509

12
 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ ~ i_ll " 1
Dimensioning
and Tolerancing

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Explain the purpose of geometric tolerancing.
0 Describe and use common practices for placing metric and inch dimensions.
0 Identify and use fundamental dimensioning rules.
0 Define common tolerancing terms.
0 Describe and use fundamental tolerancing practices.
0 Identify standard types of limits and fits between mating parts.
0 Describe and use standard dimensioning methods on drawings.

Technical Terms
Accumulation Interference fits
Actual local size Least material condition (LMC)
Actual mating size Limit dimensioning
Actual size Limits
Allowance Limits of size
Baseline dimensioning Locational fits
Basic dimensions Maximum material condition (MMC)
Bilateral tolerance Nominal size
Chain dimensioning Nonrigid parts
Chart dimensioning Plus-minus dimensioning
Clearance Radius
Clearance fits Rectangular coordinate dimensioning
Controlled radius without dimension lines
Conventional dimensioning Reference dimension
Conventional tolerancing Running and sliding fits (RC)
Diameter Shrink fits
Dimension Single limits
Direct dimensioning Specified dimension
Equal bilateral tolerance Spherical radius
Extreme form variation Stacking
Fair curve Stock size
Feature Tabular dimensioning
Feature of size Tolerance
Feature without size Tolerance buildup
Force fit Transition fits
Force fits (FN) Unequal bilateral tolerance
Free state condition Unilateral tolerance

13
 ■

~rs1on 14 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

This chapter covers general tolerancing as applied to conventional dimensioning

practices. The term conventional dimensioning as used here implies dimensioning
without the use of geometric tolerancing. Conventional tolerancing applies a degree
of form and location control by increasing or decreasing the tolerance.
Conventional dimensioning methods provide the necessary basic background
to begin a study of geometric tolerancing. It is important that you completely
understand conventional tolerancing before you begin the study of geometric
tolerancing.
When mass-production methods began, interchangeability of parts was
important. However, many times parts had to be "hand selected for fitting." Today,
industry has faced the reality that in a technological environment, there is no time
to do unnecessary individual fitting of parts. Geometric tolerancing helps ensure
interchangeability of parts. The function and relationship of a particular feature on a
part dictates the use of geometric tolerancing.
Geometric tolerancing does not take the place of conventional tolerancing.
However, geometric tolerancing specifies requirements more precisely than
conventional tolerancing, leaving no doubts as to the intended definition. This
precision may not be the case when conventional tolerancing is used and notes on the
drawing may become ambiguous.
When dealing with technology, a drafter needs to know how to properly
represent and read conventional dimensioning and geometric tolerancing. Generally,
the drafter converts engineering sketches or instructions into formal drawings using
proper standards and techniques. After acquiring adequate experience, a design
drafter, designer, or engineer begins implementing geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing on the research and development of new products or the revision of
existing products.
Most dimensions in this text are in metric. Therefore, a O precedes decimal
dimensions less than one millimeter, as in 0.25. When inch dimensions are used,
a Odoes not precede a decimal dimension that is less than one inch.

~
The examples in this textbook are based on the ASME Y14.5-2009
Dimensioning and Tolerancing standard published by the American Society
of Mechanical Engineers. All drawings based on the ASME Y14.5-2009
standard should have a general note that states: DIMENSIONING AND
TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5-2009. You will place this general note
on drawing problems throughout this textbook. The print reading exercises
found in this textbook are from actual companies. You will notice that
this general note is found on those drawings. Examples and print reading
problem drawings are presented using third-angle projection.

Dimensioning Units
Most dimensions in this text are in metric units based on the International System
of Units (SI). Separate problems and print reading exercises are provided with metric
and inch dimensions. The common SI unit of measure used on engineering drawings
is the millimeter. The common US unit used on engineering drawings is the inch.
The actual units used on your engineering drawings will be determined by the policy
of your school or company. The general note "UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED,
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS" (or "INCHES") should be placed on the
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 15

drawing when all dimensions are in either millimeters or inches. When some inch
dimensions are placed on a metric drawing, the abbreviation "IN." should follow the
inch dimensions. The abbreviation "mm" should follow any millimeter dimensions on
a predominately inch-dimensioned drawing.
The following are some rules for metric and inch dimension units. Examples of
these rules are shown in Example 1-1.
35'
24.5'
2 .00 30'1 5 ' 35"
2 .3 7 5 0' 45 ' 30 "
28 .625 30'0'±0'5'
24.5
750+ .002 0· 0•30 "± 0'0 °1 5 "
0 .5 · -. 003
25.0' ±0 .5'
24+0.08 .750± .005
- 0 .20 0
525+ ,000 30'-2°
24 ± 0 . 1 · - .004
0
24-0 2 4+0.2 625+. 004 25.5'- 00 .2·
.2 0 · - .000
30'0 '0 "- 30' 30' 30"
7 .0 - 7 .5 1 .000 - 1 .062
24.30 1.062 15'30' 4 5 "
2 4. 25 1.000 15'30'0"
Metric Inch Angular

Example 1-1. Displaying metric, inch, and angular dimensions.

Millimeter Dimensions
• The decimal point and zero are omitted when the metric dimension is a
whole number. For example, the metric dimension "12" has no decimal point.
• A zero precedes a decimal millimeter that is less than one. For example, the
metric dimension "0.5'' has a zero before the decimal point.
• When the metric dimension is greater than a whole number by a fraction of a
millimeter, the last digit to the right of the decimal point is not followed by a
zero. For example, the metric dimension "12.5" has no zero to the right of the
five. This rule is true unless tolerance values are displayed.
• Plus and minus values of a metric tolerance have the same number of
decimal places. Zeros are added to fill in where needed. For example,
24-+0.25 d 24.25
0.10 an 24.00 ·
• Metric limit tolerance values have the same number of decimal points. When
limit tolerance values are displayed on one line, such as 7.5- 7.6, the lower
value precedes the higher value, and the values are separated with a dash.
When limit tolerance values are displayed stacked, such as ~~- the higher
value is placed above the lower value. ·
 ■

~rs1on 16 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

• Examples in ASME Y14.5 show no zeros after the specified dimension to

match the tolerance. For example, 24±0.25 and 24.5±0.25 are correct.
• When using unilateral tolerances, a single 0 is used without a + or - sign for
the 0 part of the value. For example, 24-00 _25 and 24+00.25
• Basic dimension values follow the same display rules as stated for other
metric numbers. For example,~ and !24.51.

Inch Dimensions
• A zero does not precede a decimal inch that is less than one. For example, the
inch dimension ".5" has no zero before the decimal point.
• A specified inch dimension is expressed to the same number of decimal places
as its tolerance. Zeros are added to the right of the decimal point if needed. For
example, the inch dimension ".250±.005" has an additional zero added to ".25."
• Fractional inches can be used, but generally indicate a larger tolerance.
Fractions can be used to give nominal sizes, such as in a thread callout.
• Plus and minus values of an inch tolerance have the same number of
decimal places. Zeros are added to fill in where needed. For example,
+.005 d .255
·250 -,010 an .240'
• Unilateral tolerances use the + and - symbol and the 0 value has the same
number of decimal places as the value that is greater or less than 0. For
example, .250~:ggg and .250~:ggi.
• Inch limit tolerance values have the same number of decimal points. When
limit tolerance values are displayed on one line, such as 1.000- 1.062, the lower
value precedes the higher value, and the values are separated with a dash.
When limit tolerance values are displayed stacked, such as
value is placed above the lower value. ·
~-giii, the higher
• Basic dimension values have the same number of decimal places as their
associated tolerance. For example, a geometric tolerance of .005 might have a
basic dimension of 12.0001.

Angular Dimensions
• Angular dimensions are established in degrees (°) and decimal degrees
(30.5°), or in degrees (0 ) , minutes ('), and seconds ("). For example, 24°15'30".
• Both the plus and minus tolerance values and the angle have the same
number of decimal places. For example, 30.0°±0.5°, not 30°±0.5°.
• Where only minutes or seconds are specified, the number of minutes or seconds
shall be preceded by 0° or 0°0; as applicable. For example, 0°45'30" and 0°0'45".

Fundamental Dimensioning Rules

The following rules are summarized from ASME Y14.5. These rules are intended
to give you an understanding of the purpose for standardized dimensioning
practices. Short definitions are given in some cases for terminology that is explained
in detail later in this text.
• Each dimension has a tolerance except for dimensions specifically identified
as reference, maximum, minimum, or stock. The tolerance can be applied
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 17

directly to the dimension, applied indirectly in the case of basic dimensions,

indicated by a general note, or located in the tolerance block of the drawing.
• Dimensioning and tolerancing must be complete to the extent that there is
full understanding of the characteristics of each feature. Neither measuring
the drawing nor assumption of a dimension is permitted. Exceptions
include drawings such as loft, printed wiring, templates, and master layouts
prepared on stable material. However, in these cases the necessary control
dimensions must be given.
• Each necessary dimension of an end product must be shown. Only
dimensions needed for complete definition should be given. Reference
dimensions should be kept to a minimum.
• Dimensions must be selected and arranged to suit the function and mating
relationship of a part. Dimensions must not be subject to more than one
interpretation.
• The drawing should define the part without specifying the manufacturing
processes. For example, give only the diameter of a hole without a
manufacturing process such as "DRILL'' or "REAM." However, there should
be specifications given on the drawing, or related documents, in cases where
manufacturing, processing, quality assurance, or environmental information
is essential to the definition of engineering requirements.
• It is allowed to identify (as nonmandatory) certain processing dimensions
that provide for finish allowance, shrink allowance, and other requirements,
provided the final dimensions are given on the drawing. Nonmandatory
processing dimensions should be identified by an appropriate note, such as
"NONMANDATORY (MFG DATA)."
• Dimensions should be arranged to provide required information arranged
for optimum readability. Dimensions should be shown in true profile views
and should refer to visible outlines.
• Wires, cables, sheets, rods, and other materials manufactured to gage or
code numbers should be specified by dimensions indicating the diameter or
thickness. Gage or code numbers can be shown in parentheses following the
dimension.
• A 90° angle is implied where centerlines and lines displaying features
are shown on a 20 drawing at right angles and no angle is specified. The
tolerance for these 90° angles is the same as the general angular tolerance
specified in the title block or in a general note.
• A 90° basic angle applies where centerlines of features are located by basic
dimensions and no angle is specified. Basic dimensions are considered
theoretically perfect in size, profile, orientation, or location. Basic dimensions
are the basis for variations that are established by other tolerances.
• A zero basic dimension applies where axes, center planes, or surfaces are
shown one over the other on a drawing and geometric controls establish the
relationship between the features.
• Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions and tolerances are measured at
20°C (68°F}. Compensation can be made for measurements taken at other
temperatures.
• Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions and tolerances apply in a free
state condition except for nonrigid parts. Free state condition describes
 ■

~rs1on 18 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

distortion of the part after removal of forces applied during manufacturing.

Nonrigid parts are those that can have dimensional change due to thin wall
characteristics.
• Unless otherwise specified, all tolerances apply for the full depth, length,
and width of the feature.
• Dimensions and tolerances apply on the drawing where specified.
• A coordinate system shown on a drawing is considered to be right-handed
unless otherwise specified. Right-handed means that the coordinate system
is arranged clockwise. Each axis shall be labeled and the positive direction
shown.
• A 3D model coordinate system shall comply with ASME Y14.41, Digital
Product Definition Data Practices, when shown on a drawing.

Definitions Related to Tolerancing

A review of the following definitions is suggested to help you gain a good
understanding of the terminology associated with dimensioning practices.
Additional terminology is provided as you continue through this chapter.
Actual size: The measured size of a feature or part after manufacturing. The
actual size includes the actual local size and the actual mating size. See Example 1-2.
The actual local size is any cross-sectional measurement at any two adjacent points.
There can be an infinite number of actual local size values. The actual mating size
is the smallest distance between two parallel planes w ithin which the actual surface
features are contained. The two parallel planes are at maximum material condition,
which is described later in this chapter.

i-------i-- Actual mating size

25±0.11

,- - - - -+t- Actual local size

(i
The Drawing I
!,------~ Maximum material
condition= 25.1
The Meaning

Example 1-2. The actual size includes the actual local size and the actual mating size.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 19

Diameter: The distance across a circle measured through the center.

Represented on a drawing with the symbol "0" as shown in Example 1-3. Circles on
a drawing are dimensioned with a diameter.

</)36

</)12 ~

Diameter Dimension Examples

Example 1-3. Dimensioning circles with a diameter.

Dimension: A numerical value indicated on a drawing or in documents to

define the size, location, or orientation of a feature. Dimensions are expressed in
appropriate units of measure.
Feature: The general term applied to describe a physical portion of a part or
object, such as a surface, slot, tab, pin, keyseat, or hole.
Feature of size: One cylindrical or spherical surface, a circular element, or a
set of two opposed elements or opposed parallel plane surfaces, each of which is
associated with a size dimension.
Feature without size: A feature that cannot be associated with a size dimension.
Any single, flat surface is a feature without size.
Nominal size: A dimension used for general identification such as stock size or
thread diameter.
 ■

~rs1on 20 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Radius: The distance from the center of a circle to the outside. Arcs are
dimensioned on a drawing with a radius. A radius dimension is preceded by an "R."
The symbol "CR" refers to a controlled radius. See Example 1-4. The symbol "SR"
refers to a spherical radius. Controlled radius is a term applied when the limits of
the radius tolerance zone must be tangent to the adjacent surfaces. The radius must
be a fair curve and radii taken at all points on the part contour shall neither be smaller
than the specified minimum limit nor larger than the specified maximum limit. A
fair curve is a smooth curve without sharp changes in direction over any portion of
its length.

R6 ~

I
-+---;!- - ---t- /CR8

7
R18
/

Radius Radius and Controlled Radius Examples

Minimum ~

Maximum /f" ' - _ Maximum

Feature reversals Feature fair curve

permitted

Meaning of Radius Meaning of Controlled

Dimension Radius Dimension
Example 1-4. Dimensioning a radius and a controlled radius.

Reference dimension: A dimension, usually without a tolerance, used for

information purposes only. This dimension is often a repeat of a given dimension or
established from other values shown on the drawing. A reference dimension does
not govern production or inspection. A reference dimension is shown on a drawing
with parentheses. For example, (60) would indicate a reference dimension.
Stock size: A commercial or premanufactured size, such as a particular size of
square, round, or hex steel bar.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 21

Tolerancing Fundamentals
A tolerance is the total amount that a specific dimension is permitted to vary. A
tolerance is not given to values that are identified as reference, maximum, minimum,
or stock sizes. The tolerance can be applied directly to the dimension, indicated by a
general note, or identified in the drawing title block. Refer to Example 1-5.

71.3 75± .005

_l
Specified Inch Tolerance
Tolerance Placed on the Dimension

3 PLACE DECIMALS ARE ±.005 .

7 1.375
Tolerances in a General Note

_l UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

TOLERANC ES FOR :

1 PLACE DIMS.;
INCHES
± .1
Unspecified Inch Tolerance 2 PLACE DIMS.; ± .01
Tolerance Placed in Note or 3 PLACE DIMS.; ± .005
Title Block ANGULAR; ± 30 '
FRACTIONAL; ± 1
32
FIN ISH; 125 µ in

Tolerances in a Title Block

Example 1-5. Specifying the tolerance on the dimension, in a general note, or in the
drawing title block.
 ■

~rs1on 22 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

This use only applies to inch dimensioning. This does not apply to metric
dimensioning since trailing zeros are not included in metric dimensions. Metric
tolerancing is generally controlled by the ISO 2768-General Tolerances standard
developed by the International Organization for Standardization. ISO 2768
tolerancing is based on the size of features. Small sizes have closer tolerances and
larger sizes have larger tolerances. There are four classes of size tolerances. These
include fine (f), medium (m), coarse (c), and very coarse (v). Each class is represented
by its abbreviation in parentheses. A company can select the class that best meets its
dimensioning requirements. For example, a company that manufactures precision
parts and equipment might select the medium class for general metric tolerances. A
general note that states the ISO 2768 class for general tolerances, such as ISO 2768-m,
shall be placed on the drawing. Example 1-6 gives the ISO 2768 general tolerances for
linear, radius, chamfer, and angular dimensions.
Notice in Example 1-6 that sizes from Omm to 0.5 mm are not included.
Dimensions under 0.5 mm must have the specified tolerance on the dimension on
the drawing. Any dimension that requires a different tolerance from the general
tolerances listed in Example 1-6 must have the specific tolerance directly applied to
the dimension on the drawing.

Permissible Tolerances for Linear Dimensions (mm)

0.5-3 ~ 6-30 30-120 120--400 400-1000 1000-2000 2000--4000
Fine (0 ±0.05 ±0.05 ±0.1 ±0.15 ±0.2 ±0.3 ±0.5
Medium(m) ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.2 ±0.3 ±0.5 ±0.8 ±1.2 ±2
Coarse (c) ±0.2 ±0.3 ±0.5 ±0.8 ±1.2 ±2 ±3 ±4
Very coarse (v) ±0.5 ±1 ±1.5 ±2.5 ±4 ±6 ±8
Permissible Tolerances for External Radii and Chamfer Dimensions (mm)
0.5-3 ~ over6
Fine (f) ±0.2 ±0.5 ±1
Medium(m) ±0.2 ±0.5 ±1
Coarse(c) ±0.4 ±1 ±2
Very coarse (v) ±0.4 ±1 ±2
Permissible Tolerances for Ranges of Shorter Side Lengths of the Angle (mm)
Upto 10 10-50 50-120 120-400 over400
Fine (f) ±lo ±0030' ±0°20' ±0010' ±0°5'
Medium (m) ±10 ±0030' ±0°20' ±0010' ±0°5'
Coarse (c) ±1°30' ±lo ±0°30' ±0°15' ±0°10'
Very coarse (v) ±30 ±20 ±10 ±0°30' ±0°20'

Example 1-6. General tolerances for metric dimensions.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 23

The limits of a dimension are the largest and smallest numerical values that
the feature can be. In Example 1-7A, the dimension is stated as 12.50±0.25. This
is referred to as plus-minus dimensioning. The tolerance of this dimension is the
difference between the maximum and minimum limits. The upper limit is 12.50 +
0.25 = 12.75 and the lower limit is 12.50 - 0.25 = 12.25. So, if you take the upper limit
and subtract the lower limit, you have the tolerance: 12.75 - 12.25 = 0.50.
The specified dimension is the part of the dimension from where the limits
are calculated. The specified dimension of the feature shown in Example 1-7A is
12.50. A dimension on a drawing can be displayed with plus-minus dimensioning,
or the limits can be calculated and shown as in Example 1-7B. This is called limit
dimensioning.

□~0 25 □
~t
12.75
12.25

A B
Plus-Minus Dimensioning Limit Dimensioning

Example 1-7. Plus-minus dimensioning and limit dimensioning.

A bilateral tolerance is permitted to vary in both the + and the - directions

from the specified dimension. An equal bilateral tolerance is where the variation
from the specified dimension is the same in both directions. An unequal bilateral
tolerance is where the variation from the specified dimension is not the same in both
directions. Refer to Example 1-8.

24+ 0 .08
-0.20
+. 00 2
· 750- .003 45 · 5.+0.2·
-0 _5·
Metric Inch Angular
Unequal Bilateral Tolerance

24 ± 0 .1 .750± .005 45·30 ' ±0•5'

Metric Inch Angular

Equal Bilateral Tolerance

Example 1-8. Bilateral tolerances.

 ■

~rs1on 24 Geometric Dimensioning and To/erancing

A unilateral tolerance is permitted to increase or decrease in only one direction

from the specified dimension. Refer to Example 1-9.

+ .ooo
· 625- .004 2ss_ g _5.

24+ 0 .2 + .004 2s.s•+gs

0 · 625- .000
Metric Inch Angular

Example 1-9. Unilateral tolerances.

Single Limits
Various features, such as chamfers, fillets, rounds, hole depths, and thread
lengths, can be dimensioned with single limits. Single limits are used when the
specified dimension cannot be any more than the maximum or less than the
minimum given value. The abbreviation for minimum (MIN) or maximum (MAX)
follows the dimension value to specify a single limit application. The unspecified
limit is determined by the design.

Maximum Material Condition (MMC)

Maximum material condition (MMC) is the condition where a feature of size
contains the maximum amount of material within the stated limits. The key words
are "maximum amount of material."
An external feature is at maximum material condition at its largest limit, or
maximum amount of material, as shown in Example 1-10.

□ 12.75
12 .25 ~ MMC
~ j
Example 1-10. Maximum material condition (MMC) for external features.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 25

An interna l fea ture is at maximum m aterial condition at its smallest limit, or

m aximum am ount of m aterial, as shown in Example 1-11.

n,1 2 .75
¥-'1 2.25 ~MMC

12. 75
12.25 ~MMC
j

Example 1-11. Maximum m aterial condition (MMC) for internal features.

Least Material Condition (LMC)

Least material condition (LMC) is the condition w here a feature of size
contains the least a mount of m aterial w ithin the stated limits. The key words are
"least m aterial."
An external feature is at least m aterial condition at its sm a llest limit, or least
a mount of material, as illustrated in Example 1-12.

□ .75 ~LMC
12 .25
~j
Example 1-12. Least material condition (LMC) for external features.
 ■

~rs1on 26 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

An internal feature is at least material condition at its largest limit, or least

amount of material, as shown in Example 1-13.

~ 12 .75 -LMC
¥112.25

12 .75 -LMC
12.25

Example 1-13. Least material condition (LMC) for internal features.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 27

Extreme Form Variation

The limits of size of a feature controls the amount of variation in size and
geometric form. This is referred to as "Rule 1" in ASME Y14.5. The limits of size
establishes the dimensional limits between MMC and LMC. The form of the feature
can vary between the upper limit and lower limit of a size dimension. This is known
as extreme form variation, as shown in Example 1-14.
The control of geometric form established by limits of size does not apply to
premanufactured items, such as bar stock, sheets, tubing, or structural shapes. These
items are produced to government or industry standards that have established
geometric tolerances, such as straightness and flatness. These standards govern cases
where the finished product contains the original premanufactured shape, unless
other geometric tolerances are specified on the drawing.

I
- -~ ,1118.7 ¢19 .0
. 18.4 18.8
~-~~

The Drawing

0f-,[- - ------+-
] _1, I 0 19

The Meaning
Example 1-14. Extreme form variation.
 ■

~rs1on 28 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Basic Fits of Mating Parts

Standard ANSI Fits
Based on the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B4.1 standard, the
three general groups of limits and fits between mating parts are: running and sliding
fits, force fits, and locational fits.
Running and sliding fits (RC) are intended to provide a running performance
with suitable lubrication allowance. Running fits range from RC 1 (close fits) to RC 9
(loose fits).
Force fits (FN) or shrink fits constitute a special type of interference fit
characterized by maintenance of constant pressure. Force fits range from FN 1 (light
drive) to FN 5 (force fits required in high stress applications).
Locational fits are intended to determine only the location of the mating parts.

Standard ANSI/ISO Fits

Based on ANSI B4.2, the general groups of metric limits and fits between mating
parts are: clearance fits, transition fits, and interference fits. Example 1-15 shows the ISO
symbols used to represent metric fits and gives a description of the different metric fits.
Clearance fits are generally the same as the running and sliding fits explained
previously. With clearance fits, a clearance exists between the mating parts under all
tolerance conditions.
Transition fits can result in either a clearance fit or an interference fit due to the
range of limits between mating parts.
Interference fits require that the mating parts be pressed or forced together
under all tolerance conditions.
For more information on fits, refer to the Machinery's Handbook under the
classification of ALLOWANCES AND TOLERANCES FOR FITS.

ISO Symbol
Type of Fit Description of Fit
Hole Shaft

Hll/cll Cll/hll Loose running

H9/d9 D9/h9 Free running
Clearance
H8/f7 F8/h7 Close running
Fit
H7/g6 G7/h6 Sliding
H7/h6 H7/h6 Locational clearance

Transition H7/k6 K7/h6 Locational transition

Fit H7/n6 N7/h6 Locational transition

H7 / p61 P7/h6 Locational interference

Interference
Fit H7/s6 S7/h6 Medium d rive
H7/u6 U7/h6 Force
1
Transition fit for basic sizes in range from O through 3 mm.

Example 1-15. ISO symbols used to represent metric fits and a description of the fits.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 29

Clearance Fit
A clearance fit is shown in Example 1-16. In this illustration, Part 1 fits into Part 2
with a clearance between the two parts no matter what the actual size of each part is
when produced within the given tolerances.

Allowance
Allowance is defined as an intentional difference between the maximum
material limits of mating parts. Allowance is the minimum clearance (positive
allowance), or maximum interference (negative allowance) between mating parts.
Allowance can be considered to be the tightest possible fit between parts. Allowance
can be calculated using the formula:
MMC HOLE
- MMC SHAFT
ALLOWANCE
Now, refer back to Example 1-16 as you make these calculations:
MMC HOLE (Part 2) = 12.78
- MMC SHAFT (Part 1) = 12.75
ALLOWANCE = 0.03

n11 2 .83
\U12. 78

Part 1
Part2

Example 1-16. Clearance fit between two parts.

 ■

~rs1on 30 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Clearance
The loosest fit or maximum intended difference between mating parts is called
the clearance. The clearance is calculated with this formula:
LMCHOLE
- LMCSHAFT
CLEARANCE
Refer again to Example 1-16 as you determine the clearance:
LMC HOLE (Part 2) = 12.83
-LMC SHAFT (Part 1) = 12.70
CLEARANCE= 0.13

Force Fit
A force fit is also referred to as an interference fit or a shrink fit. This is where two
mating parts must be pressed or forced together. Due to the tolerance on each part,
the shaft is larger than the hole, as shown in Example 1-17. At any produced size
within the stated tolerance, the shaft will be larger than the hole.
The smallest amount of interference is:
LMC SHAFT= 12.65
- LMC HOLE = 12.62
MIN INTERFERENCE = 0.03
The greatest amount of interference is:
MMC SHAFT = 12.70
- MMC HOLE = 12.57
MAX INTERFERENCE= 0.13

r,112 .70 r,112 .62

\U12 .65 \U12 .57

Example 1-17. Force fit between two parts.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 31

Chain Dimensioning
When using chain dimensioning, dimensions are placed one after the other from
one feature to the next across the part. See Example 1-18A. Caution should be used
when using chain dimensioning, because the tolerance of each dimension builds
on the next. This is referred to as tolerance buildup, accumulation, or stacking.
An example of tolerance buildup is when three chain dimensions have individual
tolerances of ±0.2 and each feature has an actual size measured at or near the +0.2
limit. The potential tolerance buildup is 3 X 0.2 for a total accumulation of 0.6. To
accommodate this buildup, the overall dimension must have a tolerance of ±0.6.
Chain dimensioning can be used when the tolerance between adjacent features is
more important than the tolerance accumulation of all features.

Baseline Dimensioning
When using baseline dimensioning, each dimension originates from
a common point, line, plane, or axis. The drawing in Example 1-18B shows
baseline dimensioning used where each dimension originates from a common
plane or surface. Tolerance buildup is less likely to occur than when using chain
dimensioning. Baseline dimensioning is used when the size or location of features
must be controlled from a common reference plane and less tolerance accumulation
is desired.

Parenthesis used for a

reference dimension

Ff::r2C
NOTE: UNSPEC IFIED TOLERANCES ARE ±0.2
Chain Dimensioning Baseline Dimensioning
A B

Example 1-18. The difference between chain and baseline dimensioning.

 ■

~rs1on 32 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Direct Dimensioning
Direct dimensioning is applied to control the specific size or location of one or
more specific features. Baseline dimensioning is used in Example 1-19A to control
the size of three features and direct dimensioning is used to control the maximum
variation of two features by the tolerance on the dimension between the features.
This results in the least tolerance buildup where the accumulation between surfaces
X and Y is ±0.2.
In contrast, the drawing in Example 1-19B uses chain dimensioning where the
maximum variation between the features is the sum of the tolerances controlling the
dimensions. In this case, the tolerance accumulation between surfaces X and Y is ±0.6.
The drawing in Example 1-19C uses baseline dimensioning where the maximum
variation between features is controlled by the sum of the tolerances from the origin
to the features. The tolerance accumulation is limited to the possible buildup from the
origin to the second and third dimensions between surfaces X and Y, which is ±0.4.

Alternate Dimensioning Practices

In industries where computer numerical control (CNC) machining or computer-
aided manufacturing (CAM) processes are used, and especially in sheet metal
chassis design and fabrication, dimension lines are often omitted. This type of
dimensioning is a form of baseline dimensioning called rectangular coordinate
dimensioning without dimension lines.
Tabular dimensioning is similar to rectangular coordinate dimensioning
without dimension lines. In tabular dimensioning, size dimensions for holes are
given in a table.
Where changing values of a feature are involved, dimensions can be displayed in
a chart. This is referred to as chart dimensioning.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 33

,- - - - - 2 6 - - -~~

Direct Dimensioning
A

Chain Dimensioning
B

t--8 -
- I -=---+ y

:::U 26
Less tolerance accumulation
between X and Y

36

NOTE: UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCES ARE ±0.2

Baseline Dimensioning
C
Example 1-19. A comparison of tolerance buildup between chain, baseline, and direct
dimensioning. A- Direct dimensioning results in the least tolerance accumulation.
B-Chain dimensioning results in the most tolerance accumulation. C-Baseline
dimensioning results in less tolerance accumulation than chain dimensioning.
 ■

~rs1on 34 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Rectangular Coordinate Dimensioning without Dimension Lines

Rectangular coordinate dimensioning without dimension lines is often used
on precision sheet metal fabrication drawings. This type of dimensioning provides
only extension lines and numbers. All dimension lines and arrowheads are omitted.
Dimension numbers are aligned with the extension lines. For vertical extension lines,
the dimension text is commonly rotated so it faces the right side of the drawing sheet.
Holes are located to their centers. Other features are located to their edges. As shown
in Example 1-20, linear dimensions in this system specify distances in coordinate
directions from two or three mutually perpendicular planes.

2X 06 2X 0 10
50 - - ~---"~- - - - - - - - -...,..._,

38 - --+-- ---<

22 - --+-- --+---<+

8 - ---+- - ----<~- - - -
2X 04
o - - ~ - - - - + - ---+--- - - + ----<---+-~
I
0 0 0
N n
Example 1-20. A drawing using rectangular coordinate dimensioning without
dimension lines. In this system, dimensions specify distances from two mutually
perpendicular planes. Holes are located to their centers and other features are
located to their edges.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 35

Tabular Dimensioning
Tabular dimensioning is the same as the rectangular coordinate dimensioning
without dimension lines system shown in Example 1-20 except size dimensions
pointing to holes with leader lines are omitted. In tabular dimensioning,
identification letters are placed by the holes and the related information is given
in a table. See Example 1-21.

50-- ~ - - - - - - - - - - - ~

38 - --+-- -----1+
A
----rt!
2 2 -----+------+-__, +
A I C
- ------L-------- EB

C
s --f----+----+---EB
0 - - '-----+--+---+--+-+---'

I
0 0 0 0 LI)
('.J n

HOLE A B C
DIA. 6 10 4

Example 1-21. Tabular dimensioning. Holes are referenced by letters. The related
information is presented in a table.
 ■

~rs1on 36 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Some companies take this practice one step farther and display the location
and size of features in the table from an X and a Y axis. The depth of features is also
provided from the Z axis where appropriate. Each feature is labeled w ith a letter and
number that correlates to the table as shown in Example 1-22.

©--
A1
- - y1
+
A2 C1
®- - ----L- E9
B2
C2
E9
0 -- ~-----------~--~

I
0
0 LI)

HOLE QTY. DIA. X y z

A1 1 6 20 38 THRU
A2 1 6 30 22 THRU
B1 1 10 56 38 THRU
B2 1 10 56 8 THR U
C1 1 4 64 22 TH RU
C2 1 4 48 8 THR U

Example 1-22. H oles can be located w ith X, Y, and Z references given in a table with
tabular dimensioning.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 37

Chart Dimensioning
Chart dimensioning provides flexibility in situations where dimensions change
depending on the requirements of the product. The views of the part are d rawn
and variable dimensions are labeled with letters. These letters correlate with a
chart where the different options are shown. On some parts, there may be only one
variable dimension, while others may contain several. Refer to Example 1-23.

2X D

2X B
1-- - - - A - - - ------i

CHAIN NO . A B D H
SST 1000 2 .1 .75 .44 1 .1 25
SST1 00 1 3. 0 .90 .48 1.525
SST 1002 3 .0 1.1 7 .95 2.125

Example 1-23. Chart dimensioning. Some parts may have many variable dimensions
(as shown here). Other parts may have only one variable dimension.

Actual industry drawings must be completely dimensioned and toleranced

to the extent that there is full understanding of the characteristics of each
feature. Additionally, each dimension has a tolerance except for dimensions
specifically identified as reference, maximum, minimum, or stock. Each
tolerance can be applied directly to the dimension, applied indirectly in
the case of basic dimensions, indicated by a general note, or located in the
tolerance block of the drawing.
Illustrative examples found throughout this textbook generally demonstrate
the specific content being described, and may not be completely
dimensioned. Keep in mind that real-world drawings representing the same
features would be completely dimensioned to comply with the requirements
explained in the previous paragraph.
 ■

~rs1on 38 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

for CADD/CAM
The implementation of geometric dimensioning and tolerancing into a
mechanical drafting CADD program is practical. The geometric tolerancing (GT)
symbology makes this application a bonus to the mechanical drafting system.
GT/CADD symbol libraries will be introduced in Chapter 2.
Some dimensioning and tolerancing guidelines for use in conjunction with
CADD/CAM are:
• Geometric tolerancing is necessary to control specific geometric form and
location.
• Major features of the part should be used to establish the basic coordinate
system, but are not necessarily defined as datums.
• Subcoordinated systems that are related to the major coordinates are used to
locate and orient features on a part.
• Define part features in relation to three mutually perpendicular reference
planes, and along features that are parallel to the motion of CAM equipment.
• Establish datums related to the function of the part, and relate datum
features in order of precedence as a basis for CAM usage.
• Completely and accurately dimension geometric shapes. Regular geometric
shapes can be defined by mathematical formulas. A profile feature that is
defined with mathematical formulas should not have coordinate dimensions
unless required for inspection or reference.
• Coordinate or tabular dimensions should be used to identify approximate
dimensions on an arbitrary profile.
• Use the same type of coordinate dimensioning system on the entire drawing.
• Continuity of profile is necessary for CADD. Clearly define contour changes
at the change or point of tangency. Define at least four points along an
irregular profile.
• Circular hole patterns can be defined with polar coordinate dimensioning.
• When possible, dimension angles in degrees and decimal parts of degrees.
For example, 45°30' should be dimensioned as 45.5°.
• Base dimensions at the mean of a tolerance because the CNC part
programmer normally splits a tolerance and works to the mean. While
this is theoretically desirable, one cannot predict where the part will be
made. Dimensions should always be based on design requirements. If it is
known that a part will be produced always by CNC methods, then establish
dimensions with limits that conform to the CNC machine capabilities.
Bilateral profile tolerances are also recommended for the same reason.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 39

1. A(n) _______ is a numerical value indicated on a drawing or in

documents to define the size, location, or orientation of a feature.
2. _______ is a general term applied to describe a physical portion of a part.
3. Define tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. All dimensions shall have a tolerance except for dimensions that are identified
as
A. reference
B. maximum
C. minimum
D. stock sizes
E. All of the above.
5. Using appropriate hand lettering (in manual drafting) or text (in a CADD
system), give the general note that should be placed on all drawings based on
the standard used throughout this textbook. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6. Give the basic rules for displaying metric limit tolerance values correctly. _ __

7. Give an example of metric limit tolerance values specified on one line. _ _ __

8. Give an example of stacked metric limit tolerance values. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

9. Give the basic rules for displaying inch limit tolerance values correctly. _ _ __

10. Give an example of inch limit tolerance values specified on one line. _ _ _ __

11. Give an example of stacked inch limit tolerance values. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

~ _4_0__G
_ eo_m
__etr
_ ic_D
_ i1t_1_en
_s_i_o_n i_n-g~a_n_d_To_l_e_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

12. Give the basic rule for specifying the plus and minus tolerance values of an angle
correctly. _____________________________

13. Give an example of an angular dimension specified with plus and minus
tolerance values. __________________________

14. Give the basic rule for specifying an angular dimension when only minutes or
seconds are used. _________________________

15. What are the limits of the dimension: 25±0.4? ______________

16. What is the tolerance of the dimension in Question 15? ___________
17. What is the specified dimension of the dimension shown in Question 15? _ __
18. Give an example of a metric dimension with an equal bilateral tolerance. _ __

19. Give an example of an inch dimension with an equal bilateral tolerance. _ _ __

20. Give an example of a metric dimension with an unequal bilateral tolerance. _ _

21. Give an example of an inch dimension with an unequal bilateral tolerance. _ _

22. Give an example of a metric dimension with a unilateral tolerance. ______

23. Give an example of an inch dimension with a unilateral tolerance. ______

24. Define maximum material condition (MMC). ______________

25. What is the MMC of the feature shown below? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

I 015±0.25

j
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 41

26. What is the MMC of the feature shown below? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

(/)15±0.25

27. Define least material condition (LMC). _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

28. What is the LMC of the feature shown in Question 25? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

29. What is the LMC of the feature shown in Question 26? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
30. Define actual local size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

31. Define actual mating size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

32. Define feature. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

33. Define feature of size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

34. Define nominal size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

~ _4_2__G_e_o_m_e_tr_ic_ D_i1t
_1_en
_s_i_on_1_·n-g_a_n_d_Ti_o_le_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
35. Define controlled radius. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

36. Give an example of how a radius dimension is shown on a drawing. _ _ _ __

37. Give an example of how a controlled radius dimension is shown on a draw ing.

38. Briefly describe single limits and explain how to specify a single limit
application. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

39. Define limits of size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

40. List the three general groups related to the standard ANSI fits between mating
parts.
1) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
41. Is the fit between the two parts shown below a clearance fit or a force fit? _ __

11,19.43 11,19 .76

',./1 9.18 ',./19 .50
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 43

42. What is the allowance between the two parts shown in Question 41? Show your
calculations and label each numeral.

43. What is the clearance between the two parts shown in Question 41? Show your
calculations and label each numeral.

44. A force fit is also referred to as a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ or a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ fit.

45. Given the following information regarding the dimensions of a shaft and a
collar (hole), determine the limits of the dimensions for each part. Show your
calculations and label each numeral. Suggestion: Review allowance and tolerance
before you begin.
A) The dimension of the shaft is 014±0.4.
B) A clearance fit exists between the two parts.
C) Provide an allowance of 0.2.
D) The tolerance to be applied to the collar hole dimension is 0.8.

SHAFT UPPER L I M I T = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
SHAFT LOWER LIMIT= _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SHAFT TOLERANCE= _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

MMC HOLE (UNKNOWN)

- MMC SHAFT
=ALLOWANCE

MMC SHAFT
+ALLOWANCE
=MMC HOLE

MMC HOLE
+ HOLE TOLERANCE
=LMCHOLE

HOLE LIMITS

46. Identify the current ASME standard that is titled Dimensioning and Tolerancing.
 ~ _4_4__G
_ eo_m
_et_r_ic_D
_ in_1_e_ns_i_o_ni_n-g~a_n_d_To_J_e_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
47. What does the abbreviation SI mean? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

48. What are the commonly used SI u nits found on engineering drawings? _ _ __

49. What are the commonly used US units found on engineering drawings? _ __

50. What general note should accompany a drawing to describe the predominant
units used? ____________________________

51. Name the type of dimension that is placed on a drawing in parentheses. _ __

52. Identify the term that refers to the measured size of a feature or part after
manufacturing. __________________________

53. Circle the letter of each of the following correct statements:

A) The decimal point and zero after it are omitted when the metric dimension is
a whole number.
B) Based on ASME Yl4.5-2009, the last digit to the right of the decimal point is
not followed by a zero when metric values are not equal to a whole number,
unless needed to match the number of decimal places of the tolerance values.
C) A zero precedes a decimal metric dimension less than one millimeter.
D) Both the + and the - values of an inch tolerance have the same number of
decimal places. Zeros are added to fill where needed.
E) A zero precedes a decimal inch value less than one.
F) A zero does not precede a decimal inch value less than one.
G) A specified dimension in inches is expressed to the same number of decimal
places as its tolerance. Zeros are added to the right of the decimal point if
~ / needed.
H) The manufacturing process, such as "DRILi.:' or "REAM," should accompany
I a dimension.
I) Unless otherwise specified, all geometric tolerances apply for the full depth,
length, and width of a feature.
54. Define diameter. __________________________

55. Define radius. ___________________________

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 45

56. Describe chain dimensioning. Explain why caution should be used when placing
chain dimensions. _________________________

57. Describe baseline dimensioning. Explain the possibility of tolerance buildup

when using baseline dimensioning. __________________

58. Describe direct dimensioning. Explain the possibility of tolerance buildup when
using direct dimensioning. ______________________

59. Briefly describe rectangular coordinate dimensioning without dimension lines.

60. Describe chart dimensioning. _____________________

 .
~rs1on 46 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on the previously learned content
of this book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company
standards can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry
prints, a degree of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications
correlate with the ASME standards.

Refer to the P,rint of the SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING found on age 433.

1. Are the dimensions given in inches or millimeters? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2. What does the print say about burrs and sharp edges? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3. Is the part dimensioned using chain or baseline dimensioning? _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Refer to the 1.914 dimension:
A) Where is the tolerance specified?
B) What is the tolerance?
C) What is the MMC?
D) What is the LMC?
5. Refer to the 0.8740±.0005 dimension:
A) Where is the tolerance specified?
B) Is the tolerance unilateral or bilateral?
C) What is the tolerance?
D) What is the MMC?
E) What is the LMC?
6. Refer to the 0.750 dimension:
A) Where is the tolerance specified? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _
C) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7. Give the complete specifications associated with the 0.107±.001 hole. _ _ _ __

8. What does the circle on the leader connected to the 2X 45°X.010 dimension mean?
(Look at Example 2-1 in Chapter 2.)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 47

Refer to the print of the BRACKET found on page 434.

9. Are the dimensions in inches or millimeters? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __
10. Is baseline or chain dimensioning used? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
11. Refer to the 0 .875±.005 dimension:
A) What is the specified dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
12. What does the box around the 1.9500 dimension mean? (Look at Example 2-11 in
Chapter 2.) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
13. What does the note "DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5-
2009" mean? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

14. What does ASME stand for? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the rint of tlte HUB-STATIONARY ATU foun<I on age 435.

15. Are the dimensions in inches or millimeters? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
16. Refer to the 0 4.4997-4.4994 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance?
B) What is the MMC?
C) What is the LMC?
17. Refer to the 03.900±.005 dimension:
A) What is the specified dimension?
B) What is the tolerance?
C) What is the MMC?
D) What is the LMC?
18. Refer to the 0 .352+.005/-.001 dimension:
A) How many of these features are there?
B) What are the limits of the dimension?
C) What is the MMC?
D) What is the LMC?
 .
~rs1on 48 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the PEDAL-ACCELERATOR found on page 436.

19. Are the dimensions given in inches or m illimeters? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
20. Refer to the 2X 45°X0.76 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance for the 0.76 dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance for the 45° dimension ? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
21. Refer to the 04.834-4.763 dimension:
A) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Wh at is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Re er to tl-ie print of tl-ie MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)-FRAME ASSY 3 AXIS HP.

ound on page 437.
22. What do the parentheses around the 1.875 dimension mean? _ _ _ _ _ _ __

23. Refer to the 1.60 d imension:

A) Where is the tolerance found? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What are the limits? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
E) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the HYDRAULIC VALVE found on page 438.

24. Refer to the 0.961/.959 dimension:

A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
25. Refer to dimension "A" for part number 1 MS 2427-2:
A) What is the MMC of this dimension ? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the LMC of this d imension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the tolerance for this dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
26. Name and describe the dimensioning practice used for the dimension described
in Question 25. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

27. What is the tolerance for the 45° dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 1 Dimensioning and Tolerancing 49

Refer to the print of the COVER, CAGE-INNER AZ DRIVE found on page 439.
28. Refer to the SR7.500 dimension:
A) What does the "SR" mean? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Note: Dimension SR7.500 is from the tolerance dimension of .400, allowing the origin
of SR7.500 to float. Tolerance buildup can occur, although it does not affect the answer
for MMC and LMC.

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on page 443.

29. Name and describe the type of dimensioning practice found on this print. _ __

Re er to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD founil on page 446.
30. Are the dimensions given in inches or millimeters? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
31. Give the tolerances for the following unspecified decimal values:
A) .x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) .xx _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) .xxx _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

32. Refer to the l.750+.005/ -.000 dimension:

A) Is this a bilateral or unilateral tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

D) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

33. Identify the material used to manufacture this part. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL BEVEL CUTTER found on }'age 447.
34. What is the tolerance for the .875 dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
35. Identify the finish. _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ __

Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on }'age 448.

36. What is the tolerance for the 0.250 dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
37. Identify the material used to manufacture this part. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on 50 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
38. Refer to the 0.500+.002/-.000 dimension:
A) Is this a bilateral or unilateral tolerance?
B) What is the tolerance?

C) What is the MMC?

D) What is the LMC?
39. Refer to the 0 .193+.005/-.000 dimension:
A) Is this a bilateral or unilateral tolerance?
B) What is the tolerance?
C) What is the MMC?
D) What is the LMC?
40. What is the toleran ce for the 4X R.125 dimension?

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE found on page 450.
41. What is the tolerance for the 1.82 dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
42. What is the tolerance for the 0.422 dimen sion? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ ~ i_ll " 1
Introduction to Symbols
and Terms

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Identify and use standard dimensioning symbols.
0 Explain how datum feature symbols are represented on drawings.
0 Use datum feature symbols on drawings.
0 Explain how datum target symbols are represented on drawings.
0 Use datum target symbols on drawings.
0 Identify geometric characteristic symbols.
0 Identify material condition and material boundary symbols.
0 Explain the order of elements in feature control frames.
0 Properly place geometric characteristic, material condition, and material
boundary symbols in feature control frames.
0 Explain how basic dimensions are represented on drawings.
0 Draw basic dimensions.
0 Define terms related to dimensioning symbols, geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing symbols, and geometric characteristic symbols.

Technical Terms
All around symbol Feature control frame Slope symbol
All over symbol Free state Spherical diameter
Arc length symbol Free state symbol symbol
Basic dimension Geometric characteristic Spherical radius symbol
Between symbol symbols Spotface
By symbol Independency symbol Spotface symbol
Continuous feature Material boundary Square symbol
symbol symbols Statistical process control
Controlled radius Material condition Statistical tolerance
symbol symbols symbol
Counterbore Modifiers Statistical tolerancing
Counterbore symbol Modifying symbols Symbols
Countersink Movable datum target Symmetry line
Countersink symbol symbol Tangent plane symbol
Datum feature symbol Multiple datum reference Taper symbol
Datum target symbol Places symbol Translate
Datum targets Plus/minus symbol Translation symbol
Datums Projected tolerance zone Unequally disposed
Degrees symbol symbol profile symbol
Depth symbol Radius symbol
Diameter symbol Reference symbol
Dimension origin symbol
51
 ■

~rs1on 52 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

This chapter helps you identify symbols and learn terms. Your main objective is
to recognize the various types of symbols by their name, shape, and size. Only a few
terms are defined at this time. Other terms are clearly defined in later chapters as you
learn about geometric tolerancing. Symbol sizes are based on drawing lettering height.
Where symbols are detailed, you will see the note "H = Letter height." This means
that "H" equals the predominant lettering height on the drawing. For example, the
lettering height on most engineering drawings is .12" or 3 mm, depending on company
standards. Verify standard lettering height with the ASME Yl4.2 Line Conventions and
Lettering standard.
Dimensioning and geometric tolerancing symbols are divided into five
basic types:
1. Dimensioning symbols.
2. Datum feature and datum target symbols.
3. Geometric characteristic symbols.
4. Material condition symbols.
5. Feature control frame.
When you draw symbols on test answers or in problem solutions, use clear,
accurate representations. It is also recommended that an appropriate geometric
tolerancing template be used for manual drafting, or a symbol library for computer-
aided design and drafting (CADD). Geometric tolerancing symbols are drawn using
thin lines that are the same thickness as extension and dimension lines (.01" or 0.3 mm).

Dimensioning Symbols
Symbols represent specific information that would otherwise be difficult
and time-consuming to duplicate in note form. Symbols must be clearly drawn
to the required size and shape so they communicate the desired information
uniformly. Symbols are recommended by ASME Y14.5 because symbols are an
international language and are read the same way in any country. It is important in
an international economy to have effective communication on engineering drawings.
Symbols make this communication process uniform. ASME Yl4.5 also states that the
adoption of dimensioning symbols does not prevent the use of equivalent terms or
abbreviations in situations where symbols are considered inappropriate.
Symbols aid in clarity and ease of drawing presentation. Symbols also save time,
especially when used in conjunction with CADD. Symbols should be drawn clearly
using a template or CADD system. Example 2-1 shows recommended dimensioning
symbols. Refer to the following definitions as you study the symbols.
The all around symbol specifies that a profile tolerance applies to surfaces all
around the true profile in the view to which the leader points.
The all over symbol specifies that a surface profile tolerance or other
specification applies all over the three-dimensional profile of the part to which the
leader points.
The arc length symbol is placed above a dimension value to specify an arc
length measured on a curved outline.
The by symbol is used to indicate the relationship of one feature to another, such
as width by length. The same symbol is used to indicate the number of instances of a
feature.
The controlled radius symbol specifies that the radius must be a fair curve with
no reversals.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 53

60° ? \

I.SH 0
~ameter
R
Radius
SR
Spherical
so
Spherical
CR
Controlled
X
Places
_J_

I
H
Radius Diameter Radius or By

l~I~
HJ ~ _el "' 1-- ,c-r,----f 0'"
t LJ ~
2

I
Symmetry Counterbore Spotface Countersink Square
Line Shape

l.SHl l i
0.3Hj
Arc Depth Dimension Reference
Length or Deep Origin

o.stt -j 1-
~ [E> J_ / 15°

_L O.SH-1~ T
H t::===-=.
\
Taper Slope All All
Around Over
H ; Letter height

Example 2-1. Recommended ASME dimensioning symbols.

The counterbore symbol is used to specify a counterbore. A counterbore is a

cylindrical flat-bottomed hole machined below the surface to enlarge another hole.
A counterbore is often used to accommodate a recessed fastener.
The countersink symbol is used to specify a countersink. A countersink is a
conical hole machined below the surface to enlarge another hole in order to recess
a conical head fastener.
The degrees symbol (0 ) is used w ith angular dimensions to specify
measurements for circles, arcs, and angles. Angular dimensions are specified in
degrees, decimal d egrees, or degrees, minutes ('), and seconds ("). There are 360° in
a circle. There are 60' in one degree and 60" in one minute.
The depth symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify how deep a
feature is machined below the surface.
 ■

~rs1on 54 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The diameter symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify a

diameter.
The dimension origin symbol is used to indicate that a toleranced dimension
between two features originates from the feature where the symbol is placed.
The places symbol is used to specify the number of instances of a feature.
For example, the specification 4X RlS means that there are four features with a
15 radius.
The plus/minus symbol (±) is placed in front of tolerance values to indicate
positive and negative tolerances.
The radius symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify a radius.
The reference symbol is placed around a dimension value to indicate a repeat
dimension or a dimension established from other values shown on the drawing. This
designation specifies the dimension is used for information or reference purposes only.
The slope symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify that the
conical or flat feature has a uniform slope.
The spherical diameter symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify
the diameter of a sphere.
The spherical radius symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify
the radius of a sphere.
The spot/ace symbol is used to specify a spotface. A spot/ace is a cylindrical
flat-bottomed hole machined below the surface to enlarge another hole. A spotface is
similar to a counterbore, but it has less depth.
The square symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to indicate that the
dimension applies to a square shape.
The symmetry line is used as an axis of symmetry for a partial view. The
symmetry line is used when representing partial views and partial sections of
symmetrical parts.
The taper symbol is placed in front of a dimension value to specify that the
conical or flat feature has a uniform taper.
Additional definitions and examples are provided throughout thls textbook
where related to specific content. The examples provided throughout this textbook
are illustrated to match the format recommended by ASME Y14.5. Study the examples
and observe the format used to place symbols within notes. Text and symbols have a
specific format organization that must be followed to match the ASME standard.

Dimensioning and Tolerancing Templates

Dimensioning and tolerancing templates are available to help save time when
doing drawings that contain ASME Y14.5 symbols. If you are creating drawings
manually, it is recommended that one of these templates be used when doing the
tests or problems in this book. The symbols on drawing assignments should be
drawn using a template or a CADD system. Using a template or CADD system
helps ensure that all symbols are properly drawn and always uniform in size and
appearance. Standard lettering height on engineering mechanical drawings is .12"
or 3 mm, depending on company standards. The symbols are sized based on the
predominant lettering height on the drawing. Verify the lettering height specified
when purchasing a template. The template shown in Example 2-2 has both geometric
tolerancing and standard dimensioning symbols.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 55

Example 2-2. A geometric dimensioning and tolerancing template.

Datum Feature Symbols

Dat11ms are considered theoretically perfect surfaces, planes, points, or axes.
This is only an introduction to the appearance of datum-related symbols. Chapter 3
provides a complete discussion on datums and datum identification. In baseline
dimensioning, all dimensions originate from a common surface (refer to Example 1-18
in Chapter 1). This is also true where a group of dimensions originate from a
common axis or center plane. In these applications, the datum is assumed. In
geometric dimensioning and tolerancing, the datums are identified with a dat11m
feat11re symbol.
Any letter of the alphabet can be used to identify a datum except for I, 0, or Q.
These letters may be confused with the numbers 1 or 0. Each datum feature
requiring identification must have its own identification letter. On drawings where
the number of datums exceeds the number of letters in the alphabet, double letters
are used, starting with AA through AZ, and then BA through BZ. Datum feature
symbols can be repeated only as necessary for clarity. Datum identification letters A,
B, and C can be used for convenience; however, other letters are commonly used in
industry. Example 2-3 shows a datum feature symbol.

.-7
2H
t Optional shoulder \
~ Identification letter

H =Letter height
I ' - - Filled Unfilled
f
Symbol Specifications Examples
Example 2-3. Drawing specifications for datum feature symbols and example
applications.
 ■

~rs1on 56 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Target Symbols

Datum targets are used to specify points, lines, or areas of contact on a part that
establish datums when it is not possible to use a surface. This discussion is provided
for you to see what the symbols related to datum targets are supposed to look like.
Further explanation is provided in Chapter 3.
The datum target symbol is drawn as a circle with a horizontal line through the
center. The top half of the circle is left blank unless the datum target symbol refers
to a datum target area. In that case, the size of the target area is specified inside the
symbol, as shown in Example 2-4. A dot at the end of a leader pointing to the inside
of the symbol can also be used to specify a datum target area when there is not
enough room for the note to be placed inside. The lower half of the circle is used to
identify the related datum with the datum reference letter and datum target number
assigned sequentially, starting with 1, for each datum, such as Al, A2, and A3. The
movable datum target symbol is used to indicate that the datum target is not fixed
at its basic location and is free to translate. The movable datum target symbol can
point in either direction. Refer to Example 2-4. The term translate means uniform
movement without rotation.

Target area size, when used

0.8H

3.SH
L 0.3H

Datum Target number

H ; Letter height Can point either direction
Datum Target Symbol Movable Datum Target Symbol
Symbol Specifications

~01 2

Datum target symbol

@ ®
Datum target symbols
LQfil
®
Datum target symbol
without area s ize w ith circular target area w ith square target area

~ 10 X25

@
Datum target symbol w ith Movable datum Movable datum
rectangular target area target symbol target symbol w ith
without area size spherical target area

Examples

Example 2-4. Drawing specifications for datum target symbols and example applications.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Svmbo/s and Terms 57

A radial line is used to connect the datum target symbol to the datum target
point, target line, or target area, as shown in Example 2-5. These three examples of
datum target symbols are applied on datums in Chapter 3.

<90°7
X1
Target point Target line Target area
H ; Letter height
Symbol Specifications

~ ~----+----~ Nl

Nl

Examples

Example 2-5. Datum target point, datum target line, and datum target area, and
example applications of datum target symbols.
 ■

~rs1on 58 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Geometric Characteristic Symbols

Geometric characteristic symbols are symbols used in geometric dimensioning
and tolerancing to provide specific controls related to the form of an object, the
orientation of features, the outlines of features, the relationship of features to an axis,
or the location of features. Geometric characteristic symbols are separated into five
types: form, profile, orientation, location, and runout, as shown in Example 2-6.
The symbols in Example 2-6 are drawn to the actual size and shape
recommended by ASME Y14.5 based on .12" lettering.

Straightness
Flatness
Circularity
Cylindricity
Profile of a Line
Profile of a Surface
Position
Concentrici ty
Symmetry

Parallelism
O,i,ntation [ ; Perpendicularity
Angularity

R unou t
/ or /1
~~
Circular Runout
[ 1111
L / · or L / · Total Runout

Example 2-6. Geometric characteristic symbols.

Material Condition and Material

Boundary Symbols
Material condition symbols and material boundary symbols are often referred
to as modifying symbols or modifiers, because they modify or change the geometric
tolerance in relation to the produced size, location of the feature, or datum reference.
Material condition and material boundary symbols are only used in geometric
dimensioning applications. The symbols used in geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing to indicate maximum material condition (MMC), maximum material
boundary (MMB), least material condition (LMC), and least material boundary
(LMB) are shown in Example 2-7. Regardless of feature size (RPS) and regardless of
material boundary (RMB) are also material condition applications. However, there
is no symbol to represent RPS or RMB, because they are assumed for all geometric
tolerances and datum references unless MMC, MMB, LMC, or LMB are specified.
This is only an introduction to material condition and material boundary
symbols. Chapter 4 deals exclusively with this subject.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 59

Symbol Meaning
@ At maximum material condition (MMC)
when applied to a tolerance value. At
maximum material boundary (MMB) when
applied to a datum reference.

At least material condition (LMC) when

applied to a tolerance value. At least
material boundary (LMB) when applied
to a datum reference.

1L ~
t ~
H = Letter height

Example 2-7. Material condition and material boundary symbols.

Feature Control Frame

A geometric characteristic, geometric tolerance, modifiers, and datum reference
(if any) for an individual feature are specified by means of a feature control frame.
The feature control frame is divided into compartments containing the geometric
characteristic symbol in the first compartment followed by the geometric tolerance.
Where applicable, the geometric tolerance is preceded by the diameter symbol
or spherical diameter symbol that describes the shape of the tolerance zone. The
geometric tolerance is followed by a material condition modifier, if other than RFS.
See Example 2-8.

Geometric
characteristic symbol ~ / Geometric tolerance

[Q@]
Geometric tolerance
Geometric
Note: the geometric
characteristic symbol
tolerance is total, not ±

- <2)0 .1 5@
Diameter symbol,
when used Material condition
modifier, when used
Note: RFS is assumed
when this location is blank
Example 2-8. Feature control frame with geometric characteristic symbol,
geometric tolerance, diameter symbol (when used), and material condition
modifier (when used).
 ■

~rs1on 60 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Where a geometric tolerance is related to one or more datums, the datum reference
letters are placed in compartments following the geometric tolerance. A multiple
datum reference is established by two datum features, such as an axis established by
two datum diameters. Where a datum reference is multiple, both datum reference
letters, separated by a dash, are placed in a single compartment after the geometric
tolerance. Example 2-9 shows several feature control frames with datum references.

~~----~,1( Datum reference letter

1©10 0.08 IA_

Primary datum reference letter
Material condition
modifier when used

Secondary datum reference letter

Primary datum reference letter

Tertiary datum reference letter

Secondary datum reference letter

/ Multiple datum reference primary

I~ u~ 1-o.~1l~A~~~h
~-~-~--~

Material boundary symbol

~I¾~l-s0-0-_o_s_@~
IA~IB~Ic_@
, . .,.(_
Example 2-9. Feature control frames with datum references.

The order of elements in a feature control frame is shown in Example 2-10.

Notice that the datum reference letters are followed by a material boundary symbol
where applicable. Draw each feature control frame compartment large enough to
accommodate the symbols without crowding. Minimum compartment length is 2X
the lettering height. Maintain the minimum compartment sizes when the symbols or
letters fit without crowding.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 61

I I 2H minimum r! 2H minimum

±lt& l0o s@ IAIBlc:# H = Letter height

l
Symbol Specifications

Geometric characteristic
symbol~
Diameter symbol zone
;JJ
I~ I</J 0. 13@ IA IB@I CI
~ LTertiary datum reference
L .
Matenal boundary symbol,
w hen used
descriptor, w hen used Secondary datum reference
Geometric tolerance Primary datum reference
Material condition symbol
Order of Elements

Example 2-10. Feature control frame with order of elements.

Basic Dimensions
A basic dimension is considered a theoretically perfect dimension. Basic
dimensions are used to describe the theoretically exact size, profile, orientation, or
location of a feature or datum target. These dimensions provide the basis from where
permissible variations are established by tolerances on other dimensions, in notes,
or in feature control frames. In simple terms, all a basic dimension does is tell you
where the geometric tolerance zone or datum target is located. This text will show you
specific situations where basic dimensions are optional or required. Basic dimensions
are shown on a drawing by placing a rectangle (box) around the dimension as shown
in Example 2-11. A general note can also be used to identify basic dimensions in some
applications. For example, the note "UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS LOCATING
TRUE POSITION ARE BASIC" indicates the dimensions that are basic.
The basic dimension symbol around a dimension is a signal to the print reader to look
for a geometric tolerance in a feature control frame related to the features being dimensioned.

H = Letter height
Symbol Specifications

l6X 45 ] 6X ]45' ]
Multiple Features

Example 2-11. Basic dimensions. When dimensioning multiple locations, the number
of times or places can be applied inside or outside of the basic dimension symbol.
 ■

~rs1on 62 Geometric Dimensioning and To/erancing

Additional Symbols
There are other symbols used in geometric dimensioning and tolerancing.
These symbols are used for specific applications and are identified as follows.
See Example 2-12.

l_
l.SH
=====;
IT)==-
==== DO<H? t====
_· ~_ _
~ ---==-------------(Q-+- ____,®
,_ _ _ID~ (I~ _ [ 0.8H

! Free Tangent Projected Independency Unequally

State Plane Tolerance Disposed
Zone Profile

08H~~~n1_l
T [> ◄ ~
3X I.SH =:J- o::-T
Translation Between
5
I ~~-
1.SH
H-
ST 0.8H
j_i~ .sH
1~ C~ 0.8H

T; 0
I 30°
Statistical Continuous
Tolerance Feature
H = Letter height
Symbol Specifications

12.5±0.08®
12.5±0.04

D ~
12.5±0.08®
D Combined w ith
conventional tolerance
With a dimension

In the feature control frame

Statistical Tolerancing Applications
Example 2-12. Additional dimensioning symbols. (Continued)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 63

The between symbol is used to indicate that a tolerance or other specification

applies to a limited segment of a surface or feature between designated ends or
across multiple features.
The continuous feature symbol indicates a group of two or more interrupted
features that are considered as a single feature.

IO I0 .1IAIBICI
G ,...._. H
Between Symbol Application

Material Condition Modifier and

Free State Symbol Application

Tangent Plane Symbol Application

Material Condition Modifier and Projected

Tolerance Zone Symbol Application

Unequally Disposed Tolerance Symbol

Application

D ~
12 .5±0.0S(D

Independency Symbol Application

Datum Translation Symbol Application

Example 2-12. (Continued)
 ■

~rs1on 64 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Free state describes distortion of a part after the removal of forces applied
during manufacture. The free state symbol is placed in the feature control frame
after the geometric tolerance and the material condition (if any) if the feature must
meet the tolerance specified while in free state. See Chapter 5 for more detail on this
subject.
The independency symbol indicates that perfect form of a feature of size is not
required at MMC or LMC.
The projected tolerance zone symbol is placed in the feature control frame to
inform the reader that the geometric tolerance zone is projected outside the feature.
See Chapter 8 for a complete description.
The statistical tolerance symbol is used to indicate that a tolerance is based on
statistical tolerancing. Statistical tolerancing is the assigning of tolerances to related
dimensions in an assembly based on the requirements of statistical process control
(SPC). Statistical process control is a method of monitoring a manufacturing
process by using statistical signals to either leave the process alone or change it
as needed to maintain the quality intended in the dimensional tolerancing. The
statistical tolerancing symbol is placed after the dimension or geometric tolerance
that requires SPC. When the feature can be manufactured either by using SPC or by
using conventional means, both the statistical tolerance with the statistical tolerance
symbol and the conventional tolerance must be shown. Refer to Example 2-12. An
appropriate general note should accompany the drawing. Either of the two notes
shown below are acceptable:
• FEATURES IDENTIFIED AS STATISTICAL TOLERANCED SHALL BE
PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL.
• FEATURES IDENTIFIED AS STATISTICAL TOLERANCED SHALL BE
PRODUCED WITH STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL, OR THE MORE
RESTRICTIVE ARITHMETIC LIMITS.
The tangent plane symbol is placed after the geometric tolerance in the feature
control frame when it is necessary to control a feature surface by contacting points of
tangency. See Chapter 6 for more detail on this subject.
The translation symbol is used to indicate that a datum feature simulator is
not fixed at its basic location and shall be free to translate. The term datum feature
simulator is described in detail in Chapter 3.
The 11nequally disposed profile symbol is used to specify a unilateral or
unequal bilateral profile tolerance.
Additional definitions and examples are provided throughout this textbook
where related to specific content. A complete display of all dimensioning and
geometric tolerancing symbols is provided in the appendices of this textbook for
your convenience.

~ ----------------
Tools for drawing feature control frames, datum feature symbols, and other
dimensioning and geometric tolerancing symbols are available in different
CADD software programs. See the appendices in this textbook for informa-
tion on using dimensioning tools in specific CADD software programs,
including AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and SolidWorks.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Svmbo/s and Terms 65

1. Name each of the following dimensioning symbols.

0 □
R
SR T
s0 --ED
CR ()
X [>
=FI

LJ
Lill
V
2. List the five basic types of dimensioning and geometric tolerancing symbols.
1) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3. Name the five ty pes of geometric characteristic symbols.
1) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~ _6_6 __G_e_o_n_1e_tr_ic_ D_im
_ e_ns_i_on_1_·n-g_a_n_d_I1_o_le_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4. Name each of the following geometric characteristic symbols.

II
_J_

/
u ________
5. Any letter of the alphabet can be used to identify a datum except for ___,
___,or ___.
6. When can datum feature symbols be repeated on a drawing? _ _ _ _ _ __

7. What information is placed in the lower half of the datum target symbol? _ __

8. What information is placed in the top half of the datum target symbol? _ _ __

9. Given the following symbols, provide the meaning of each symbol in the spaces
provided.

@- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 67

10. Label each of the symbols in the following feature control frame using the blanks
provided.

l-$- I0 o.os@ I AIB@lc l

A) - - - - - - - - - - - -
I I
B) - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - -
£) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

F) - - - - - - - - - - - -

G) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

11. Label each of the symbols in the following feature control frame using the blanks
provided.

l-$-I0 O.13@IA IBIC [> I

A) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I I
B) - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
£) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

F) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

G) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

12. Label the symbol in the following application using the blank provided.

D __ _ o~.os CD
1_2 ±
~ - - A) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~ _68_ _G_e_o_n_1e_tr_ic_ D_im
_ e_ns_i_on_1_·n-g_a_n_d_I1_o_le_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
13. Completely define the term "basic dimension." _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

14. How are basic dimensions shown on a drawing? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

15. Label the follow ing symbol and identify the proper drafting dimensions using
the blanks provided.

~ A) _

B) _ _

F) - - - - - - - - - -
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 69

16. Label the following symbols and identify the proper drafting dimensions and
features using the blanks provided.

A) - - - - - - - - - -
E) _ _

D) _ _

B) - - - - - - - - - - C) - - - - - - - - - -
G) - - - - - - - - - -

H) - ~
I) - - - - - - - - -

17. Label the following symbols as they relate to datum targets using the blanks provided.

A) _ _
X B) _ _ C) _ _

18. Label the following symbol and identify the proper drafting dimensions using
the blanks provided.

J_~
A) _ _ T B) _ _

C) - - - - - - - - - -
 .
~rs1on 70 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standard s
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards. Note: Dimensioning symbols refer to symbols found in Example 2-1.
Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols refer to symbols found in, and
including, the feature control frame, datum feature and target symbols, basic
dimensions, and symbols found in Example 2-12. Geometric characteristic symbols refer
to the symbols found in Example 2-6.

Refer to tl-ie print of tlie SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING ounil on page 433.

1. Identify the dimensioning and tolerancing standard that was used as a basis for
the dimensioning and tolerancing placed on this drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. List the names of at least six dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric

dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
3. List the names of at least 10 geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)

C)
D)
E)
F)
G)
H)
I)
J)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 71

4. Give a complete identification for each of the items found in the feature control
frame associated with the 0 .750 dimension. Identify the items from left to right.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Refer to the print of the HUB-STATIONARY, ATU found on page 435.
5. List the names of at least five dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6. List the names of at least eight geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
G) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7. Give a complete identification for each of the items found in the feature control
frame associated with the 04.500 dimension. Identify these items from left to
right.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 .
~rs1on 72 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

8. Why is there no material condition symbol in the feature control frame described
in Question 7? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to tne rint of tne PEDAL-ACCELERATOR founa on age 436.

9. List the names of at least nine geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)

C)
D)
E)
F)
G)
H)
I)

Refer to tne print of tne HYDRAULIC VALVE found on page 438.

10. List the names of at least eight geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)

C)
D)
E)
F)
G)
H)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 73

Refer to the print of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on page 441.

11. List the names of the different geometric characteristic symbols found on this
print.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Refer to the print of the BRACKET ASSY-EL GIMBAL found on page 445.
12. List the names of at least eight dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
G) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
13. List the names of at least five geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Refer to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD foun<i on page 446.
14. List the names of at least three dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 .
~rs1on 74 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

15. List the names of at least six geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL BEVEL CUTIER found on page 447.
16. List the names of at least three dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
17. List the names of at least four geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
D)
Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on page 448.
18. List the names of at least four dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A)
B)

C)
D)
19. List the names of at least six geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 2 Introduction to Symbols and Terms 75

Refer to the print of the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
20. List the n ames of at least five dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimension ing and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
21. List the names of at least eight geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
G) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
H) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Refer to the
22. List the names of at least five dimensioning symbols, excluding geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing symbols, found on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 ■

trs1on 76 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

23. List the names of at least eight geometric dimensioning and tolerancing symbols
found on this print.
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
G)
H)
 .
~rs1on

Datums

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Explain the purpose of datums.
0 Define common terms related to datum features.
0 Interpret information provided by datum feature symbols.
0 Describe methods for representing datum surfaces on drawings.
0 Explain how to establish datum reference frames.
0 Identify the degrees of freedom of a part.
0 Explain how to establish datum targets.
0 Identify datum target points, areas, and lines.
0 Describe methods for representing datum axes on drawings.
0 Describe methods for representing datum center planes on drawings.

Technical Terms
Actual mating envelope Normal
Coaxial Order of precedence
Coaxial datum features Primary datum
Coplanar surfaces Primary datum plane
Datum axis Rotational
Datum feature Secondary datum
Datum feature simulator Secondary datum plane
Datum feature symbol Simulated datum
Datum plane Simulated datum axis
Datum reference frame (DRF) Simulated datum plane
Datum reference order Tangent plane
Datum target line Tertiary datum
Datum target point Tertiary datum plane
Datum targets Three degrees of rotation
Datums Three degrees of
Degrees of freedom translation
High points Translational
Movable datum targets

Datums are considered to be theoretically perfect planes, surfaces, points, lines,

axes or a combination thereof derived from the datum feature simulator, which is
described in this chapter.

77
 ■

~rs1on 78 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

This chapter is designed to help you identify and read information related to
datums on drawings. This chapter also covers the specifications for properly placing
datum-related symbols on drawings. This information is covered without regard to
specific inspection and tooling techniques. Advanced instruction is recommended
after you gain a solid understanding of the basic fundamentals presented here.

Datums
Datums are planes, points, lines, axis, or a combination thereof. A datum is
theoretically exact and is derived from the theoretical datum feature simulator. A
datum feature is identified on the drawing with either a datum feature symbol or a
datum target symbol. Datum features are used to establish the datum reference frame.
Examples of physical datum feature simulators are machine tables, surface plates,
gages, mandrels, specifically designed fixtures, or a set of points established on the
datum feature using a coordinate measuring machine. These are commonly referred
to as processing or inspection equipment. A simulated datum is a plane, point, line,
axis, or a combination thereof similar to, or derived from the processing or inspection
equipment. The datum reference frame is a set of three mutually perpendicular
intersecting datum planes. It exists only in theory and not on the part itself.
There are many concepts to keep in mind when selecting datum features,
including the function of the part or feature, manufacturing processes, methods
of inspection, the shape of the part, relationship to other features, assembly
requirements, and design requirements. Datum features should be selected to match
on mating parts, to be easily accessible, and of adequate size to permit control of the
datum requirements. Datum features should not be removed by later processing.

Datum Feature Symbol

The datum feature symbol is placed on the drawing to identify the features of
the object that are specified as datums and referred to as datum features. The datum
feature symbol identifies physical features and shall not be applied to centerlines,
center planes, or axes. This symbol is placed in the following locations on a drawing:
• On the outline of a feature surface in the view where the surface appears as
an edge.
• On a leader line directed to the surface. The leader line can be shown as a
dashed line if the datum feature is not on the visible surface.
• On an extension line projecting from the edge view of a surface, clearly
separated from the dimension line.
• On a chain line next to a partial datum surface.
• On the dimension line or an extension of the dimension line of a feature of
size when the datum is an axis or center plane.
• On the outline of a cylindrical feature or an extension line of the feature
outline, separated from the size dimension, when the datum is an axis.
• Above or below and attached to a feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 79

Datum feature symbols are commonly drawn using thin lines with the symbol
size related to the drawing lettering height. The triangular base on the datum feature
symbol can be filled or unfilled, depending on the company or school preference.
The filled base helps easily locate these symbols on the drawing. Each datum feature
on a part requiring identification must be assigned a different datum identification
letter. Uppercase letters of the alphabet, except the letters I, 0, and Q, are used
for datum feature symbol letters. These letters are not used because they can be
mistaken for numbers. Example 3-1 shows the specifications for drawing a datum
feature symbol.

-.
Any
needed
length

I
T
2H
I

j
H
t Ophorutl shoWde, \

'd=•>firahoo '""" r r;-

H ; Letter height Filled Unfilled __/

Symbol Specifications Examples
Example 3-1. Drawing specifications for datum feature symbols.

Datum Feature
The datum feature is the actual feature of the part that is used to establish the
datum. When the datum feature is a surface, it is the actual surface of the object that
is identified as the datum. Look at the magnified view of a datum feature placed on
the simulated datum in Example 3-2. Study the following terms:
Actual mating envelope: The smallest size that can be contracted about an
external feature or the largest size that can be expanded within an internal feature.
Datum feature: The actual feature of the part (such as a surface).
Datum feature simulator: The opposite shape of the datum feature. The datum
feature simulator is one of two types:
1. The theoretical datum feature simulator is a perfect boundary used to establish a
datum from a specified datum feature.
2. The physical datum feature simulator is the physical boundary used to establish
a simulated datum from a specified datum feature. The manufacturing
inspection equipment associated with the datum feature or features is used as
the physical object to establish the simulated datum or datums. Physical datum
feature simulators represent the theoretical datum feature simulators during
manufacturing and inspection.
 ■

~rs1on 80 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A datum feature simulator can be one of the following:

• Maximum material boundary (MMB).
• Least material boundary (LMB).
• The actual mating envelope.
• A tangent plane.
• A mathematically defined contour.
Datum feature simulators have the following requirements:
• Perfect form.
• Basic orientation to each other for all the datum references in the feature
control frame.
• Basic location relative to other datum feature simulators for all the datum
references in the feature control frame, unless a translation modifier or
movable datum target symbol is specified.
• Movable location when a translation modifier or movable datum target
symbol is specified.
• Fixed in size when MMB or LMB is specified.
• Adjustable in size when RMB is specified.
In actual practice, measurements cannot be made from theoretical datum
features or datum feature simulators. This is why manufacturing inspection
equipment is of the highest quality for making measurements and verifying
dimensions even though they are not perfect.
Datum plane: The theoretically exact plane established by the simulated datum
of the datum feature.
Simulated datum: A point, axis, line, or plane consistent with or resulting
from processing or inspection equipment, such as a surface plate, inspection table,
gage surface, or a mandrel. The simulated datum plane in Example 3-2 is the plane
derived from the physical datum feature simulator and coincides with the datum
plane when the datum plane is in contact with the simulated datum plane.

Datum plane
Theoretical datum feature simulator in
contact with simulated datum plane

Part

' - Physical datum

Simulated datum plane feature simulator
Plane derived from the physical
datum feature simulator Surface of manufacturing
or verification equipment

Example 3-2. Datum plane, datum feature, and the simulated datum plane. Datums
are to be treated as if they are perfect even though they may not be perfect.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 81

Tangent plane: A plane that contacts the high points of the specified feature
surface.
When a surface is designated as a datum feature on a part, the datum feature
symbol is placed on the edge view of the surface or on an extension line in the view
where the surface appears as a line. Refer to Example 3-3. A leader line can also be
used to connect the datum feature symbol to the view in some applications.

Surface datum feature symbols

must be clearly separated from
dimension line arrowheads

24
C

-f
Datum feature symbol
placed on edge view
of surface or extension
line from edge view

Angled Surface

The Drawing The Meaning The Drawing The Meaning

Example 3-3. Methods for placing datum feature symbols on datum feature surfaces.
The datum feature symbol is placed on the edge view or on an extension line in
the view where the surface appears as a line. The datum feature symbol can also
be placed on a leader line directed to the surface. The leader line can be shown as a
dashed line if the datum feature is not on the visible surface.
 ■

~rs1on 82 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Geometric Control of Datum Surface

The datum feature surface can be controlled by a geometric tolerance such as
flatness, straightness, angularity, perpendicularity, or parallelism. Measurements taken
from a simulated datum plane do not take into account any variations of the datum
feature surface from the simulated datum plane. Any geometric tolerance applied
to a datum should only be specified if the design requires the control. Example 3-4
shows the feature control frame and datum feature symbol together. Example 3-5 is a
magnified representation that shows the meaning of the drawing in Example 3-4.
The geometric tolerance of 0.1 is specified in the feature control frame in
Example 3-4. The maximum size that the part can be produced is the upper limit of
the dimensional tolerance, or MMC. The MMC is 12.5 + 0.3 = 12.8. The minimum size
that the part can be produced is the lower limit of the dimensional tolerance, or LMC.
The LMC is 12.5-0.3 = 12.2.

D ~
12.5 ± 0 .03
_____,_-._,

Example 3-4. A feature control frame and datum feature symbol.

~ 12.8
12.2
Datum maximum
minimum
plane A ~ ::±===-<;:;a-,s....a==:zsl:::: - - ~ - - - ~
L 0.1 geometric tolerance
Example 3-5. The meaning of the drawing in Example 3-4.

The Datum Reference Frame Concept

Datum features are selected based on their importance to the design of the part.
Generally, three datum features are selected that are perpendicular to each other;
however, this is not a requirement. These three datum features are used to establish a
datum reference frame (DRF). The datum reference frame is used to fully constrain
the part in all six degrees of freedom. The datums that make up the datum reference
frame are referred to as the primary datum, secondary datum, and tertiary datum.
In order to fully constrain all six degrees of freedom, the primary datum is simulated
first, followed by the secondary datum, and then the tertiary datum. The order of
the datums is designated in the feature control frame. The first datum listed is the
primary datum, the second datum listed is the secondary datum, and the third
datum listed is the tertiary datum.
The datum feature symbols on the drawing relate to the datum features on the
part. Notice datum feature symbols A, B, and C as you look at Example 3-7. Also,
notice the datum reference order A, B, C in the feature control frame. The datum
reference in the feature control frame tells you that Datum A is primary, Datum B is
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 83

Example 3-6. The datum reference frame.

secondary, and Datum C is tertiary. The geometric tolerance that controls a feature or
features relative to datums must include one or more datum references, as shown with
the position tolerance relating the location of the two holes to Datums A, B, and C in
Example 3-7. An explanation of the symbols on the drawing in Example 3-7 follows.

>----~ SO >---~~
-[IQ]

2X 0 8 .0- 8.2

::1~
Example 3-7. The datum feature symbols on the drawing relate to the datum features
on the part. Look at this drawing as you refer to Examples 3-8 through 3-10 and the
related discussion in the text.
 ■

~rs1on 84 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The surface of the part labeled as the primary datum is placed on the surface of
an inspection table or manufacturing inspection equipment, as shown in Example 3-8.
Now measurements can be made from the primary datum inspection table surface to
features that are dimensioned from the primary datum.

Primary datum plane

Example 3-8. The surface of the part labeled as the primary datum is placed on the
surface of the inspection table.

The part is then positioned against the secondary datum, as shown in Example 3-9.
With the part held against the primary and secondary datums, dimensions can
be verified from the secondary datum inspection table surface to features that are
dimensioned from the secondary datum.

Secondary datum plane

Example 3-9. The part is now positioned against the secondary datum.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 85

Finally, the tertiary datum is established to totally confine the part in the datum
reference frame, as shown in Example 3-10. Now, with the part totally confined in
the datum reference frame, all measurements made from the simulated datum planes
to related features on the part are reliable and have the same origin every time.
The surfaces of this inspection equipment are the simulated datums. The datums
are the assumed exact planes established by the true geometric counterpart of the
datum features. Measurements cannot be made from the datums, because they are
only assumed to exist, but do not actually exist. The machine tables, surface plates,
or inspection tables are of such high quality that they are used to act as the datums
where measurements are taken from and where dimensions are verified. In this way
each dimension always originates from the same reliable location. Dimensions are
never taken or verified from one surface of the part to another. Dimensions always
originate from the datum planes.
Refer again to Example 3-7 for review. Notice again the feature control frame
associated with the 2X 08.0-8.2 dimension. The last three compartments in the
feature control frame provide the datum reference. This is known as the datum order
of precedence. The primary datum (A} is given first followed by the secondary (B) and
tertiary (C). For instructional purposes, this example labels datum feature symbols
conveniently as A, B, and C. In industry and later in this book, other letters are used
to identify datums, such as D, E, F, or L, M, N, or X, Y, Z. The letters 0, Q, and I are
avoided because they may resemble numbers.
As the part is positioned on the datum reference frame, as illustrated in
Example 3-8 through Example 3-10, there must be three points anywhere on the
primary datum feature in contact with the first datum plane. At least two points
of contact are required to establish the secondary datum feature against its datum
plane. At least one point must contact the datum plane on the tertiary datum

Tertiary datum plane

Example 3-10. The tertiary datum is established to totally confine the part in the
datum reference frame.
 ■

~rs1on 86 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

feature. These points of contact, referred to as high points, take into account possible
irregularity in the manufacture of the part within design limits. Positioning the
part in the datum reference frame in this manner ensures a common basis for
measurements.

Degrees of Freedom
All parts have six degrees of freedom. There are three translational degrees
of freedom and three rotational degrees of freedom. The term degrees of freedom
means the number of coordinates it takes to exclusively control the position of a part.
The term translational refers to uniform movement without rotation, and the term
rotational refers to movement around an axis.
Considering the datum reference frame in Example 3-11, the part can move
without rotation in each of the three directions from the mutually perpendicular
planes. This is called the three degrees of translation. The part can also rotate about
each of the axes, which is referred to as the three degrees of rotation.
Refer again to Example 3-11 and notice that the three translational degrees of
freedom are labeled x, y, and z. The three rotational degrees of freedom are labeled 11,
v, and w. The following demonstrates the degrees of freedom related to the primary,
secondary, and tertiary datums:
The primary datum plane constrains three degrees of freedom:
• One translational in z.
• One rotational in 11.
• One rotational in v.

Datum axis "'

Tertiary d a tum
Secondary datum

Datum Datum
axis axis

Primary datum

Three Mutually Perpendicular Planes

Example 3-11. All parts have six d egrees of freedom. The three translational d egrees
of freedom for this part are labeled x, y, and z. The three rotational degrees of
freedom for this part are labeled 11, v, and w.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 87

The secondary datum plane constrains two degrees of freedom:

• One translational in y.
• One rotational in w.
The tertiary datum plane constrains one degree of freedom:
• One translational in x.

Multiple Datum Reference Frames

Depending on the functional requirements of a part, more than one datum
reference frame can be established. In Example 3-12, datums X, Y, and Z constitute
one datum reference frame, while datums L, M, and Y establish a second reference
frame. The relationship between the two datum reference frames is controlled by
the angularity tolerance on datum feature L. Datum M is the axis of the large hole to
which the datum feature symbol is connected. Datum axes are discussed later in this
chapter.
For parts with inclined datum features, as in Example 3-12, the datum feature
simulator plane is oriented at the basic angle of the datum feature. The related datum
reference frame plane passes through the vertex of the basic angle and is mutually
perpendicular to the other datum planes.

2X ¢5
l-$-100 .8 lx lYI ZI , - ' , - - - - ~ - - - -R_e_p_re_s,ents d atum axis \
(±) (±) __eh_
(±) (±)- Y -

2X ¢5
VIEW A- A
L:. 0.80 X Y

Example 3-12. Multiple datum reference frames.

 ■

~rs1on 88 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Features Specified Individually

When multiple datum reference frames exist and features need to be positioned
to different datums individually, then a note can be placed next to the datum feature
symbols identifying how many datum features are to be considered separately. For
example, if there are two separate datum features that are identified with the same
datum identification letter, but they need to be considered individually, the note
2X INDIVIDUALLY is placed next to the datum feature symbols. An example of this
can be seen on the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK drawing in the Prints for Print
Reading Exercises section. This drawing has four holes at different angles. The holes
on the right side need to be positioned to different datums than the holes on the left
side. Instead of calling out two more datums and having to cut another section to
show the holes on the left side, the datums are used individually and the locations
of two holes on each side are positioned to the two datums individually. Using this
method, only two holes are checked for position at a time to different datums.

Datum Target Symbols

In many situations it is not possible to establish an entire surface, or entire
surfaces, as datums. When this happens, datum targets can be used to establish
datum planes. Datum targets are designated points, lines, or surface areas that are
used to establish the datum reference frame. This procedure is especially useful on
parts with surface or contour irregularities, such as some sheet metal, sand cast, or
forged parts that are subject to bowing or warpage. However, datum targets can be
used on most parts. Use datum targets to minimize the variation in the way features
are measured. This method can also be applied to weldments where heat can cause
warpage. Movable datum targets are datum targets that are not fixed at their basic
location, are free to translate, and can apply to a point, line, or area.
The datum target symbol is drawn as a circle using thin lines. The circle is
divided into two parts with a horizontal line. The bottom half provides the datum
reference letter and the specific datum target number on that datum. The top half
is left blank if a datum target point or line is identified. When identifying a datum
target area, the top half contains the shape and size of the area. The dimension for
the datum target area can be placed outside the datum target symbol with a leader
and a dot pointing to the upper half if the dimension is too big to fit inside. See
Example 3-13. When the datum target area is circular, a diameter symbol precedes
the size value. When the datum target area is square, a square symbol precedes
the size value. The datum target area can also be rectangular in shape, whlch
is dimensioned with a length and width value, such as 10 X 25. The rectangular
dimension is placed outside the datum target symbol and a leader points to the
top half of the datum target symbol. A spherical datum target area can be used
by placing the spherical diameter symbol in front of the size value. The spherical
diameter is generally placed outside the datum target symbol and a leader points to
the top half of the datum target symbol. The surface upon which the datum target
lies can be identified with a datum feature symbol, as shown in Examples 3-14 and
3-15. A movable datum target symbol is used to indicate that the datum target is not
fixed at its basic location and is free to translate. Refer to Example 3-13.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 89

Target a rea size, w hen used ~

0.8H 60~

~
3.SH

I L 0.3H

Datum Target number

H =Letter height Can point e ither direction
Datum Target Symbol Movable Datum Target Symbol

Symbol Specifications

( ' 7 \ 0 12
(08\
\gJ @ ~
Datum target symbol Datum target symbols Datum target symbol
w ithout area size with circular target area with square target area

( ' 7 \1OX 25 ~S08

\gJ ~
Datum target symbol w ith Movable datum Movable datum
rectangular target area target symbol target symbol w ith
w ithout area size spherical target a rea
Examples
Example 3-13. Drawing specifications for datum target symbols and example
applications.
 ■

~rs1on 90 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

On the drawing, the datum target symbol is connected with a leader to the
datum target point, line, or area. This leader line generally has no shoulder or
arrowhead associated with leaders. Example applications of datum target points and
datum target lines are shown in Example 3-14. Example applications of datum target
areas are shown in Example 3-15. Additional uses are provided where they relate to
specific applications.

<90°7
Truck~x 1 I >< I lf
Target point
~~~
YL ~
[ill
Target line

N1

Target area Datum Target Point

H ; Letter height
Symbol Specifications

~ ~ __j_
I >< I

Dashed leader indicates LJ

opposite side of part ~ / ~
I /
I/
~
I
I
I
Datum Target Line Datum Target Line

Example 3-14. The datum target point and datum target line and examples of their use.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 91

Area not
shown

Circular Datum Target Area Circular Datum Target Area

□12 ~ 10 X 25

N1

Square Datum Target Area Rectangular Datum Target Area

Example 3-15. Exam ple applications of datum target areas.

 ■

~rs1on 92 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Target Points

Datum planes are established by the datum target points as follows:
The primary datum plane must be established by at least three points on the
primary datum surface. These points are used to provide stability on the primary
plane, similar to a three-legged stool.
The secondary datum plane must be located by at least two points on the related
secondary datum surface. Two points provide the required stability for the secondary
plane.
The tertiary datum plane must be located by at least one point on the related
tertiary datum surface. One point of contact at the tertiary datum plane is all that is
required to complete the datum reference frame and provides complete stability of
the part in the datum reference frame.
Baseline or chain dimensioning can be used to locate datum target points.
The location dimensions must originate from datums. Datum target points are
established on the drawing using basic or tolerance dimensions. Established tooling
or gauging tolerances apply when datum targets are located with basic dimensions.
Datum targets are established on the part with fixtures and with pins. These pins
contact the part where the datum targets are specified. Example 3-16 shows a
pictorial drawing of the datum target points on the primary, secondary, and tertiary
datums.

Two points of contact One point of

on secondary datum contact on
tertiary datum

Three points of contact

on primary datum
Example 3-16. Datum target points on primary, secondary, and tertiary datums.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 93

As you have seen, each datum target point is identified with a datum target
symbol. The information inside the datum target symbol identifies the datum target
point, as shown in Example 3-17.

Identifies the datum feature

w here the point is located Identifies the specific
point on the datum

Example 3-17. The information inside the datum target symbol identifies the datum
target point, target line, or target area.

The datum target points can be located w ith basic d imensions or tolerance
dimensions. Refer to Example 3-18 for a multiview representation using basic
dimensions to locate the datum target points. The datum feature symbols appear on

A2 A3

Al

B
-@]-

~ ~-----+--
[ ill
-6 ~-~-~ Cl

81

Example 3-18. Locating datum target points using baseline dimensioning w ith basic
dimensions. Chain dimensions and tolerance dimensions can also b e used.
 ■

~rs1on 94 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

the view where the datum surface is a line and the datum points are located on the
surface view of the related datum. The datum target symbol can be placed on the
view where the surface appears as an edge if the drawing arrangement dictates such
placement, as shown in Example 3-19.

Y2

Y1

X1 X3

Example 3-19. The datum target symbol can be placed on an edge when a surface
view is not available, such as point Zl in this drawing. Note: Datum target point Zl
is located at the edge where datum surfaces X and Z meet. Otherwise, there would
be a side view and location dimensions provided.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 95

When datum target points are used on a drawing to identify a datum plane, the
datum plane is established by locating pins at the datum tangent points as shown
in the magnified representation in Example 3-20. The locating pins are rounded or
pointed standard tooling hardware.

The Drawing

Xl,X2
,----- Part
Datum ,----- X3

~ ~~I__ _]JI __ _
feature

plane X
Locating pins
The Fixture Setup
(Enlarged View)

Example 3-20. Datum target points on a drawing and the points established with
locating pins.
 ■

~rs1on 96 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Target Areas

Areas of contact can also be used to establish datums. When this is done, the
shape of the datum target area is outlined by a phantom line with section lines
through the area. Circular areas are dimensioned with basic or tolerance dimensions
to locate the center. The diameter of the target area is provided in the upper half
of the datum target symbol, as shown in Example 3-21, or with a leader and dot
pointing to the upper half. The locating pins for target areas are flat end tooling pins
with the pin diameter equal to the specified size of the target area.

_! - .---+-----+----,

01 2

X1
012 0 12

X2

The Drawing

----~50>---~~
X3,012 X2,012 Xl,012
Part
Datum
feature

Datum
plane X
7 l 3X012
locating pins

,__,______,60>------- Fixture base

The Fixture Setup

(Enlarged View)

Example 3-21. Datum target areas are located to their centers. The locating pins for
target areas are flat end tooling pins with the pin diameter equal to the specified size
of the target area.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 97

When the area is too small to accurately or clearly display on a drawing, then
a datum target point is used at the center location. The top half of the datum target
symbol identifies the diameter of the target area, as shown in Example 3-22.

(/)6
X3

The Drawing

l----~401--~~
Xl,06 X2,06 X3,06
Part
Datum
feature

---y--
3X06
Da~ _j
plane X I locating pins

"'-- Fixture base

The Fixture Setup

(Enlarged View)

Example 3-22. When the datum target area is too small to show, the datum target
point is used and the target area size is given in the top half of the datum target
symbol.
 ■

~rs1on 98 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Target Lines

A datum target line is indicated by the target point symbol "X" on the edge view
of the surface and by a phantom line on the surface view. Refer to Example 3-23.
If the locating pins are cylindrical, then the datum target line is along the tangency
where the pins meet the part. The pins can also be knife-edged. A surface is often
placed at 90° to the pin to create the datum reference frame.

The Drawing

Fixture base

Part ~ ~ - -.....
'---.

Locating pin

The Fixture Setup

(Enlarged View)
Example 3-23. Specifying a datum target line.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 99

Partial Datum Surface

A portion of a surface can be used as a datum. For example, this can be done
when a part has a hole or group of holes at one end where it is not necessary to
establish the entire surface as a datum to effectively locate the features. This can be
accomplished on a drawing using a chain line dimensioned with basic dimensions to
show the location and extent of the partial datum surface. The chain line dimension
is considered a minimum distance. The datum feature symbol is attached to the
chain line. The datum plane is then established at the location of the chain line, as
shown in Example 3-24.

The Drawing

Simulated datum
(fixture surface) rPart Datum fea lure

-=ffi_
LJ ~ Datum plane

The Fixture Setup

Example 3-24. A partial datum surface established with a chain line.

Coplanar Surface Datums

Coplanar surfaces are two or more surfaces that are on the same plane. The
relationship of coplanar datum features establishes the surfaces as one datum plane
in correlated feature control frame specifications. A phantom line is placed between
the surfaces if a void, such as a slot, exists. The phantom line between surfaces is
omitted when the area between the surfaces is higher than the datum features. The
surfaces are treated as a single, interrupted surface. The number of surfaces can be
specified as continuous by using a note, such as "2 SURFACES," below the related
feature control frame. See Example 3-25A and Example 3-25B. This concept is also
discussed in Chapter 9 with an application for profile tolerances of coplanar surfaces.
 ■

~rs1on 100 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Q 0.6
2 SURFACES

The Drawing

_I 0.6 tolerance zone

~r == =i~
Datum featur l _/r~----------}-
~
The Meaning
Datum feature M

Q 0 .6
2 SURFACES

The Drawing

0.6 tolerance zone

I ~[- =_ =
_ =~] ~
Datum feature~ _/L The Meaning
~ Datum feature M

Example 3-25. Coplanar surface datums represented using a note to indicate the
number of coplanar surfaces.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 101

It is also possible to display multiple coplanar surfaces as a single datum by

placing the d atum feature symbol on the phantom line, or by attaching the datum
feature symbol to a feature control frame that is connected to the phantom line by a
leader. In Example 3-26, there are a total of 6 raised surfaces behind the two that can
be seen in the front v iew. This is identified w ith the note "6 SURFACES" below the
feature control frame. In this application, the surfaces are all controlled by a flatness
geometric tolerance of 0.05 and they are also Datum D. A top view is also required to
provide dimensions to the 6 raised features.

6 SURFACES

Example 3-26. Specifying multiple coplanar surfaces as a single datum.

For your reference, the continuous feature symbol can be used to identify any
group of two or more interrupted features as a single feature. Example 3-27 shows
sample drawings using the continuous feature symbol w ith dimension values.

Extension lines can

be used or omitted \ __J_
-lf
f--+-
f i- a -+- -+- 0112.2
2 5@
- ~

____c 12.2 - 12.5@

~ -I
Example 3-27. Sample drawings using the continuous feature symbol.
 ■

~rs1on 102 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Axis
A cylindrical object can be a datum feature. When the cylindrical datum feature
is used, the center axis is know n as the datum axis. There are two theoretical planes
intersecting at 90°. These planes are represented by the centerlines of the drawing.
Where these planes intersect is referred to as the datum axis. The datum axis is
the origin for related dimensions, while the X and Y planes indicate the direction of
measurement. A datum feature symbol is added to the end of the object to establish
the datum reference frame, as show n in Example 3-28.

080

\ _ Secondary
datum axis

The Drawing
L ~
Secondary
datum axis
y X

Primary datum
The Meaning

Example 3-28. Datum axis.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 103

Placement of the Datum Feature Symbol for a Datum Axis

When the datum is an axis, the datum feature symbol can be placed on the
drawing using one of the following methods (also shown in Example 3-29).

t -=+ _l_

~
012
~ B

0 12

ABC

Example 3-29. Methods of representing the datum axis.

 ■

~rs1on 104 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

• The symbol can be placed on the outside surface of a cylindrical feature.

• The symbol can be centered on the opposite side of the dimension line
arrowhead, but it must line up and be centered with the arrowhead.
• The symbol can replace the dimension line and arrowhead when the
dimension line is placed outside of the extension lines.
• The symbol can be placed on the dimension line.
• The symbol can be placed on a leader line shoulder.
• The symbol can be placed below and attached to the center of a feature
control frame.

Simulated Datum Axis

The simulated datum axis is the axis of a perfectly cylindrical inspection device
that contacts the datum feature surface. For an external datum feature, as shown
in Example 3-30, the inspection device is the smallest circumscribed cylinder. The
inspection device for an internal datum feature is the largest inscribed cylinder, as
shown in Example 3-31. This application is valid only when datum features are
specified at RMB. RMB is described in Chapter 4. For a review on simulated datums
and datum feature simulators, refer to the discussion earlier in this chapter.

r Datum feature (part)

Simulated datum
Smallest circumscribed
cylinder

~ Datum feature simulator

Example 3-30. Simulated datum axis for an external datum feature only when a
datum feature is specified at RMB.

Datum feature (part)

r
Simulated datum
Largest inscribed
cylinder

Datum feature simulator

Example 3-31. Simulated datum axis for an internal datum feature only when a
datum feature is specified at RMB.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 105

Coaxial Datum Features

Coaxial means two or more cylindrical shapes that share a common axis.
Coaxial datum features exist when a single datum axis is established by two datum
features that are coaxial. When more than one datum feature is used to establish
a single datum, the datum reference letters are separated by a dash and placed in
one compartment of the feature control frame. These datum reference letters are of
equal importance and can be placed in any order. See Example 3-32. A datum axis
established by coaxial datum features is normally used as a primary datum.

d 0.2 A- 8

The Drawing

Datum axis A-B

Datum feature A \

~ / / ~ ~~,~ru~ e
3
C -.,. . ~•m=-,
_j
circumscribed cylinders

The Meaning
=r
Example 3-32. Coaxial datum features.

The Datum Axis of Screw Threads, Gears, and Splines

When a screw thread is used as a datum axis, the datum axis is established from
the pitch cylinder unless otherwise specified. If another feature of the screw thread
is desired, then a note such as "MAJOR DIA'' or "MINOR DIA'' is placed next to the
datum feature symbol. For example, the note "MAJOR DIA'' is specified when the
datum axis is established from the major diameter cylinder.
A specific feature such as the major diameter should be identified when a gear or
spline is used as a datum axis. When this is done, the note "MAJOR DIA," "MINOR
DIA," or "PITCH DIA'' is placed next to the datum feature symbol as appropriate.
The use of a screw thread, gear, or spline should be avoided for use as a datum axis
unless necessary.
 ■

~rs1on 106 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Axis Established with Datum Target Symbols

Datum target points, lines, or surface areas can also be used to establish a
datum axis. A primary datum axis can be established by two sets of three equally
spaced targets-a set near one end of the cylinder and the other set near the other
end, as shown in Example 3-33. Notice the datum target points in the circular view
are rotated as needed to align with an imaginary line projected from the center for
clarity.

Primary
datum axis

Example 3-33. Establishing a primary datum axis with target points.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 107

When two cylindrical features of different diameters are used to establish a

datum axis, then the datum target points are identified in correlation to the adjacent
cylindrical datum feature. Refer to Example 3-34.

Example 3-34. Two cylindrical features of different diameters used to establish a

datum axis.

Cylindrical datum target areas and circular datum target lines can also be used
to establish the datum axis of cylindrical shaped parts, as shown in Example 3-35.
In this application, the datum target area is a designated width band that goes all
around the part. This datum target area is shown as two phantom lines with section
lines between. The datum target line is a phantom line that goes all around the part.

r-
</)32 I
I- </)45

L
80
7;
81

Example 3-35. Establishing datum axes with a cylindrical datum target area and a
circular datum target line.
 ■

~rs1on 108 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A secondary datum axis can be established by placing three equally spaced

targets on the cylindrical surface. Refer to Example 3-36.

L 1 ~--_-_
- -~-
-
0 45

L ¥- ------
'--+-+-----

Example 3-36. Establishing a secondary datum axis with datum target points.

Movable Datum Target Symbols

and Datum Target Points
The movable datum target symbol can be used to indicate movement of the
datum feature simulator. When datum targets establish a center point, axis, or
center plane on a regardless of material boundary basis, the datum feature simulator
moves normal to the true profile and the movable datum target symbol can be used
for clarity. The term normal is used in ASME Yl4.5 and in mechanical engineering
applications to represent a feature that is perpendicular to a plane surface and radial
to a curved surface. Movable datum targets are datum targets that are not fixed at
their basic location, are free to translate, and can apply to a point, line, or area. In
Example 3-37, datum C uses movable target symbols. The part is fixed against datum
target points Al, A2, and A3 primary, datum target lines Bl and B2 secondary, and
datum target points Cl and C2 tertiary. Because datums B and C are referenced in
the feature control frame as RMB, the datum simulator makes contact with the part.
If the actual part is manufactured to the small size tolerance, then datum target
points Cl and C2 are movable in order to contact the feature part. In this case, the
movable target points move along the basic 45° angle that is attached to the movable
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 109

datum target symbol Cl until contact is made. This example shows how to define the
direction of the movement. When the datum feature simulator is required to move
and when the movement is not normal to the true profile, the movable datum target
symbol is used and the movement direction is defined. If the 45° basic angle is not
given, the datum target can move "normal" to the surface or radial toward the center
of the round feature.

81 @ 4 X <,t)5.2-5.3

tiifp~ z
_L _Li Ill

Example 3-37. Using movable datum target symbols with datum target points.

Movable Datum Target Symbols

and Datum Target Spheres
The movable datum target symbol can be used with a spherical diameter
specified for the datum target size, and a circular phantom line is used to represent
the spherical datum feature simulator as shown in Example 3-38. The spherical
datum feature simulators are used to establish the datum axis in this example. The
conical shaped ends on the part allow the spherical datum feature simulators to
restrict the movement of the part and define the datum axis. In this example, the
spherical datum targets move horizontally normal to the axis to contact the actual
surface of the part, with datum A specified at RMB in the feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on 110 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

0 0 .2 A

The Drawing

Datum plane

Part

'

Datum axis

Datum feature simulator

The Meaning

Example 3-38. The movable datum target symbol can be used with a spherical
diameter specified for the datum target size, and a circular phantom line is used
to represent the spherical d atum feature simulator.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 111

Datum Center Plane

Elements on a rectangular, symmetrical part or feature can be located and
dimensioned in relationship to a datum center plane. Axis and center plane datum
feature symbols must align with or replace the dimension line arrowhead or be placed on
the feature, leader shoulder, dimension line, or feature control frame. The representation
and related meaning of datum center plane symbols are shown in Example 3-39.

Datum Datum

--t
center plane center plane

Datum
center plane
_l
28

Datum
center plane
J
_j
~
t
8
~

Example 3-39. Placement of center plane datum feature symbols.

 ■

~rs1on 112 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Be sure you notice the difference between the datum feature symbol associated
with the datum axis discussed earlier and the datum center plane. The drawings
look similar. The datum axis is on a cylindrical feature such as an external shaft or
an internal hole. Look carefully at the drawing views and notice that the cylindrical
datum feature is dimensioned with a diameter (refer to Example 3-29). The datum
center plane is the plane that splits a symmetrical feature such as a slot or tab. The
dimension associated with the center plane datum does not have a diameter symbol
because the feature is not round. The datum feature symbol is placed in one of the
following ways.
• The symbol is centered on the opposite side of the dimension line arrowhead.
• The symbol replaces the dimension line and arrowhead when the dimension
line is placed outside of the extension lines.
• The symbol is placed on a leader shoulder.
• The symbol is placed below and attached to the center of a feature control
frame.

Simulated Datum Center Plane

The simulated datum center plane is the center plane of a perfect rectangular
inspection device that contacts the datum feature surface. For an external datum
feature, the datum center plane is established by two parallel planes at minimum
separation, as shown in Example 3-40. For an internal datum feature, the datum
center plane is established by two parallel planes at maximum separation, as shown
in Example 3-41. This application is valid only when datum features are specified at
RMB. RMB is described in Chapter 4.

Datum feature simulator

of datum fea ture A
Parallel p lanes at minimum
Datum
fe,ru~A _J separation (RMB)

[_=-;-=-
r t
Datum center
_] Datum feature simulator
plane A
Example 3-40. Simulated datum center plane for an external datum feature only
when a datum feature is specified at RMB.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 113

pl•di
Datum center

I
/ Part

- ~
I

Datum feature simulator

of datum feature A
T
r '
- - - ---:::.
Datum feature
A

I
Parallel planes at maximum
separation (RMB)
Datum feature simulator

Example 3-41. Simulated datum center plane for an internal datum feature.

The Center of a Pattern of Features

as the Datum Axis
The center of a pattern of features, such as the holes in the part shown in
Example 3-42, can be specified as the datum axis when the datum feature symbol
is placed under and attached to the middle of the feature control frame. In this
application, the datum axis is the center of the holes as a group. This will be
discussed further in Chapter 7 in regard to location tolerances.

6X 0 88 .4
.0
6 X 6 0" -$- 0 0 .05@ A

Datum
axis B

\_ Datum axis B

Example 3-42. The datum axis at the center of a pattern of features as a group.
 ■

~rs1on 114 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Applying a Translation Modifier

to a Datum Reference
The translation modifier is added to the feature control frame following the
datum feature reference and any other applicable modifiers. The translation modifier
is used to specify that the basic location of the datum feature simulator is unlocked
and free to translate within the specified geometric tolerance. Example 3-43 shows
the translation modifier used in an application and the resulting datum reference
frame.

Tran slation
modifier

Translation
modifier

The Drawing

Example 3-43. Establishing a datum reference frame with a translation

modifier. (Continued)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 115

Secondary datum
feature B

0
0
Primary datum
feature A 0
Tertiary datum
feature C

Datum feature simulator

of datum feature B
Expanding cylinder
perpendicular to datum
plane A

~ ofDatum
,,,.,,,.
feature simulator
datum feature A

Datum feature simulator of datum feature C

Expanding cylinder perpendicular to datum plane A
Location distance adjustable from datum axis B

/ /

/ / //,,,
,,,,,, ,,,,,, / /
/
/ ~ Datum plane A
/

/
/

Datum axis C

The Meaning

Example 3-43. (Con tin ued)

 ■

~rs1on 116 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Using a Contoured Surface as a Datum Feature

Some applications require a compound or contoured surface to be identified
as a datum feature. The feature on the part containing the compound surface is
defined by a three-dimensional mathematical coordinate system. In this application,
the datum feature datum simulator results from the mathematical data and is used
to establish the datum reference frame. Aligning the high points of the datum
feature with its datum feature simulator restricts movement of the part to the datum
reference frame. Example 3-44 shows the use of a contoured surface as a datum
feature and the three-dimensional mathematical coordinate system. The phantom
oval line is used to define the limit of the datum target area and the hatched area
defines datum target area Al. The word TRUE is added before the dimension when
the feature displayed on a 2D view is shown foreshortened. In this example, the holes
are shown as ellipses and the note TRUE is added before the 06.O/6.l dimension
value, as in TRUE 06.0/6.1. The 10 mm basic dimension also has the note TRUE
before it to clarify that it is the width of the datum target area, because it does not
show true width in the displayed view.
The note [BSC] placed in the feature control frames means that datum target
area Al is defined by the 3D CADD model as basic. See note 1 in the example
referring to the model for complete product definition. In addition, there are basic
dimensions from the origin of the mathematically defined data to locate the hole
centers with the x, y, and z axis directions and coordinates. This is an example of
using a mathematically defined feature or a contoured surface as a datum feature.
A practical application is when a part is designed to copy the contours of an
actual object that has few or no flat surfaces to use as datums. In this approach,
a CADD model that defines the basic shape of the plate is used and the engineer
applies a profile tolerance on the shape of the plate to control its size. The bottom
surface is datum target area A, and the CADD model defines the basic location of the
holes in the plate. A position tolerance relative to datum target area A on the holes is
used to control the hole locations. This application has many uses for parts that are
not square. Chapter 7 explains location tolerances.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 117

A"-
~l
-+----'=;= I
z
I
B

Basic

SECTION A- A

NOTES:
1. THIS DRAWING SHALL BE USED WITH MODEL MDl-100 1
FOR COMPLETE PRODUCT DEFINITION.
2. THIS DRAWING MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME Yl 4.41 .

The Drawing

~~~~;!tically

¥-~=L
defined data

8X 05.85 (6.0-.15) MMB ~ O ~ y

Datum fea ture simulator
of datum feature B
, : /0-::-
[I]

I
Z

%/
~ :::::---..__
-----------(ii)

Datum feature simulator of

datum feature A fixed at basic
I
I
I
I
\ \
-+ ----)-Jr
I

· "- %' - ~ I
'

/ / /
.,, 0 / / I
~ \

Datum feature A must remain

in contact w ith the simulated ~ ~
datum fea ture
A
SECTIO N A- A
The Meaning

Example 3-44. Establishing a contoured surface and a mathematically defined feature

as a datum feature.
~ _1_1B_ _G_e_o_me_tr_ic_D
_ i,_ne_n_s_io_n_i~
ng~ a_
nd_ Ti_ol_e_ra_n_c_in-g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Name _ __ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ __

1. Define datum. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Define datum feature. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3. Describe datum feature simulators. Include the term "simulated datums" in your
description and give at least three examples of datum feature simulators used in
manufacturing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Identify at least five locations where a feature control frame can be placed on a
drawing.
1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

5. Define datum plane. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 119

6. Describe the method used for datum feature identification. Indicate which letters
cannot be used for datum identification and explain why they cannot be used. _

7. List at least five item s that can be considered as datum features on an object
or part.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8. Identify the dat um featu re, the part, the simulated datum plane, the physical
datum feature simulator, and the datum plane on the following illustration.

B) _ _ __

A) _ _ __
C) _ _ __

D) _ _ _ _ _ __ E) _ _ _ _ _ __

9. There are two types of datum feature simulators. Name and describe each type.

10. Name at least four items that can be used as a datum feature simulator.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

11. Identify at least three required conditions for datum feature simulators.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

12. Define simulated datum. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

13. Define actual mating envelope. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

14. Define tangent plane. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

15. Given the following drawing and related meaning, fill in the blanks at Part I A
and B and at Part II A, B, C, and D. Provide the actual dimensions as related to
the drawing at Part II B, C, and D.

A) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Part I

~ Cl - - - -
Bl - - - -

A) - - - ~D::::J)l====-=cs..2=sz,;1:::: - ~ - - - - ~

Part II
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 121

16. Name the three datums of a complete datum reference frame. _ _ _ _ _ __

17. When referring to the datum reference frame in the feature control frame, the
_ _ _ _ _ datum is given first followed by the _ _ _ __ and _ _ __ _
datums. This is known as the datum _ _ _ __
18. Define degrees of freedom. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

19. Identify how many degrees of freedom are found on every part, and identify
how many are translational and how many are rotational. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

20. Define translational. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

21. Define rotational. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

22. Define datum targets. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

23. The prim ary datum plane must be established by at least ___ point(s) on the
primary datum surface.
24. The secondary datum plane must be established by at least ___ point(s) on
the secondary datum surface.
25. The tertiary datum plane must be established by at least _ __ point(s) on the
tertiary datu m surface.
26. How is a datum target area represented on a drawing? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

27. The circular datum target area is d imensioned with _ _ _ _ _ dimensions

or _ _ _ _ _ dimensions to locate the from datums and the
diameter of the area is provided in the half of the datum target
symbol.
122 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

28. How are datum target areas treated on a drawing when the target area is too
small to draw? ___________________________

29. Describe how to properly display the symbols for a circular datum target area,
a square datum target area, a rectangular datum target area, and a spherical
datum target area. _________________________

30. What does a movable datum target symbol indicate? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

31. How are datum target lines represented on a drawing? __________

32. When a portion of a surface is used to establish a single datum, this is referred to
as a(n) _ _ _ _ _ datum surface.
33. Two or more surfaces that are on the same plane are referred to as _ _ _ __
surfaces.
34. Depending on the functional requirements of a part, more than one datum
reference frame can be established. This is referred to as a(n) _ _ _ __
datum reference frame.
35. Describe the basic function of the continuous feature symbol. ________
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 123

36. List at least five ways the datum feature symbol can be placed on the drawing
when the datum is an axis.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
37. Label the elements A, B, C, and D below that represent the fixture setup for a datum
axis. This setup is for a datum feature at regardless of material boundary (RMB).

A) - - - - - - - - -

Bl - - - - - - -

Cl - - - - -
~D) - - - - - - -

38. A primary datum axis can be established by two sets of three equally spaced
target points. True or False?
39. Cylindrical datum target areas and circular datum target lines can be used to
establish the datum axis of cylindrical sh aped parts. True or False?
40. List at least three ways to place the datum feature symbol on the drawing for a
datum center plane.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
41. Explain the basic function of the translation modifier. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
124 Geometric o·imenswning
. and Toi .
42. Identif th . erancmg
y e items in the d rawmgb
. e1ow labeled A th roughF
A) .

B)

C)

F)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 125

43. Identify the items in the drawing below labeled A through C.

A) - - - - - --

(/'.) 18

B) - - - - - - -
C) - - - - - --
 ~ 1
_2_6__G_eo_n_1e_tr_ic_D
_i_m_en_s_io_m~
·ng~ a_n_d_Ti_ol_er_a_nc_in-g_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

44. For the drawings below, identify on the blank lines (A through G) whether the
datum feature symbols represent a datum surface, datum axis, or datum center
plane.

Al - - - - - - -

Bl - - - - - - -

_j
+-
,---
- =+
---, 0 12

~
C) - - - - - -
Dl - - - - - - - El - - - - - - -

.
~ /

Fl - - - - - - -

Gl - - - - - - -
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 127

45. Label the elements A, B, C, D, and E below that represent the fixture setup for a
datum center plane. This setup is for a datum feature at regardless of material
boundary (RMB).

A) _ _ _ _ _ __ C) - - - - - - - -

D) - - - - -

_J
[ __ _ ___ ]
 .
~rs1on 128 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

◄
Print Reading Exercises
Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to the rint of the SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING found on age 433.

1. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3. Give the location dimension of the 0.107±.001 hole from Datum A. _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the BRACKET found on page 434.

4. Identify the datums that make up the primary datum reference frame. _ _ __

5. Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6. Identify the primary, secondary, and tertiary datum references associated with
the positional geometric tolerance placed with the 0.875±.005 dimension:
Primary _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Secondary _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Tertiary _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7. Give the location dimensions to the three 0.437±.005 holes from Datum C.

8. Give the location dimensions to the three 0.437±.005 holes from Datum B.

9. Give the location dimensions to the four 0.187±.003 holes from Datum A.

10. Give the location dimensions to the four 0.187±.003 holes from Datum C.

11. Are the location dimensions in question 7 placed using baseline or chain
dimensioning?
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 129

Refer to the print of the HUB-STATIONARY ATU found on page 435.

12. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

13. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

14. Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

15. Give the dimension from Datum A to the left face of the part. _ _ _ _ _ __
16. Give the horizontal and vertical location dimensions from Datum C to the six
0.352+.005/ -.001 holes. _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the PEDAL-ACCELERATOR found on page 436.

17. How many points of contact are used to establish the following datums?
Datum A ___ , Datum B ___ , Datum C ___ .
18. Identify the following items for each of the datum target areas: the datum
reference, specified number on the datum, and the area size and shape. _ _ __

19. What is the distance between datum target points B-1 and B-2? _ _ _ _ _ __
20. What does the box around the 74.00 dimension mean? _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _

21. Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

22. Give the location dimensions between the datum target areas Al and A2.

23. Give the location dimensions between the datum target area Al and datum
target point A3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
24. Give the location dimensions between the datum target points A3 and Cl.
 .
~rs1on 130 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

25. Give the location dimensions between the datum target points Bl, B2, and Cl.

Refer to the print of the DOUBLE V-BLOCK found on page 440.

26. Identify the datum reference frame. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
27. Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

28. Give the dimension from Datum C to the bottom of the 1.60 wide slot.

29. Give the location dimension to the 012.70/12.65 feature from Datum B.

30. Give the location dimension to the 012.70/12.65 feature from Datum C.

Refer to the print of the BRACKET ASSY-EL GIMBAL found on page 445.
31. Give the location dimension from Datum D to the three 0.109+.004/- .001
COUNTERSINK 0.172X100° features. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
32. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

33. Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

34. What is the wall thickness of the material? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

35. Give the vertical location dimension from Datum B to the three .086-56UNC-2B
features. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to tne print of tne FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD ouna on page 446.
36. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

37. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

38. Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 3 Datums 131

39. What is the relationship between Datums A, B, and C? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL BEVEL CUTTER found on page 447.
40. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

41. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on J>age 448.

42. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

43. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

44. Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of tlie SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
45. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

46. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

47. Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

48. Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

49. Describe Datum E. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

50. Describe the use of the note 2X INDIVIDUALLY placed below the feat ure control
frame for the 0.193+.005/-.000 feature. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on 132 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE found on page 450.
51. Describe Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

52. Describe Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ ~ i_ll " 1
Material Condition and
Material Boundary

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Explain the purpose of material condition symbols.
0 Explain the purpose of material boundary symbols.
0 Use material condition and material boundary symbols on drawings.
0 Interpret drawing applications specifying regardless of feature size (RFS) and
regardless of material boundary (RMB).
0 Differentiate between maximum material condition (MMC) and least material
condition (LMC).
0 Explain methods for specifying surface geometric control and axis geometric control.
0 Apply or interpret surface geometric controls and axis geometric controls.
0 Determine geometric tolerances for produced sizes at RFS, MMC, and LMC.
0 lnterpret design requirements established by datum precedence and material condition.

Technical Terms
Actual produced size Least material condition {LMC)
Attitude variation Limits of size
Axis geometric control Material boundary symbols
Conventional tolerancing Material condition symbols
Datum feature simulator Maximum boundary condition
Datum precedence Maximum material boundary (MMB)
Extreme form variation Maximum material condition(MMC)
Feature Perfect form boundary
Feature of size Regardless of feature size (RFS)
Feature without size Regardless of material boundary (RMB)
Irregular feature of size Regular feature of size
Least material boundary {LMB) Surface geometric control

Material condition and material boundary symbols are used in conjunction with the
geometric tolerance or datum reference in the feature control frame. Material condition
symbols and material boundary symbols establish the relationship between the size of
the feature within its given dimensional tolerance and the geometric tolerance. The use of
different material condition symbols alters the effect of this relationship. Material condition
symbols are referred to as "modifiers" because they modify the geometric tolerance in
relationship to the actual produced size of the feature. The actual produced size is the
measured size after production. The material condition modifying elements are:
• Maximum material condition, abbreviated MMC.
• Maximum material boundary, abbreviated MMB.
• Regardless of feature size, abbreviated RFS.
133
 ■

~rs1on 134 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

• Regardless of material boundary, abbreviated RMB.

• Least material condition, abbreviated LMC.
• Least material boundary, abbreviated LMB.
The material condition and material boundary symbols are detailed in Example 4-1.
Notice in Example 4-1 that there is no symbol for Regardless of feature size (RFS)
or Regardless of material boundary (RMB). RFS is assumed for all geometric tolerance
applications and RMB is assumed for datum references unless otherwise specified.
The MMC or LMC symbols must be in the feature control frame if these applications
are intended. The material condition and material boundary symbols, when used, are
placed after the geometric tolerance or datum reference, as shown in Example 4-2.

Symbol Meaning
@ At maximum material condition (MMC)
when applied to a tolerance value. At
maximum material boundary (MMB) when
applied to a datum reference.
At least material condition (LMC) when
applied to a tolerance value. At least
material boundary (LMB) when applied
to a datum reference.

1L~
I ~
H = Letter height
Example 4-1. Material condition and material boundary symbols.

The material condition symbol The boundary condition symbol

MMC or LMC is placed after MMB or LMB is placed after
the geometric tolerance, the datum reference if the
otherwise RFS is assumed datum fea lure has size,
¢6±0.5 otherwise RMB is assumed
Example related _ / _Lb.. rA O "M'
dimension __·_1~~~~~~~__,
....-v~~YJ

RFS is assumed when the RMB is assumed if the datum

place behind the geometric feature has size and when the
tolerance has no material
place behind the datum
condition symbol specified reference has no boundary

A 6±0.5 condition symbol specified

Exa mple related _Lb..
- -rA - ~ "----+---+----<
d1mens10n '--'V-'--.._YJ 0 . -'--'---'---'
'--_ 1
Example 4-2. The material condition symbols MMC and LMC, when used, are
placed a fter the geometric tolerance in the feature control frame. If no material
condition symbol is used, RFS is assumed. The m a terial boundary symbols MMB
and LMB, when used, are placed after the datum reference in the feature control
frame. As discussed later in this chapter, this is referred to as "Rule 2" in ASME
Y14.5. The MMB and LMB symbols are only used if the datum feature has size. If no
material boundary symbol is used, RMB is assumed.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 135

The MMB and LMB symbols are only used if the datum feature has size. RMB is
implied if the datum feature has size and no boundary symbol is used. No material
boundary can be used if a feature does not have size. Features of size and features
without size are described and demonstrated in the following.

Features of Size
A feature is a physical portion of a part such as a surface, pin, hole, or slot. A
feature can be represented on a drawing, a model, or a digital data file.
A feature of size is one cylindrical or spherical surface, a circular element, or
a set of two opposed elements or opposed parallel plane surfaces, each of which is
associated with a size dimension as shown in Example 4-3. A feature without size
is a feature that cannot be associated with a size dimension. Any single, flat surface
is a feature without size as shown by the shaded color surfaces in Example 4-4A. In
Example 4-4B, Datum Features C, D, and Fare associated with the surfaces, and the
surfaces are not features of size. Therefore, no material boundary condition can be
used in the feature control frame for the datum references. Datum Features A, B, and
E are associated with a size dimension; therefore, the datum feature is a feature of
size, and a material boundary modifier is used in the feature control frame for these
datum references. RMB is implied when no material condition boundary is used.
Use of the @ symbol represents MMB in this application. Use of the (D symbol
represents LMB in this application.
There are two types of features of size: regular and irregular. A regular feature
of size is one cylindrical or spherical surface as shown in Example 4-3A, a circular
element as shown in Example 4-3B, or two parallel opposed elements or opposed

~ S¢13±01

□ R4±02

1A71 _Fl_
LYJJ:1 t=f
~ 30± 1_j
C
-J 15 ± 1 ~
Example 4-3. A regular feature of size is associated with a directly toleranced
dimension. A-This regular feature of size is one cylindrical or spherical surface.
B-This regular feature of size is a circular element. C-This regular feature of size is
two parallel opposed elements or opposed parallel surfaces.
 ■

~rs1on 136 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

B
Example 4--4. A-Any single flat surface is a feature without size as demonstrated by
the shaded color surfaces in this example. B-A drawing representing datum features
associated to surfaces that are not features of size, and no material boundary condition
can be used in the feature control frame for the datum references. Also shown are datum
features associated with a size dimension, where the datum feature is a feature of size and a
material boundary modifier is used in the feature control frame for these datum references.

parallel surfaces as shown in Example 4-3C, each of which is associated with a

directly toleranced dimension. An irregular feature of size is either a directly
toleranced feature or a collection of features that may contain, or be contained by, an
actual mating envelope. The mating envelope is a sphere, cylinder, or pair of parallel
planes, or a directly toleranced feature or collection of features.
In Example 4-5A, Datum Feature A is an irregular feature of size that is directly
toleranced with profile. This example is an actual mating envelope that is two
parallel planes. Datum Feature C is a regular feature of size. In Example 4-5B, Datum
Feature A is an irregular feature of size in each drawing. In Example 4-5C, the odd-
shaped cutout in the center of the part is an irregular feature of size.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 137

4X ¢6±0.1
1~1¢o.4@IAIB@lc@I
A

Distance Outside Pins Distance Inside Pins

Circumscribed Cylinder Inscribed Cylinder

B

2X §IQ)

C
Example 4-5. A- Datum Feature A is an irregular feature of size that is directly toleranced
with profile. This example is an actual mating envelope that is two parallel planes. Datum
Feature C is a regular feature of size. B---Datum Feature A is an irregular feature of size in each
drawing. C-The odd~haped cutout in the center of the part is an irregular feature of size.
 ■

~rs1on 138 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Conventional Tolerance
Use of the term conventional tolerancing in this text refers to tolerances related
to dimensioning practices w ithout regard to geometric tolerancing. The limits of a
size dimension determine the given variation allowed in the size of the feature. The
part shown in Example 4-6 has a maximum material condition of 6.5 and a least
material condition of 5.5. The MMC and LMC produced sizes represent the limits
of the dimension. The actual part can be manufactured at any size between the
limits. Some possible produced sizes in 0.1 mm increments are shown in the chart in
Example 4-6.

Possible
Produced
Sizes
6.5 - MMC
6.4
6.3
6.2
6.1
6.0
t ---3 \2)6 ± 0 .5

5.9
5.8
5.7
5.6
5.5 -LMC
Example 4-6. A conventional tolerance given w ithout regard to geometric tolerancing.

Limits of Size
Conventional tolerancing, w ithout the addition of geometric tolerancing, p ermits
a degree of variation in form, profile, or location because of the tolerance. The degree
of form or location control can be increased or decreased by altering the tolerance. The
amount of form control implied in a conventional tolerance is determined by the actual
size of the feature or part that must be within the given tolerance at any cross section.
The limits of size of a feature controls the amount of variation in size and
geometric form. This is referred to as "Rule 1" in ASME Y14.5. The limits of size is the
boundary between maximum material condition (MMC) and least material condition
(LMC). The form of the feature can vary between the upper limit and lower limit of
a size dimension. This is known as the extreme form v ariation. The limits of size
and representative extreme form variation of the part shown in Example 4-6 and a
mating collar are shown in Example 4-7.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 139

</)7 .8
6 .8

The Drawing

l _ _ _ _ __, _l_
05.5

I
t - -3 06.5

I
l--- = =-- ------==
e,55

'
E-----3
---- 7
__L

06.5

The Meaning
Example 4-7. The limits of size and representative extreme form variation of the part.

The form of an individual feature is controlled by its size limits in the following ways:
• The surface of a feature may not extend beyond the MMC boundary. Refer to
the following section titled Perfect Form Boundary.
• When the actual size of a feature departs from MMC, a variation in form is
allowed equal to the difference from MMC.
• If a feature is produced at LMC, the geometric form can vary between the
LMC and MMC boundaries.
 ■

~rs1on 140 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perfect Form Boundary

The form of a feature is controlled by the size tolerance limits, as shown in Example 4-8.
The boundary of these limits is established at MMC. The perfect form boundary is the
true geometric form of the feature at MMC. Therefore, if the part is produced at MMC, it
must be at perfect form. If a feature is produced at LMC, the form tolerance is allowed to
vary within the geometric tolerance wne to the extent of the MMC boundary.
In some applications, it is desirable to exceed the perfect form boundary a t MMC.
When this is done, the independency symbol must accompany the size dimension.
The independen cy symbol is u sed to specify that perfect form at MMC is not
required. See Example 4-9.

J__ _ _ _ _~ _J_
E
p::~t
i-
- -=+-r MMC

l--1------ 2 -
LN\C ~ l;;:===::::=:-=--=-::::::::d°=:::::;:;
:;
l MMC
-;j_ .::_____i_
\ Geometric
tolerance zone
J f
Geometric tolerance

- 0 .2

06±0.5

The Drawing

0~{=----
1
The Meaning
Example 4-8. Perfect form boundary.

£
~10 .2h
~ ~ ---~l- r Independency

----
-+ _0_6±~0 .5(D
symbol

Example 4-9. Using the independency symbol to indicate that perfect form of a
feature of size is not required at MMC.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 141

Perfect form can also be violated when the straightness of a cylindrical object is
specified in relation to the axis. This is discussed later in this chapter. This is where
the feature control frame is displayed with the diameter dimension and a diameter
symbol precedes the geometric tolerance.

Regardless of Feature Size (RFS) and Regardless

of Material Boundary (RMB)
Regardless offeature size (RFS) is the term used to indicate that a geometric
tolerance applies at any increment of size of the feature within its size tolerance.
Regardless of material boundary (RMB) is the term used to indicate that a datum
is established from a datum feature simulator that progresses from the maximum
material boundary (MMB) toward the least material boundary (LMB) until it makes
maximum contact with the farthest points of the feature.
The following rules govern the use of RFS and RMB:
• "Rule 2" in ASME Y14.5 states that RFS applies with respect to the individual
geometric tolerance, and RMB to the datum reference, when no material
condition or boundary condition symbol is specified. Refer to Example 4-2
for reference. MMC, LMC, MMB, and LMB must be specified in the feature
control frame where required.
• The geometric tolerances of circularity, cylindricity, profile, circular runout,
total runout, concentricity, and symmetry are applied only on an RFS basis.
An MMC or LMC material condition symbol cannot be used with these
geometric characteristics.
• The geometric tolerance specified using RFS is held at any produced size
within the specified dimensional tolerance.
• A datum reference specified with RMB means that the feature is centered
about the axis or center plane regardless of the feature size.
As you learn to apply RFS and RMB to different drawing presentations
throughout the rest of this textbook, keep these ideas in mind:
• RFS is assumed for all geometric tolerances and RMB for all datum
references unless otherwise specified to be MMC, LMC, MMB, or LMB.
• Regardless of feature size, as the name implies, means that the stated geometric
tolerance is applied the same at any produced size-regardless offeature size.

Surface Control, Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)

Surface geometric control is when the feature control frame is either connected
with a leader to the surface of the object or feature, or extended from an extension
line from the surface of the object or feature, and a diameter symbol is not placed in
the feature control frame. The use of a leader connecting the feature control frame to
the surface is shown in Example 4-10.
 ■

~rs1on 142 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

t ---=+ 06 ± 0 .5

Example 4-10. Surface control showing straightness. The feature control frame is
connected to the surface of the feature with a leader.

RFS is implied in the drawing in Example 4-10 because neither MMC nor
LMC is specified in the feature control frame. Also, a surface control requires an
RFS application because it is not associated with a size dimension. Only a control
related to a size dimension or feature of size can have an MMC or LMC application.
The surface straightness specification, as shown in Example 4-10, means that "each
longitudinal element" of the surface must lie between two parallel lines 0.2 mm
apart, where the two lines and the nominal axis of the part share a common plane.
The concept of each longitudinal element is based on the function of the part and
the comfort level of inspection because there is no required number of elements.
Also, the feature must be within the specified size limits and within the perfect form
boundary at MMC. When the actual size of the feature is MMC, then zero geometric
tolerance is required. When the actual produced size departs from MMC, then the
geometric tolerance is allowed to increase equal to the amount of departure until the
specified geometric tolerance is reached. When the geometric tolerance specified in
the feature control frame is reached, then the geometric tolerance stays the same at
every other produced size. Example 4-11 shows an analysis of regardless of feature
size (RFS) surface control based on the drawing presented in Example 4-10.

Axis Control, Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)

Axis geometric control is implemented by placing the feature control frame with
the diameter dimension of the related object or feature. A good way to remember
the difference between surface and axis control is to recognize that surface control is
when the feature control frame is connected to the surface by a leader or extension
line, while axis control places the feature control frame with the diameter dimension
that correlates with the axis. When axis control is used, a diameter tolerance zone
must be specified by placing the diameter symbol in front of the geometric tolerance
in the feature control frame, as shown in Example 4-12.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 143

Perfect form
atMMC
~-
E -----3 ~~~n~!':~
I

05.5 LMC
produced size\

:=%.\:;:;;;~-=-=--=~-
\
3

0.2 geometric
_1~_b_oun~dary
06.5MMC

tolerance zone

05.7 actual
part boundary

Possible Geometric
Produced Tolerances at Given
Sizes Produced Sizes
MMC- 6.5 0 - Perfect form
required at
6.4 0.1 MMC
6.3 0.2
6.2 0.2
6.1 0.2
6.0 0.2
5.9 0.2
5.8 0.2
5.7 0.2
5.6 0.2
LMC- 5.5 0.2

Example 4-11. The effect of specifying surface straightness. RFS is assumed and
perfect form is required at MMC.

E ---3 41 ¢ 6± 0 5
1- 100.21
Example 4-12. Axis control showing straightness. The feature control frame is placed
below the diameter size dimension.
 ■

~rs1on 144 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

When axis control is specified, the perfect form boundary can be violated. This
violation is permissible when the feature control frame is associated with the size
dimension. When MMC is not specified, then RFS is implied. When this situation
occurs, the geometric tolerance at various produced sizes remains the same as given
in the feature control frame; even at MMC. Example 4-13 shows an analysis of axis
control at regardless of feature size (RFS) based on the drawing in Example 4-12.

0Prod"~'"'L~ j
....i-- 00.2 tolerance zone

Possible Geometric
Produced Tolerances at Given
Sizes Produced Sizes
MMC ~ 6.5 0.2 ~ Perfect form not
required at
6.4 0.2
MMC
6.3 0.2
6.2 0.2
6.1 0.2
6.0 0.2
5.9 0.2
5.8 0.2
5.7 0.2
5.6 0.2
LMC ~ 5.5 0.2

Example 4-13. The effect of specifying axis straightness. RFS is assumed and perfect
form is not required at MMC.

Maximum Material Condition (MMC) @

Maximum material condition (MMC) is the condition where a feature contains
the maximum amount of material within the stated limits of size. For example,
maximum shaft diameter or minimum hole diameter are both MMC. When MMC
is used in the feature control frame, the given geometric tolerance is maintained
when the feature is produced at MMC. Then as the actual produced size departs
from MMC, the geometric tolerance is allowed to get larger equal to the amount
of departure from MMC. Think of using the MMC material condition symbol as
meaning "at MMC." In other words, the specified geometric tolerance is held only at
the MMC produced size. The MMC material condition application is commonly used
when controlling a feature of size.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 145

One of the following formulas can be used to calculate the geometric tolerance at
any produced size when a MMC material condition symbol is used. The formula you
should use is determined by whether the part is an external feature, such as a shaft,
or an internal feature, such as a hole.
External Feature:
MMC - Produced Size + Given Geometric Tolerance = Applied Geometric
Tolerance
Internal Feature:
Produced Size - MMC + Given Geometric Tolerance = Applied Geometric
Tolerance

Axis Control, Maximum Material Condition (MMC)

When it is desirable to use MMC as the material condition symbol, then the
MMC symbol must be placed in the feature control frame after the geometric
tolerance. This axis control is also a diameter tolerance zone and the diameter symbol
must precede the geometric tolerance, as shown in Example 4-14.
When a MMC material condition symbol is used, the geometric tolerance is the
same as specified in the feature control frame at the MMC produced size. Then, as
the produced size departs from MMC, the geometric tolerance is allowed to increase
equal to the amount of departure from MMC. For example, the geometric tolerance
at MMC in Example 4-14 is 0.2. If the part is produced at MMC (6.5), the geometric
tolerance is 0.2. If the part is produced at 6.1, the applied geometric tolerance is: MMC
(6.5) - PRODUCED SIZE (6.1) + GIVEN GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE (0.2) = APPLIED
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE (0.6). The maximum geometric tolerance is at the LMC
produced size. LMC is the condition where a feature of size contains the least amount
of material within the limits. The complete interpretation of the drawing shown in
Example 4-14 is given in Example 4-15.
The concepts of surface and axis straightness previously discussed can also
be applied on an RFS or MMC basis to noncylindrical features of size. However,
straightness controls line elements. Flatness should be used to control the surface or
center plane with a tolerance zone between two parallel planes. When this is done,
the derived center plane must lie in a geometric tolerance zone between two parallel
planes separated by the amount of the dimensional tolerance. Otherwise, the feature
control frame placement is the same as previously discussed. The diameter tolerance
zone symbol is not used in front of the geometric tolerance because the tolerance
zone is noncylindrical, established by two parallel planes as shown in Example 4-16.
This is discussed further in Chapter 5.

E- 1- 100.2@1
Example 4-14. Axis control showing straightness with the MMC material condition
symbol applied. The feature control frame is placed below the diameter size dimension.
 ■

~rs1on 146 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

1J
=-=-===--=-==-==-==-===1=
J
0 0.2 tolerance zone at MMC

-r-~
--c= --=-=---
- ----
,z;s:s '-.i"\C -==-
- -==-21
-=:; =iI
J
j__.--- 01.2 tolerance zone at LMC

Possible Geometric
Produced Tolerances at Given
Sizes Produced Sizes
MMC - 6.5 0.2
6.4 0.3
6.3 0.4
6.2 0.5
6.1 0.6
6.0 0.7
5.9 0.8
5.8 0.9
5.7 1.0
5.6 1.1
LMC- 5.5 1.2
Examp le 4-15. The effect of specifying axis straightness with the MMC material
condition symbol used.

0 0 .5 Geometric tolerance zone

_ [Two parallel planes
~-....,__-~ _l_

□ t
20
TE -3
The Drawing The Meaning
Surface Control
I Geometric
j
tolerance zone
Two parallel planes

□ .___I_1 1 -1=20
TE -73- Centerplane
The Drawing 101
or
0.sl The Meaning

1010.s@ I
Center Plane Control
Examp le 4-16. Surface and center plane controls for noncylindrical features.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 147

Least Material Condition (LMC) CD

Least material condition (LMC) is the condition where the feature of size
contains the least amount of material. For example, minimum shaft diameter or
maximum hole diameter are both conditions of LMC. LMC is the opposite of MMC.
When an LMC symbol is used in the feature control frame, the given geometric
tolerance is held at the LMC produced size. When the actual produced size departs
from LMC toward MMC, the geometric tolerance is allowed to increase equal to the
amount of departure. The maximum geometric tolerance is at the MMC produced
size. The formula for calculating the applied geometric tolerance in an LMC
application is based on the relationship to an external or internal feature as follows.
External Feature:
Produced Size - LMC + Given Geometric Tolerance= Applied Geometric
Tolerance
Internal Feature:
LMC - Produced Size + Given Geometric Tolerance = Applied Geometric
Tolerance
Example 4-17 shows an application of LMC in the feature control frame where
the axis perpendicularity of a hole must be within a 0.2 diameter geometric tolerance
zone, at LMC, to Datum A. When the feature size is at LMC (12.5), the geometric
tolerance is held as specified in the feature control frame. As the actual produced size
decreases toward MMC, the geometric tolerance increases equal to the amount of
change from LMC to the maximum change at MMC. The analysis in Example 4-17
shows the possible geometric tolerance variation from LMC to MMC. This
specification is often used to control the minimum wall thickness of the part.

Perfect Form Boundary, LMC

There is no requirement for the feature to maintain perfect form when produced
at its LMC limit of size when an LMC material condition symbol is specified. The
feature is permitted to vary from true form to the maximum variation allowed by the
perfect form boundary at MMC.
 ■

~rs1on 148 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

012 .5
12.0

The Drawing

~c..........~..,_,_~ - .
~ -- 012.5
1--.--,..-,---.,--r-r,--r.;I __L

Datum
plane A
The Meaning

Possible Geometric
Produced Tolerances at Given
Sizes Produced Sizes
MMC- 12.0 0.7
12.1 0.6
12.2 0.5
12.3 0.4
12.4 0.3
LMC- 12.5 0.2

Example 4-17. The effect of specifying axis perpendicularity with the LMC material
condition symbol used.

Comparison between LMC and MMC

When LMC is shown in the feature control frame, the specified geometric
tolerance is held at the LMC produced size and the geometric tolerance is allowed
to increase as the produced size moves toward MMC. This application increases the
amount of allowable attitude variation as the produced size moves toward MMC.
Attitude variation is the amount the axis of the hole inclines within the tolerance
zone. When MMC is shown in the feature control frame, the specified geometric
tolerance is held at the MMC produced size and the geometric tolerance is allowed
to increase as the produced size departs from MMC. This application increases the
amount of allowable attitude variation as the produced size moves toward LMC.
Example 4-18 shows a chart comparing the geometric tolerance variation between
the possible produced sizes with LMC and MMC used in the feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 149

0 12 .5
12 .0
I _l_ 10or0 . ifilIA)- option
LMC

I _Ll</JO.~MMC
option

The Drawing

90'

0 0.7

Datum Datum
plane A plane A
The LMC Option Meaning

~~,:.....,...J-J-~ - .
c...=~...- 0 12.5
-__L
0 0.2 j I 00.7J ~~7"777"7/1

Datum Datum_/
plane A plane A
The MMC Option Meaning

Possible Geometric Tolerances at

Produced Given Produced Sizes
Sizes
LMCOption MMC Option
MMC ~ 12.0 0.7 0.2
12.1 0.6 0.3
12.2 0.5 0.4
12.3 0.4 0.5
12.4 0.3 0.6
LMC~ 12.5 0.2 0.7

Example 4-18. This comparison chart displays the geometric tolerance variation between
the possible produced sizes with LMC and MMC used in the feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on 150 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Comparison of RFS, MMC, and LMC

The previous discussions explained how a drawing looks using surface and axis
control and how the use of RFS, MMC, and LMC specifications affect the geometric
tolerance at different produced sizes. These concepts are all brought together in
Example 4-19 in a very basic drawing of each application for surface and axis
control using RFS, MMC, and LMC as appropriate. This example shows you each
of the applications and how they differ. The chart compares geometric tolerances at
different produced sizes between MMC and LMC for the various applications.

- t -- - -=-t-1°~ 6 ± 0 5
-/} _,_I- !
\2)6 ± ~
Surface Control RFS 1- 100.2 1
Axis Control RFS

~I ~ -t-1- !
\2)6±~ \2)6 ± ~
1- 100.2@1 1- 100.2CD I
Axis Control MMC Axis Control LMC

Geometric Tolerances at Given Produced Sizes

Possible
Produced Surface Axis Axis Axis
Sizes Control Control Control Control
RFS RFS MMC LMC
MMC~ 6.5 0 0.2 0.2 1.2
6.4 0.1 0.2 0.3 1.1
6.3 0.2 0.2 0.4 1.0
6.2 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.9
6.1 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.8
6.0 0.2 0.2 0.7 0.7
5.9 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.6
5.8 0.2 0.2 0.9 0.5
5.7 0.2 0.2 1.0 0.4
5.6 0.2 0.2 1.1 0.3
LMC~ 5.5 0.2 0.2 1.2 0.2

Example 4-19. This example shows a very basic drawing of each application for
surface and axis control using RFS, MMC, and LMC as appropriate. The chart shows
a comparison of geometric tolerances at different produced sizes between MMC and
LMC for the various applications.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 151

Primary Datum Feature, RMB

Datum features, such as diameters and widths, that are influenced by size
variations are also subject to variations in form. RMB is implied in these cases unless
otherwise specified. When a datum feature has a size dimension and a geometric
form tolerance, the size of the simulated datum is the MMB size limit. This applies in
all cases except for axis straightness, where the boundary is allowed to exceed MMB.
When a datum feature of size is represented on an RMB basis, the datum
is established by contact between the datum feature surface and the surface of
processing equipment, such as a centering device. The processing equipment
establishes the datum axis or center plane because it simulates the datum feature.
When a datum axis is primary and applied at RMB, the simulated datum is
the axis of the processing equipment and is called the datum feature simulator.
The datum feature simulator for an external cylindrical feature is the smallest
circumscribed perfect cylinder that contacts the datum feature surface, as shown in
Example 4-20. Imagine this as placing a cylinder around the datum feature until the
cylinder closes in on, and touches, the high points of the datum feature.
The datum feature simulator for an internal cylindrical feature is the largest inscribed
perfect cylinder that contacts the datum feature surface, as shown in Example 4-21. Imagine
this as placing a cylinder inside the datum feature and increasing the size of the cylinder
until the cylinder touches the high points of the datum feature.

r Datum feature (part)

I
Simulated datum
Smallest circumscribed
cylinder
I

~ Datum feature simulator

Example 4-20. The datum feature simulator for an external feature is the smallest
circumscribed perfect cylinder that contacts the datum feature surface.
 ■

~rs1on 152 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum feature (part)

Simulated datum
Largest inscribed
cylinder

C7 Datum feature simulator

Example 4-21. The datum feature simulator for an internal feature is the largest
inscribed perfect cylinder that contacts the datum feature surface.

When a datum center plane is primary and applied at RMB, the simulated datum
is the center plane of the datum feature simulator. The datum feature simulator for an
external feature is two parallel planes that contact the datum feature surface at minimum
separation, as shown in Example 4-22. Imagine this as closing vise jaws down on the
datum surface until the jaws touch the high points of the datum feature.

Datum fea tur_es]imulator

_ P~t-~--'-- {-
•

Datum feature simulator

of datum feature A
Parallel planes at minimum
Datum separation (RMB)
feature A

plane A
Example 4-22. The datum feature simulator for an external feature is two parallel
planes at minimum separation that contact the datum feature surface.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 153

The datum feature simulator for an internal feature is two parallel planes at
maximum separation, as shown in Example 4-23. Imagine this as opening two
parallel plates until the plates touch the high points of the datum feature.

,,-Al_
Datum center Part

Datum feature simulator

T _
~
__
--
r ----~
Datum feature
A

of datum feature A
Parallel p lanes a t maximum
separation (RMB)
Datum feature simulator
Example 4-23. The datum feature simulator for an internal feature is two parallel
planes at maximum separation that contact the datum feature surface.

Secondary and Tertiary Datum Feature, RMB

The secondary datum for either an axis or center plane is established in the same
way as previously discussed for the primary datum axis or center plane with the
additional requirement:
• The contacting cylinder or parallel planes of the datum feature simulator
must be 90°, or another design angle, to the primary datum. The primary
datum is usually an adjacent plane. Refer to Example 4-24.
The tertiary datum for either an axis or center plane is established in the
same way as just discussed for the secondary datum axis or center plane with the
additional requirement:
• The contacting cylinder or parallel planes of the datum feature simulator
must be 90°, or another design angle, to both the primary and secondary
datums. The tertiary datum feature can be oriented with a datum axis, as
shown in Example 4-24, or offset from a plane of the datum reference frame.
 ■

~rs1on 154 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

¢1 2±0.2
I_LI¢~ 1@IAI

, 10±1.0
--1410. llAIBI
~ C

4X ¢ 8.5-- 8. 6
1410 o.2@IAIBlcl ! ! !
~---:I~::. . .I~:
. :. .1. .:~:
. ~ jl_
1

The Drawing
Datum feature simulator of
Part datum feature C
Parallel p lanes at maximum
separation perpendicular to
datum plane A
Center p lane aligned with
datum axis B

H
~
Datum feature simulator of datum feature B
Largest inscribed cylinder perpendicular
to datum plane A
I I r Part

~ r j:,---,--,
~ ---,---,-D
--r--
atum-+--,
: , "! A

90°
...._ The Meaning
Example 4-24. Secondary and tertiary datum features at RMB.

Datum Precedence and Material Condition

The effect of material condition on the datum and related feature can be altered
by changing the datum precedence and the applied material condition symbol. The
datum precedence is established by the order of datum identification placement
in the feature control frame. The first datum listed is the primary datum, and is
followed by the secondary and tertiary datums. Refer to Example 4-25.
Change in size and form is allowed by the size tolerance of the datum feature.
It is important to determine the datum precedence and material condition since these
changes alter the fit and design function of the part.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 155

The drawing in Example 4-25 shows a part with a pattern of holes loca ted in
relation to the surface Datum A and the axis Datum B. The datum requirements for
the position tolerance associated with the location of the four holes can be specified
in three different ways, as described next. The perpendicular tolerance is added to
this drawing to show that Datum Feature B can be out of perpendicular from Datum
Feature A. The maximum material boundary of the 018.0/17.6 feature is 18.l, where
MMB = MMC + related geometric tolerance (18 + 0.1 = 18.1).
The illustration in Example 4-26 shows the surface Datum A as primary and the axis
Datum Bas secondary. Datum Plane A is established first, followed by Datum Axis B.
Datum Axis Bis established by the datum feature simulator of Datum Feature B, which is
the smallest circumscribed cylinder perpendicular to Datum Plane A. Datum Feature B is
referenced at RMB in this example, so the perpendicularity tolerance is only used to show
that the post can be out of perpendicular.

Primary datum reference

Secondary datum reference
Example 4-25. A part with a pattern of holes located in relation to the surface Datum A
and the 018.0/17.6 axis Datum B. The perpendicular tolerance is added to this drawing
to show that Datum Feature B can be out of perpendicular from Datum Feature A.

\ Feature control frame

~~--~~~....
L~datum precedence RMB assumed
1@1AIBI
Primary datum feature A \

Simulated
datum plane A

Datum axis B ~ L - - + -- i

,-..- - - + - Secondary simulated datum B

Smallest circumscribed cylinder
perpendicular to datum plane A
Example 4-26. The surface Datum A is represented as primary and the axis Datum Bis
secondary. Datum Feature Bis referenced at RMB in this example, so the
perpendicularity tolerance is only used to show that the post can be out of perpendicular.
 ■

~rs1on 156 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The illustration in Example 4-27 shows the axis Datum B as primary and the surface
Datum A as secondary. Datum Axis B is established first followed by Datum Surface A.
Datum Axis B is established by the datum feature simulator of Datum Feature B, which
is the smallest circumscribed cylinder. Datum Plane A is perpendicular to Datum Axis B.
Datum Feature B is referenced at RMB in this example, so the perpendicularity tolerance
is only used to show that the post can be out of perpendicular.
The MMC material condition is commonly applied to a feature of size, such as a
hole or pin (as in Example 4-26), when it is identified as a datum feature. The illustration
in Example 4-28 shows the surface Datum A as primary and the axis Datum B as

~
Feature control frame
datum precedence RMB assumed
I~
~~I~
(/) -0 .~
~-----~~~
1@ ~ ~AI
~1_,_,
Secondary
datum fea lure A
I I I

Simulated datum plane A

Perpendicular to datum axis B

Primary datum axis B _ /~ - 1 - - ~

t-----+1- Primary simulated datum B
Smallest circumscribed cylinder
Example 4-27. The axis Datum Bis shown as primary and the surface Datum A is
secondary. Datum Feature Bis referenced at RMB in this example, so the
perpendicularity tolerance is only used to show that the post can be out of perpendicular.

Feature control frame

datum precedence

Primary datum
I I I II I feature A
I
\ _ Simulated
datum plane A

,___ ___,_ Simulated datum B

Maximum boundary condition•
Cylinder perpendicular to datum plane A
'Maximum boundary condition =
MMC + geometric tolerance
Example 4-28. The surface Datum A is represented as primary and the axis Datum Bis
secondary with an MMB material condition. The perpendicular tolerance does come into
play in this example, where Datum Feature Bis applied at MMB. The maximum material
boundary must be established in this example and it is calculated for the 018.0/ 17.6
feature as 18.1, where MMB =MMC + related geometric tolerance (18 + 0.1 = 18.1.)
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 157

secondary, with a MMB material condition applied to Datum B. Datum Plane A is

established first, followed by Datum Axis B. Datum Axis B is established by the datum
feature simulator of Datum Feature B, which is a cylinder equal in diameter to maximum
boundary condition and perpendicular to Datum Plane A. Maximum boundary
condition is the combined maximum material condition and geometric tolerance.
Maximum boundary condition is a boundary that takes into consideration the combined
effect of feature size at MMC and geometric tolerance. Maximum boundary condition
establishes a working zone that is used to determine gage member sizes and the MMC
size of mating parts or fasteners for mating parts. The maximum boundary condition
represents extreme conditions at MMC plus or minus the related geometric tolerance. For
an external feature, maximum boundary condition is equal to MMC plus the geometric
tolerance, as shown in Example 4-28. For an internal feature, maximum boundary
condition is equal to MMC minus the geometric tolerance.

Placing the MMB Value in the Feature Control Frame

An optional application is to place the material boundary condition value or
values in brackets in the feature control frame after the related material boundary
symbol. This can be done when the boundary is not clear, or another boundary is
desired. In this application, the boundary value is enclosed in brackets following the
applicable datum feature reference and any modifier in the feature control frame.
The term [BASIC] or [BSC] can be used to specify that the datum feature simulator is
positioned at the basic location of the datum feature. See Example 4-32.

MMB and LMB Defined

MMB is determined by the MMC condition of the datum feature of size or the
collective effects of MMC and any applicable geometric tolerances. A datum feature
can have several MMB (as shown in the calculations on the previous page). When
determining the MMB, datum feature precedence must be respected.
MMB establishes the appropriate boundary for the datum feature simulator.
Gages and processing equipment may remain at a constant size to simulate a
datum feature and to establish the datum feature simulator. The size of the datum
feature simulator must include an analysis of geometric tolerances applied to a
datum feature. The appropriate MMB for determining the size of the datum feature
simulator varies for an internal or external datum feature of size:
• Internal datum feature of size-The largest MMB that the datum feature
contains while ensuring datum feature precedence.
• External datum feature of size-The smallest MMB that the datum feature
contains while ensuring datum feature precedence.
Additional discussion and examples are provided in the section titled Material
Boundary Calculation Examples.
 ■

~rs1on 158 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

MMB can be clarified by stating the boundary value, enclosed in brackets,

following the applicable datum feature reference and any modifier in the feature
control frame. This method is used to clarify the boundary or if a different boundary
is desired. See Example 4-29.

l-$- l 00.4@I A I8@[0 12.5] I0@[09 .2] I

A
l-$- l 0O.2(D I A IB(0[011 .9] Ic(D[0s.7] I
B
l-$- I00.2 I A IBID[ BASIC] I
C
Example 4-29. Placing the MMB value in brackets in the feature control frame.
A-MMB can be clarified by stating the boundary value, enclosed in brackets, following
the applicable datum feature reference and any modifier in the feature control
frame. B---LMB can be clarified by stating the boundary value, enclosed in brackets,
following the applicable datum feature reference and any modifier in the feature
control frame.C-The term (BASIC] or [SSC] can be used to specify that the datum
feature simulator is positioned at the basic location of the datum feature.

LMB is determined by the LMC condition of the datum feature of size or the
collective effects of LMC and any applicable geometric tolerances. A datum feature
can have several LMB. When determining the LMB, datum feature precedence must
be respected.
LMB establishes the appropriate boundary for the datum feature simulator. The
size of the datum feature simulator must include an analysis of geometric tolerances
applied to a datum feature. The appropriate LMB varies for the internal and external
datum feature of size:
• Internal datum feature of size-The smallest LMB that contains the feature
while ensuring datum feature precedence.
• External datum feature of size-The largest LMB that contains the feature
while ensuring datum feature precedence.
Additional discussion and examples are provided in the section titled Material
Boundary Calculation Examples.
LMB can be clarified by stating the boundary value, enclosed in brackets,
following the applicable datum feature reference and any modifier in the feature
control frame. This method is used to clarify the boundary or if a different boundary
is desired as shown in Example 4-32B.

Material Condition Analysis and Applications

An analysis of material condition applications on a drawing is shown in
Example 4-30. The labels A and B identify locations where material condition
symbols are commonly placed in feature control frames. The different material
condition options and their applications are provided in the descriptions for labels
A and B following the drawing.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 159

2X !2)4 ±0.2 A

A Since Datum Dis a feature of size, the material boundary modifier must be
used. If@is used here, then the datum is simulated at the maximum
material boundary. If (D is used here, then the datum is simulated at the least
material boundary. If no symbol is used here, then the datum must be
simulated regardless of material boundary.
B If@is used here, then the geometric tolerance applies at the feature's
maximum material condition. If <D is used here, then the geometric tolerance
applies at the feature's least material condition. If no symbol is used here,
then the geometric tolerance applies regardless of feature size.
Note: Datum Features A, B, and C are not features of size; therefore, no material
boundary modifier can be used. Material boundary modifiers are only used on
datum features w ith size.
Example 4-30. A drawing illustrating material condition applications and analysis.

Material Boundary Calculation Examples

The following examples provide drawings with a variety of geometric
tolerancing and material boundary condition applications along with the information
used to calculate the material boundary in each situation.
Calculate the MMB condition for the datum references in the feature control
frames in Example 4-31. Look at the geometric tolerancing applications labeled A, B,
C, and D as you study the following discussion:
A. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to three da-
tum features: Datum A primary, Datum B secondary, and Datum C tertiary.
To calculate the MMB condition of Datum B and Datum C, the relation-
ships of those datums to Datum A must be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature B. Datum Feature B has a size tolerance and
a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum Feature A. The
maximum material condition size of Datum Feature Bis 11.9. The
perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is 0.1 at MMC. The
MMB size is 11.9-0.1 = 11.8
• Look at Datum Feature C. Datum Feature C has a size tolerance and a po-
sition geometric relationship to Datum Features A and B. The maximum
material condition size of Datum Feature C is 4. The position tolerance to
Datum Features A and B is 0.2 at MMC. The MMB size is 4 - 0.2 = 3.8.
 ■

~rs1on 160 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

¢3.6± 0.~ D
I~ 1¢o.3tl@I

1~ 1¢o.3@ IAI D@I

b
[½]¢o.3@ IAIB@lo@I
C

¢36±0.5

~
C
~ 02@ A B@
4~g2~ ~ ilJ L N, MMS,Milifu>,
applied; therefore,
lo:,
no calculations A
given in content
C
Example 4-31. This drawing provides a variety of geometric tolerancing and material
boundary condition applications along with the information used to calculate the
material boundary in each situation. Look at the geometric tolerancing applications
labeled A, B, C, and Das you study the discussion.

B. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to two da-
tum features: Datum A primary and Datum E secondary. To calculate the
MMB condition of Datum E, the relationships of Datum E to Datum A must
be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature E. Datum Feature E has a size tolerance and it
has a geometric relationship to Datum Feature A (perpendicularity).
The maximum material condition size of Datum Feature Eis 36.5.
The perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is 0.3 at MMC. The
MMB size is 36.5 + 0.3 = 36.8.
C. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to two da-
tum features: Datum A primary and Datum B secondary. To calculate the
MMB condition of Datum B, the relationship of Datum B to Datum A must
be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature B. Datum Feature B has a size tolerance and
a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum Feature A. The
maximum material condition size of Datum Feature Bis 11.9. The
perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is 0.1 at MMC. The
MMB size is 11.9 - 0.1 = 11.8.
D. There are three applications labeled a, b, and c for this feature control
frame. Each application is explained in the following:
a. Positioned to Datum Feature D only. The MMB for Datum Feature Dis
equal to the maximum material size of the datum feature, which is 8.7.
b. Positioned to Datum Feature A primary and Datum Feature D sec-
ondary. To calculate the MMB condition of Datum Feature D, the re-
lationship of Datum D to Datum A must be taken into consideration.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 161

• Look at Datum Feature D. Datum Feature D has a size toler-

ance and a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum
Feature A. The maximum material condition size of Datum
Feature B is 8.7. The perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is
0.2 at MMC. The MMB size is 8.7 + 0.2 = 8.9.
c. Positioned to Datum Feature A primary, Datum Feature B secondary, and
Datum Feature D tertiary. To calculate the MMB condition of Datum D,
the relationship of Datum D to Datums A and B must be taken into
consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature D. Datum Feature D has a size toler-
ance and a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum
Feature A, and a position geometric relationship to Datum
Feature B. The maximum material condition size of Datum Fea-
ture Dis 8.7. The perpendicularity tolerance to Datum Feature
A is 0.2 at MMC. The position tolerance in relation to Datum
Feature Bis 0.4 at MMC. The MMB size is 8.7 + 0.4 = 9.1. The
perpendicularity tolerance is not added, because it is a refine-
ment of the position tolerance.
Calculate the MMB condition for the datum references in the feature control
frames in Example 4-32. Look at the geometric tolerancing applications labeled A, B,
C, and Das you study the following discussion:
A. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to three da-
tum features: Datum A primary, Datum B secondary, and Datum C tertiary.
To calculate the MMB condition of Datum B and Datum C, the relation-
ships of those datums to Datum A must be taken into consideration.

¢3.6±0. ~ D
I~ I¢o.3@[@ 1
a

I~ I¢0.3@ IAID@ I
b
I~ I¢o.3@ IAIB@ ID@ I
C

¢36±0.5

C
I- ~
[Kl \_ No MMB condition
applied; therefore,
no calculations
given in content
Example 4-32. This drawing provides a variety of geometric tolerancing and material
boundary condition applications along with the information used to calculate the
material boundary in each situation. Look at the geometric tolerancing applications
labeled A, B, C, and Das you study the discussion.
 ■

~rs1on 162 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

• Look at Datum Feature B. Datum Feature B has a size tolerance and

a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum Feature A. The
maximum material condition size of Datum Feature Bis 11.9. The
perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is O at MMC. The MMB
size is 11.9 - 0 = 11.9
• Look at Datum Feature C. Datum Feature Chas a size tolerance and
a position geometric relationship to Datum Features A and B. The
maximum material condition size of Datum Feature C is 4. The posi-
tion tolerance to Datum Features A and Bis Oat MMC. The MMB size
is4-0=4.
B. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to two da-
tum features: Datum A primary and Datum E secondary. To calculate the
MMB condition of Datum E, the relationships of Datum E to Datum A must
be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature E. Datum Feature E has a size tolerance and
a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum Feature A. The
maximum material size of Datum Feature E is 36.5. The perpendicu-
lar tolerance to Datum Feature A is Oat MMC. The MMB size is
36.5 + 0 = 36.5.
C. The positional tolerance in this feature control frame is related to two da-
tum features: Datum A primary and Datum B secondary. To calculate the
MMB condition of Datum B, the relationships of Datum B to Datum A must
be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature B. Datum Feature B has a size tolerance and
a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum Feature A. The
maximum material condition size of Datum Feature Bis 11.9. The
perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is Oat MMC. The MMB
size is 11.9 - 0 = 11.9.
D. There are three applications labeled a, b, and c for this feature control
frame. Each application is explained in the following:
a. Positioned to Datum Feature D only. The MMB for Datum Feature D
is equal to the maximum material condition size of the datum fea-
ture, which is 8.7.
b. Positioned to Datum Feature A primary and Datum Feature D sec-
ondary. To calculate the MMB condition of Datum D, the relationship
of Datum D to Datum A must be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature D. Datum Feature D has a size toler-
ance and a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum
Feature A. The maximum material condition size of Datum
Feature Dis 8.7. The perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is
0.2 at MMC. The MMB size is 8.7 + 0.2 = 8.9.
c. Positioned to Datum Feature A primary, B secondary, and D tertiary.
To calculate the MMB condition of Datum D, the relationship of Da-
tum D to Datums A and B must be taken into consideration.
• Look at Datum Feature D. Datum Feature D has a size toler-
ance and a perpendicularity geometric relationship to Datum
Feature A, and a position geometric relationship to Datum Fea-
ture B. The maximum material size of Datum Feature Dis 8.7.
The perpendicular tolerance to Datum Feature A is 0.2 at MMC.
The position tolerance in relation to Datum Feature B is 0.5 at
MMC. The MMB size is 8.7 + 0.5 = 9.2. The perpendicularity
tolerance is not added, because it is a refinement of the position
tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 163

1. Given the following symbols, provide the meaning of each symbol in the spaces
provided.

@-------------

©-------------
2. What is the datum feature requirement for the use of the MMB and LMB
symbols? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3. Define perfect form boundary. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Define regardless of feature size (RFS). _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

5. _ _ _ _ _ _ is assumed for all geometric tolerance applications unless

otherwise specified.
6. How is a feature control frame connected to a related feature when surface
control is intended? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

7. Can perfect form at MMC be violated for surface straightness? Yes or No?
164 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

8. Given the following drawing and a list of possible produced sizes, specify the
geometric tolerance at each possible produced size.

- 0 .2

y'.)6 ± 0 .4

Possible Produced Sizes 0 Geometric Tolerance at Given Produced Sizes

6.4MMC
6.3
6.2
6.1
6.0
5.9
5.8
5.7
5.6LMC
9. How is an axis geometric control specified?_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

10. When axis straightness is specified, can the perfect form boundary be violated?
Yes or No?
11. When axis straightness control is used, a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ tolerance zone must
be specified by placing the _ _ _ _ _ _ symbol in front of the geometric
tolerance in the feature control frame.
12. Given the following drawing and a list of possible produced sizes, specify the
geometric tolerance at each possible produced size.

t ---31 -------c 0 6 ± 0 5
1-100.11
Possible Produced Sizes 0 Geometric Tolerance at Given Produced Sizes
6.5MMC
6.4
6.2
6.0
5.8
5.6
5.5 LMC
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 165

13. Give the formula that can be used for calculating the geometric tolerance of
an external feature at a given produced size when MMC is specified with the
geometric tolerance in the feature control frame. _____________

14. Given the following drawing and a list of possible produced sizes, specify the
geometric tolerance at each possible produced size.

t ---3=!: ¢ 6 ± 0 .4
1- 100.os@I
Possible Produced Sizes 0 Geometric Tolerance at Given Produced Sizes
6.4MMC
6.2
6.0
5.8
5.6LMC
15. Give the proper abbreviation and definition for regardless of material boundary.

16. Give the formula that can be used for calculating the geometric tolerance of
an internal feature at a given produced size when LMC is specified with the
geometric tolerance in the feature control frame. _____________

17. The use of the LMC material condition symbol after the geometric tolerance in a
feature control is often used to control minimum wall thickness. True or False?
18. When a datum feature has a size dimension and a geometric form tolerance, the
size of the simulated datum is the _______ size limit, except for
_______ straightness applications where the boundary is allowed to
exceed MMC.
19. The effect of material condition on the datum and related feature can be altered
by changing the datum precedence and the applied material condition symbol.
True or False?
166 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

20. Given the following drawing and a list of possible produced sizes, specify the
geometric tolerance at each possible produced size.

~ 01
I ---- I
012 .4
11 .8

027 5 \2)2 4

_j i - --- -- ~ - _L
Possible Produced Sizes 0 Geometric Tolerance at Given Produced Sizes
11.8MMC
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4 LMC
21. Circle the following statements that are true in regard to datum precedence and
datum reference? (More than one can be correct.)
A) Datum precedence is established by the order of placement in the feature
control frame.
B) Datum precedence is established by alphabetical order of datum reference letters.
C) The first datum listed in the feature control frame is the primary datum reference.
D) '',A;' is always the primary datum.
E) The third datum listed in the feature control frame is the tertiary datum reference.
F) RMB is assumed unless otherwise specified.
22. The MMB and LMB symbols are only used if the datum feature has size. RMB
is implied if the datum feature has size and no boundary symbol is used. No
material boundary symbol can be used if a feature does not have size.
True or False?
23. Define feature and specify how a feature can be represented on a drawing.

24. Describe a feature of size.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 167

25. Describe a feature without size.

26. Define a regular feature of size.

27. Define an irregular feature of size.

28. Explain and show an example of how material boundary condition values can be
displayed in the feature control frame.

29. Given the following drawing, identify the datums related to the pattern of holes.
Explain why the perpendicular tolerance is added to this drawing. Calculate the
maximum material boundary of the 018.0/ 17.6 feature. Show your calculations.

1-;22 ¢18 0

¢ 46 t---~ B

L
~
168 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

30. Given the following drawing w ith labels A and B pointing to locations in two
feature control frames, explain the following applications:

A
rT-65_±_1-- -+1---1-r ~'!~±_g_:- - ,. ~A~D~

A) Explain the use of MMB and give the maximum material boundary
calculation.

Explain the use of LMB and give the least material boundary calculation.

Explain if no symbol is used here.

B) Explain the use of MMB and give the maximum material boundary
calculation.

Explain the use of LMB and give the least material boundary calculation.

Explain if no symbol is used here.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 169

31. Given the following drawing, calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature Das
referenced in the feature control frame positioning the four 08-8.5 holes.
,...7 5.25
'P:24.75

C
 .
~rs1on 170 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to the print of the SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING found on page 433.

1. Refer to the 0.8740±.0005 dimension:
A) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Name the geometric characteristic symbol found in the feature control frame.

D) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

E) Is this geometric tolerance an axis or surface control? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
F) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.8745
.8742
.8740
.8738
.8735
2. Refer to the 0.674 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Name the geometric characteristic symbol found in the feature control frame.

E) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

F) What is the material condition symbol associated with this geometric
tolerance?_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

G) Is this geometric tolerance an axis or surface control? _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 171

H) Give the relationship of the datum reference to the geometric tolerance. _ _

I) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.677
.676
.675
.674
.673
3. Refer to the 0.750 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Name the geometric characteristic symbol found in the feature control frame.

E) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

F) What is the material condition symbol associated with this geometric
tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

G) Is this geometric tolerance an axis or surface control? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

H) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.753
.752
.751
.750
.749

!Refer to the print of the BRACKET found on age 434.

4. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature D in the positional feature control
frame for the 4X 0.156±.005 holes. Show your calculations.
 .
~rs1on 172 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the PEDAL-ACCELERATOR found on page 436.

5. Refer to the 19.10-19.08 diameter dimension at Datum D and answer the
following related questions:
A) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) The position tolerance for this feature is referenced to which datums? _ __
D) Why is there no material condition symbol after the perpendicularity
geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

E) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size for perpendicularity and position:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
Perpendicularity Position
19.100
19.095
19.090
19.085
19.080

Refer to the print of the MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)-FRAME ASSY 3

AXIS HP found on age 437.
6. Refer to the feature control frame with Datum A.
A) What is the geometric characteristic symbol associated with this feature
control frame? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) How do any changes in produced sizes affect the geometric tolerance? _ __

7. Refer to the .2510±.0005 dimension:

A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Name the geometric characteristic symbols found in the feature control frames. _

E) Give the geometric tolerances with each geometric characteristic. _ _ __

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 173

F) What is the material condition symbol associated with each geometric

tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

G) Do the geometric tolerances apply to an axis, center plane, or surface control?

H) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
Parallelism Position
.2505
.2510
.2515

Refer to the rint of the HYDRAULIC VALVE founa on age 438.

8. Refer to the 0.344 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Name the geometric characteristic symbol found in the feature control frame.

E) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

F) What is the material condition symbol associated with this geometric
tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

G) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.349
.347
.345
.343
.341
.339
9. Refer to DIM 'A' part number 1 MS 2427-3:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Name the geometric characteristic symbol found in the feature control frame.

E) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 .
~rs1on 174 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

F) What is the material condition symbol associated with this geometric

tolerance?_ _ _ __ __ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ __

G) Is this geometric tolerance an axis or surface control? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

H) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.687
.686
.685
.684

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on page 443.

10. Refer to the 0.122 THRU COUNTERBORE 0.188 DEPTH .15 dimension:
(Note: the geometric tolerance is applied the same to the hole and counterbore.)
A) What is the MMC of the hole? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the LMC of the hole? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the MMC of the counterbore? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the LMC of the counterbore? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
E) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Sizes-Hole Geometric Tolerance
.125
.124
.123
.122
.121
Possible Sizes-Counterbore Geometric Tolerance
.191
.190
.189
.188
.187

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD found on page 446.
11. Refer to the 0.500 THRU hole dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 4 Material Condition and Material Boundary 175

D) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.505
.500
.495

!Refer to the print of the BRACKET found on page 434.

12. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature C. Show your calculations.

!Refer to the print of the FEMORAL BEVEL CUTTER found on rage 447.
13. Refer to the 0.500 THRU hole dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.505
.500
.495
14. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature Bin the perpendicularity feature
control frame for the 3/ 8-24 UNF-2B thread. Show your calculations.

Refer to the rint of ttie CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on rage 448.

15. Refer to the 0.250 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.260
.250
.240
16. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature B as referred to in the positional
feature control frame for the 4X 0.250±.010 posts. Show your calculations.
 .
~rs1on 176 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
17. Refer to the 0.193+.005/-.000 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the MMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) What is the LMC? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.198
.197
.196
.195
.194
.193
18. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature C in the positional feature control
frame of the 3/8-24 UNF-2B th read. Show your calculation s.

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE founa on page 450.
19. Refer to the 1.82 dimension:
A) What is the tolerance?
B) What is the MMC?
C) What is the LMC?
20. Refer to the 0.422 dimension:
A. What is the tolerance?
B. What is the MMC?
C. What is the LMC?
D. Given the following list of possible produced sizes, determine the geometric
tolerance at each produced size:
Possible Produced Size Geometric Tolerance
.417
.420
.422
.425
.427
21. Calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature A in the positional feature control
frame of the 0.422 hole. Show your calculations.
 .
~rs1on

Form Tolerances

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 List and describe the types of control specified by form tolerances.
0 Explain methods used to specify straightness.
0 Apply or interpret straightness geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Explain methods used to specify flatness.
0 Apply or interpret flatness geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Explain methods used to specify circularity.
0 Apply or interpret circularity geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Interpret tolerance requirements for parts subject to free state variation.
0 Explain methods used to specify cylindricity.
0 Apply or interpret cylindricity geometric tolerances on drawings.

Technical Terms
Acceptance boundary Nonrigid
Average diameter Perfect flatness
Axis straightness Restrain
Circularity Restrained condition
Circularity geometric tolerance Specific area flatness
Cylindricity Straightness
Flatness tolerance zone Straightness tolerance
Form tolerances Surface straightness tolerance
Free state variation Unit flatness

This chapter explains the concepts and techniques of dimensioning and

tolerancing to control the form of geometric shapes. Form tolerances specify a
zone in which the dimensioned feature, the feature's line elements, the feature's
derived median plane, or the feature's derived median line must be controlled. Form
tolerances are applied to single features or elements of single features. Therefore,
form tolerances are not related to datums. Form tolerances control:
. Straightness.
. Flatness.
. Ci rcula ri ty.
. Cylindricity.

177
 ■

~rs1on 178 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

When size tolerances provided in conventional dimensioning do not provide

sufficient control for the functional design and interchangeability of a product, then
form tolerances should be specified. As discussed in Chapter 4, the limits of size
control form to a certain degree. The extent of this control should be evaluated before
specifying geometric tolerances of form.

~
Form tolerances can be applied to individual features, feature elements, or
features of size, including datum features. Applying a form tolerance to a
datum feature does not relate the tolerance to a datum. This application is
discussed later in this chapter.

Straightness Tolerance
Straightness is a condition where an element of a surface or an axis is in a
straight line. Straightness is a form tolerance. The straightness tolerance specifies a
zone within which the required surface element or axis must lie. Example 5-1 shows
a detailed example of the straightness geometric characteristic symbol used in a
feature control frame.

H = Letter height

Symbol Specifications
Example 5-1. A feature control frame with the straightness geometric characteristic
symbol.

The surface straightness tolerance is represented by connecting the feature

control frame to the surface with a leader, or by connecting the feature control frame
to an extension line in the view where the surface to be controlled is shown as an
edge. Placement of the feature control frame on the extension line is not normally
recommended for cylindrical objects, but is typically used on planar surfaces. The
feature cannot exceed the MMC envelope and perfect form must be maintained
if the actual size is produced at MMC. Otherwise, RFS applies and the geometric
tolerance remains the same at any produced size. Example 5-2 shows a drawing and
an exaggerated representation of what happens when a surface straightness tolerance
is applied. Remember, straightness implies RFS. The chart in Example 5-2 shows the
maximum out-of-straightness at several possible produced sizes. The straightness
tolerance must be less than the size tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 179

- - - ~ _l
t --~=~~2
~ - [ 0 .05[
or _l
+=
~-~-~--
➔~ ¢6±0.2
t 1-10.os1
The Drawing

_J
-E------3 _J_ 06.2 MMC
0.05 straightness
tolerance zone
J I

-E--- -3 _J_ 06.2 MMC

0.05 straightness
tolerance zone
J j

-E---- -3 _j_ 06.2 MMC

0.05 straightness j j
tolerance zone
The Meaning

Possible
Maximum
Produced
Out-of-Straightness
Sizes
MMC - - 6.2 0 ~ - Perfect form
required at MMC
6.1 0.05
6.0 0.05
5.9 0.05
LMC - - 5.8 0.05

Example 5-2. The effect of surface straightness. RFS is assumed and perfect form is
required at MMC. With surface control, the feature control frame is connected to the
surface of the feature with a leader or an extension line.
 ■

~rs1on 180 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Surface Straightness Applied Using the Independency Symbol

When using the independency symbol on surface straightness, perfect form
is not required at MMC, and the straightness tolerance can be larger than the size
tolerance. The independency symbol is used to indicate that perfect form of a feature
of size is not required at MMC or LMC. Example 5-3 shows how perfect form is not
required at MMC when using the independency symbol next to the size dimension.
Axis straightness is specified on a drawing by placing the feature control
frame below the diameter dimension and placing a diameter symbol in front of the
geometric tolerance to specify a cylindrical tolerance zone, as shown in Example 5-4.
Notice in the chart in Example 5-4 that this application allows a violation of perfect
form at MMC. RFS is assumed. The acceptance boundary is the possible produced
size plus the maximum out-of-straightness.
Axis straightness can also be specified on an MMC basis by placing the MMC
material condition symbol after the geometric tolerance. The specified geometric
tolerance is then held at MMC and allowed to increase as the actual size departs from
MMC. The geometric tolerance is at MMC, as shown in Example 5-5A. In this case,

- - - ~ _l_
-F --~= ➔~o ,m
~ - 10.31
The Drawing

Any local size measurement must

be within the size tolerance
_J
-~ 06.4possible
="--- --=~ ___l_ virtual condition

I
0.3 straightness
tolerance zone J
The Meaning

Possible Maximum
Produced Out-of-Straightness
Sizes
MMC- 6.1 0.3 - - Perfect form not required
at MMC because of
6.0 0.3
independency symbol
LMC - 5.9 0.3

Example 5-3. Perfect form is not required at MMC when using the independency
symbol next to the size dimension.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 181

t ---3 41 ¢ 6±0.2
1-1 0 0.os I
The Drawing

00.05 straightness
tolerance zone
The Meaning

Possible
Maximum Acceptance
Produced
Out-of-Straightness Boundary
Sizes
MMC ~ 6.2 0.05 6.25
6.1 0.05 6.15
6.0 0.05 6.05
5.9 0.05 5.95
LMC ~ - 5.8 0.05 5.85

Example 5-4. The effect of axis straightness. RFS is assumed and perfect form is not
required at MMC.

the straightness tolerance can be greater than the size tolerance, but normally the
straightness tolerance is less than the size tolerance. The illustration in Example 5-5B
shows how the part is allowed to bend outside the size tolerance. In this application,
the acceptance boundary is the maximum size plus the allowable out-of-straightness
tolerance. The acceptance boundary can be used as a functional gage to verify the
part. The local size is also verified so that the part does not exceed the size tolerance
and the gage can be used to verify the straightness.

Unit Straightness
Straightness per unit of measure can be applied to a part or feature in
conjunction with a straightness specification over the total length. This can be done
as a means of preventing an abrupt surface variation within a relatively short length
of the feature. The specified geometric tolerance over the total length is greater than
the unit tolerance and is normally given to keep the unit tolerance from getting out
of control when applied to the length of the feature. The per unit specification can
be given as a tolerance per inch or per 25 millimeters of length. When this technique
is used, the feature control frame is doubled in height and split so the tolerance over
 ■

~rs1on 182 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

the total length is specified in the top half and the per unit control placed in the
bottom half, as shown in Example 5-6. Caution should be exercised when using unit
straightness without the limiting geometric tolerance over the total length as this
could cause excessive waviness in the feature or part.

+-----+! ---t:=¢6±0.2
1-100.os@ I
Possible Maximum Acceptance
Produced Out-of-Straightness Boundary
Sizes
MMC- 6.2 0.05 6.25
6.1 0.15 6.25
6.0 0.25 6.25
5.9 0.35 6.25
LMC - 5.8 0.45 6.25

Part produced at maximum size 0 6.2

can be out of straight by 0 0.05

00.05

06.25 acceptance
boundar

Part produced at minimum size 0 5.8

can be out of straight by 00.45
[

00.45

06.25 acceptance
boundar

Example 5-5. A-The effect of axis straightness with the MMC material condition
symbol used. B-Examples showing how the part is allowed to bend outside the size
tolerance, with the acceptance boundary shown at different produced sizes.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 183

~Mo;o~\ Total

-E.----------=----------,3- d
The Drawing
- </J0 .05/25
Unit

MMC + geometric tolerance (20.4 + 0.1) =20.5 outer boundary

0.1 geometric tolerance zone over total length

I:,_ :~~=---_----
--_ cf
Length - - - - - - - - ~ --<
- 020 4

196

00.05 tolerance zone for each 25 mm increment

i--- - - - 1 - - -- ---+- 25 mm increments over total length

The Meaning

Example 5-6. Unit straightness used on a drawing.

In Example 5-6, the derived axis or centerline of the actual feature must lie
within a cylindrical tolerance zone of 0.1 diameter for the total length and within
a 0.05 cylindrical tolerance zone for any 25 mm length, regardless of feature size.
Additionally, each circular element of the surface must be within the specified limits
of size.

Straightness of Noncylindrical Features

Straightness can also be applied on an RFS or MMC basis to noncylindrical
features of size. When this is done, the associated median line must lie within two
parallel lines separated by a distance equal to the specified geometric tolerance zone.
The feature control frame is attached to the size dimension. In this situation, the
diameter symbol is not placed in front of the geometric tolerance.
Example 5-7 shows a straightness geometric tolerance applied to a thin
rectangular part. The straightness geometric tolerance controls the median line of the
part w ithin the specified straightness tolerance. Straightness of a rectangular part
can be applied at RFS or MMC. This application is generally used for thin features
such as this example. Flatness, described next, is used on thick features.
 ■

~rs1on 184 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

J_i--
1 - - -36.5 - - -- 1
c::::::=================:::i
1±0.0 S J
1- 10.sl The Drawing

0.5 straightness tolerance zone

1T---
where the median line must lie

'--E-:-= - - -=-=~
- L
1.55 o:e~bounda~
The Meaning
Example 5-7. Applying straightness to a rectangular feature.

Straightness of a Flat Surface

Straightness can also be applied to a flat surface. When this is done, the
straightness geometric tolerance controls single line elements on the surface in one or
two directions. The direction of the tolerance zone is determined by the placement of
the feature control frame, as shown in Exam ple 5-8.

- 0 .08 - 0 .1 2

Exam ple 5-8. Straightness applied to a flat surface.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 185

Straightness of a Limited Length

A straightness geometric tolerance can be applied to a portion of a long part by
placing a chain line next to the view at the desired straightness length. The length of
the chain line is dimensioned and the feature control frame is connected to the chain
line with a leader as shown in Example 5-9. This can be applied to a cylindrical part
or a flat part.

f--- - - - - - - - - 125 - - - - - - - - --l

Example 5-9. Applying straightness to a partial length of a part.

Flatness Tolerance
Perfect flatness is the condition of a surface where all of the elements are in one plane.
Flatness is a form tolerance. A flatness tolerance zone establishes the distance between
two parallel planes within which the surface must lie. Example 5-10 shows a detailed
example of the flatness geometric characteristic symbol used in a feature control frame.
When a flatness geometric tolerance is specified, the feature control frame is
connected by a leader or an extension line in the view where the surface appears
as a line. Refer to Example 5-11. All of the points of the surface must be within the
limits of the specified tolerance zone. The smaller the tolerance zone, the flatter the
surface. The flatness tolerance must be less than the size tolerance when the surface
is associated with a size tolerance. Flatness does not reference a datum and when
applied to a surface is always considered regardless of feature size.

2H

T60° H = Letter he ight

Symbol Specifications

Example 5-10. A feature control frame with the flatness geometric characteristic symbol.
 ■

~rs1on 186 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

0 0 .06

15±0.4
-.
~---~____i_
or

~----~l~-4 The Drawing

The Meaning
Example 5-11. The flatness geometric tolerance applied to a drawing.

Flatness Applied Using the Independency Symbol

When using the independency symbol with a flatness geometric tolerance, perfect
form is not required at MMC, and the flatness tolerance can be larger than the size
tolerance. The independency symbol is used to indicate that perfect form of a feature
of size is not required at MMC or LMC. Example 5-12 shows how perfect form is not
required at MMC when using the independency symbol next to the size dimension.

15±0.4 CD 1010.81
The Drawing

Any local size measurement must 0.8 flatness

be within the size tolerance - tolerance zone

C: J 16.2 possible
virtual condition

The Meaning
Exam ple 5-12. Perfect form is not required at MMC when using the independency
symbol next to the size dimension.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 187

Flatness Applied to a Size Dimension

A flatness geometric tolerance can be applied to a size dimension, as shown in
Example 5-13. In this example, the derived median plane of the feature must lie within
two parallel planes that are spaced equal to the specified flatness geometric tolerance. A
flatness geometric tolerance specified to a size dimension can be applied RFS or MMC.

1201 --------- 70 - - - - - ~ ~

□41600 1~~ 15.75

1010.51
The Drawing

The Meaning

Example 5-13. Applying flatness to a size dimension.

Specific Area Flatness

At times, it is necessary to provide a flatness callout for only a specific area of a
surface. This procedure is known as specific area flatness. Specific area flatness can
be used when a large cast surface must be flat in a relatively small area. Rather than
an expensive operation of machining the entire surface, it is possible to finish only
the required area, as shown in Example 5-14.
When specific area flatness is used, the specific area is outlined with phantom
lines and section lines are placed within the area. The specific area is then located,
preferably from datums, with basic or ± dimensions. The feature control frame is
connected to the area with a leader line, as shown in Example 5-15.
 ■

~rs1on 188 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Example 5-14. A pictorial drawing showing specific area flatness on a large surface.

- '- - - -+- -■ 0 0 .06

Example 5-15. Representing specific area flatness on a drawing. Basic or± location
dimensions are used.

Unit Flatness
Unit flatness can be specified when it is desirable to control the flatness of
a given surface area as a means of controlling an abrupt surface variation within
a small area of the feature. The unit flatness specification can be used alone or in
combination with a total tolerance. Most applications use unit flatness in combination
with a total tolerance over the entire surface so the unit callout is not allowed to get
out of control. When this is done, the height of the feature control frame is doubled
with the total tolerance placed in the top half and the unit tolerance plus the size of
the unit area placed in the bottom half. The unit tolerance must be smaller than the
total tolerance. Unit flatness can be specified using a square, rectangular, or circular
unit area, as shown in Example 5-16.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 189

Total tolerance
over entire area

Unit tolerance area

Cl 0 .8
0 .06 / 025
Unit tolerance

Square Area

Total tolerance
over entire area

Unit tolerance area

Cl 0 .8
0 .06 / 25 X 50
Unit tolerance

Rectangular Area

Total tolerance
over entire area

Unit tolerance area

/ 025
Unit tolerance

Circular Area

Example 5-16. Specifying unit flatness on a drawing.

Circularity Tolerance
Circularity is characterized by any given cross section taken perpendicular to
the axis of a cylinder or cone, or through the common center of a sphere. Circularity
is a form tolerance. The circularity geometric tolerance is formed by two concentric
circles within which the actual surface must lie. Circularity is established from the
periphery or circumference of a shaft or the inside diameter of a hole. Circularity is
not referenced to a datum and is always regardless of feature size. The circularity
geometric tolerance must be less than the size tolerance. Example 5-17 shows a
detailed example of the circularity geometric characteristic symbol used in a feature
control frame. The tolerance applies to only one sectional element at a time, as shown
exaggerated in Example 5-18.
 ■

~rs1on 190 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

H =Letter height
Symbol Specifications

Example 5-17. A feature control frame with the circularity geometric characteristic
symbol.

A Circularity
~ - - - - - - + - - - -t_o_Ie_ra_n~ce z o n e ~ _ _ _

~J-----=-1 • A SECTION A- A
Example 5-18. An analysis of the circularity geometric tolerance.

When a circularity geometric tolerance is used, the feature control frame is

connected with a leader to the view where the feature appears as a circle or in the
longitudinal view. Examples showing circularity of a cylinder and a cone are shown
in Example 5-19. Circularity is always specified as regardless offeature size and no
datum reference is used.

Circularity Tolerance for a Sphere

The circularity geometric tolerance can also be applied to a sphere. When this
is done, the circularity geometric tolerance is established by two concentric circles
created by a plane passing through the center of the sphere. All points on the surface
must lie within the circularity tolerance zone. An example showing circularity of a
spherical feature is shown in Example 5-20.

Free State Variation

The circularity tolerance must be less than the size tolerance, except for parts
subject to free state variation. Free state variation is the distortion of a part after
removal of forces applied during manufacture. Distortion can happen to thin wall
parts where the weight and flexibility of the part are affected by internal stresses
applied during fabrication. These types of parts are referred to as nonrigid.
The part may have to meet the tolerance specifications while in free state or it
may be necessary to hold features in a simulated mating part to verify dimensions.
The free state symbol, shown in Example 5-21, is placed in the feature control frame
after the geometric tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 191

The Drawing

A 1---.____
0.5 circularity
tolerance zone

A SECTION A-A
The Meaning
Circularity of a Cylindrical Feature

The Drawing

0.5 circularity
tolerance zone

[
A SECTION A- A
The Meaning
Circularity of a Conical Feature

Examp le 5-19. Applying the circularity geometric tolerance to cylindrical and conical
features.
 ■

~rs1on 192 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

0 0 .5

The Drawing

A ~ 9 00 / 0.5 circularity
/ tolerance zone

~ J_
A SECTI ON A- A
The Meaning
Circularity of a Spherical Feature

Example 5-20. Applying the circularity geometric tolerance to a spherical feature.

H = Letter height

Symbol Specifications

Example 5-21. The free state symbol, w hen used, is placed in the feature control
frame after the geometric tolerance and any material condition symbol (in this case,
no material condition symbol is used).

It may be necessary to specify circularity of a nonrigid part based on an

average size diameter to help make sure the desired diameter can be held during
assembly. When this is necessary, the abbreviation "AVG" is placed after the size
dimension, as shown in Example 5-22. The average diameter is the average of
several measurements across a circular or cylindrical feature. Normally, at least four
measurements or enough measurements are taken to assure the establishment of an
average diameter. The circularity tolerance is larger than the size tolerance because
the average of the diameter measurements is established w ithin the boundarjes of
the circularity tolerance.
In Example 5-22, free state circularity is applied on a drawing of an O-ring. This
is a nonrigid part. For this application, at least four measurements are taken and
averaged. The average must be betw een the size limits and the outside diameter must
be w ithin the specified circularity geometric tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 193

\'l120 AVG
119
IOls®I

The Drawing
Nonrigid Part (O-ring)

f 5 circularity tolerance zone

r Four measurements taken and averaged

The average must be between 119 and
120, and the outside diameter must be
in the 5 tolerance zone

The Meaning

Example 5-22. Specifying average size diameter of nonrigid parts using the "AVG"
abbreviation after the size dimension.

Circularity of Features to Be Restrained

Specific features identified as datums can have a circularity geometric tolerance
applied when a part must be verified in a restrained condition. The maximum
forces necessary to restrain each feature are specified when the surfaces are subject
to free state variation. The forces are established as needed to simulate the expected
assembly conditions. The drawing should specify that the remainder of the part
or specific features must be within the stated tolerances. Example 5-23 shows an
example of this application. The term restrained condition refe rs to a situation when it
is necessary to restrain or hold a part on its datum features to simulate the function
or interaction with other features or parts, as in an assembly. When a part is placed in
a restrained condition, a note is placed on the drawing defining the specific restraint
requirements. The term restrain means the application of forces resulting in possible
distortion of a part from its free state condition.
 ■

~rs1on 194 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

4X \2)6 .2

/ 0 .3 A
NOTE 1

0 0 .5®

NOTE 1:
THIS TOLERANCE APPLIES WHEN DATUM FEATURE A IS MOUNTED AGAI NST
A FLAT SURFACE USING FOUR M6X1 BOLTS TORQUED TO 9-15 N-m
WHILE RESTRAINING DATUM FEATUR E B TO TH E SPECIFIED SIZE LI MIT.

Example 5-23. Specifying restraint for a part with a datum feature controlled by a
circularity geometric tolerance.

Cylindricity Tolerance
Cylindricity is identified by a tolerance zone that establishes two perfectly
concentric cylinders within which the actual surface must lie. Cylindricity is a form
tolerance and is not referenced to a datum. Example 5-24 shows a detailed example
of the cylindricity geometric characteristic symbol used in a feature control frame.
The cylindricity geometric tolerance must be less than the size tolerance. Cylindricity
is always considered regardless of feature size.
The feature control frame showing the cylindricity tolerance specification
is connected by a leader to either the circular or longitudinal view, as shown in
Example 5-25.
Cylindricity is a composite control of form that includes circularity, straightness,
and taper of a cylindrical feature. Cylindricity can be characterized as a blanket
tolerance that covers the entire feature. The difference between circularity and
cylindricity is that:
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 195

L
1.SH

60° H =Letter height

Symbol Specifications

Example 5-24. A feature control frame with the cylindricity geometric characteristic
symbol.

Jj 0 .25

-.---
\2)60
_L__ ' - - - - - - - - - - - '
The Drawing

r 0.25 cylindricity

-e- t~-~=====:-f
/ tolerance zone l_

T
The Meaning

Example 5-25. An application of the cylindricity geometric tolerance.

• Circularity (circle) is a single cross-sectional tolerance representing a zone

between two concentric circles.
• Cylindricity (cylinder) is a tolerance that covers both circular and
longitudinal elements at the same time representing a zone between two
concentric cylinders.

Applying Form Control to a Datum Feature

Form geometric tolerances can be applied to datum features. This is specified on
the drawing by attaching the datum feature symbol directly to the form control or to
the leader associated with the control. Refer to Example 5-26. Note that this does not
relate the geometric tolerance to a datum.
 ■

~rs1on 196 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Example 5-26. Specifying flatness of a datum feature.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 197

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

1. Define form tolerances. _______________________

2. Name the geometric tolerance that specifies a zone within which the required
surface element or axis must lie. ____________________
3. Explain the difference between the methods used to represent surface and axis
straightness.____________________________

4. Perfect form is required at MMC for _ _ _ _ _ _ straightness.

5. The perfect form boundary can be violated at MMC for _ _ _ _ __
straightness.
6. Axis straightness can be specified on an MMC basis by placing the MMC
symbol after the geometric tolerance in the feature control frame. The specified
geometric tolerance is held at the MMC produced size. Explain what happens to
the geometric tolerance as the produced size departs from MMC._______

7. Name the geometric tolerance that establishes the distance between two parallel
planes within which the surface must lie. ____ _ __ ________ _
8. Why should unit straightness have a limiting geometric tolerance over the total
length? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
198 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

9. Explain limited length straightness and describe how it is displayed on a

drawing. _____________________________

10. Which geometric tolerance is characterized by any given cross section taken
perpendicular to the axis of a cylinder or cone, or through the common center of
a sphere? _____________________________
11. Describe the appropriate method of placing a feature control frame with a
circularity geometric tolerance in a drawing. _______________

12. What is the difference between the circularity geometric tolerance and the
cylindricity geometric tolerance? ___________________

13. Which geometric tolerance, cylindricity or circularity, would require more

precise control? _ _ _ __ __ __ _____________ _ _ __
14. Describe the control established when a flatness geometric tolerance is applied to
a size dimension. _________________________

15. Define free state variation.

16. Explain the meaning of the free state symbol placed in the feature control frame
after the geometric tolerance and material condition symbol (if any material
condition symbol is used). ______________________
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 5 Form Tolerances 199

17. Define average diameter. Identify how many measurements are taken to assure
the establishment of an average diameter. ________ ________

18. Define restrained condition. _____________________

19. Define restrain. __________________________

20. When specifying a part to be verified in a restrained condition, describe how the
necessary forces are established and how the drawing is created to represent the
desired specifications. ________________________

21. Describe the use of the independency symbol on surface straightness.

22. Describe the use of the independency symbol with a flatness geometric
tolerance.
 .
~rs1on 200 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
5 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to the print of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on page 441.

1. Name at least one form geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Completely describe the form geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ __

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on P.age 443.

3. What does the title block specify in regard to form geometric tolerances? _ __

Refer to the rint of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD ouna on age 446.
4. Completely describe the form geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ __

5. Explain what is represented by the datum feature symbol attached to the feature
control frame containing the form geometric tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ ~ i_ll " 1
Orientation
Tolerances

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 List and describe the geometric tolerances used to control orientation.
0 Explain methods used to specify parallelism.
0 Apply or interpret parallelism geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Explain methods used to specify perpendicularity.
0 Apply or interpret perpendicularity geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Describe how to establish combination geometric tolerances and apply or
interpret them on drawings.
0 Explain methods used to specify angularity.
0 Apply or interpret angularity geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Identify and describe orientation tolerances specified at RFS, MMC, and zero
geometric tolerance at MMC.

Technical Terms
Angularity Perpendicularity
Angularity geometric tolerance Perpendicularity tolerance
Orientation tolerances Radial element
Parallelism Tangent plane
Parallelism geometric tolerance

This chapter explains the concepts and techniques of dimensioning and

tolerancing to control the orientation of geometric features.
Orientation geometric tolerances control:
• Parallelism.
• Perpendicularity.
• Angularity.
When size tolerances provided in conventional dimensioning do not provide
sufficient control for the functional design and interchangeability of a product, then
form and/or profile tolerances should be specified. Size limits control a degree of
form and parallelism. Locational tolerances control a certain amount of orientation.
Therefore, the need for further form and orientation control should be evaluated
before specifying geometric tolerances of form and orientation.

201
 ■

~rs1on 202 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Orientation Tolerances
Orientation tolerances control the relationship of features to one another.
Orientation tolerances include parallelism, perpendicularity, and angularity. When
controlling orientation tolerances, the feature is related to one or more datum
features. Relation to more than one datum should be considered if required to
stabilize the tolerance zone in more than one direction.
Orientation tolerances are total. This means that all elements of the related
surface or axis fall within the specified tolerance zone. When less demanding
requirements controlling only individual line elements of a surface meet the design
goal, then a note such as EACH ELEMENT or EACH RADIAL ELEMENT should
be shown below the associated feature control frame. This application permits
indiv idual line elements of a surface, rather than the total surface, to be controlled in
relation to a datum.
Parallelism, perpendicularity, and angularity, when applied to a plane surface,
also control flatness to the extent of the orientation tolerance specified in the feature
control frame.
Orientation tolerances imply RFS. Therefore, MMC or LMC must be specified if
any application other than RPS is intended.

Parallelism Tolerance
Parallelism is the condition of a surface or center plane equidistant from a
datum plane or axis. Parallelism is also the condition of an axis equidistant along
its length from one or more datum planes or a datum axis. A parallelism geometric
tolerance is established by t wo parallel planes, two parallel lines, or cylindrical
zones that are parallel to a datum plane, and between which the surface or axis of
the feature must lie. The parallelism geometric characteristic symbol and associated
feature control frame are detailed in Example 6-1.

0.6H
2H

1.SH

~
60° H = Letter height
Symbol Specifications
Example 6-1. A feature control frame with the parallelism geometric characteristic
symbol and datum reference.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 203

Surface Parallelism
When a surface is to be parallel to a datum feature, the feature control frame is
either connected by a leader to the surface or to an extension line from the surface.
The actual surface must be within the parallelism tolerance zone that is established
by two planes parallel to the datum. The parallelism tolerance zone must be within
the specified size limits. Refer to Example 6-2.

12±0.4 I// I0.25 IAI

The Drawing

0.25 w ide parallelism

Jr
Possible parallelism tolerance zone
orientation o f surface Two parallel planes
parallel to Datum A

l l
12.4
;:;;::::::;~~=========I
M MC 11.6

I LMC ~---------~
~ ~ Datum plane A
The Meaning

Example 6-2. An application of the parallelism geometric tolerance.

Tangent Plane
Geometric tolerance zones are total. This means that all elements of the related
surface or axis must fall within this zone unless the note EACH ELEMENT or
EACH RADIAL ELEMENT is placed below the feature control frame, as discussed
previously. The total geometric tolerance zone also means that the surface elements
or axis can be anywhere within the geometric tolerance zone. An additional
requirement can be applied to the surface within the geometric tolerance zone by
placing the tangent plane symbol after the geometric tolerance in the feature control
frame.
 ■

~rs1on 204 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A tangent plane is a plane that contacts the high points of the specified feature.
When a tangent plane control is required, the tangent plane symbol follows the
geometric tolerance in the feature control frame. A tangent plane application is used
with a parallelism geometric tolerance in Example 6-3. In this application, the actual
surface can be outside the parallelism geometric tolerance zone, but the tangent plane
must be within the parallelism geometric tolerance zone.

j_~ 0.8H
1.SH T
t
H = Letter height

Symbol Specifications

J_ ~ - - - ~ --'-'-
I//'--'-[_o.--'2G)=--[__.AI
8 .5±0.3 ~~---~~

The Drawing
~
Tangent plane 0.2 wide parallelism
A plane contacting the high tolerance zone
points of the actual surface Two parallel p lanes

____
pa;!:~~

8.8
MMC

L8.2 Actual surface Datum p lane A J

LMC
The Meaning
Example 6-3. Using the tangent plane application.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 205

Axis Parallelism
A parallelism tolerance can be established for a feature axis by two parallel
planes that are parallel to a datum plane, and between which the axis must lie. For
example, the axis of a hole can be specified within a tolerance zone that is parallel
to a given datum feature. This parallelism tolerance zone must also be within the
specified locational tolerance. The feature control frame is placed with the diameter
dimension, as shown in Example 6-4. Remember, placing the feature control frame
with a diameter dimension associates the related geometric tolerance with the feature
axis. RFS is assumed.

20
J_ ~--+------,,-----,

J-20
The Drawing

- i- 0.2 w ide parallelism tolerance zone

Datum p lane A Possible orientation of feature axis

SECTIO N A-A
The Meaning

Example 6-4. Specifying parallelism of an axis to a datum plane.

Parallelism can also be applied to the axes of two or more features when a
parallel relationship between the features is desired. The axis of a feature must
lie within a cylindrical tolerance zone that is parallel to a given datum feature axis.
This is a diameter tolerance zone. RFS is assumed unless MMC or LMC is applied.
Example 6-5 shows an RFS application and Example 6-6 shows an MMC
application.
 ■

~rs1on 206 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A
---,
025

0 12±0.5
I // I 0 0 . 6 I A I

--1
A
The Drawing

Datum axis A ~
-'-I-- - -

00.6 parallelism
tolerance zone
J
SECTION A-A
The Meaning

Example 6-5. Specifying parallelism of an axis to a datum fea ture axis. RFS is
assumed in this examp le.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 207

A
--,
¢25

¢12±0.5
l//l 00.2@ IAI

---1
A
The Drawing

Datum axis A

0 0.2 parallelism
tolerance zone a t MMC

SECTION A-A
The Meaning
Example 6-6. Specifying parallelism of an axis to a datum feature axis for a feature at
MMC.
 ■

~rs1on 208 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Parallelism of Line Elements

Orientation tolerances, such as parallelism, perpendicularity, angularity, and, in
some cases, profile, are implied to be total where an axis or all elements of a surface
must fall within the specified tolerance zone. Where it is desirable to control only
individual line elements, rather than the entire surface, the note EACH ELEMENT
is placed below the feature control frame, as shown in Example 6-7. This allows
control of individual elements of the surface independently related to the datum and
does not control the entire surface within the zone. Note that the EACH ELEMENT
specification only controls elements in a plane parallel to the view in which the
tolerance is given. As shown in Example 6-7, the parallelism control only applies in
one direction, which in this case is the long edge of the part.

24±0.4 I// IO. 2 5 I A I

EACH ELEMENT
~~
The Drawing

..L

Datum p lane A
The Meaning

Example 6-7. Specifying parallelism of line elements to a datum feature.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 209

Parallelism of Radial Elements

A radial element is a line element on the contour of a radial surface. When
control of parallelism for individual line elements on a radial surface is desired,
the note EACH RADIAL ELEMENT is placed under the feature control frame as
shown in Example 6-8. This allows control of individual elements of the surface
independently related to the datum feature.

R2 4

L t ·~-
0 19 .05
j

II 0 .02 A B
EACH RAD IAL ELEMENT
The Drawing

R
1
Radial element _,,,/

Possible orientation
of radial element
1 0.02 wide tolerance zone

Datum axis B

~----</ Datum plane A

The Meaning
Example 6-8. Specifying parallelism of radial elements to a datum.
 ■

~rs1on 210 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perpendicularity Tolerance
Perpendicularity is the condition of a surface, center plane, or axis at a right
angle (90°} to a datum plane or axis. A perpendicularity tolerance is established by
a specified geometric tolerance zone made up of two parallel planes or cylindrical
zones that are a basic 90° to a given datum plane or axis, and within which the actual
surface or axis must lie. The perpendicularity geometric characteristic symbol and
associated feature control frame are detailed in Example 6-9.

H = Letter height

Symbol Specifications

Example 6-9. A feature control frame with the perpendicularity geometric

characteristic symbol and datum reference.

Perpendicularity of a Surface
When a surface is to be perpendicular to a datum, the feature control frame
can be connected to the surface with a leader or from an extension line, as shown in
Example 6-10. The actual surface is oriented between two parallel planes that are
perfectly 90° to the datum plane. When applied to a feature of size perpendicularity
can be controlled RFS, MMC, or LMC, and a datum references is required.

--I 1-- 0.15 perpendicularity

II tolerance zon e

The Drawing

The Meaning

Example 6-10. An application of the perpendicularity geometric tolerance to one

da turn reference.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 211

In Example 6-10, the surface is held perpendicular to one datum plane. It is

also possible to hold a surface perpendicular to two datum planes. When this is
done, the surface must lie between two parallel planes that are perpendicular to two
datum planes. Both datums are referenced in the feature control frame, as shown
in Example 6-11. Example 6-11B shows the use of angularity in a feature control
frame as an alternate practice that can be used to control parallel and perpendicular
relationships.

1-1_1 ~.2IAI BI

~u CL@

The Drawing

The Meaning

Example 6-11. A-An application of the perpendicularity geometric tolerance to two

datum references. B--The use of angularity is an alternate practice to control parallel
and perpendicular relationships.
 ■

~rs1on 212 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perpendicularity of an Axis
Perpendicularity can be a tolerance zone made up of two parallel planes
perpendicular to a datum plane or axis within which the axis of the feature must lie.
In this application, the datum feature is established and the feature control frame is
placed below the diameter dimension controlling perpendicularity. This geometric
tolerance only applies in the view where the dimension is shown. RFS is implied
unless MMC or LMC is specified in the feature control frame after the geometric
tolerance. For example, the 0.2 wide perpendicularity tolerance zone in Example 6-12
controls the orientation as shown in Section A-A, but not in the direction represented
by Section B-B.

Ll ,----------+----,

12)25 A l - + - - -+------+-j A

j
~
8
The Drawing

0.2 w ide perpendicularity

tolerance zone
90°

No orientatio~
control
Possible orientation
of feature axis SECTION 8-8
SECTION A- A
The Meaning

Example 6-12. Specifying perpendicularity of an axis to a datum axis.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 213

A cylindrical perpendicularity tolerance zone can be applied by placing a

diameter symbol in front of the geometric tolerance in the feature control frame.
As shown in Example 6-13, the axis of the 012 hole is contained within a cylindrical
tolerance zone that is perpendicular to the axis of Datum A. However, there is
nothing to keep the cylindrical tolerance zone from rotating around the axis of
Datum A if the feature is viewed from the end of the datum cylinder.
In Example 6-13, the 025 cylindrical feature is the datum reference feature A.
This is the axis that establishes the resistance for the degrees of freedom of the part.
When looking at the end of the 025 cylinder, the cylinder resists movement in the Y
and Z directions and resists rotation about the Y and Z axis, but there is no resistance
about the X axis. In this case, the effect of applying a cylindrical tolerance zone to the
012 hole accomplishes nothing in relation to controlling the degrees of freedom of
the part.

Lj ------~
025 A l _ _ _ -+----+- j A

j
--1
B
The Drawing

0 0.2 perpendicularity
tolerance zone
90°

No orientatio~
control
Possible orientation
of feature axis SECTION B- B
SECTION A- A
The Meaning

Example 6-13. Applying a cylindrical perpendicularity tolerance zone.

 ■

~rs1on 214 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Alternately, the desired effect works if a slot runs the length of the 025 cylinder,
at the circumference, and is identified as Datum B. Then, adding the cylindrical
tolerance zone in the feature control frame and including Datum Bas the secondary
datum establishes the resistance for the degrees of freedom. Refer to Example 6-14.
The 025 cylinder resists movement in the Y and Z directions and resists rotation
about the Y and Z axis, and there is resistance about the X axis when looking into the
end of the cylinder.

¢1 2

._J
B

The Drawing

Datum center p lane B

00.2 perpendicularity
tolerance zone - -
90° Possible
orientation of
feature axis

00.2
perpendicularity
Possible orientation tolerance zone
of fea ture axis

SECTIO N A-A
SECTION B- B
The Meaning

Example 6-14. Adding a slot identified as Datum B to the length of the 025 cylinder.
Adding a cylindrical tolerance zone in the feature control frame and including
Datum Bas the secondary datum establishes the desired resistance for the degrees of
freedom of the part.

Another application that can require a perpendicularity specification is a

cylindrical feature such as a pin or stud. In this situation, the feature axis is within a
cylindrical tolerance zone that is perpendicular to a datum plane. The feature control
frame is attached to the diameter dimension and a diameter symbol precedes the
geometric tolerance to specify a cylindrical tolerance zone, as shown in Example 6-15.
Regardless of feature size is implied as shown in Example 6-lSA. Example 6-15B
shows the use of maximum material condition.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 215

H 19±O.25
I_L I 00.2 IAI
A
I_L l 00.2@IAI
B

The Drawing

00.2 perpendicularity
tolerance zone

Datum plane A

00.2 perpendicularity
tolerance zone at MMC

Datum plane A

00.7 perpendicularity
tolerance zone at LMC
B
The Meaning
Example 6-15. Specifying the perpend icu larity of an axis to a datum plan e.
A- Regardless of feature size application. B-Maximurn material condition application.
 ■

~rs1on 216 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perpendicularity of a Center Plane

A symmetrical feature, such as a slot, can be specified as perpendicular to a
datum plane. In this application, the feature center plane is held within two parallel
planes that are perpendicular to a given datum plane. The center plane must also be
within the specified locational tolerance. Refer to Example 6-16.

- - 1 24±0.4
-+---+--~ -~-□ 1slA

The Drawing

Datum plane A

Possible orientation of feature axis _u_~---,

0.15 wide perpendicularity
tolerance zone

The Meaning

Example 6-16. Specifying the perpendicularity of a center plane to a datum plane.

Perpendicularity of Line Elements

Another tolerancing possibility is that single line elements of a surface, rather
than the entire surface, can be perpendicular to a given datum. When any single
line element of the object shall be held perpendicular to a datum, the note EACH
ELEMENT is indicated below the feature control frame, as shown in Example 6-17.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 217

_l_ 0. 15 A
EACH ELEMENT

The Drawing

_____j l--- 0.15 w ide perpendicularity

II tolerance zone

Datum plane A
The Meaning

Example 6-17. Specifying perpendicularity of line elements to a datum plane.

 ■

~rs1on 218 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perpendicularity of Radial Elements

When control of perpendicularity for individual line elements on a radial surface
is desired, the note EACH RADIAL ELEMENT is placed under the feature control
frame as shown in Example 6-18. This allows control of individual elements of the
surface independently related to the datum.

------+------

1_u o.31 A 1
EACH RADIAL
ELEMENT

The Drawing

90°

------+------

Radial element
element

Possible orientation
of radial element
Datum plane A
The Meaning

Example 6-18. Specifying perpendicularity of radial elements to a datum.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 219

Combination of Parallelism and

Perpendicularity Tolerances
The combination of parallelism and perpendicularity can be achieved by
combining the parallelism and perpendicularity controls, as shown in Example 6-19.
This allows versatility by providing uniform parallelism and perpendicularity to
related datums.

_l_ 0.4 A
II 0.25 B

Example 6-19. Combined parallelism and perpendicularity applied to the same

surface.

The tolerance zones are often different, but when appropriate, they can be the
same. When the geometric tolerance zones are the same, they still remain in their
own feature control frame compartments, as shown in Example 6-20.

_l_ 0 .25 A
II 0 .25 B
Example 6-20. A combined feature control frame with equal geometric tolerance
zones.
 ■

~rs1on 220 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Angularity Tolerance
Angularity is the condition of a surface, center plane, or axis at any specified
angle from a datum plane or axis. An angularity geometric tolerance zone is
established by two parallel planes or cylindrical zones at any specified basic angle,
other than 90°, to a datum plane, a pair of datum planes, or an axis. The angularity
geometric characteristic symbol and associated feature control frame are detailed in
Example 6-21.

H ; Letter height
Symbol Specifications
Example 6-21. A feature control frame with the angularity geometric characteristic
symbol and datum reference.

Angularity of a Surface
When applying an angularity geometric tolerance to a surface, the feature
control frame is normally connected to the surface by a leader, but it can be attached
to an extension line from the surface. The specified angle must be basic and dimensioned
from the datum plane, as shown in Example 6-22. RFS is the only material condition
that can be applied, because the feature to which the angularity is applied does not
have size.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 221

L:_ 0 .15 A

The Drawing

0.15 wide angularity tolerance zone

Datum p lane A
The Meaning

Example 6-22. An application of the angularity geometric tolerance to a datum

reference.
 ■

~rs1on 222 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Angularity of an Axis
The axis of a hole or other cylindrical feature can be dimensioned with an
angularity tolerance if the feature is at an angle other than 90° to a datum plane or
axis. This specification establishes two parallel planes spaced equally on each side
of the specified basic angle from a datum plane or axis between which the axis of
the considered feature must lie. This control applies only to the view in which it is
specified. The feature control frame is shown next to the feature diameter dimension
to specify axis control, as shown in Example 6-23. Note: An auxiliary view of the
hole should be provided giving the X and Y location dimensions to the center of
the hole. One location dimension could be given in the section view. Secondary and
tertiary datums could be considered for these location dimensions, which will then
allow you to control the axis at an angle to the primary datum and parallel to a
secondary or tertiary datum.
It is also possible to control the feature axis within a cylindrical angularity
tolerance zone. To do this, a diameter symbol is placed in front of the geometric
tolerance in the feature control frame. This indicates that the angularity tolerance

The Drawing

Possible orientation _ / Datum plane A

of feature axis
The Meaning

Example 6-23. An application of the angularity geometric tolerance of an axis to a

datum plane.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 223

zone is cylindrical, as shown in Example 6-24. Note: An auxiliary view of the hole
should be provided giving the X and Y location dimensions to the center of the hole.
One location dimension could be given in the section view. Secondary and tertiary
datums could be considered for establishing these location dimensions.

\2)20±0.5

The Drawing

Possible orientation
of feature axis
_j Datum p lane A

The Meaning

Example 6-24. Controlling the axis of a feature within a cylindrical angularity

tolerance to a d a tum reference.

Angularity of a Center Plane and Single Element Control

An angularity geometric tolerance, just like parallelism and perpendicularity,
can control the orientation of the center plane of a symmetrical feature, such as a
slot or center plane. This angularity tolerance is formed by two parallel planes at a
specified basic angle to a datum plane between which the center plane of the feature
must lie. Angularity may also be controlled on a single line element or single radial
element basis by placing the note EACH ELEMENT or EACH RADIAL ELEMENT
below the feature control frame.

Application of Orientation Tolerances at RFS,

MMC, and Zero Tolerance at MMC
When a material condition symbol is not shown in the feature control frame,
then RFS is implied. This means that the geometric tolerance is the same w hen the
feature is manufactured at any produced size.
 ■

~rs1on 224 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Placing the MMC material condition symbol after the geometric tolerance in the
feature control frame means that the tolerance is held at the MMC produced size, and
then the geometric tolerance is allowed to increase equal to the amount of depar ture
from MMC.
Another application is zero geometric tolerance at MMC. This is done when
the geometric tolerance in the feature control frame is zero and the MMC material
condition symbol is used. This means that at the MMC produced size, the feature
must be perfect in orientation with respect to the specified datum. As the actual
produced size departs from MMC, the geometric tolerance increases equal to the
amount of departure. This is done to create a boundary of perfect form at MMC to
control the relationship between features.
Applications of RFS, MMC, and zero tolerance at MMC are shown in Example 6-25.
The idea behind using zero geometric tolerance at MMC is to allow more size
tolerance. In Example 6-25C, with zero geometric tolerance at MMC applied, the size
tolerance is increased to 19.7-20.2 as shown.
Zero orientation tolerance at MMC can be used for parallelism, perpendicularity,
or angularity. While the zero geometric tolerance at MMC method is easy
and eliminates the use of a note, the note PERFECT ORIENTATION AT MMC
REQUIRED FOR RELATED FEATURES can also appear on the drawing.

0 20.2 0 20.2
19 .8 19. 7
I~_L~l~</J_o.
A
~l~AI I_LI </Jo
C
@I AI
I_L l</Jo.1@IAI
B
Optional Feature
Control Frames

Geometric Tolerances Based

19.8-20.2 19.7-20.2 on the Optional Feature
Possible Possible Control Frames
Produced Produced
Sizes Sizes C. Zero at
A.RFS B. MMC MMC
MMC - - 19.7 0
19.8 19.8 0.1 0.1 0.1
19.9 19.9 0.1 0.2 0.2
20.0 20.0 0.1 0.3 0.3
20.1 20.1 0.1 0.4 0.4
LMC-- 20.2 20.2 0.1 0.5 0.5

Example 6-25. Applications of orientation geometric tolerances at RFS, MMC, and

zero tolerance at MMC.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 225

1. Orientation geometric tolerances control ______________ , and

2. _______ tolerances control the relationship of features to one another.

3. Orientation tolerances must be related to one or more datum features.

True or False?
4. Orientation tolerances control flatness. True or False?
5. Which of the following does an orientation tolerance imply: MMC, RFS, or LMC?

6. Define parallelism. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

7. What does it mean when a feature control frame with a parallelism geometric
characteristic symbol is placed below a diameter dimension? ________

8. Parallelism can be applied to the axes of two or more features when a parallel
relationship between the features is desired. True or False?
9. Define tangent plane and describe the relationship between the actual surface,
the tangent plane, and the geometric tolerance. ______________

10. Orientation tolerances are implied to be total. Therefore, how must a drawing
be modified where it is desirable to control only individual line elements rather
than the entire surface? _______________________
226 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

11. Define radial element and describe how a radial element specification is applied
to a drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

12. Define perpendicularity. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

13. A _ _ _ _ _ _ tolerance is established by a geometric tolerance zone made

up of two parallel planes that are a basic 90° to a given datum plane or axis
where the actual surface must lie.
14. A symmetrical feature, such as a slot, may be specified as perpendicular to a
datum plane. In this application, the feature _ _ _ _ _ _ is held within two
parallel planes that are _ _ _ _ _ _ to a given datum.
15. A(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ geometric tolerance zone is established by two parallel
planes at any specified basic angle, other than 90°, to a datum plane or axis. The
specified angle must be _ _ _ _ _ _ and must be dimensioned from the
_ _ _ _ _ _ plane.
16. Given the follow ing drawing, a reference chart showing a range of possible
produced sizes, and three optional feature control frames that may be applied
to the diameter dimension, provide the geometric tolerance at each possible
produced size for each feature control frame application.
Suggestion: Review Chapter 4, Material Condition and Material Boundary.

I_LI 00.08 IAI

A
I_L I0o.os@IAI
B
I_L I0o@IAI
C

DIAMETER TOLERANCE ZONES ALLOWED

Possible Produced Sizes A)RFS B)MMC C) Zero at MMC
24.0
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 227

17. Name the geometric tolerances that can be used to control orientation. _ _ __

18. Explain the geometric tolerance that exists in the following drawing.

A jA

<;Z\18
 .
~rs1on 228 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

◄
Print Reading Exercises
Name _______________

The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to the P,rint of the SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING found on age 433.

1. Name two orientation geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Completely describe the orientation geometric tolerances and related features

found on this print, include if the geometric tolerance is a surface, axis, or center
plane control, and give the material condition symbol applied to the geometric
tolerance. _____________________________

Refer to the print of the HUB-STATIONARY ATU found on page 435.

3. Name the orientation geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Completely describe the orientation geometric tolerances and related features

found on this print, include if the geometric tolerance is a surface, axis, or center
plane control, and give the material condition symbol applied to the geometric
tolerance. _____________________________
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 6 Orientation Tolerances 229

Refer to the print of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on page 441.

5. Name the orientation geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ __

6. Completely describe the orientation geometric tolerance and related features

found on this print, include if the geometric tolerance is a surface, axis, or center
plane control, and give the material condition symbol applied to the geometric
tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on page 443.

7. Completely describe the specifications provided in the feature control frame
associated with Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the PLATE-BOTTOM WEDGED, ADJUSTABLE PARALLEL

(HP) found on page 444.
8. Refer to the angularity geometric tolerance.
A) What is the geometric tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the material condition? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Name the reference datum. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Give the angle from the reference datum. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
E) Describe the combination geometric tolerance associated with this feature.

9. Describe the combination orientation geometric tolerance applied to Datum C.

 .
~rs1on 230 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL BEVEL CUITER found on page 447.
10. Completely describe the orientation geometric tolerances and related features
found on this print, include if the geometric tolerance is a surface, axis, or center
plane control, and give the material condition symbol applied to the geometric
tolerance.-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ ~ i_ll " 1
Location Tolerances
(Part I)

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Describe the types of control specified by location tolerances.
0 Apply or interpret location tolerances on drawings.
0 Explain the differences between conventional tolerancing and positional
tolerancing.
0 Determine positional tolerances for features at different material conditions.
0 Use and interpret rectangular coordinate and polar coordinate dimensioning on
drawings.
0 Describe the purpose of composite positional tolerancing.
0 Apply or interpret composite positional tolerances on drawings.

Technical Terms
Basic dimensions Pattern-locating control
Coaxial features Polar coordinate dimensioning
Coaxial positional tolerance Positional tolerancing
Composite positional tolerancing Rectangular coordinate
Conventional tolerancing dimensioning
Extreme attitude variation Single composite pattern
Extreme conditions True position
Extreme positional variation Two single-segment feature
Feature-relating control control frame
Location tolerances Virtual condition
Location tolerancing

Location tolerances are used for the purpose of locating features from datums,
or for establishing coaxiality or symmetry. Location tolerances include:
• Positional.
• Concentricity.
• Symmetry.
Positional tolerancing is used to define a zone in which the center, axis, or
center plane of a feature of size is permitted to vary from true position. True position
is the theoretically exact location of a feature. Basic dimensions are used with
baseline or chain dimensioning systems to establish the true position from specified
datum features and between interrelated features.
Location tolerancing is specified by a positional, concentricity, or symmetry
symbol, a tolerance, and appropriate datum references placed in a feature control

231
 ■

~rs1on 232 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

frame. When positional tolerancing is used, the appropriate material condition

symbol must be specified after the tolerance in the feature control frame. Otherwise,
RFS is assumed.
In comparison to conventional methods, the use of positional tolerancing
concepts provides some of the greatest advantages to mass production. The
coordinate dimensioning system limits the actual location of features to a
rectangular tolerance zone. Using positional tolerancing, the location tolerance
zone changes to a cylindrical shape, thus increasing the possible location of the
feature by about 54%. This improves the interchangeability of parts while increasing
manufacturing flexibility and reducing the scrap rate of parts. The use of MMC
applied to the positional tolerance allows the tolerance zone to increase in diameter
as the feature size departs from MMC. This application also allows greater flexibility
in the acceptance of mating parts.

Positional Tolerance
The positional geometric characteristic symbol is placed in the feature control
frame as shown in Example 7-1. The next compartment of the feature control frame
contains the diameter symbol (if a cylindrical tolerance zone is applied) followed by
the specified positional tolerance and a material condition symbol (if MMC or LMC
is used). Additional compartments are used for datum reference.

H =Letter height

Symbol Specifications

Example 7-1. Placement of the positional geometric characteristic symbol and

tolerance in a feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 233

Some specific characteristics of positional tolerances include the following.

• True position is the theoretically exact location of the centerline of a feature,
as shown in Example 7-2.
• The MMC or LMC material condition symbol must be specified after the
positional tolerance and the MMB or LMB material boundary symbol must
follow the specified datum reference only if the datum reference is a fea ture
of size. Otherwise, RFS or RMB is assumed.
• Positional tolerances control the location of a cylindrical tolerance zone
in which the centerline of a feature is located, as show n in Example 7-2.
Where a feature other than a cylindrical shape is located, the tolerance value
represents the distance between two parallel straight lines or planes, or the
distance between two uniform boundaries.
• Positional tolerances are established with a diameter tolerance zone, as
show n in Example 7-2, unless the tolerance zone is between two parallel
straight lines or planes, or between two uniform boundaries.

Example 7-2. A diameter positional tolerance zone with true position shown. While
this displays the cylind rical tolerance zone, the tolerance zone can also be between
two parallel straight lines or planes, or between two uniform boundaries, depending
on the application.
 ■

~rs1on 234 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A Comparison between Conventional Tolerancing

and Positional Tolerancing
The term conventional tolerancing as used in this text refers to the use
of conventional coordinate dimensioning practices. A comparison between
conventional coordinate location dimensioning and positional dimensioning and
tolerancing can help you understand the function of geometric tolerancing for the
location of features. The location of a hole using conventional dimensioning and
tolerancing methods is shown in Example 7-3.
The 12±0.25 location dimensions in Example 7-3 establish a total tolerance zone
of 0.5. This tolerance zone is square, as you can see in Example 7-4.

¢ 15 ± 0 .5

12±0.25

L ~-~
~ 12±0.25
Example 7-3. Location of a hole using conventional coordinate dimensioning.

0.5

0.5

12

L ~-~
~1 2
Example 7-4. The conventional location tolerance zone.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 235

The 0.5 square tolerance zone shown in Example 7-5 demonstrates that
the actual center of the hole can fall anywhere within the square area and the
manufactured part is acceptable.
The application of positional tolerancing on the same part allows the acceptable
tolerance zone to increase in size. Consider the following points.
• The diagonal of the square tolerance zone, represented by the dashed line in
Example 7-5, is the greatest distance that allows variation in the location of
the center.
• The leng th of this diagonal is equal to a constant of 1.414 times the tolerance
of the location dimensions. The constant 1.414 is used only for dimensions
toleranced equally in the X and Y axis, as in this example. If the location
tolerances are not equal, a rectangular tolerance zone is created. In a case
where the tolerance zone is rectangular, use the formula A 2 + B' = C2. A and
B are the sides of the rectangle and C is the diagonal.
• The tolerance zone in Example 7-5 has a diagonal length of 1.414 x 0.5 = 0.707,
rounded to 0.7. Refer to Example 7-6.

ro.s--j

81
Example 7-5. A close look at the conventional location tolerance zone.

ro.s--j

<8 1 07✓
Example 7-6. The length of the diagonal of a square tolerance zone produced by
conventional dimensioning.
 ■

~rs1on 236 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

• In a positional tolerance for the location of a hole, this 0.7 diagonal becomes
a diameter tolerance zone that is cylindrical in shape through the thickness
of the part. This is how a conventional location tolerance can be converted
directly to a positional tolerance. It has been proved that the diagonal
tolerance zone is acceptable in any direction, thus creating a circular
tolerance zone. The result of this action is an increase of 54% in permissible
area for the location of the hole. The relationship between the square
conventional tolerance and the round positional tolerance zone is shown in
Example 7-7. With the use of positional tolerancing, there is an increase in
acceptable mating parts and a possible reduction in manufacturing costs.
See Appendix ClO and Appendix C11 for coordinate-to-positional tolerance
conversion charts.

Example 7-7. The positional tolerance zone circumscribed about the conventional
tolerance zone.

When converting a drawing with conventional location dimensioning to a

drawing with positional tolerancing, use the following guidelines.
• Add datums as appropriate. Notice in Example 7-8 the datums A, B, and
C have been placed on the drawing. Perpendicularity of the true position
centerline is controlled relative to the primary datum (Datum A in this case).
Datum Band Datum C control the location of true position.
• Change the location dimensions from plus-minus dimensions to basic
dimensions, as shown in Example 7-8. This locates the theoretically exact
true position of the hole.
• Add the feature control frame to the diameter dimension, as shown in
Example 7-8. Show the positional symbol in the first compartment, followed
by the diameter symbol, the calculated positional tolerance, and the MMC
symbol unless otherwise specified. MMC is a commonly used material
condition symbol with positional tolerancing. However, RFS is assumed
unless MMC or LMC is specified. The last three compartments in the feature
control frame contain the datum references A, B, and C.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 237

015± 0 .5
I-$- I0 o. 7-@-M-IA-IB-1c-1

Example 7-8. A drawing with positional tolerancing. Notice the datum feature
symbols, basic location dimensions, and feature control frame added.

The previous discussion explained the difference between conventional

tolerancing and positional tolerancing and how to make a direct conversion of
a drawing with conventional dimensioning to positional tolerancing. In many
situations, the engineer gives the desired positional tolerances. Only direct
application to the drawing is required and no conversion is necessary.
When locating holes using positional tolerancing, the location dimensions must
be basic. This can be accomplished by applying the basic dimension symbol to each
of the basic dimensions, or specifying on the drawing or in a reference document the
general note "UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS LOCATING TRUE POSITION ARE
BASIC."
Positional tolerances are often applied at MMC. However, either MMC or LMC
must be indicated in the feature control frame to the right of the positional tolerance
as applicable. Otherwise, RFS is assumed. Example 7-9 shows the cylindrical
tolerance zone that is established by the positional tolerance specified in Example 7-8.
The true position centerline is perpendicular to the primary datum. The centerline of
the hole can be anywhere within the diameter and length of the specified cylindrical
positional tolerance zone at the maximum material condition size of the hole.
 ■

~rs1on 238 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

As you look at Example 7-9, notice that the hole in part "A" shows the axis of
the hole at true position. The example in part "B" shows the axis of the hole at the
extreme side of the positional tolerance zone. This is referred to as extreme positional
variation. The example in part "C" shows the axis of the hole at an extreme angle
inside the positional tolerance zone. This is referred to as extreme attitude variation.
For more information, refer to Appendix C12, Positional Tolerance Zone Analysis.

D
Example 7-9. The hole axis in relation to the positional tolerance zone using the
following conditions: A-The axis of the hole at true position and the positional
tolerance zone at MMC. B-The axis of the hole at the extreme side of the positional
tolerance zone (extreme positional variation). The positional tolerance zone is at
MMC. C-The axis of the hole at an extreme angle inside the positional tolerance
zone (extreme attitude variation). The positional tolerance zone is at MMC. O-The
axis of the hole at true position and the positional tolerance zone at LMC. Notice
the bonus positional tolerance provided when the hole is at LMC, as compared with
Example A where the positional tolerance is at MMC.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 239

Positional Tolerance at MMC

The maximum material condition (MMC) of a feature means that the actual
size contains the maximum amount of material permitted by the size dimension
tolerance for that feature. A hole or other internal feature is at MMC when the actual
size is at the lower limit. A shaft or other external feature is at MMC when the actual
size is at the upper limit.
A positional tolerance at MMC means that the specified positional tolerance
applies when the feature is manufactured at MMC. The axis of a hole must fall within
a cylindrical tolerance zone with an axis located at true position. The diameter of this
cylindrical tolerance zone is equal to the specified positional tolerance when the hole
is manufactured at MMC. The positional tolerance is then allowed to increase equal to
the amount of change or departure from MMC. The maximum amount of positional
tolerance is when the feature is produced at LMC, as shown in the analysis provided in
Example 7-10. When MMC is applied to a positional tolerance, the following formulas
are used to calculate the positional tolerance at any produced size.
Internal Feature (as in Example 7-10):
Actual Size - MMC + Specified Positional Tolerance = Applied Positional Tolerance

0 10 .2
9 .8

J
Possible
Position Virtual
Produced
Tolerance Condition
Sizes
MMC~ 9.8 0.2 9.6
9.9 0.3 9.6
10.0 0.4 9.6
10.1 0.5 9.6
LMC~ 10.2 0.6 9.6

Example 7-10. Positional tolerance at MMC.

 ■

~rs1on 240 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

External Feature:
MMC - Actual Size + Specified Positional Tolerance = Applied Positional Tolerance
Notice in Example 7-10 that the virtual condition is calculated and listed with
each produced size. Virtual condition is discussed in the next section.

Introduction to Virtual Condition

Virtual condition is a boundary that takes into consideration the combined
effect of feature size at MMC and geometric tolerance. Virtual condition establishes
a working zone that is used to establish gage member sizes and the MMC size of
mating parts or fasteners for mating parts. The virtual condition represents extreme
conditions at MMC plus or minus the related geometric tolerance. This is used to
determine clearance between mating parts. It is important to determine the virtual
condition when designing mating parts. Using virtual condition is described further in
Chapter 8. Virtual condition is calculated for situations involving internal or external
features. When calculating the virtual condition of an internal feature, use the formula:
MMC OF FEATURE
- RELATED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
VIRTUAL CONDITION
Referring to Example 7-10, the virtual condition of the hole is 9.6, calculated as follows:
9.8 (MMC OF FEATURE)
- 0.2 (RELATED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE)
9.6 (VIRTUAL CONDITION)
When calculating the virtual condition of an external feature, use the formula:
MMC OF FEATURE
+ RELATED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
VIRTUAL CONDITION

Positional Tolerance Based on the Surface of a Hole

Positional tolerance applied at MMC can also be explained in regard to the
surface of the hole rather than the hole axis. In this explanation, all elements of the
hole surface must be outside a theoretical boundary located at true position and the
hole must be produced within the specified size limits, as shown in Example 7-11.

Hole position can vary but no

point on its surface shall be
inside the theoretical boundary

True position

Theoretical boundary:
Minimum diameter of hole (MMC)
minus the position tolerance

MMC Hole - Positional Tolerance= Theoretical Boundary

Example 7-11. The boundary for the surface of a hole at MMC.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 241

Zero Positional Tolerancing at MMC

Zero geometric tolerancing was introduced in Chapter 6. This concept can also be
applied to positional tolerances. You have already seen that the application of positional
tolerance at MMC allows the positional tolerance zone to exceed the amount specified
when the feature is produced at any actual size other than MMC. Zero positional tolerance
can be specified when it is important to be certain that the tolerance is totally dependent
on the actual size of the feature. When this is done, the positional tolerance is zero when
the feature is produced at MMC and must be located at true position. When the actual
size of the feature departs from MMC, then the positional tolerance is allowed to increase
equal to the amount of departure. The total allowable variation in positional tolerance is
at LMC, unless a maximum tolerance is specified. Other than specifying zero positional
tolerance at MMC in the feature control frame, this is the same application explained in the
previous discussion Positional Tolerance at MMC. When zero positional tolerance at MMC
is specified, the engineer normally applies the MMC of the hole at the absolute minimum
required for insertion of a fastener when located at true position. Refer to Exam ple 7-12.

010 .2
9 .6

Possible
Position Virtual
Produced
Tolerance Condition
Sizes
MMC- 9.6 0 9.6
9.7 0.1 9.6
9.8 0.2 9.6
9.9 0.3 9.6
10.0 0.4 9.6
10.1 0.5 9.6
LMC-- 10.2 0.6 9.6

Exam ple 7-12. Zero positional tolerance at MMC.

 ■

~rs1on 242 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The intent when using zero positional tolerance at MMC is to allow for a greater
size tolerance. Compare the drawings in Example 7-10 and Example 7-12. Notice
that the hole tolerance in Example 7-10 is 10.2 -9.8 = 0.4 and the hole tolerance in
Example 7-12 is 10.2- 9.6 = 0.6, while the virtual condition of both features is the
same at9.6.

Positional Tolerance at RFS

Regardless of feature size (RFS) is assumed when no material condition
symbol is placed after the positional tolerance in the feature control frame. RFS
can be applied to the positional tolerance when it is desirable to maintain the given
positional tolerance at any produced size. The application of RFS requires closer
controls of the features involved because the size of the positional tolerance zone
does not increase, as it does when MMC is used. Remember, RFS is assumed for the
geometric tolerance unless otherwise specified. Refer to Example 7-13.

¢18 .6
18.0

Possible
Geometric Tolerances at
Produced
Given Produced Sizes
Sizes
MMC - - 18.0 0.2
18.2 0.2
18.4 0.2
LMC - - 18.6 0.2

Example 7-13. Positional tolerance at RFS.

Positional Tolerance at LMC

Positional tolerance at least material condition (LMC) is used to control the
relationship of the feature surface and the true position of the largest hole size. The
function of LMC is sometimes used to control minimum edge distance or minimum
wall thickness. When the LMC material condition symbol is used in the feature
control frame, the given positional tolerance is held at the LMC produced size. Then,
as the produced size departs from LMC toward MMC, the positional tolerance
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 243

increases equal to the amount of change from LMC. The maximum amount of
positional tolerance is applied at the MMC produced size, as shown in Example 7-14.
When using the LMC control, perfect form is required at the LMC produced size.
LMC specifications are limited to positional tolerances where the use of MMC does
not give the desired control and RFS is too restrictive.

¢ 18.6
18 .0

The Drawing

20.6 minimum edge

0.2 positional
tolerance at LMC

0 18.6 LMC

Hole at MMC (18.0) Hole at LMC (18.6)

Location 30.00 Location 30.00
-l/2MMC 9.00 -1/2 LMC 9.30
- 1/2 Geometric Tolerance 0.40 -1/2 Geometric Tolerance 0.10
Minimum Edge 20.60 Minimum Edge 20.60

The Meaning

Possible
Geometric Tolerances at
Produced
Given Produced Sizes
Sizes
MMC-- 18.0 0.8
18.2 0.6
18.4 0.4
LMC - - 18.6 0.2

Example 7-14. Positional tolerance at LMC.

 ■

~rs1on 244 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

As show n in Example 7-14, the minimum edge for the part is the same when the
hole tolerance is at LMC or MMC and is calculated using these formulas:
LOCATION
-1 /2 LMC
-1 /2 GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
MINIMUM EDGE
LOCATION
-1 / 2MMC
- 1/ 2 GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
MINIMUM EDGE
When LMC is applied to a positional tolerance, the following formulas are used
to calculate the positional tolerance at any produced size:
Internal Feature:
LMC - Actual Size+ Specified Positional Tolerance = Applied Positional Tolerance
External Feature:
Actual Size - LMC + Specified Positional Tolerance = Applied Positional Tolerance

Locating Multiple Features

Multiple features of an object can be dimensioned using positional tolerancing.
When this is done, the location of the features must be dimensioned from datums
and between features using baseline or chain dimensioning related to rectang ular or
polar coordinates.
Rectangular coordinate dimensioning is where linear dimensions are used to
locate features from planes, centerlines, or center planes. Refer to Example 7-15.
~rs ion Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 245

4X \2)12±0.4

6X ¢s+g.s

12

¢50.0
49 .5

L.. ________O J

HAJ
Example 7-15. Rectangular coordinate dimensioning.
 ■

~rs1on 246 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Polar coordinate dimensioning is where angular dimensions are combined with other
dimensions to locate features from planes, centerlines, or center planes. Refer to Example 7-16.
When multiple features are located, the following guidelines apply.
• The pattern of features is located collectively in relation to datum features
that are not subject to size changes. The actual centers of all features in the
pattern must lie on, or be within, the specified positional tolerance zone
when measured from the given datums.
• Multiple patterns of features are considered a single composite pattern if the
related feature control frames have the same datums, in the same order of
precedence, with the same material boundary condition symbols.

Locating a Single Composite Pattern

A group of features is referred to as a single composite pattern when they
are located relative to common datum features not subject to size tolerance, or
to common datum features of size specified on an RFS basis. All of the location
dimensions are basic from a common datum reference frame, as previously
discussed. All of the holes can be checked together, as shown in Example 7-17.

6X ¢8.4
8.0
l-$-I00.05 IAIB [

¢1 4+g - 1
8X )2)8±0.4
[-$-l00.1@[A [c@ I

n110 .60
\U10 .45
l~l~ os lA
45·

Example 7-16. Polar coordinate dimensioning.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 247

Locating Features in Patterns with Separate Requirements

A pattern of features is located as a single composite pattern, as previously
discussed, when there is no note given below the feature control frame that specifies
otherwise. When multiple patterns of features exist, and it is desired to treat the
patterns separately with regard to the datum references, the note "SEP REQr" (separate
requirement) is placed below each feature control frame. This allows the patterns to
be treated as separate patterns and to have their own datum reference frame. This can
be done when features in one pattern are different in size or have different location
requirements than the features in other patterns, as shown in Example 7-18. This
application can only be used when one or more of the datum features is a feature of size,
and either MMB or LMB is used as a material boundary modifier.

4 X y'.) 12±0.4
l$l</>o.o5@IA IBlcl

The Drawing

4X 00.05 positional
tolerance zone at MMC

20

15

VIEW A
15 ~ 20 SCALE 2 : 1
Datum plane C
Datum plane B
The Meaning
Example 7-17. Locating a single composite pattern.
 ■

~rs1on 248 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

l-$-l0o c@IAIB®I
SEP REQT

Example 7-18. Locating features in a pattern with separate requirements.

Positional Tolerance Specified Individually

When a multiple datum reference frame exists and features need to be
positioned to different datums individually, then a note can be placed next to
the datum feature symbols and related position tolerance feature control frame
identifying how many datum features and position tolerance specifications are to
be considered individually. For example, if there are two separate datum features
that are identified with the same datum identification letter, but they need to be
considered individually, the note 2X INDIVIDUALLY is placed next to the datum
feature symbols and related position tolerance specification feature control frame.
An example of this can be seen on the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK drawing in
the Prints for End-of-Chapter Print Reading Exercises section of this textbook on page 433.
This drawing has four holes at different angles. The holes on the right side need to
be positioned to different datums than the holes on the left side. Instead of calling
out two more datums and having to cut another section to show the holes on the left
side, the datums are used individually and the location of two holes on each side are
positioned to the two datums individually. Using this method, only two holes are
checked for position at a time to different datums.

Composite Positional Tolerance

Composite positional tolerancing is used when it is desirable to permit the location
of a pattern of features to vary within a larger tolerance than the positional tolerance
specified for each feature. For this application, the feature control frame is doubled in
height and divided into two parts. Only one positional geometric characteristic symbol is
used and it is placed in one double height feature control frame compartment.
• The upper part of the feature control frame is the pattern-locating control and
specifies the larger positional tolerance for the pattern of features as a group.
• The lower entry is called the feature-relating control and specifies the
smaller positional tolerance for the individual features within the pattern.
The pattern-locating control locates the pattern of features as a group to the
specified datums. The pattern is located from the datums by basic dimensions. The
feature-relating control is a feature-to-feature relationship. The features are related to
each other with basic dimensions. The pattern-locating control and feature-relating
control are inspected separately but are interrelated.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 249

The feature-relating control is free to shift and slant within the boundaries
established by the pattern-locating control. When it is desired to control orientation
(perpendicularity) in the feature-relating control, only the primary datum is given in
the bottom half of the feature control frame. If no datum reference is provided in the
bottom half of the feature control frame, the feature-relating control is free to shift
and slant w ithin the boundaries established by the pattern-locating control.
The tolerance zone of an individual feature can extend partly beyond the group
zone, but the feature axis must fall within the confines of both zones. Also, all of the
feature axes must lie within both zones, as shown in Example 7-19.

_El Feature-
relating

B
~ The Drawing
Actual hole axis

Hole feature

9o0 .
~~
7 00 15 feature-relating control
is not located to Datums Band C

-L Hole axis
' ' '

I-- 00.6 pattern-locating control

The Meaning
Example 7-19. Composite positional tolerancing.
 ■

~rs1on 250 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The composite positional tolerance can also be applied with two datum references
placed in the lower half of the feature control frame. When this is done, the feature-
relating control must remain as a group that is perpendicular to the primary datum
and parallel to the secondary datum. Notice in Example 7-20 how the pattern-locating
zones and the feature-relating zones are parallel. This feature-relating orientation to
the secondary datum is not required when only the primary datum reference is placed
in the lower half of the feature control frame, as in Example 7-19.

The Drawing

00.15 feature-relating
control

Hole feature

Hole axis 1-- 0 0.6 pattern-locating control

aligns with Datum B
The Meaning
Example 7-20. The composite positional tolerance applied with two datum references
in the lower half of the feature control frame. This makes the pattern-locating zone
and the feature-relating zone parallel. The pattern-locating zone and the feature-
relating zone align with Datum B. Use of Datum B in the feature-relating feature
control frame adds the parallel requirement shown.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 251

Two single-segment feature control frames

The composite positional tolerance is specified by a feature control frame doubled
in height with one position symbol shown in the first compartment. Also provided is
a single datum reference given for orientation, or a double datum reference given for
orientation and alignment with respect to the feature-relating control. The two single-
segment feature control frame is similar, except there are two position symbols, each
displayed in a separate compartment, and a two-datum reference in the lower half
of the feature control frame, as shown in Example 7-21. The terms pattern-locating

2X ¢JUr Pattern-locating
-$- (Z)06@A B C
-$- (Z) 0 .15 @ AB
Feature-relating

_B
u~
The Drawing

Actual hole axis

00.15 feature-relating
control

Hole feature

( . T. 90
0 ~J

'
00.15 feature-relating control ahgns w ith
and 1s the same distance from Datum B

\_
Hole axis 41- 00.6 pattern-locating control aligns w ith
and is the same distance from Datum B
The Meaning
Example 7-21. The two single-segment positional tolerance application. Segment 1
control and Segment 2 control align and are the same distance from Datum B. The
basic location dimension from Datum B applies to the feature-relating tolerance zone.
 ■

~rs1on 252 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

and feature-relating are used to describe the tolerance zones in the upper and lower
segments of the feature control frame and only apply to composite tolerancing as
previously described. The reason is that in the multiple single-segment application,
the feature control frame controls the pattern location and any datums in that segment
of the feature control frame. The multiple single-segment feature control frame
controls pattern location and feature interrelation in each segment to the specified
datums. The final segment controls the feature relationship in addition to locating the
pattern to any datums applied. The terms segment 1 and segment 2 are used to describe
the tolerance zones in the upper and lower segments of the feature control frame for
a two single-segment feature control frame application. The top feature control frame
is segment 1 and it applies as described in the composite position tolerance. The lower
feature control frame is segment 2 where two datums control the orientation and
alignment. This type of positional tolerance provides a tighter relationship of the holes
within the pattern than the composite positional tolerance because both the pattern-
locating zones and the feature-relating zones must remain the same distance from the
secondary datum. Refer to Example 7-21.

Composite positional tolerancing applied to circular patterns

Composite positional tolerancing can be applied to circular patterns of features. In
this application, the pattern-locating tolerance zones are located using a basic diameter
and basic angle between features, and oriented to the specified datum reference frame.
The feature-relating tolerance zones are held perpendicular to the primary datum,
controlled as a group by the basic dimensions, and are partially or totally within the
boundaries of the pattern-locating tolerance zones. The actual feature axes must fall
within the boundaries of both tolerance zones. Refer to Example 7-22.
Two single-segment feature controls can also be applied to circular patterns. The
positional geometric characteristic symbol is displayed twice, as previously discussed.
This is used when it is necessary for the Segment 1 zones and Segment 2 zones to be
located from a common datum axis. Notice in Example 7-23 that Datum B (the datum
axis) is listed in both halves of the feature control frame. The slot and Datum C are
added to the part, so the two feature control frames do not cancel each other out. The
top portion of the feature control frame controls the location of the features as a group
to the datums. The slot and the tertiary datum are added to the Segment 1 control to
provide orientation of the pattern of holes. The lower portion of the feature control
frame is segment 2 and it controls the pattern of features to each other and their
location in relation to Datum Feature B.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 253

6X ¢8.4 Pattern-locating
8.0
-$- (,L)0 .8@ A B
(,L)0 .3@ A
" ' - Feature-relating

The Drawing

Actual feature axes

must lie w ithin both 00.8 pattern-locating
tolerance zones ~ tolerance zones

00.3 feature-relating
tolerance zones

r
Datum
Datum center
plane A
planeC

~ :::::::t:===±:i::..--!L

Actual feature _J
pattern

\_ Datum axis B

The Meaning
Example 7-22. Composite positional tolerancing applied to a circular pattern.
 ■

~rs1on 254 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

6X 60° 6X ¢~:6 /Segment I

-$- (,ZJ0.8@ A B@ C@
-$- (,ZJ0.3@ A B@
__:_]_ "-- Segment 2

The Drawing

Actual feature axes

must lie within both
tolerance zones

Datum
p lane A

Actual feature
pattern

The Meaning

Example 7-23. The two single-segment positional tolerance application for circular
patterns.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 255

Material condition requirements in composite positional tolerancing

Composite and two single-segment feature control frames must have the same
material condition, and the datums must be in the same order of precedence with the
same boundary condition.
Two separate feature control frames are used when the same material condition is
not required or the datum reference frames are different, as shown in Example 7-24.

Positional Tolerancing of Coaxial Features

Coaxial features are features having a common axis, such as counterbores,
countersinks, and counterdrills. When the positional tolerance of the coaxial features
is to be the same, such as the same for the hole and the associated counterbore,
then the feature control frame is placed below the note specifying the hole and
counterbore, as shown in Example 7-25. When this is done, the positional tolerance
zone diameter is identical for the hole and counterbore relative to the specified
datums.

2X ¢6 .0-6.5
-$- 02@ A B C
-$- 00.5@ D

2X ¢6.0-6 .5
-$- 02@ A B C
00.5@ A
33

Example 7-24. Using separate feature control frames to specify different datum
reference frames for positional tolerances.
 ■

~rs1on 256 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

8X ¢5.3-5.4
8X 45" LJ¢84-8.6
'f 4.6- 5.0
l'1!-l00.25@IAIB@ I

70 .C
>---- - - ;359 5 - - -- --. B

The Drawing

--I I-- 00.25 positional tolerance zone

11 for holes and counterbores at MMC

True position axis ~ Datum plane A

The Meaning

Example 7-25. Displaying the same positional tolerance for coaxial features.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 257

Different positional tolerances can be applied to coaxial features related to the

same datum features. For example, when the positional tolerance is different for the
counterbore and the related hole, then one feature control frame is placed under the
note specifying the hole size and another feature control frame is placed under the
note specifying the counterbore. Refer to Example 7-26. This can occur when the
counterbore is a different tolerance than the hole.
Positional tolerances can also be applied to coaxial features, such as
counterbore holes, by controlling individual counterbore-to-hole relationships
relative to different datum features. The application is similar to the one shown and
detailed in Example 7-26. However, an additional note is placed und er the datum

8X ¢5.3 - 5.4
l~l¢0.25@IAIB@I
8 X LJ ¢ 8. 4 - 8 .6 T 4 .6- 5 .0
1~1¢o.5@IAIB@I

The Drawing

-11-I 00.5 positional tolerance zone

for counterbores at MMC

~ True position axis

00.25 positional tolerance

zone for holes at MMC
11
-11-- ~ Datum plane A

The Meaning
Example 7-26. Displaying different positional tolerances for coaxial features.
 ■

~rs1on 258 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

feature symbol for the hole and under the feature control frame for the counterbore
indicating the number of places each applies on an individual basis, as shown in
Example 7-27. With this method, the holes are located as a single composite pattern
and then the counterbores are located individually to each related hole, with the
axis of the hole as the aligning datum.

8X <Z\5.3- 5.4

<Z\50

s~----0l~:g----
-l 1- 8X LJ <Z\8.4 - 8 .6 'f 4 .6 - 5 .0
1'1l- 100.1 s@1c@1
8 X INDIVIDUALLY

~~ 8X INDIVIDUALLY
The Drawing
Possible location of
counterbore axis ~ - I-- 00.15 positional tolerance zone
"'--.._ I for counterbores at MMC

DatumaxisC

Hole a t MMC --l 1-- ~ Datum plane A

The Meaning
Example 7-27. Positional tolerancing of coaxial features to different datum references.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 259

Coaxial Positional Tolerance

Coaxial features are two or more features that lie on a common axis. In the
previous discussion, counterbore features were described as being coaxial. This
discussion is in regard to coaxial features that are established as holes that are apart,
but in alignment, as shown in Example 7-28. A coaxial positional tolerance can
be used to control the alignment of two or more holes that share a common axis.
The positional tolerance of two or more coaxial holes can be controlled as shown
in Example 7-28 w here the positional tolerance zone of the holes is located by basic
dimensions from the referenced datums. Each hole can be produced at any location
within the positional tolerance zone.

The Drawing

Hole axis

J_

00 3 at MMC, coaxial
tolerance zones w ithin w hich
the axes of the holes must lie

The Meaning

Example 7-28. Controlling the positional tolerance of coaxial holes.

 ■

~rs1on 260 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

A composite position tolerance can also be used to locate coaxial holes. This is
used when a tolerance of location alone does not provide the necessary control of
alignment of the holes and a separate requirement must be specified. When this is
done, the positional tolerance feature control frame is doubled in height. The top half
of the frame is used to specify the coaxial diameter tolerance zones at MMC located
at true position relative to the specified datums in which the axes of the holes, as a
group, must lie. The lower half of the feature control frame is used to designate the
coaxial diameter tolerance zones at MMC in which the axes of the holes must lie
relative to each other. Refer to Example 7-29.
When locating the positional tolerance of coaxial holes of different sizes,
then the drawing looks similar to Example 7-29 except the different size holes are
dimensioned independently and the note "TWO COAXIAL HOLES" (where two is
the number of holes) is placed below the feature control frame. This acknowledges
that the same positional tolerance zone requirements apply to all holes.

-$- <2)03@ AB
00.1@

The Drawing

Hole axis

~~~~~ L .,MMC,=•••1 Wle,•"re~~

w ithin w hich the axes of the holes, as
a group, m ust lie

00.1 at MMC, coaxial tolerance

zones w ithin w hich the axes of the
holes must lie relative to each other

The Meaning

Example 7-29. Positional tolerancing for coaxial holes of the same size.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 261

Positional Tolerancing of Nonparallel Holes

Positional tolerances can be used in situations where the axes of the holes are not
parallel to each other and where they can also be at an angle to the surface, as shown
in Example 7-30.

l~ [<t>o 1@IA[B@ [

[~[00.2@[A[B@[

Example 7-30. Positional tolerancing of nonparallel holes.

Applying Different Positional Tolerances to the Same Feature

Different positional tolerances can be applied to a hole in each direction.
Example 7-31 shows a positional tolerance of 0.3 applied in one direction, and a 0.5
positional tolerance applied in the other direction on the 021±0.1 hole. The result is a
rectangular positional tolerance zone that is 0.3 - 0.5, and the axis of the hole can be
anywhere inside the rectangular zone.
 ■

~rs1on 262 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

021±0.1 -$ 0.3@ ABC

-$ 0 .5@ A BC

The Drawing

Datum
plane A 0.3 position tolerance

0.5 position
tolerance
J
Bidirectional positional
~38 tolerance zone
The Meaning
Example 7-31. Different position tolerances can be applied to a hole in each direction.
The result is a rectangular position tolerance zone.

Locating Slotted Features

Slotted features can be located to their centers with basic dimensions from established
datums. When a different positional tolerance is placed on the length than the width, the
feature control frame is added to both the length and width dimensions of the slotted
feature. This type of positional tolerance results in a rectangular tolerance zone that can be
used for locating holes or slots. The diameter symbol is omitted from the feature control
frame because the positional tolerance zone is non-cylindrical. This application provides
a positional tolerance zone in which the center axis, or center plane of a feature of size,
is permitted to vary from a true position within the specified tolerances, as shown in
Example 7-32. Example 7-32 shows the tolerance zones when the feature is at its MMC
size. The tolerance zones increase as the feature departs from MMC toward IMC, as
demonstrated with the following calculations:
Slot length:
Feature size 38 - tolerance zone 1.5
Feature size 38.1 - tolerance zone 1.6
Feature size 38.2 - tolerance zone 1.7
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 263

Slot width:
Feature size 10.5 - tolerance zone 0.2
Feature size 10.6- tolerance zone 0.3
Feature size 10.7 - tolerance zone 0.4
ASME Y14.5-2009 states that the same positional tolerancing for slotted features
can be defined in two ways. One definition is described in the previous description
and correlated with Example 7-32. The positional tolerance zone for slotted features
can also be controlled in relation to the surfaces of the feature. This application
means that each slotted feature is controlled by a theoretical boundary of identical
shape that is located at true position. The size of each slot must remain within the
size limits and no portion of the slot surface can enter the theoretical boundary.
The optional term BOUNDARY can be placed below each feature control frame.
See Example 7-33. The length and width of the boundary is calculated using the
following formulas:
MMC Length - Positional Tolerance = Boundary Length
MMC Width - Positional Tolerance = Boundary Width
When specified on an MMC or LMC basis, a boundary is defined as the virtual
condition and located at true position. The boundary may not be violated by the
surface or surfaces of the specified feature of size. The shaded area in Example 7-33
is the virtual condition boundary that may not be violated by the surfaces of the slot.
This application demonstrates why a gauge can be used to verify the position of the
slotted features.

>----->- 2X 3s+g 2
1~11.s@lxlYIZI

2x 1o.s+g.2
1~10.2@I XIYIZI

z
The Drawing
--j _,,-Datum
90° f" planeX 1.5 position tolerance

j_ =~-
27 0.2 position tolerance

12.5

" \ _ Bidirectional positional

~ ~38
tolerance zones
The Meaning
Example 7-32. Positional tolerancing for noncircular features. Where the center axis,
or center plane of a feature of size, is permitted to vary from a true position within
the specified tolerances.
 ■

~rs1on 264 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

f--- -~ t- 2X 33+g 2
1~11.s@lx lY IZ I
BOUNDARY " " -
~--+-----,__~ Optional

2X 10.s+g-2
l~lo.2@lxlYIZI
BOUNDARY

" " - Optional

z
The Drawing

- - - - ~ + - 38.0 MMC slot

- 1.5 position tolerance
/ Datum
90° / planeX 36.5 boundary

L
27 10.5 MMC slot
- 0.2 position tolerance
12.5 10.3 boundary

Slots must be within size

limits and their surfaces mu
remain outside of boundari,

The Meaning
Example 7-33. Positional tolerancing for noncircular features using the boundary
application. The shaded area (in The Meaning) is the virtual condition boundary that
may not be violated by the surfaces of the slot.

The positional tolerance can also be the same for the length and width. In this
case, the feature control frame is separated from the size dimension and connected to
the feature as shown in Example 7-34.
The boundary application can also be used for other features when the center
is not easily specified, such as a half slot-shape with one full radius end and a flat
surface on the other end.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 265

2X 10.s+ g -2

4X R

z
The Drawing

,- - - - • - 38.0 MMC slot

- 0.5 position tolerance
/ Datum
90° / planeX 37.5 boundary

J_
27 10.5 MMC slot
- 0.5 position tolerance
12.5 10 boundary

~ ~ 38

The Meaning
Example 7-34. Positional tolerancing for noncircular features with the same
positional tolerance for the length and width.

~ -------------------
In summary, the tolerance for slotted features can be defined three ways. Example 7-32
demonstrates the zone in which the center axis or center planes must lie. Example 7-33
shows how the positional tolerance wne for slotted features can also be controlled in
relation to the surfaces of the feature. This application means that each slotted feature
is controlled by a theoretical boundary of identical shape that is located at true
position. The size of each slot must remain within the size limits and no portion of
the slot surface can enter the theoretical boundary. The boundary is equal to the
MMC size of the slot minus its positional tolerance. Example 7-34 has the same
meaning as the description for Example 7-33 except the same positional tolerance is
applied to the length and width.
 ■

~rs1on 266 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Positional Tolerancing of Spherical Features

A positional tolerance can be used to control the location of a spherical feature
relative to other features of a part. When dimensioning spherical features, the
spherical diameter symbol precedes the feature size dimension. The feature control
frame is placed below the size d imension and the positional tolerance zone is
spherical in shape, as shown in Example 7-35.

S¢3o_g_4
l-$-ls¢o.slLIMI

The Drawing

0 0.8 spherical tolerance zone \

/ Spherical feature 0~~:~

Datum plane L

The Meaning

Example 7-35. Positional tolerancing of a spherical feature.

 ■

~rs1on Location Tolerances (Part I) 267

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

1. Describe the purpose of location tolerances. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ is used to define a zone in which the center, axis, or center plane

of a feature of size is permitted to vary from true position.
3. Define true position. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. _ _ _ _ _ _ dimensions are used to establish true position from specified

datum features and between interrelated features.
5. Location tolerancing is specified by a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ , a(n) _ _ _ _ __
or a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ symbol, a(n) _ _ _ _ _ _ , and appropriate
_ _ _ _ _ _ references placed in a feature control frame.
6. When positional tolerancing is used, the MMC or LMC material condition
symbol must be specified after the positional tolerance and the MMB or
LMB material boundary symbol must follow the specified datum reference.
Otherwise, RFS or RMB is assumed. True or False?
7. Redraw the object below making a complete conversion from conventional
coordinate dimensioning to positional tolerancing as follows.
A) Calculate the positional tolerance required to convert this drawing to a
positional tolerance drawing. (Show your calculations.)
B) Use full scale.
C) Use proper size symbols.
D) Use 20 mm for the thickness.

0 12±0.4

22 ± 0 .4

L ~--~
~ 22±0 .4
268 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Use the space below for the drawing in Question 7.

Show your calculations for Question 7 here. Note: The precision of the constant will
affect the degree of accuracy.

8. When locating features using positional tolerancing, the basic dimensions can be
drawn by placing the basic dimension symbol around each basic dimension or
specifying on the drawing (or in a reference document) the following general note:
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 269

9. Given the following drawing, a reference chart showing a range of possible

produced sizes, and four optional feature control frames that can be applied
to the diameter dimension, provide the positional tolerance at each possible
produced size for each feature control frame application.

A) I-$- I0 0 . 15 @ 1A IBICI
B) I-$- I0 0 . 1 5 IA I BIC I

C) I-$- I0 0 .15 CD IA IB ICI

D) I-$- I 0 0 @ IA IB IC I
Optional feature control frames
B

DIAMETER TOLERANCE ZONES ALLOWED

Possible Produced Sizes A)MMC B)RFS C) LMC D) Zero at MMC
12.0
12.2
12.4
12.6
10. Name the two types of dimensioning systems that are normally used when
locating multiple features._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

11. The positional tolerancing of slotted holes is accomplished by locating basic

dimensions to the centers of the slots from datums and adding the feature
control frame to the length and width dimension. True or False?
12. Describe when composite positional tolerancing is used. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

13. When using composite positional tolerancing, the upper part of the feature
control frame is referred to as the _ __ _ _ _ and specifies the larger
tolerance for the pattern of features as a group, while the lower half of the frame
is called the _ _ _ _ _ _ and specifies a smaller positional tolerance for
individual features within the pattern.
~ 270 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

14. Positional tolerances can be used in situations where the axes of the holes are not
parallel to each other and where they may be at an angle to the surface.
True or False?
15. What is the shape of the positional tolerance zone when using positional
tolerancing to control the location of a spherical feature? __________

16. When the axis of a hole is at the extreme side of a positional tolerance zone, it is
referred to as ___________________________

0
,_
6
~
17. When the axis of a hole is at an extreme angle inside the positional tolerance
zone, it is referred to as _ __________________ _ _ __

18. Give the formulas for internal and external features that can be used when
calculating the positional tolerance at any produced size when MMC is applied
to the positional tolerance.
Internal feature:

External feature:

19. Give the formulas for internal and external features that can be used when
calculating the positional tolerance at any produced size when LMC is applied to
the positional tolerance.
Internal feature:

External feature:

20. Calculate the minimum edge distance or minimum wall thickness between the
edge of a hole and the outside surface of the part for an LMC positional tolerance
application given the following information (dimensions are in millimeters).
Location dimension: 40.5
Positional tolerance: 0.4
MMC of hole: 12.5
LMC of hole: 13.5
Calculations:
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 271

21. What is the purpose of the note "SEP REQT" placed below the feature control
frame for locating a pattern of features? _________________

22. Briefly describe two different ways to provide positional tolerancing to slotted
features. _____________________________

23. Give the formulas for calculating the slot boundary when applying positional
tolerancing to slotted features. ____________________

24. How is the feature control frame placed in relation to a hole and counterbore
when the positional tolerance is the same for the hole and counterbore? _ _ __

25. How is the feature control frame placed in relation to a hole and counterbore
when the positional tolerance is different for the hole and counterbore? _ _ __

26. What is the difference between the appearance of the feature control frame used
for a composite positional tolerance and the one used for a two single-segment
positional tolerance? ________________________
~ _2_72__G
_e_o_n_1e_t_n_·c_D
_im
_en_s_io_n_1_·n-g_a_n_d_Ti
_o_l_e~_a_n_c_in-g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

27. Explain the primary difference between the composite positional tolerance and
the two single-segment positional tolerance. _______________

28. Explain the primary difference between the composite positional tolerance and
the two single-segment positional tolerance as applied to circular patterns.

29. Define virtual condition. _______________________

30. Give the formulas for calculating virtual condition for internal and external
features.
Internal feature:

External feature:

31. What must occur with regard to material condition and datum precedence when
composite and two single-segment feature control frames are specified? Explain
what can be done when this requirement is not desired. __________
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 273

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this book.
The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards can differ
slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree of flexibility is
required to determine how individual applications correlate with the ASME standards.

Refer to the print of the BRACKET found on page 434.

1. Refer to the 0.875±.005 dimension:
A) In regard to the positional tolerance, what is the location called that is 1.5000
basic from Datum B and 1.9500 basic from Datum C? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the positional tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

D) Name the location dimensions enclosed by boxes and describe their purpose.

E) Give the positional tolerance at the following actual produced sizes:

Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance
.880
.878
.876
.874
.872
.870
 ■

trs1on 274 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

2. Refer to the 0.187±.003 dimension:

A) How many of these features are there? _______________
B) Are the location dimensions placed using rectangular or polar coordinate
dimensioning? _________________________
C) Which of the following most closely describes the positional tolerance
applied to these features:
1) Single composite pattern.
2) Pattern with separate requirements.
3) Composite positional tolerance.
4) Two single-segment feature control frame.
3. Refer to the 0.156±.005 dimension:
A) How many of these features are there? _______________
B) Are the location dimensions placed using rectangular or polar coordinate
dimensioning? _________________________
C) Which of the following most closely describes the positional tolerance
applied to these features:
1) Single composite pattern.
2) Pattern with separate requirements.
3) Composite positional tolerance.
4) Two single-segment feature control frame.
D) Completely describe the meaning of the information provided in the feature
control frame. _________________________
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 275

4. Refer to the 0 .437±.005 dimension:

A) How many of these features are there? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) Which of the following most closely describes the positional tolerance
applied to these features:
1) Single composite pattern.
2) Pattern with separate requirements.
3) Composite positional tolerance.
4) Two single-segment feature control frame.
C) Completely describe the meaning of the information provided in the feature
control frame. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on 276 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)-FRAME ASSY 3 AXIS HP

ound on page 437.
5. Refer to the 0.188 THRU COUNTERBORE 0.313 DEPTH 1.070 specification:
A) Why is there a separate feature control frame for the hole and counterbore?

B) Provide the positional tolerance at each of the following possible produced

sizes for the hole and counterbore:
Hole Counterbore
Produced Positional Produced Positional
Sizes Tolerance Sizes Tolerance
.191 .316
.190 .314
.188 .313
.187 .312

Refer to the print of the DOUBLE V-BLOCK found on page 440.

6. Refer to the 012.70/ 12.65 dimension.
A) How is it possible to have a zero positional tolerance?_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Provide the positional tolerance at the following possible produced sizes:

Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance
12.70
12.69
12.68
12.67
12.66
12.65
C) Describe Datum D. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 277

7. Refer to the 44.45 dimension.

A) What is the positional tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What is the datum reference? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame.

Refer to the rint of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on age 441.

8. Refer to the 0.290 THRU COUNTERBORE 0.625 DEPTH SHOWN specification:
A) Are these features located using rectangular or polar coordinate dimensioning?

B) How many of these features are there? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

C) Why is there the same feature control frame for the hole and counterbore?

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD found on page 446.
9. Refer to the 0.500 dimension.
A) Give the location dimension from Datum B and the location application
relative to Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

C) Provide the positional tolerance and virtual condition at the following

possible produced sizes:
Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance Virtual Condition
.495
.500
.505
 .
~rs1on 278 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

10. Refer to the 3/ 8-24UNF-2B feature.

A) Give the location dimension from Datum A and the location application
relative to Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on page 448.

11. Refer to the 4X 0.250 dimension.
A) Give the location dimensions from Datum A and the location application
relative to Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

C) Provide the positional tolerance and virtual condition at the following

possible produced sizes:
Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance Virtual Condition
.240
.250
.260
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 7 Location Tolerances (Part I) 279

Refer to the print of the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
12. Refer to the 3/ 8-24UNF-2B feature.
A) Give the location dimension from Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

13. Describe the use of the note 2X INDIVIDUALLY placed below the feature control
frame for the 0.193+.005/- .000 feature. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE found on page 450.
14. Refer to the 0.422 dimension.
A) Give the location dimension from Datum C and the location application
relative to Datum A. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

C) Provide the positional tolerance and virtual condition at the following

possible produced sizes:
Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance Virtual Condition
.417
.422
.427
 ■

trs1on 280 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

15. Refer to the 6X dimension with the feature control frame.

A) Describe the features and their size dimensions referenced by this
dimension. ___________________________

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame. _ __

 .
~rs1on
fr::,·1 ~
~ - -~ 1~ i_li " 1
/ -
Location Tolerances (Part II)
and Virtual Condition

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Apply or interpret geometric tolerances specified for threaded fasteners.
0 Explain how positional tolerances are specified in floating fastener and fixed
fastener applications.
0 Describe the purpose of a projected tolerance zone.
0 Apply or interpret projected tolerance zone representations on drawings.
0 Calculate and apply virtual condition in designs involving mating parts.
0 Explain methods used to specify concentricity.
0 Apply or interpret concentricity geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Draw or interpret positional tolerances specified for coaxial features.
0 Explain methods used to specify symmetry.
0 Apply or interpret symmetry geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Draw or interpret positional tolerances specified for symmetrical features.

Technical Terms
Concentricity Pitch diameter
Concentricity tolerance Projected tolerance zone
Extreme conditions Symmetry tolerance
Fastener Thread note
Fixed fastener Thread symbol
Floating fastener True position
Gage Virtual condition
Median Working zone
Perfect symmetry

This chapter continues the discussion on location tolerances with emphasis on:
• Positional tolerances applied to mating parts.
• The use of projected tolerance zones.
• Virtual condition.
• Positional tolerancing for coaxiality.
• Concentricity.
• Symmetry.
• Positional tolerancing for symmetrical features.

281
 ■

~rs1on 282 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Fasteners
A fastener is a hardware device that mechanically joins two or more objects.
A w ide variety of fastener devices are available. The most common are fasteners
manufactured with screw thread. The parts of a screw thread include the major
diameter, minor diameter, pitch diameter, pitch, and crest. Example 8-1 shows the
elements of an external screw thread. Example 8-2 shows the elements of an internal
screw thread.

_J_
Pitch~

External Thread

Example 8-1. Parts of an external screw thread.

-/rA~
Major Minor
d iameter dia meter t+i++'H++'- d iameter

~-------
~ ~ \-~\-) \1'7'01\·l -¾~I- _I

Root

Internal Thread

Example 8-2. Parts of an internal screw thread.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 283

When applying geometric tolerances, such as orientation or location tolerances,

to threaded fasteners, the tolerance is applied to the axis of a cylinder established by
the pitch diameter of the thread. If it is necessary to apply the geometric tolerance
of the screw thread to the major diameter or the minor diameter rather than the
pitch diameter, then the note "MAJOR DIA'' or "MINOR DIA'' (as appropriate) is
placed below the related feature control frame or datum feature symbol. A thread
symbol is used to represent the thread on the drawing and a thread note provides
the thread specifications. Example 8-3A shows the drawing of an internal thread
with no diameter note under the feature control frame, representing an application
of the location tolerance to the axis of the cylinder established by the pitch diameter.
Example 8-3B and Example 8-3C show the optional MAJOR DIA and MINOR DIA
notes applied under the feature control frame for specific applications where the
location tolerance is applied to the axis of the cylinder established by the major or
minor diameter.
When the geometric tolerance and datum reference or datum feature are
established for gears and splines, the specific feature of the gear or spline must be
noted below the feature control frame or datum feature symbol. The options include
"MAJOR DIA," "PITCH DIA," or "MINOR DIA."

Inch thread note ~

1
--13UNC-2B
Metric thread note ~ 2
r-'M 14X2
l~-$-~l-</J-0.-1@=M~IA~IB~l~cI
A

Simplified internal
l-$-l</J o.1@IAIBlc l
MAJOR DIA
thread representation B
l-$-l</J o.1@IAIBlc l
MI NOR DIA
C

,___ ___,_, 1 5

Example 8-3. Internal screw thread representations. A- A thread note with a location
tolerance applied to the cylinder axis of the pitch diameter. B---A thread note with
a location tolerance applied to the cylinder axis of the major diameter. C- A thread
note with a location tolerance applied to the cylinder axis of the minor diameter.
 ■

~rs1on 284 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Floating Fasteners
The term floating fastener relates to an application where two or more parts are
assembled with fasteners, such as bolts and nuts, and all parts have clearance holes
for the fasteners. A floating fastener application is shown in Example 8-4. Notice
Parts "A" and "B" are fastened together by a bolt and a nut is required to hold the
parts secure. When the holes in a pattern are the same diameters, the bolts used
are the same diameters, and the same positional tolerance is used, the positional
tolerance is calculated using the formula:

MMC HOLE - MMC FASTENER (BOLT) = POSITIONAL TOLERANCE

FOR EACH PART
Note that each part is calculated separately.

~Part B

Example 8-4. A floating fastener application.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 285

Given an application where an M12Xl.5 bolt is used to fasten two identical parts
with a hole diameter of 13.0/ 12.5, the positional tolerance required can be calculated as:
MMC HOLE (12.5) - MMC BOLT (12) = POSITIONAL TOLERANCE (0.5)
The MMC of a bolt is considered to be the nominal size, which is the same as the
major diameter. The major diameter of the M12Xl.5 thread is 12 mm. The resulting
drawing is shown in Example 8-5.

Parts A and B
MMC Hole - MMC Bolt= Positional Tolerance
12.5 - 12 = 0.5

2X 1313.0
12.5
-$- <,Z'>o.s@ A B C

2 PARTS REQUIRED

Example 8-5. Calculating and showing the positional tolerance for a floating fastener
application. These are two identical parts required for this assembly.
 ■

~rs1on 286 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Fixed Fasteners
The term fixed fastener relates to an application where one of the parts to be
assembled has a held-in-place fastener. This applies to all holes of the same size in a
pattern where the same positional tolerance is specified. Examples of a fixed fastener
include a stud or a threaded hole for a bolt or screw. An example of a fixed fastener is
shown in Example 8-6.
Notice in Example 8-6 that Part "fl:' has a clearance hole and Part "B" is
threaded. Part "B" acts as part of the fastener, much like a nut. Therefore, a nut is
not required as in the floating fastener application. Notice that only Part "fl:' has
clearance around the fastener. This means that half as much positional tolerance is
applied as compared to a floating fastener. The fixed fastener positional tolerance is
calculated using the formula:
MMC HOLE - MMC FASTENER (BOLT) _POSITIONAL TOLERANCE
2 - FOR EACH PART
Given an application where an M14X2 bolt is used to fasten two parts together,
where Part "N' has a clearance hole diameter of 14.4/ 14.2 and Part "B" is threaded
with M14X2 thread to accommodate the bolt, the positional tolerance is calculated as
follows:

MMC HOLE (14-2~- MMC BOLT (l4) = POSITIONAL TOLERANCE (0.1)

Part B

Example 8-6. A fixed fastener application.

l eom,,y d,rum

Notice in the calculation that the MMC of the fastener is the same as the major
diameter. In this example, the M14X2 metric screw thread has a major diameter of 14.
A drawing representing the positional tolerance calculation for this fixed fastener is
show n in Example 8-7.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 287

(MMC Hole- MMC Bolt)/2 =Positional Tolerance

(14.2 - 14)/2 =0.1

2 x ¢114.2
4 .4

-$-Q)0. 1@ABC

Part A

(MMC Hole - MMC Bolt)/2 =Positional Tolerance

(14.2 - 14)/2 =0.1

2X M14X2
-$-Q)0. 1@ABC

PartB

Example 8-7. Calculating and showing the positional tolerance for a fixed fastener.
 ■

~rs1on 288 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The positional tolerance for a screw thread can be specified at MMC, but the
extra tolerance gained by using MMC is minimal given tight screw thread tolerances.
For this reason, an RFS application for the positional tolerance of screw threads is
often preferred. This is because in order to gage the position, a thread gage must be
screwed into or onto the threaded feature. A gage is a device used to establish or
obtain measurements, or to inspect a part or parts when verifying matching features.
In the RFS application, the thread gage uses the pitch diameter regardless of the
manufactured screw thread size, which is the same as RFS. This can also be applied
to press fit pins where the tolerance is so small that any bonus tolerance is negligible.
MMC can be used on screw thread features when the minor diameter for an internal
thread or major diameter for an external thread is specified. In this application, a
fixed size pin or ring gage can be used to check the position. A fixed size pin gage
can be used to check the position of an internal threaded hole when the minor
d iameter is specified for the same reason a fixed size pin gage can be used to check
the position of a plain hole when MMC is specified. Example 8-7 demonstrates this
application.
In Example 8-8, two inspection pins are created and threaded into the part,
which has two 3/8-24UNF threaded features with a positional tolerance of .014 to
Datums A, B, and C. The part is then placed in a gage flat against Datum A primary,
against Datum B secondary, and touching Datum C tertiary, and the pins must fit
into the holes. The positional tolerance of .014 is built into the inspection pins as
0D - .014. 0D can be any diameter, but it should be larger than the thread so it can
be used as a stop when threading it into the part. If the part fits into the gage and the
pin diameter goes into the holes, then the positional tolerance is correct. The holes
must also be verified that they are within the specified size tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 289

2X ~- 2 4 UNF- 2B
l-$- 10.014IAIBlcl
Company preference\
ofRFSorMMC

~ - -+--+
.,, + +-- ----+
#'

The Drawing

Inspection Pins

Gage to Check Diameter of Threaded Holes

Example 8-8. Inspecting screw threads with positional tolerance specifications.

Shown are inspection pins and a gage used to inspect threaded holes with a pitch
diameter application at MMC or RFS.
 ■

~rs1on 290 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

In Example 8-9, the 3/8UNF thread has a positional tolerance of .014 at MMC
to Datums A, B, and C related to the minor diameter. A gage is made that has two
matching pins, each with 0.316, which is the MMC of the minor diameter of a 3/8-24
thread (.330) minus the positional tolerance (.330 - .014 = .316). The part is placed in
the gage on Datum Surface A (primary), Datum Surface B (secondary), and Datum
Surface C (tertiary), and the pins must go into the holes. If the pins do not go into the
holes or if one of the datum surfaces is not touching the gage, then the location of the
holes is not within the specified position tolerance. These gages only check for the
accuracy of the position tolerance. The size of the holes must also be verified to be
within the specified size tolerance.

2X ~ - 24 UNF- 2B

1~10 .0 14@IAIB l c l
MINOR DIA

~ - ---+- -,t-u' + +-- - -,I-

I'

.000
The Drawing

Example 8-9. Inspecting screw threads with positional tolerance specifications.

Shown are inspection pins and a gage used to inspect threaded holes with a minor
diameter application at MMC.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 291

Example 8-10 shows an application when inspecting a unthreaded part that

has two 0.375±.003 holes with a positional tolerance of .014 at MMC to Datums A,
B, and C. In this application, two 0.358 pins are used to check the position of the
holes. The 0.358 value is calculated as the MMC hole (.375 - .003 = .372 MMC hole)
minus the positional tolerance (.372 - .014 = .358). The part is placed in the gage on
Datum Surface A (primary), Datum Surface B (secondary), and Datum Surface C
(tertiary), and the pins must go into the holes. If the pins do not go into the holes or
if one of the datum surfaces is not touching the gage, then the location of the holes is
not within the specified position tolerance. These gages only check for the accuracy
of the position tolerance. The size of the holes must also be verified to be within the
specified size tolerance.

2X 0 375±.003

1.000
The Drawing

Gage to Check Position of Holes

Example 8-10. Inspecting screw threads with positional tolerance specifications. Shown
are inspection pins and a gage used to inspect threaded holes in an MMC application.
 ■

~rs1on 292 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Fixed Fastener Application with Different Positional

Tolerances Applied to Each Part
Sometimes an engineer designs the positional tolerance between two or m ore
parts in a fixed fastener application with a greater amount of positional tolerance
applied to the unthreaded part. For example, 70% of the tolerance can be applied
to the unthreaded part and 30% to the threaded part. Referring to Example 8-7, the
revised positional tolerance for Part "A" and Part "B" can be calculated using the
formula:
MMC HOLE (14.2) - MMC BOLT (14) = 0.2
0.2 x 70% (.70) = 0.14 POSITIONAL TOLERANCE FOR PART A.
0.2 x 30% (.30) = 0.06 POSITIONAL TOLERANCE FOR PART B.

Projected Tolerance Zone

In some applications where positional tolerance is used entirely for out-of-
squareness, it is necessary to control perpendicularity and position above the
part. The use of a projected tolerance zone is recommended when variations in
perpendicularity of threaded or press-fit holes could cause the fastener to interfere
with the mating part. A projected tolerance zone is usually specified for fixed
fastener applications, such as the threaded hole for a bolt or the hole of a press-fit pin
application.
The length of a projected tolerance zone is specified as the distance the fastener
extends into the mating part, the thickness of the part, or the height of a press-fit
stud. A position tolerance zone applies through the length or depth of the feature
being dimensioned, and does not extend beyond the feature boundary. However,
this application can cause an interference between the location of a thread or press-fit
object and its mating part. This is because the attitude of a fixed fastener is controlled
by the actual angle of the threaded hole. There is no clearance available to provide
flexibility. For this reason, the projected tolerance zone is established at true position
and extends entirely outside the part.
A projected tolerance zone is entirely outside the feature boundary. The
projected tolerance zone provides a bigger tolerance because it is projected outside
the part, rather than within the thread. The projected tolerance is also easier to
inspect than the tolerance applied to the pitch diameter of the thread because a
thread gage with a post projecting above the threaded hole can be used w ith a
coordinate measuring machine (CMM). A detailed example of the projected tolerance
zone is shown in Example 8-11.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 293

M12X1.75
l$l00.2s@®1slAI
Point A
The positional tolerance
is established here
Point B
The positional tolerance is
projected above the part being
toleranced rather than within

Part B

Point A

00.25 positional J
tolerance zone

LJ
Part A_,;--' PartB

Projected tolerance zone

(minimum tolerance zone
height is equal to maximum
thickness of part or feature)

Example 8-11. A projected tolerance zone.

 ■

~rs1on 294 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The projected tolerance zone symbol is detailed in Example 8-12. The projected
tolerance zone representation can be shown on a drawing a couple of different ways.
These are described next.
One method for displaying the projected tolerance zone is where the projected
tolerance zone symbol and height is placed in the feature control frame after the geometric
tolerance and related material condition symbol. The related thread specification is then
connected to the section view of the thread symbol. With this method, the projected
tolerance zone is assumed to extend away from the threaded hole. Refer to Example 8-12.

l___
~ 0.8H
I.SH F::
T
H =Letter height
Projected Tolerance Zone
Symbol Specifications

M12X1 .75- 5 H
I~ 10 0.4@®201 A IBI CI

The Drawing

Outline of

=•mg~ - - ~t-:•:~•=•
- ~ 00.4 positional
20 minimum projected
_ [ tolerance zone height

I :\ !
I Il l
Datum
I 1 1
p lane A

Axis of threaded hole

The Meaning

Example 8-12. A projected tolerance zone representation with the length of the
projected tolerance zone given in the feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 295

To provide additional clarification, the projected tolerance zone can be shown

using a chain line in the view where the related datum appears as an edge. The
minimum height of the projection is also dimensioned. Refer to Example 8-13.
When this is done, the projected tolerance zone symbol is shown alone in the feature
control frame after the geometric tolerance and material condition symbol (if any).
The meaning is the same as previously discussed.

M1 2X1. 75-5H
l-$-100.4@®1 A IMINI

11
11 20 MIN

.-----------~~-~ _J_
II II
II II

Example 8-13. A projected tolerance zone representation with the length of the
projected tolerance zone shown with a chain line and a minimum dimension in the
adjacent view.

The projected tolerance zone is often established by a positional tolerance that

controls location and perpendicularity. A perpendicularity geometric tolerance can
be used to provide a tighter control than that allowed by the positional tolerance, as
shown in Example 8-14. Either of the previously discussed representation techniques
can be used when specifying projected perpendicularity.

Virtual Condition
Virtual condition is a boundary that takes into consideration the combined
effect of feature size at MMC and geometric tolerance. Virtual condition establishes
a working zone that is used to establish gage member sizes and the MMC size of
mating parts or fasteners for mating parts. The virtual condition represents extreme
conditions at MMC plus or minus the related geometric tolerance. This is used to
determine clearance between mating parts.
 ■

~rs1on 296 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

M12X1 .75- 5H
I_L 10 o.2@®201A IBIc I

The Drawing

Outline of ~ 00 2 perpendicularity
20 minimum projected
=~~-- - ~ o~,~~=• tolerance zone height

I ~I
I Ii!
Datum
I I plane A

Axis of threaded hole

The Meaning

Example 8-14. Using a perpendicularity geometric tolerance to establish a projected

tolerance zone.

It is important to determine the virtual condition when designing mating parts.

For example, if a bolt is intended to pass through a hole and the bolt head is to rest
flat on the surface, then the bolt diameter can be no bigger than the MMC of the
hole less the geometric tolerance. This is the virtual condition. It is not possible to
be certain of interchangeability of mating parts if virtual condition is violated. The
virtual condition of a feature must be interchangeable with the virtual condition of
its mating part. The virtual condition is calculated for applications involving internal
or external features.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 297

When calculating the virtual condition of an internal feature, use the formula:
MMC SIZE OF THE FEATURE
- RELATED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
= VIRTUAL CONDITION
Given the part shown in Example 8-15, calculate the virtual condition.

12514.7
14.5
1~100.2s@IAIBlcl

M MC Hole= 14.50
- Geometric Tolerance= 0.25
Virtual Condition= 14.25
The Drawing The Calculation

Datum plane A <------+-- Virtual condition = 014.25

0 0.25 geometric tolerance zone

The Meaning

Possible Geometric Tolerances

Virtual
Produced at Given Produced
Condition
Sizes Sizes
MMC-- 14.5 0.25 14.25
14.6 0.35 14.25
LMC-- 14.7 0.45 14.25

Example 8-15. Calculating the virtual condition of an internal feature.

 ■

~rs1on 298 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

When calculating the virtual condition of an external feature, use the formula:
MMC SIZE OF THE FEATURE
+ RELATED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE
= VIRTUAL CONDITION
Given the part shown in Exam ple 8-16, calculate the virtual condition.

n<.13 .95

M \U7 3 .25
l~
_L
~l-0-0.2_5_@~1~AI

MMC Pin= 13.95

+ Geometric Tolerance= 0.25
Virtual Condition= 14.20
The Drawing The Calculation

,___ _ _~,_ Virtual condition= 014.20

Datum plane A

00.25 geometric tolerance zone

The Meaning

Possible Geometric Tolerances

Virtual
Produced at Given Produced
Condition
Sizes Sizes
MMC-- 13.95 0.25 14.2
13.85 0.35 14.2
13.75 0.45 14.2
13.65 0.55 14.2
13.55 0.65 14.2
13.45 0.75 14.2
13.35 0.85 14.2
LMC-- 13.25 0.95 14.2

Examp le 8-16. Calculating the virtual condition of an external feature.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 299

Zero Positional Tolerance at MMC with the Clearance Hole

at Virtual Condition
An application of zero positional tolerance at MMC is used with the design of
the maximum material condition of clearance holes at virtual condition, as shown in
Example 8-17. Notice that the maximum material condition of the hole is the same
as the virtual condition calculated in Example 8-15. As previously explained, virtual
condition establishes the working zone that is used to establish the MMC size of
mating parts. Therefore, starting with the virtual condition as the maximum material
condition of the feature and allowing the produced size to increase with the MMC
application is a realistic approach.

r,,;14.4
\U73.95

Possible Geometric Tolerances

Virtual
Produced at Given Produced
Condition
Sizes Sizes
MMC~- 13.95 0 13.95
14 0.05 13.95
14.1 0.15 13.95
14.2 0.25 13.95
14.3 0.35 13.95
LMC ~ 14.4 0.45 13.95

Exam ple 8-17. Specifying zero positional tolerance at MMC with the maximum
material condition of the clearance hole equal to virtual condition.
 ■

~rs1on 300 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Concentricity Tolerance
A concentricity tolerance is used to establish a relationship between the axes
of two or more cylindrical features of an object. Concentricity establishes a median
point to axis control. The median is the middle value in a set or distribution of points.
The concentricity geometric characteristic symbol is shown detailed in a feature
control frame in Example 8-18. Perfect concentricity exists when the axes of each
cylindrical feature fall on the same centerline, as shown in Example 8-19.

2H

0 0.2
H ; Letter height

Symbol Specifications
Example 8-18. The concentricity geometric characteristic symbol in a feature control
frame.

Concentricity is the condition where the axis of each cross-sectional element of

a cylindrical surface is common with the axis of a datum feature. The concentricity
tolerance specifies a cylindrical (diameter) tolerance zone. The axis of this tolerance
zone coincides with a datum axis. All of the median points that originate from the
feature surface must be within the cylindrical concentricity tolerance zone, as shown
in Example 8-20. The specified concentricity geometric tolerance is applied only on
an RFS basis and the related datum reference is applied only on an RMB basis.
As noted in ASME Y14.5, irregularities in the form of an actual feature to be inspected
can make it difficult to establish the location of a feature's median points. Finding the
median points of a feature can require time-consuming analysis of surface variations.
It is recommended that runout or positional tolerancing be used unless it is absolutely
necessary to control a feature's median points. Runout is discussed in Chapter 10.

i
t
Axis of 0 B
7J
Example 8-19. Perfect concentricity exists when the axes of two or more features
line up.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 301

-31
0,gT
l©l0o 1 IAI
The Drawing
Datum axis A

_ [ 00.1 concentricity

T "''""~ '°"'

Median points originated from the

feature surface must lie within the
00.1 concentricity tolerance zone
The Meaning

Example 8-20. Application of the concentricity geometric tolerance.

Positional Tolerancing for Coaxiality

Positional tolerancing is recommended over concentricity tolerancing when the
control of the axes of cylindrical features can be applied on a material condition basis.
Positional tolerancing is an axis-to-axis control when applied to control coaxiality.
A coaxial relationship can be controlled by specifying a positional tolerance at MMC,
LMC, or RFS and the datum feature reference on an MMB, LMB, or RMB basis,
depending on the design requirements. Refer to Example 8-21.
When the datum feature is specified on an MMB basis, any departure of the
datum feature from MMB results in an additional displacement of the datum axis
and the controlled feature axis. The maximum allowable distance between the axis of
the datum feature and the axis of the controlled feature can be calculated at various
produced sizes using the following formula:
a+b=c
Where:
c Maximum allowable distance between axis of datum feature
and axis of controlled feature.
a MMC controlled feature - Actual feature size + Geometric tolerance
2
b MMB datum feature - Actual datum feature size
2
 ■

~rs1on 302 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

\2>24_g _5
I¾ I\2)0.4@1 A@I
A
l¾l00.4@IAI
B
l¾I\ZJ0.4IAI
C
I¾ I\Z)O.4(0 IA(D I
D
l¾lo@IA@ I
E

c \2>12_g _1
----+-t
~ ~______. ~
The Drawing

The Meaning

Controlled Datum Feature Sizes

Feature Sizes
12 11.98 11.% 11.94 11.92 11.9

24 0.2 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25

23.9 0.25 0.26 0.27 0.28 0.29 0.3

23.8 0.3 0.31 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35

23.7 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.4

23.6 0.4 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45

23.5 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.5

Example 8-21. Positional tolerancing for coaxiality.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 303

Controlled D atum Feature Sizes

Feature Sizes 12 11.98 11.96 11.94 11.92 11.9
24 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.9 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
23.8 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
23.7 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
23.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
23.5 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
C
Controlled Datum Feature Sizes
Feature Sizes 12 11.98 11.96 11.94 11.92 11.9
24 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.9 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.8 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.6 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
23.5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
D
Controlled Datum Feature Sizes
Feature Sizes 12 11.98 11.96 11.94 11.92 11.9
24 0.5 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45
23.9 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.4
23.8 0.4 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.35
23.7 0.35 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.3
23.6 0.3 0.29 0.28 0.27 0.26 0.25
23.5 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.2
E
Controlled Datum Feature Sizes
Feature Sizes 12 11.98 11.96 11.94 11.92 11.9
24 0 0.01 O.CJ2 0.03 0.04 0.(15
23.9 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1
23.8 0.1 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15
23.7 0.15 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19 0.2
23.6 0.2 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25
23.5 0.25 0.26 0.27 0.28 0.29 0.3

Example 8-21. (Con tin ued)

 ■

~rs1on 304 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Symmetry
A symmetry tolerance is a center plane relationship of the features of an object
establishing a median point to center plane control. The symmetry geometric
tolerance is a zone where the median points of opposite symmetrical surfaces align
with the datum center plane. The symmetry geometric characteristic symbol is
shown detailed in a feature control frame in Example 8-22.
The symmetry geometric tolerance is applied only on an RFS basis and the related
datum reference is applied only on an RMB basis. Refer to Example 8-23. The same
difficulties discussed in inspecting the median points of a feature for concentricity
should also be considered when using symmetry. If this control is not required, then the
positional tolerance locating symmetrical features should be considered.

O.SH
ff~ O.SIA I Jf"
l.2H-
H = Letter height
Symbol Specifications
Example 8-22. The symmetry geometric characteristic symbol in a feature control frame.

I
40

j
~ The Drawing

Datum center plane B

0.5 wide symmetry

tolerance zone

Median points

Example 8-23. Application of the symmetry geometric tolerance.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 305

Positional Tolerancing Locating Symmetrical Features

Perfect symmetry or true position occurs when the center planes of two or
more related symmetrical features line up, as shown in Example 8-24. Positional
tolerancing is a center plane-to-center plane control when applied to control
symmetrical features. A positional tolerance is used when it is required to locate one
or more features symmetrically with respect to the center plane of a datum feature,
as shown in Example 8-25.

-: 13 -+- - ~=-
Perfect Symmetry of a Slot Perfect Symmetry of a Tab

Example 8-24. Perfect symmetry is when the center planes of two or more features
line up at true position.

I
36 .8 =r
-~.J
l-~ 1!:1
36.3

l-$- I0.25@ 1AIB@I

The Drawing

0.25 w ide symmetry

tolerance zone
l The center p lane of datum feature B
is perpendicular to datum p lane A

\_ Maximum position of
fea ture center plane
Datum Plane A
The Meaning
Example 8-25. Application of a positional tolerance locating symmetrical features.
The 0.25 symmetry tolerance zone applies when the feature is at MMC. The
symmetry tolerances increase equal to the amount of departure from MMC until the
LMC size is reached.
 ■

~rs1on 306 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The diameter symbol is omitted in front of the positional tolerance in the feature
control frame. This is because the given tolerance zone is the distance between two
parallel planes equally divided on each side of true position, rather than a cylindrical
tolerance zone, as described in other applications. A material condition symbol
identifying MMC or LMC must accompany the positional tolerance, as shown in
Example 8-25. O therwise, RFS is assumed. The 0.25 symmetry tolerance zone shown
in Example 8-25 applies when the feature is at MMC. The symmetry tolerance
increases equal to the amount of departure from MMC until the LMC size is reached.
Positional tolerancing of symmetrical slots or tabs can be accomplished by
identification of related datums, by dimensioning the relationship between slots or
tabs, by providing the number of units followed by the size, or by a feature control
frame with a positional tolerance. The diameter symbol is omitted from the feature
control frame and a material condition symbol is required, as shown in Example 8-26.
Otherwise, RFS is assumed.

Zero Positional Tolerance at MMC for Symmetrical Objects

A zero positional tolerance at MMC can be used when it is necessary to control
the symmetry relationship of features within their limits of size. In this application,
the datum feature is usually specified on an MMB basis. When the positional
controlled feature is at MMC and the datum feature is at MMB, then perfect
symmetry occurs and a boundary of perfect form is established. Out-of-perfect
symmetry only happens as the produced size leaves MMC. This is similar to the
application of zero positional tolerance at MMC previously discussed.

6X 6Q° ¢ 28

Example 8-26. Showing positional tolerancing of slots or tabs.

 ■

~rs1on Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 307

1. Define fastener. __________________________

2. List the major elements of a screw thread. ________________

3. Describe how a thread note looks when a location tolerance applied to the axis
of the cylinder is established by the pitch diameter, and how this compares
to applications when a location tolerance applied to the axis of the cylinder is
established by the major or minor diameter. _______________

4. Give the formula used to determine the positional tolerance of a floating fastener.

5. Give the formula used to determine the positional tolerance of a fixed fastener.

6. Under which condition(s) is a projected tolerance zone recommended? _ _ __

 308 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Z Identify the two ways that a projected tolerance zone can be shown on a drawing.

0
'.
t
,,
""-
~

8. Define virtual condition . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

9. Give the formula used to calculate the virtual condition of an internal feature.

10. Give the formula used to calculate the virtual condition of an external feature.

11. Given the following drawing and a range of possible produced sizes, provide the
geometric tolerance and virtual condition at each possible produced size.

i;z;14.4
14.2

B
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 309

Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance Virtual Condition

14.2
14.3
14.4
12. Define concentricity. ________________________

13. Define median. __________________________

14. A concentricity tolerance requires the establishment and verification of axes

unrelated to surface conditions. Therefore, unless there is a need to control the axis,
it is recommended that runout or positional tolerancing be used. True or False?
15. A coaxial relationship can be controlled by specifying a positional tolerance at
MMC with the datum feature reference specified on an MMB, LMB, or RMB
basis, depending on design requirements. True or False?
16. When applying geometric tolerances to threaded fasteners, the tolerance is
applied to the axis of a cylinder established by the _ _ _ _ _ _ of the thread.
17. What is displayed on the drawing when the geometric tolerance of a screw
thread is applied to the minor diameter? ________________

18. When the axis or center plane of a datum feature of size is controlled by a
geometric tolerance, the datum feature implies virtual condition even if a related
datum reference is MMB. True or False?
19. Concentricity and symmetry must be applied on an RFS basis. True or False?
20. It is recommended that runout or positional tolerancing be used unless it is
necessary to control a feature's median points with concentricity. True or False?
21. Describe the symmetry geometric tolerance. _______________

22. Calculate the virtual condition of a hole through a part where the hole diameter
is 014.5±0.3 and the associated positional tolerance is 00.1 at MMC. Show your
calculations. ____________________________

23. Calculate the virtual condition of a pin that extends 15 mm above the primary
datum of a part where the pin diameter is 014.5±0.3 and the associated
perpendicularity tolerance is 00.1 at MMC. Show your calculations. _____

24. Positional tolerancing is a _______ control when applied to control

symmetrical features.
 .
~rs1on 310 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to tne print of tne BRACKET found on page 434.

1. Refer to the feature control frame associated with the 0.156±.005 dimension:
A) Explain the virtual condition of size datum rule that relates to the secondary
Datum D at MMB. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Calculate the virtual condition of Datum feature D. Show the formula and
your calculations. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the HUB-STATIONARY, ATU found on page 435.

2. Refer to the 0.352+.005/-.001 dimension:
A) Are the location dimensions placed using rectangular or polar coordinate
dimensioning? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) What is the positional tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

C) Give the positional tolerance at the following actual produced sizes:
Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance
.357
.355
.353
.351
D) Calculate the virtual condition of these holes. Show the formula and your
calculations: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 311

3. Refer to the .164-32UNC-2B DEPTH .325 MIN FULL THD specification:

A) What is the positional tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) What does the symbol after MMC in the feature control frame signify? _ _

C) What does the chain line in the section view refer to in regard to these features?

D) What does the .375 MIN d imension mean as related to the chain line
referenced in Question 3C?_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

E) Identify the type of fastener application if the mating part is an end plate
w ith holes machined to match the six threads in this part, and if a HEX
HEAD MACHINE SCREW is used at each of these locations to fasten the
parts together. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the HYDRAULIC VALVE found on page 438.

4. How many different concentricity geometric tolerances are there on this print?

5. Refer to the 0.961/.959 dimension.

A) Define concentricity as related to the geometric tolerance applied to this
dimension. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) What is the material condition applied to this geometric tolerance? _ _ __

C) Name the datum reference and give the datum feature dimension. _ _ __

D) Give the geometric tolerance at the following produced sizes:

Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
.961
.960
.959
 .
~rs1on 312 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on page 443.

6. Refer to the dowel pin associated with the feature on the print identified by
general note number 4.
A) Give the diameter and length of the dowel pin. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) Give the location of the dowel pin from Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Give the location of the dowel pin from Datum B. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) What is the positional tolerance for the location of the dowel pin? _ _ __
E) Assuming the dowel pin size limits are .0628/.0626 based on the American
National Standard for dowel pins, calculate the virtual condition. Show the
formula and your calculations. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD. found on page 446.
7. Refer to the 3/8-24UNF-2B feature.
A) Explain the meaning of the MINOR DIA note below the feature control frame.

8. Refer to the 0.500 dimension.

A) Calculate the geometric tolerance and the virtual condition at the following
produced sizes.
Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance Virtual Condition
.505
.502
.500
.498
.495
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 8 Location Tolerances (Part II) and Virtual Condition 313

Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on Jlage 448.

9. Refer to the 4X 0.250 feature.
A) Calculate the geometric tolerance and the virtual condition at the following
produced sizes.
Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance Virtual Condition
.260
.255
.250
.245
.240

Refer to the print of the SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK found on page 449.
10. Refer to the 3/ 8-24UNF-2B feature.
A) Explain the meaning of the MINOR DIA note below the feature control frame.

11. Refer to the 0.193+.005/ -.000 feature.

A) Give the location dimensions from Datum D and Datum B in View A-A.

B) Explain the meaning of the information in the feature control frame.

C) Calculate the geometric tolerance and the virtual condition at the following
produced sizes.
Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance Virtual Condition
.193
.195
.197
.198
 .
~rs1on 314 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

D) Describe the use of the note 2X INDIVIDUALLY placed below the feature
control frame. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE found on page 450.
12. Refer to the 0.422 dimension.

A) Calculate the geometric tolerance and the v irtual condition at the following
produced sizes.
Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance Virtual Condition
.427
.425
.422
.420
.417
 .
~rs1on

Profile Tolerances

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Describe the purpose of profile geometric tolerances.
0 Apply or interpret profile geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Draw or interpret profile of a line tolerances.
0 Explain methods used to apply bilateral tolerances.
0 Explain methods used to apply unilateral tolerances.
0 Apply or interpret profile of a surface tolerances.
0 Draw or interpret coplanar profile tolerances.
0 Explain the types of controls specified by composite profile tolerances.

Technical Terms
Coaxial Profile form and orientation tolerance zone
Composite profile tolerance Profile geometric tolerances
Coplanar profile tolerance Profile of a line tolerance
Coplanar surfaces Profile of a surface tolerance
Disposed Profile tolerance
Locating tolerance zone True profile
Non-uniform profile Unequally disposed profile
Profile Unilateral profile

This chapter explains the concepts and techniques of dimensioning and

tolerancing to control the profile of geometric shapes. Profile geometric tolerances
control the form, orientation, and/or location of straight lines or surfaces, arcs, and
irregular curves.

Profile Tolerances
Profile can be characterized as the outline of an object represented either by
an external view or a cross section through the object. The true profile or actual
desired shape of the object is the basis of the profile tolerance. The true profile is
defined by basic dimensions. The profile tolerance specifies a uniform boundary
along the true profile within which the elements of the surface must lie. Profile can
be used to control form or combinations of size, form, and orientation. When used
as a refinement of size, the profile tolerance must be contained within the size
tolerance. Profile geometric tolerances are always regardless of feature size. Datum
reference can be applied with boundary conditions (RMB, LMB, MMB) if the datum
feature is a feature of size.

315
 ■

~rs1on 316 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Profile tolerances are always equally disposed bilateral unless otherwise specified.
An equally disposed bilateral tolerance is where the tolerance zone is split equally
on each side of true profile. Profile tolerances can be specified as unequally disposed
bilateral or as unilateral tolerance zones. An unequally disposed bilateral tolerance is
where the tolerance zone is split on each side of true profile, but the distance on each
side is not equal. A unilateral tolerance is where the entire tolerance zone is on one
side of the true profile. A profile tolerance can also be specified between two given
points, all around the object, or all over the entire part. The term disposed refers to
the distribution of material added to or removed from the part on the specified side
of true profile. A profile tolerance is specified by connecting the feature control frame,
using a leader, to the view or section that clearly shows the intended profile. There are
two types of profile geometric tolerances: profile of a line and profile of a surface.

Profile of a Line
The profile of a line tolerance is a two-dimensional or cross-sectional geometric
tolerance that extends along the length of the feature. The profile of a line symbol
and associated feature control frame are shown in Example 9-1. The datum reference
is provided in the feature control frame because the profile geometric tolerance zone
is generally oriented to one or more datums. Profile of a line is used where it is not
necessary to control the profile of the entire feature.

i - - - -,-2H
2H

0.6 X
H ; Letter height

Symbol Specifications

Example 9-1. A feature control frame with the profile of a line geometric
characteristic symbol and datum reference.

A profile of a line tolerance is used in situations where parts or objects have

changing cross sections throughout the length. A pump impeller is an example of
a part that has changing cross sections. Datums are used in some situations, but
are not necessary when the only requirement is the profile shape taken at various
cross sections. When the leader from the feature control frame extends to the related
surface without any additional clarification, the profile tolerance is assumed to be
bilateral. Equally disposed bilateral tolerances are equally split on each side of the
basic dimensions that establish true profile.

Profile of a Line between Two Points

The profile tolerance can be between two given points of the object. This
specification is shown by using the between symbol under the feature control frame.
Any combination of letters can be used, such as "A" and "B" or "C" and "D." The true
profile is established by basic dimensions. Profile of a line is a single cross-sectional
check anywhere along the intended surface. The profile tolerance is assumed to be
equally disposed bilateral unless otherwise specified. This means that the profile
tolerance is split equally on each side of the true profile. The actual profile of the
feature is confined within the profile tolerance zone. Refer to Example 9-2. In the
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 317

0.8H ~ti: 1y
X ... ►
_l_
H
0.6HJ f
H =Letter height
Between Symbol Specifications

n
0.2 A
X +-+ y
Between_/
symbol
YI :~;~nsion
option

The Drawing

Basic Dimension Option

(controls form, orientation, and location)

± Dimension Option
(controls form and orientation)
The Meaning

Example 9-2. A profile of a line tolerance specified between two points.

 ■

~rs1on 318 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

example shown, the profile tolerance is equally disposed bilateral and has an equal
disposition of 0.1 on each side of the true profile.

Profile of a Line All Around

Profile of a line can also specify a tolerance zone that goes around the entire
object. When this is desired, the feature control frame is connected to the object
with a leader as previously discussed and the all around symbol must be placed
on the leader, as shown in Example 9-3. Any note indicating between two points is
excluded. The specification in Example 9-3 is assumed to be a bilateral profile of a
line tolerance equally split 0.2 on each side of the true profile.

Unilateral and Unequally Disposed Profile of a Line

An equally disposed bilateral profile tolerance is assumed unless unilateral or
unequally disposed specifications are provided. A unilateral profile is where the
entire tolerance zone is on one side of the true profile. When a unilateral profile
tolerance is required, the unequally disposed symbol is placed after the geometric
tolerance in the feature control frame as shown in Example 9-4. When the unilateral
profile tolerance has material added to the feature or part, the profile tolerance

~o
I
H ; Letter height
All Around Symbol Specifications

R30

R300

All around symbol

The Drawing

SECTION A-A
The Meaning
EE A

Example 9-3. A profile of a line tolerance specified all around.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 319

_L~ O.SH
1.SH U_
I
H = Letter height
Unequally Disposed
Symbol Specifications

Unilateral profile tolerance provides

additional material to feature or part

Unequally disposed symbol

Profile geometric tolerance

NOTE: ASSUM E THE SHAPE BETWEEN

M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.
The Drawing

0.5 profile tolerance

to the side that adds \,....,..-- _ _ ---._
material to the part / /
r
-..........____
~
True profil':.,_,-- _ _
,,,--- ~
I \ .___ _.- \
I \

/.. ._________, ..----------'I

The Meaning

Example 9-4. An application of a unilateral profile tolerance where the entire profile
tolerance provides additional material to the feature or part.
 ■

~rs1on 320 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

value is repeated after the unequally disposed symbol. The feature control frame
is connected to the edge view of the surface with a leader line. This is the preferred
ASME Y14.5 use for the application shown in Example 9-4.
When the unilateral profile tolerance has material taken from the feature or part,
the profile tolerance value is placed before the unequally disposed symbol and a Ois
placed after the unequally disposed symbol to denote that the entire profile tolerance
is inside of true profile. The feature control frame is connected to the edge view of
the surface with a leader line as shown in Example 9-5. This is the preferred ASME
Y14.5 use for this application.

Unilateral profile tolerance has less

material taken from feature or part

Unequally disposed symbol

Profile geometric tolerance

AB

~----< · ~ 2 suRFAcrs F;;j

N
M
NOTE: ASSUM E TH E SHAPE BETWEEN
M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
k
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.
The Drawing

0.5 profile tolerance to

the side that removes , r True profile
material from the part \ /

/ \~- - ~' "

The Meaning

Example 9-5. An application of a unilateral profile tolerance where the entire profile
tolerance has material removed from the feature or part.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 321

When the profile tolerance is not equally split on each side of true profile, the
total profile tolerance value is placed before the unequally disposed symbol in the
feature control frame and the value of the tolerance that adds material to the feature
or part is placed after the unequally disposed symbol. The feature control frame is
connected to the edge view of the surface with a leader line as shown in Example 9-6.
This is the preferred ASME Y14.5 use for this application.

Value of the profile tolerance that

adds material to the feature or part

Unequally disposed symbol

Total profile geometric tolerance

M +--+ N

,-------',,- ~ ' SURFAITS E~~1

~
N
M
NOTE: ASSUME THE SHAPE BETWEEN
M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.
The Drawing

l
0.5 true profile
y-
True profile

~
0.3 value of the profile tolerance
that adds matenal to the part
7

1i
tolerance
1
{ "' --

The Meaning

Example 9-6. An application of an unequally disposed profile tolerance.

 ■

~rs1on 322 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

An alternate method used when the profile tolerance is unequally disposed

displays the total tolerance inside the feature control frame. Either the inside or
outside of true profile is shown as a basic dimension. Example 9-7 shows the
unequally disposed profile tolerance on the inside as a basic dimension of 0.2.
The same result can be achieved by showing a basic dimension of 0.3 on the
outside. One or the other must be dimensioned to show which way the tolerance
applies and how much profile tolerance is allowed inside or outside. A dimension
line with arrowheads is placed on each side of the phantom lines and connects the
feature control frame w ith a leader. The basic dimension is required because the true
profile is defined by basic dimensions and the tolerance zone must also be defined
basic. The actual profile of the part must be between the basic zone created around
the true profile.

7r \/=== ~___. ~ 2 SURFACES ~~~1

~M --
N

NOTE: ASS UME THE SHAPE BETWEEN I A

M AN D N IS DEFINED WITH BAS IC ~
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATU M B.
The Drawing

True profile

0.5 total profile

l 0.2 profile toleran;'.J
tolerance y ~ ~

I. ' ~
I \

i-------. .....----------l
The Meaning

Example 9-7. Using a basic dimension to indicate an unequally disposed profile

tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 323

An alternate option when a unilateral profile tolerance is required is to draw a

short phantom line parallel to the true profile on the side of the intended unilateral
tolerance. A dimension line with arrowhead is placed on the far side and a leader line
connects the feature control frame on the other side, as shown in Example 9-8.

0.4 profile
True profile_1 - - - [ _ tolerance zone

The Drawing
c::r
Unilateral Profile
Tolerance
The Meaning

n 0 .4 A r
True profile
l I
0.4 profile
tolerance zone

~ - --- ~_1
The Drawing
~ _l
cr:=i
Unilateral Profile
The Meaning

Tolerance

Example 9-8. An alternate method for specifying a unilateral profile tolerance uses a
phantom line to indicate how the intended profile tolerance applies to true profile.

Profile of a Surface
A profile of a surface tolerance is used where it is desired to control the entire
surface as a single feature. The profile of a surface geometric characteristic and
associated feature control frame are detailed in Example 9-9. Profile of a surface
is a blanket tolerance that is three-dimensional and extends along the total length
and width or circumference of the object or feature(s). In most cases, the profile of a
surface tolerance requires reference to datums for proper orientation of the profile.

2H

H =Letter height
Symbol Specifications

Example 9-9. A feature control frame with the profile of a surface geometric
characteristic symbol and datum reference.
 ■

~rs1on 324 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Profile of a Surface between Two Points

The profile of a surface tolerance zone is equally disposed bilateral unless
otherwise specified, just as for profile of a line. Profile of a surface can be between
two points and is handled in the same manner used for profile of a line between two
points. A sample drawing and its related meaning are show n in Example 9-10.

~
B

A B

J= _r_ D
~ ~ 20.5
19.5

The Drawing

Actual profile
may be anywhere
t .4 profile tolerance zone equally
split on both sides to true profile - - - - - - - - - ~
l
inside profile
tolerance zone \ - - r True profile ~ - - ~

/~T -- ~ == / - - -" T
# / '~ ----

Datum plane A
The Meaning

Example 9-10. A profile of a surface tolerance specified between two points.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 325

Profile of a Surface All Around or All Over

Surface profile can also be applied to completely blanket objects that have a
constant uniform cross section by placing the all around symbol on the leader line.
When this is done, surfaces all around the object outline must lie between two
parallel boundaries equal in width to the given geometric tolerance. The tolerance
zone should also be perpendicular to a datum plane. Refer to Example 9-11. The

r
all over symbol, shown in Example 9-11, is used when it is necessary for the profile
tolerance zone to be all over the entire part.

This dimension has a tolerance when the all around symbol is

used, or the dimension is basic when the all over symbol is used

I 55 I~ 1 2 X R0 .2 MAX
7
20 ± o.4
A

15

r-- l
R12 RS

R12
oc~
All around symbol All over symbol
NOTE: UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE BASIC.
The Drawing

Datum pLJlane
A

0.4 w ide profile 90°

rr=----------
, ,= = ==-3;;;;;;;;--i
~ : c e zone ---i_
r .

t, .,r//----==
, __ _
'-----= ✓✓ \-]
-
Maynot
exceed RO 2
I
----7 '
! i
VIEW A
SCALE 2 :1
The Meaning
(All around application. All over covers the entire part.)
Example 9-11. Using a profile of a surface tolerance all around or all over.
 ■

~rs1on 326 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Profile of a Sharp Corner

When a profile tolerance is at a sharp corner, the tolerance zone extends to the
intersection of the boundary lines. In these situations, a rounded corner can occur
because the actual surface can be anywhere within the tolerance zone boundary. If
this roundness must be controlled, then a maximum radius note shall be added to
the drawing. The drawing in Example 9-11 has the note R0.2 MAX to indicate this.

Unilateral or Unequally Disposed Profile of a Surface

The profile of a surface can also be specified as a unilateral or unequally
disposed tolerance using the same options available for the profile of a line
previously described. The following options correlate with the drawing shown in
Example 9-12.
When a unilateral profile tolerance is required, the unequally disposed symbol
is placed after the geometric tolerance in the feature control frame as shown in
Example 9-12A. When the unilateral profile tolerance has material added to the
feature or part, the profile tolerance value is repeated after the unequally disposed
symbol. The feature control frame is connected to the edge view of the surface with a
leader line. This is the preferred ASME Y14.5 use for this application.
When the unilateral profile tolerance is total, and the tolerance has material
removed from the feature or part, the profile tolerance value is placed before the
unequally disposed symbol and a O is placed after the unequally disposed symbol
to denote that the entire profile tolerance has less material removed from the feature
or part. The feature control frame is connected to the edge view of the surface with a
leader line as shown in Example 9-12B. This is the preferred ASME Y14.5 use for
this application.
When the profile tolerance is not equally split on each side of true profile, the total
profile tolerance value is placed before the unequally disposed symbol in the feature
control frame and the value of the tolerance that adds material to the feature or part is
placed after the unequally disposed symbol. The feature control frame is connected to
the edge view of the surface with a leader line as shown in Example 9-12C. This is the
preferred ASME Y14.5 use for this application.
An alternate method used when the profile tolerance is unequally disposed
displays the total tolerance inside the feature control frame. Either the inside or
outside of true profile is shown as a basic dimension. Example 9-120 shows the
profile tolerance on the inside as a basic dimension of 0.1. The same result can be
achieved by showing a basic dimension of 0.4 on the outside. One or the other must
be dimensioned to show which way the tolerance applies and how much profile
tolerance is allowed inside or outside. A dimension line with arrowheads is placed
on each side of the phantom lines and connects the feature control frame with a
leader. The basic dimension is required because the true profile is defined by basic
dimensions and the tolerance zone must also be defined basic. The actual profile of
the part must be between the basic zone created around the true profile.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 327

An alternate option used when a unilateral profile tolerance is required is

to draw a short phantom line on the side of the true profile where the unilateral
tolerance zone is intended. The feature control frame is connected to the feature with
a leader as shown in Example 9-12E.

Q 0 .5@0.5 A B A
M +-+ N

l
M +-+ N

..--------'--__r ,~,m ~;;;

~
N
M
NOTE: ASSUM E TH E SHAP E BETWEE N M AN D N IS
DEFIN ED WITH BASIC DIM ENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.

Example 9-12. Unilateral and unequally disposed profile of a surface tolerance

applications. A-Applying the unilateral profile tolerance where the entire profile
tolerance provides additional material to the feature or part. This is the preferred
ASME Y14.5 use for this application. B-Applying the unilateral profile tolerance
where the entire profile tolerance removes material from the feature or part. This
is the preferred ASME Y14.5 use for this application. C-Applying an unequally
disposed profile tolerance. This is the preferred ASME Y14.5 use for this application.
D- An alternate method when an unequally disposed profile tolerance is required
uses a basic dimension to indicate where the tolerance zone is intended. E- An
alternate option when a unilateral profile tolerance is required uses a short phantom
line on the side of the true profile to indicate where the tolerance zone is intended.

~ -------------------
Example 9-12 shows six methods of applying profile tolerances. An actual
drawing would only show one profile tolerance application.

Non-Uniform Profile Tolerance Zone

A non-uniform profile tolerance zone is specified by a maximum material
boundary and a least material boundary of a unique shape. The boundaries are
defined on a drawing by basic dimensions with phantom lines used to indicate that
the tolerance zone or the boundaries may be defined in a CAD file. The term NON-
UNIFORM replaces the tolerance value in the feature control frame and the leader
line points to the true profile. Example 9-13 shows an application of a non-uniform
profile tolerance.
 ■

~rs1on 328 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

B
0
~ - ~ N -1-FO_R_M_A~B-c-@~ J [f]
---------------0 0 I 30

50
r-"-'---------_J

R35
Example 9-13. An application of a non-uniform profile tolerance.

Profile of Coplanar Surfaces

Coplanar surfaces are two or more surfaces on a part that are on the same plane.
A coplanar profile tolerance can be used when it is desirable to treat two or more
separate surfaces, which lie on the same plane, as one surface. To control the profile
of these surfaces as a single surface, place a phantom line between the surfaces in the
view where the required surfaces appear as lines. Connect a leader from the feature
control frame to the phantom line and add a note preceding the feature control frame
identifying the number of surfaces. Refer to the note 6X shown in Example 9-14.

/6x lolo.6IAI
.
c --
_ -_
--_--
_ l ---J
-, ----J
The Drawing
~

The Meaning
Example 9-14. An application of a coplanar profile tolerance. Note: A top view is also
required to show and provide location and size dimensions to the six raised features.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 329

The drawing shown in Example 9-14 can also have the surfaces controlled
with a flatness geometric tolerance without using a datum reference. When the
feature control frame leader points to the phantom line, all of the surfaces are jointly
controlled. For example, if there are a total of four additional raised surfaces behind
the two that can be seen in the front view, the note 6X is placed below the feature
control frame. A top view would also be required to provide dimensions to the
6 raised features.
When there are several coplanar surfaces, it can be desirable to establish two
surfaces as datum planes with a common profile tolerance, such as the datum
features labeled A and Bin Example 9-14. Other coplanar surfaces can be controlled
with a profile tolerance relative to both datums by placing the letters A-B in the
feature control frame. The profile tolerance zone applies to all surfaces, including the
datums. Refer to Example 9-15.

2X Q 0 .3

The Drawing

Simulated datum A-8

_ [ 0.6 profile tolerance zone

l__ -- . _- - - - - _---- -- _j_

ill '., em>O '"'="re a<aamm ''""' ~

The Meaning
-

Example 9-15. When there are several coplanar surfaces, it can be desirable to
establish two surfaces as datum planes with a common profile tolerance and control
other surfaces with a profile tolerance specified to both datums. A note specifying the
number of surfaces or the continuous feature symbol can be used.

Profile of Plane Surfaces

Profile tolerancing can be used to control the form and orientation of planar
surfaces. For example, profile of a surface can be used to control the angle of an
inclined surface in relationship to a datum, as shown in Example 9-16. Notice in
Example 9-16 that the required surface must lie between two parallel planes 0.1 mm
apart equally split on each side of a true plane that has a basic angular orientation to
a datum.
 ■

~rs1on 330 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Q 0 .1 AB

~-~,~
~------------~
_il
,_. ____I-------<@Q]>------------<•
I

The Drawing

'!!,/
True profile ---.___/ / --...__ 0.1 w ide profile
tolerance zone

110°
~ Datum
p lane B

~ Datum plane A
,___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 60 - - - - - - - - ~-<

The Meaning

Example 9-16. Specifying the profile of an inclined planar surface.

Profile of Conical Features

A profile tolerance can be used to control the form, or form and orientation, of
a conical surface. The feature can be controlled independently as a refinement of
size or it can be oriented to a datum axis. In either case, the profile tolerance must be
within the size tolerance. Conical profile requires that the actual surface lie between
two coaxial boundaries equal in width to the specified geometric tolerance, having
a basic included angle, and within the size limits. (Coaxial means having the same
axis.) Refer to Example 9-17.

Composite Profile Tolerance

A composite profile tolerance provides for the location of a profiled feature
and, at the same time, the control of form and orientation. This is done by doubling
the height of the feature control frame that points to the feature to be controlled. The
profile geometric characteristic symbol is placed in the first compartment. The top
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 331

7 9)40±0.2

_J
The Drawing

The Meaning

Example 9-17. Specifying the profile of a conical feature.

half of the feature control frame is called the locating tolerance zone. This is the
profile tolerance that locates the feature from datums. The related datum reference
is given in the order of precedence in the feature control frame and the feature
to be controlled is located from datums with basic dimensions. The bottom half
of the feature control frame is called the profile form and orientation tolerance
zone. Datum referencing in the lower area establishes the limits of size, form, and
orientation of the profile related to the locating tolerance zone. The actual feature
surface must be within both tolerance zones, as shown in Example 9-18.
In Example 9-18, Datum B is in the lower segment of the feature control frame.
This means that the profile tolerance of 0.2 must remain oriented (parallel) to Datum
Feature B. In Example 9-19, Datum Bis removed from the lower segment of the
feature control frame. This allows the profile tolerance to float anywhere inside the
profile locating tolerance zone, and profile tolerance no longer has an orientation to
Datum Feature B.
 ■

~rs1on 332 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Locating zone

4X R4

Profile zone

J_ ..---------r--------r----,

P- s I
.__..__
T_h_e_D
_ ra
-w- in
--'-
g--'

I 0.6 wide profile

location tolerance zone
1

Actual surface

Datum plane C

Datum plane B
0.2 wide profile
form/orientation tolerance zone

Datum plane A

The Meaning

Example 9-18. A composite profile tolerance provides for the location of a profiled
feature and, at the same time, the control of form and orientation.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 333

Locating zone

4X R4

~ + - - -~

40

l_ ~ - ~ ~
s I
~ ' - ---'-- T_h_e_ D_r_a_w_i_n_g'------'

I 0.6 w ide profile

I location tolerance zone

_,.,---- Actual surface

Datum p lane C

Datum p lane B
0.2 profile tolerance zone can float a nywhere
inside the profile locating tolerance zone

Datum p lane A

The Meaning
Exam ple 9-19. Datum Bis removed from the lower segment of the feature control
frame, allowing the profile tolerance to float anywhere inside the profile locating
tolerance zone. The profile tolerance no longer has an orientation to Datum Feature B.
 ■

~rs1on 334 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Profile of a Feature to Be Restrained

When any geometric tolerance is to be verified with the part in a restrained
condition, the features to be used as datum features must be identified. It may also be
necessary to specify the force required to restrain the part. Refer to Example 9-20. In the
drawing shown, the part relaxes after being removed from the bending press and the
profile must be maintained in the restrained condition. Notice that NOTE 1 under the
feature control frame specifies the process used and the force required to restrain the
part. Because of the releases of internal stresses, after forming the part, it may look like
the Profile Tolerance Zone in Free State view in Example 9-20. The free state profile tolerance
zone limits how far the part can be out of profile. The other 0.3 profile tolerance zone in
the restrained condition controls the shape of the part in a simulated assembly condition.

♦---- ----♦
1 I
4 X ¢6.2

♦ --+"----

Q 0 .3 A
x .......... y
NOTE 1
y

~2 SURFACES

NOTE 1:
THIS TOLERANCE APP LI ES WHEN DATUM FEATURE A IS MOUNTED AGAINST
A FLAT SURFACE USING FOUR M6X1 BOLTS TORQUED TO 9-15 N-m.

The Drawing

_ I
- - ---2-;,r~ile tolerance
zone in the free state
J
Profile Tolerance Zone in Free State
Example 9-20. Specifying a profile of a surface tolerance to be verified in a restrained
condition.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 335

Specifying Basic Dimensions in a Note

A general note can be used to specify basic dimensions. Use the general note
"UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS ARE BASIC" rather than using the customary
rectangular block around the dimension to denote basic. Refer to Example 9-11. This
general note was once used to save time in manual drafting in situations requiring
an extensive number of basic dimensions on the drawing. This issue is not a problem
when using CADD, because basic dimensions are placed quickly. It is better to use
the basic dimension symbol on basic dimensions for clarity.
There is a good reason not to use the general note. When the note is used, the
reader of the drawing must understand GD&T and know when basic dimensions are
used and their specific applications. The reader must also sort through the dimensions
to determine which dimensions are basic and which are plus/ minus. This can be
difficult for the reader and some dimensions can be missed if dimensions that rely
on the tolerances in the title block are used. The general note should be avoided to
reduce misinterpretation of the meaning of the drawing. Check with your company or
instructor before using this method to determine if it is appropriate.

Combination of Geometric Tolerances

Profile tolerancing can be combined with other types of tolerancing. For
example, a surface can have a profile tolerance controlled within a specified amount
of parallelism relative to a datum. When this is done, the surface must be within the
profile tolerance, and each line element of the surface must be parallel to the given
datum by the specified parallelism tolerance, as shown in Example 9-21.

II 0 . 15 X
A EAC H ELEMENT

The Drawing
0.15 sectional tolerance
0.5 p rofile zone p arallel to d atum
tolerance zone _ [
---- -~- -

Datum p lane Y Da tum plane X

The Meaning
Example 9-21. An application of geometric tolerances combining profile of a surface
between two points and single element parallelism.
~ _3_36_ _G_e_o_m_e_tr_ic_ D_il_r,_en_s_io_n_i~ng~ a_n_d_Ti_o_le_ra_n_c_in~g~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Chapter Test
Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~
1. The _ _ _ _ _ _ tolerance specifies a uniform boundary along the true
profile within which the elements of the surface must lie.
2. Complete this statement: A profile tolerance is specified by connecting the
feature control frame, using a leader, to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Which situations, or types of features or parts, frequently require the use of a

profile of a line tolerance? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

5. How is a profile tolerance shown to be specified between two given points?

6. How is a profile tolerance specified all around an object or feature, rather than
between two given points? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

7. Explain the basic difference between profile of a line and profile of a surface.

8. Either the profile of a line or the profile of a surface can be all around, between
two given points, unilateral, or equally disposed bilateral. True or False?
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 337

9. Define equally disposed bilateral tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

10. An equally disposed bilateral profile is assumed unless otherwise specified.

True or False?
11. Define unilateral profile. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

12. Given the following drawing, describe the profile geometric tolerance and
related drawing specifications. Indicate whether the drawing shows preferred
ASME Y14.5 use or an alternate practice. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

n 0 .5@0.5 AB
M +--+ N

,------'-..-~2 SURFAITS ~~~j

N
M
NOTE: ASSUME TH E SHAPE BETWEEN
HAJ
M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.
338 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

13. Given the following drawing, describe the profile geometric tolerance and
related drawing specifications. Indicate whether the draw ing shows preferred
ASME Y14.5 use or an alternate practice. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

n 0 .5@0 .3 A B
M +--+ N

~----',.- ~ 2 SURFA~S E~~]

N
M
NOTE: ASSUME THE SHAPE BETWEEN
M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
k
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.

14. Given the following drawing, describe the profile geometric tolerance and
related drawing specifications. Indicate whether the draw ing shows preferred
ASME Y14.5 use or an alternate practice. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

NOTE: ASSUME THE SHAPE BETWEEN

M AND N IS DEFINED WITH BASIC
DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 339

15. Given the following drawing, describe the profile geometric tolerance and
related drawing specifications. Indicate whether the drawing shows preferred
ASME Y14.5 use or an alternate practice. ________________

16. Give the general note that can be used to specify basic dimensions that are used
to dimension true profile rather than using the customary rectangular block
around the dimension to indicate basic. _________________

17. Explain why you would want to avoid using the general note described in
Question 16. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

18. Define coplanar surfaces._______________________

19. Explain how to represent as a single surface the surface profile of four (4)
coplanar surfaces. _________________________

20. Profile tolerancing can be used to control the form and orientation of a plane
surface. True or False?
21. Profile of a surface tolerancing can be used to control the angle of an inclined
surface in relationship to a datum. True or False?
 ~ _34_0_ _G_eo_n_1e_t_n_·c_D_i_m_e_
n s_io_n_i~
ng~ an_d_ To_l_
er_a_nc_i~
ng~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

22. A profile tolerance can be used to control the form, or form and orientation, of a
conical surface. True or False?
23. Describe the purpose of a composite profile tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

24. Given the following drawing, describe the requirement specified by the profile
geometric tolerances and related note. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

♦
-$- 4X (2)6 .2

0 0 .3 A
X ........ y
NOTE 1
X

~ /
~ 2 SURFACES
I 2X O 2®

NOTE 1:
THIS TOLERANCE APPLIES WHEN DATUM FEATU RE A IS MOUNTED AGAINST
A FLAT SURFACE USING FOUR M6 X1 BOLTS TORQUED TO 9 - 15 N- m .

25. Describe the use of a non-uniform profile tolerance zone, including how the non-
uniform profile tolerance is specified in the feature control frame.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 9 Profile Tolerances 341

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
9
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this book.
The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards can differ
slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree of flexibility is
required to determine how individual applications correlate with the ASME standards.

Refer to the print of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on page 441.

1. Name the profile geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Completely describe the profile geometric tolerances found on this print. _ __

Refer to the print of the HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS found on page 443.

3. Name the profile geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Completely describe the profile geometric tolerances and related features found
on this print.
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B) - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - -- -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Refer to the print of the FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD. found on page 446.
5. Name the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6. Completely describe the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ __

 .
~rs1on 342 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the CEMENT RESTRICTOR found on page 448.

7. Name the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

8. Completely describe the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ __

9. Name the symbol found on the leader associated with the geometric tolerance
described in Question 8. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

10. Describe the function of the symbol named in Question 9. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to tlie rint of tlie SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK founa on age 449.
11. Name the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

12. Completely describe the profile geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ __

Refer to the print of the STANDARD REAMER GUIDE found on page 450.
13. Describe the profile geometric tolerance associated with the slots and identify
the number of places controlled. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

14. Name the profile geometric tolerance related to the R.375 feature. _ _ _ _ __

15. Describe the datum reference related to the geometric tolerance specified in
Question 14. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

16. Name and describe the function of the symbol placed between the geometric
tolerance values in the feature control frame associated with the R.375 feature.
Explain the application of the values. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

17. Name and describe the function of the symbol placed below the feature control
frame associated with the R.375 feature. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on

Runout Tolerances

Learning Objectives
After studying this chapter, you will be able to:
0 Describe the purpose of runout geometric tolerances.
0 Apply or interpret runout geometric tolerances on drawings.
0 Explain methods used to specify circular runout.
0 Explain methods used to specify total runout.
0 Describe how features are inspected for runout.
0 Identify applications combining runout tolerancing with other types of
tolerancing.
0 Apply or interpret form tolerances when independency is specified.

Technical Terms
Chain line Collet
Circular runout Runout
Coaxiality Total runout

This chapter explains the concepts and techniques of dimensioning and

tolerancing to control the runout of geometric shapes.
Runout is a combination of controls that can include:
• The control of circular elements of a surface.
• The control of the cumulative variations of circularity, straightness,
coaxiality, angularity, taper, and profile of a surface.
• The control of variations in perpendicularity and flatness.

Runout Tolerances
Runout is a combination of geometric tolerances used to control the relationship
of one or more features of a part to a datum axis. Features that can be controlled by
runout are either surfaces constructed around, or perpendicular to, a datum axis. The
datum axis should be selected as a diameter of sufficient length, or replace with two
diameters adequately separated on the same axis, or as a diameter and perpendicular
surface. Runout is always controlled on a regardless of feature size (RFS) basis.
Datum references are always regardless of material boundary (RMB).

343
 ■

~rs1on 344 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

There are two types of runout geometric tolerances: total runout and circular
runout. The type of runout selected depends on design and manufacturing
considerations. Circular runout is generally a less complex requirement than total
runout. The feature control frame is connected by a leader line to the surface.
Multiple leaders can be used to direct a feature control frame to two or more surfaces
having a common runout tolerance. The runout geometric characteristic symbols are
shown detailed in feature control frames in Example 10-1.

0.8H
45°
2H

1.5H
0.08
0.6H
H = Letter height

Circular Runout
Symbol Specifications

/0.SH
45°
2H

1.5H
0.08 A_

'--- 0.6H
H = Letter height

Total Runout
Symbol Specifications

[ZI IU I C2I IUI

Runout Symbols Can Be Drawn Filled or Open

Example 10-1. Feature control frames with the circular and total runout geometric
characteristic symbols and datum references. The runout symbol arrows may be
filled or unfilled, depending on company preference.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 345

Circular Runout
Circular runout provides control of single circular elements of a surface. When
applied to surfaces constructed around or perpendicular to a datum axis, circular
runout controls circularity and coaxiality. Coaxiality is a condition where two or
more features share a common axis. When applied to surfaces at right angles to a
datum axis, circular runout can be used to control wobbling motion. This tolerance is
measured by the full indicator movement (FIM) of a dial indicator placed at several
circular measuring positions as the part is rotated 360°. FIM shows a total tolerance.
Each circular element must lie within the FIM. FIM is also referred to as total
indicator reading (TIR). Refer to Example 10-2. To establish the datum axis for runout

Full Indicator
Movement (FIM)

Minimum Maximum
Reading Reading
Example 10-2. A dial indicator showing full indicator movement (FIM).
 ■

~rs1on 346 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

inspection, the part is held in a clamping device, such as a collet. A col/et is a cone-
shaped chuck used for holding cylindrical pieces in a lathe or inspection machine.
An example of circular runout is shown in Example 10-3. Circular runout is a
control of single circular elements, but not just one check on each feature as implied
by Example 10-3. Many single circular element checks are required to verify each
feature. The controlling datum must be verified before other surfaces are checked.
The circular runout reference datum is always regardless of material boundary.

/ 0 .2 X

The Drawing

The Meaning

Example 10-3. The application of circular runout.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 347

Total Runout
Total run out provides a combined control of surface elements. This is a
tolerance that blankets the surface to be controlled. Total runout is used to control
the combined variations of circularity, straightness, coaxiality, angularity, taper,
and profile when applied to surfaces constructed around and at right angles to
a datum axis. The reference datums are always regardless of material condition.
Total runout can be used to control the combined variations of perpendicularity (to
control wobble and flatness) and to control concavity or convexity when applied to
surfaces perpendicular to a datum axis. The total runout tolerance zone encompasses
the entire surface as the part is rotated 360°. The entire surface must lie within the
specified tolerance zone. In order to determine this, the dial indicator is placed at
every location along the surface as the part is rotated 360°. Total runout is shown in
Example 10-4.

ff 0 . 15 X

~
¢20

L!' 0 .08 X

The Drawing
i
,,.--t O.lSFIM

~~
V

/
/
\
/
/
0.08 FIM

' The Meaning

Example 10-4. The application of total runout. Note: The angled feature of the part
shown cannot be controlled with total runout. The indicator reading would never
be within limits. The angled surface can only be controlled with circular runout.
 ■

~rs1on 348 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Applying Runout to a Portion of a Surface

and Two Datum References
A portion of a surface can have a runout tolerance specified if it is not desired
to control the entire surface. This is done by placing a chain line located with basic
dimensions in the linear view. The chain line identifies where the runout tolerance
around the object is located. The feature control frame is then connected by a leader
to the chain line. Runout tolerances can also be applied where two datum diameters
collectively establish a single datum axis. This is done by placing the datum
identifying letters, separated by a dash, in the feature control frame. For example,
"G-H" shown in Example 10-5 is how this appears on a drawing.

I
0 44

~
Example 10-5. Using partial surface runout and specifying runout to two datum
references established collectively.
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 349

Applying Runout to a Datum Surface and a Datum Axis

Runout geometric tolerances can be controlled in relationship to a datum axis
and a surface at right angles to the axis. When this is done, the datums are placed
separately in the feature control frame in their order of precedence. Each circular
element (for circular runout) or each surface (for total runout) must be within the
specified geometric tolerance when the part is mounted on the datum surface and
rotated 360° about the datum axis. The datum reference is always specified on a
regardless of material boundary basis. Refer to Example 10-6.

L/ 0 . 15 X Y

/ 0 . 15 X Y

~
020

The Drawing
i

The Meaning
Example 10-6. Specifying runout to a datum surface and a datum axis.
 ■

~rs1on 350 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Applying Runout Control to a Datum

When a datum feature symbol is specified on a runout control, then the runout
geometric tolerance applies to the datum feature. This is done by centering the
datum feature symbol below the feature control frame or connecting the datum
feature symbol to the leader shoulder, as shown in Example 10-7.

Preferred

}!/ 0 . 15X-Y

Example 10-7. Specifying runout to a datum feature.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 351

Combination of Geometric Tolerances

Runout tolerancing can be combined with other types of tolerancing. For
example, a surface can be controlled by profile and refined by runout. When this is
done, as shown in Example 10-8, the surface must be within the specified profile
tolerance and any circular element of the surface must be w ithin the specified runout
tolerance.

~\ X -+-+ y
\
J' 0.08 AB
\ y

Example 10-8. Combined application of a profile tolerance (unilateral in this case)

between two points and circular runout.

In some situations, it can be necessary to control runout constrained by flatness,

straightness, or cylindricity. A combination of runout and cylindricity, as shown
in Example 10-9, means that the surface must be controlled within the specified
tolerances of runout and cylindricity. Notice that the different feature control frames
are attached. This is different from the previous example where the feature control
frames are separate.

/ 0 .15C-D

- l
\2)26
j
/
/:.I
0 . 15C-D
0 .05 ~
Example 10-9. Combined application of runout to two coaxial datums and
cylindricity.
 ■

~rs1on 352 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Specifying Independency
Rule 1 of ASME Y14.5 states that the limits of size of a regular feature of size
controls form, such as straightness, flatness, circularity, and cylindricity. This means
that the form of the feature is dependent on the limits of size. This concept was
introduced in Chapter 1. This rule can be overridden by the use of the independency
symbol, as shown in Example 10-10. Rule 1 can be impractical on a feature of
significant length that has a tight size tolerance. When the independency symbol is
used, the form control is independent of the size tolerance, and a form control should
be added to the feature. Refer to Example 10-10. Without the independency symbol,
the form of the 010±0.02 feature is completely dependent on the size tolerance. With
the independency symbol used, the size is verified by a two-point check using a
micrometer or caliper and the form is checked using the runout tolerance. In this
case, the runout checks straightness, circularity, taper, and profile of the feature.

2X 0.4H ~
l__
1 o.8H
I .SH I
,7
H = Letter height
Independency
Symbol Specifications

L/ 0 .3 A B

~ 5±0 05 / ' 0 .8 AB

Example 10-10. Specifying independency to a feature of size.

 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 353

1. Define runout. ___________________________

2. Features that can be controlled by runout are either surfaces constructed around
or perpendicular to a datum axis. True or False?
3. The two types of runout are _______ and _______
4. _______ runout provides control of single circular elements of a surface.
5. When applied to surfaces constructed around a datum axis, circular runout
controls _______ and _______
6. _______ is a condition where two or more features share a common axis.
7. _______ runout provides a combined control of surface elements.
8. Total runout is used to control the combined variations of circularity,
straightness, coaxiality, angularity, taper, and profile when applied to surfaces
constructed around a(n) _______ axis.
9. _______ can be used to control the combined variations of
perpendicularity or to control concavity or convexity when applied to surfaces
perpendicular to a datum axis.
10. Explain the fundamental difference between how circular runout and total
runout are established. ________________________

11. What does the chain line represent when specifying runout to a portion of a
surface? _____________________________
354 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

12. Explain the combination of geometric tolerances that exist in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

X
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 355

13. Given the drawing below, explain the meaning represented by the following
specifications.
A) Datum feature symbol C.
B) Datum feature symbol D.
C) Datum reference C-D in the feature control frame with the runout geometric
tolerance.
D) Combination of runout and cylindricity.

/ 0 .15C-D

1 \2)26

j
/
/:I
0.15 C-D
0 .05 ~
A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

14. Runout is always controlled on a regardless of feature size (RFS) basis.

True or False?
15. When using a runout tolerance, the datum references can be specified at
maximum material boundary (MMB) or least material boundary (LMB).
True or False?
16. When using a runout tolerance, regardless of material boundary (RMB) is always
assumed. True or False?
 .
~rs1on 356 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Print Reading Exercises

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
0 ◄
The following print reading exercises use actual industry prints with related
questions that require you to read specific dimensioning and geometric tolerancing
representations. The answers should be based on previously learned content of this
book. The prints used are based on ASME standards. However, company standards
can differ slightly. When reading these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree
of flexibility is required to determine how individual applications correlate with the
ASME standards.

Refer to tne rint of tne SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING founa on age 433.

1. Name the runout geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2. Completely describe the runout geometric tolerance and related feature found on
this print and identify the material condition applied. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3. What is the maximum FIM allowed in regard to the runout geometric tolerance
identified in Question 2? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4. Briefly describe how the geometric tolerance specified in Question 2 is inspected.

Refer to tne print of tne HUB-STATIONARY, ATU found on page 435.

5. Name the runout geometric tolerances found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Chapter 10 Runout Tolerances 357

6. Refer to the 04.4997/4.4994 feature at Datum C. Note: For runout inspection, a

collet is used to establish the datum axis.
A) Completely describe the geometric tolerance associated with this dimension.

7. What is the maximum FIM allowed in regard to the runout geometric tolerance
identified in Question 6? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8. Briefly describe how the geometric tolerance specified in Question 6 is inspected.

9. Refer to the Rl.525 dimension.

A) How many features relate to this dimension? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) Completely describe the geometric tolerance associated with th is dimension.

C) What does the reference to Datum B-C mean? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

D) Is the datum reference identified in Question 9C primary, secondary, or

tertiary? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Refer to the print of the PLATE-TOP MOUNTING found on page 441.

10. Name the runout geometric tolerance found on this print. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

11. Completely describe the runout geometric tolerance and related feature found on
this print and identify the material condition applied. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on 358 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Refer to the print of the B.H.-TOP found on page 442.

12. Refer to the 024.13/24.10 dimension.
A) Completely describe the geometric tolerance associated with this feature.

B) Give the geometric tolerance applied to the following list of possible

produced sizes.
Produced Sizes Geometric Tolerance
24.13
24.12
24.11
24.10
13. Refer to the tapered feature with the dimensions 023.34 and 8°26'.
A) Completely describe the geometric tolerance associated with this feature.

B) Identify the primary and secondary datum references associated with this
geometric tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 .
~rs1on

Name _______________

Part I
Below is a list of short descriptions with a list of words and symbols at the right.
Place the letter of the word or symbol that matches the description in the blank. Each
letter may be used more than once. Some selections may not be used.
1. Used to define a zone in which the center axis or A) _l_
center plane of a feature of size is permitted to B) Datum target
vary from true position.
C) RFS
2. The general term applied to a physical portion of a

3.
part.
Condition where a feature of size contains the
D)
II
maximum amount of material within the limits.
E) 0
4. Datum feature symbol. F) Bilateral
5. Considered a theoretically perfect dimension. G)
6. The actual feature of an object that is used to H) LMC
establish a datum plane.
7. All datum planes on a part intersecting at right
I) °$
angles are 90° basic by interpretation. J) MMC
8. A geometric tolerance applies at any increment of
size of the feature within its size tolerance.
K) /:I
L) Basic
9. A geometric characteristic that specifies a tolerance
zone in which the required surface element or axis M) 0
must lie. N) Unilateral
10. A geometric characteristic that specifies a
tolerance zone between two parallel planes and
0) /
P) Datum feature
perpendicular to a datum feature.
11. A geometric characteristic used to identify a
location tolerance.
Q)
R) LMB
~
12. A geometric characteristic that specifies a
tolerance zone between two parallel planes and S) MMB
parallel to a datum. T) Datum reference
13. A single element form control that establishes a frame concept
tolerance zone between two concentric circles.
14. A type of profile tolerance that is split equally on U) Simulated datum
each side of the true profile. V) Feature
15. A geometric characteristic that establishes two W) Positional tolerance
perfectly concentric cylinders between which the X) RMB
actual surface must lie.
Y) Virtual condition
16. Applies to a datum feature of size when no
material boundary symbol is specified in the Z) Tolerance buildup
feature control frame. 359
 ■

~rs1on 360 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Part II
Answer the following questions. Write your answer in the space provided.
Identify dimensions and other items as needed.
17. The symbol below is called a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Fill in the dimensions below
as related to lettering height = H when this symbol is properly placed on a
drawing.

~A) _

B) _ _

18. The symbol below is called a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Fill in the dimensions below

as related to lettering height = H when this symbol is properly placed on a
drawing.

19. The symbol below is called a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Fill in the dimensions below

as related to lettering height = H when this symbol is properly placed on a
drawing.

J_ ~
A) _ _ T B) _ _
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 361

20. Identify the items in the symbol below and write your answers in the blanks on
the left.

l-$- I0 0.13@ 1AIB@ICI

A) - - - - - - - - - - - -
I I
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

F) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

G) - - - - - - - - - - - - -

H) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
21. Name each of the dimensioning and tolerancing symbols shown below. Place
your answer on the blank provided to the right of the symbol.

0 --$
R
SR D>
so t:::::-------,_
CR
X
~
=f=
~
I

I
LJ .._...
ISF I @
V [>
□
,,-----..__
CD
\V ®
() CD
 ■

~rs1on 362 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

22. Name each of the following geometric characteristic symbols. Place your answer
on the blank provided to the right of the symbol.

II
_L

.c:::_

/
u _____
23. The symbol below is called a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Identify the symbol
components in the blanks provided and fill in the dimensions as related to
lettering height = H when this symbol is properly placed on a drawing.

A) - - - - - - - - - -

D) _ _

B) - - - - - - - - - - C)

24. The symbol below is called a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Fill in the dimension used

when this symbol is properly placed on a drawing.

A) - ~

25. List three items that can be identified as datum features. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

26. Draw or neatly sketch the symbol for each of the items listed below.
Maximum material condition _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Projected tolerance zone _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Least material condition _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 363

27. Name the following symbols. Place your answer in the blank provided below the
symbol.

X
A) - - - - - - - B) _ _ _ _ _ _ __ C)

28. Why are there no symbols to represent regardless of feature size (RFS) and
regardless of material boundary (RMB)? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on 364 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Part III
Answer the following questions. Write your answer in the space provided.
29. Given the drawing shown below, answer the following questions.

018.4
18.0
[-$-10 o.08@I A[s [c I

A) What is the MMC size of the hole? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) What is the LMC size of the hole? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Provide the positional tolerance at the following produced sizes:
Produced Sizes Positional Tolerance
018.0
018.1
018.2
018.3
018.4
D) Given the three optional feature control frames that can be applied to the
diameter dimension and the range of possible produced sizes below, provide
the positional tolerance at each produced size for each feature control frame
application.

A) l-$-I 0 0 .08 IA IBI CI

B) I -$- I0 0. 0 8 CD IA IBICI
C) I -$- I0 0 @ I A I BI CI
Produced Sizes A)RFS B)LMC C) Zero at MMC
018.0
018.1
018.2
018.3
018.4
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 365

30. Given the drawing shown below, answer the following questions.

8X ¢8± 0.4
l-$-I00.1@IA lc@I

n110.60
\Uj 0.45
UJ ~ oslA

A) Are the holes located using rectangular or polar coordinate dimensioning?

B) What is the MMC of the small holes? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

C) What is the virtual condition of the small holes? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
D) Recalculate the positional tolerance for a floating fastener application if the
bolt used is specified as M7Xl. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
E) Recalculate the positional tolerance for a fixed fastener application (equal
distribution) if the bolt used is specified as M7Xl. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
F) What is the virtual condition of the 010.60/ 10.45 hole? _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G) Describe Datum C. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on 366 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

31. Provide a short, complete interpretation of the feature control frame associated
w ith the following d rawing. _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ __

r \ 0 .2 A
X ...._. y

B
1- 40~
32. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

1 55
I
2X R0 .2 MAX

'_______C 15
1 20±0.4
r
I20
R5
R12

R1 2 Q 0.4 A

NOTE: UNTOLERANCED DI MENSIONS AR E BASIC .

 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 367

33. Given the following drawing, describe the profile geometric tolerance related to each
specification located at optional feature control frames labeled A through F. Indicate
whether the specification shows preferred ASME Y14.5 use or an alternate practice.
Q 0.5@0.5 A B A
M +-+ N

E M +-+ N

~ - - ' , .~ - SC'<CKES ~;;;J

~
N
M
NOTE: ASSUME THE SHAPE BETWEEN M AND N IS
DEFIN ED WITH BASIC DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO DATUM B.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

D) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 ■

~rs1on 368 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

34. Given the following drawing, describe the requirement specified by the profile
geometric tolerances and related note. _ _ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ __

♦ -+,---- - - - , . if- ...

1 I
4X ¢ 6.2

♦ --++----

Q 0 .3 A
X ....-. y
NOTE 1
y X

2X Q 2([) ~ 2 SURFAC ES

NOTE 1:
THIS TOLERANCE AP PLIES WHEN DATUM FEATURE A IS MOU NTED AGAINST
A FLAT SURFACE USING FOUR M6X1 BOLTS TORQUED TO 9 - 15 N- m .

35. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerances in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

I
¢ 44
I 0 44

~ U 0 .08 G-H
- ~ - ~
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 369

36. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ __ _ __ _

~~~~ J 2X \2)16~8~
~ '--+---'

-$- (,Z)0 .3@ A B

(,Z)0 .1@ A

37. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2 x ¢ 17.8
17.6
~ 00.6@ A 8 C
0O.15@A
 ■

~rs1on 370 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

38. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2 x ¢17.8
17.6
-$- 00.6@ A B C
0O. 15@AB

39. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6X 60° 6X 088.04
-$- (2) 0.8@ A B@
(l)0.3@A
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 371

40. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6X 60" 6X \2)8.4
8.0
4- /2)0.8@ A B@C@
4- /2)0 .3@ A B@
__:_i

rE
¢14+g- 1
 ■

~rs1on 372 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

41. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

8X ¢ 5.3-5.4
l-$-l00.25@IA IB@ I
8X LJ \2\8.4-8.6 w 4.6-5.0
l-$-l00.35@IA IB@ I
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 373

42. Provide a short, complete description of the geometric tolerance in the following
drawing. _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ __

M12X1.75-5H
l-$ l(,L)0.4@®1AIM INI

11
11 20 MIN

------------..------+-'~-- _l_
II II
II II
 ■

~rs1on 374 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

43. Given the following drawing, describe how the location tolerance is applied to
the thread elements in each specification.

A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

M14X2
l-$-1 0o.1@IAIBlc
A
l
l-$-10o.1@IAIBlc l
MAJOR DIA
B
l-$-10o.1@IAIBlc l
MINOR DIA
C

44. Define feature and specify how a feature can be represented on a drawing.

45. Describe a feature of size.

 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 375

46. Describe a feature without size.

47. Define a regular feature of size.

48. Define an irregular feature of size.

49. Explain how material boundary condition values can be displayed in the feature
control frame.
 ■

~rs1on 376 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

50. Given the following drawing, identify the datums related to the pattern of holes.
Explain why the perpendicular tolerance is added to this drawing. Calculate the
maximum material boundary of the 018.0/ 17.6 feature. Show your calculations.

51. Given the following drawing w ith labels A and B pointing to locations in two
feature control frames, explain the following applications:

f A

r
165±1
· - --+-· @]± 0 .5
I - - - + - 25
~/4)-
~ 0_.5_--\,-J-A
~ D~
B

2X szj4± 0.2

A) Explain the use of MMB and give the maximum material boundary
calculation.

Explain the use of LMB and give the least material boundary calculation.

Explain if no symbol is used here.

 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 377

B) Explain the use of MMB and give the maximum material boundary
calculation.

Explain the use of LMB and give the least material boundary calculation.

Explain if no symbol is used here.

52. Given the following drawing, calculate the MMB value for Datum Feature D as
referenced in the feature control frame positioning the four 08 - 8.5 holes.

,,.?5 .25
ll':24 75

4X~5 B ~~
l-$ 10 0 .3 @I A ID@I BI
C
 ■

~rs1on 378 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Part IV
Circle T if the statement is true. Circle F if the statement is false.
T F 53. The MMB and LMB symbols are only used if the datum feature has size.
RMB is implied if the datum feature has size and no boundary symbol
is used. No material boundary symbol can be used if a feature does not
have size.

T F 54. Unit straightness can be used if the part must be controlled per unit of
measure as well as over the total length.
T F 55. Specific area flatness should be avoided on very large parts.
T F 56. Circularity is a profile tolerance.
T F 57. Cylindricity is identified by a radius tolerance zone that establishes two
perfect concentric cylinders.
T F 58. The profile of a line tolerance must be established between two given
points on an object.
T F 59. A parallelism tolerance zone must be smaller than the size tolerance of the
feature.
T F 60. The perpendicularity of a shaft, such as a stud or pin, to a datum feature
establishes a cylindrical tolerance zone.
T F 61. The note EACH ELEMENT must be applied to a perpendicularity feature
control frame.
T F 62. An angularity tolerance must have a basic angular relationship to a
datum.
T F 63. The tolerance zone descriptor of a concentricity tolerance is R.
T F 64. Concentricity is used to establish the relationship between the axes of two
or more cylindrical features of an object.
T F 65. The profile tolerance zone can be bilateral or unilateral.
T F 66. Surface straightness can violate perfect form at MMC.
T F 67. Geometric tolerances imply RFS unless otherwise specified.
T F 68. A concentricity tolerance should be used if there is a need to control the
axis, as in a dynamically balanced shaft. Otherwise, it is recommended
that a runout or positional tolerance be used.
T F 69. A coaxial relationship can be controlled by a positional tolerance at MMC
with the datum reference at MMB, LMB, or RMB.
T F 70. LMC is often used to control minimum edge distance or wall thickness.
T F 71. True position is the theoretically exact location of a feature.
T F 72. The datum reference frame exists in theory. The theoretical reference
frame is simulated by positioning the part on datum features to
adequately relate the part to the datum reference frame and to restrict
motion of the part relative to the reference frame.
T F 73. When reference is made to the datum reference frame, the primary datum
should be given first, followed by the secondary and tertiary datums. This
is referred to as datum precedence.
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 379

PartV
Given the following specifications, calculate the required unknown values.
74. Given: A shaft with a diameter of 36±0.2.
Calculate:
A) Tolerance _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) MMC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) LMC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

75. Given: A hole with a diameter of 36.5 ~8:f ·

Calculate:
A) Tolerance _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) MMC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) LMC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
0) Allowance with the shaft in Question 74. Show the formula(s) and your
calculations.

E) Clearance with the shaft in Question 74. Show the formula(s) and your
calculations.

76. Given: Two parts to be bolted together with a 5±0.4 hole through each part and
an M4.5X0.75 HEX SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW and HEX NUT for fastening.
Show the formula(s) and calculations for:
A) Positional tolerance. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

B) Virtual condition. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on 380 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

77. Given: Two parts to be bolted together. One part has a hole with a diameter
of 16.5-16.1. The other part has a threaded hole, M16X2, located to align with
the hole through the first part. An M16X2 STANDARD METRIC HEAVY HEX
SCREW is used to fasten the two parts. Calculate the positional tolerance for
each part based on:
A) Equally distributed positional tolerance. Show the formula(s) and your
calculations.

B) Provide 60% of the positional tolerance to the threaded part. Determine the
positional tolerance for each part. Show the formula(s) and your calculations.

78. Given: A pin with a diameter of 8 -g5 is held perpendicular to datum surface A
by a tolerance of 00.2. ·
Calculate:
A) MMC pin. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B) LMC pin. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C) Virtual condition. Show the formula(s) and your calculations. _ _ _ _ __
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 381

Part VI
Answer the following questions. Write your answer in the space provided.
79. Describe chain dimensioning. Explain why caution should be used when placing
chain dimensions._________________________

80. Describe baseline dimensioning. Explain the possibility of tolerance buildup

when using baseline dimensioning. __________________

81. Describe direct dimensioning. Explain the possibility of tolerance buildup when
using direct dimensioning. _ _____________________

82. Describe rectangular coordinate dimensioning without dimension lines. _ __

83. Describe chart dimensioning. _____________________

 ■

~rs1on 382 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

84. Define limits of size. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

85. Give the basic rules for displaying metric limit tolerance values correctly. _ __

86. Give an example of metric limit tolerance values specified on one line. _ _ __

87. Give an example of stacked metric limit tolerance values. __________

88. Give the basic rules for displaying inch limit tolerance values correctly. _ _ __

89. Give an example of inch limit tolerance values specified on one line. _____

90. Give an example of stacked inch limit tolerance values. ___________

91. Give the basic rule for specifying the plus and minus tolerance values of an angle
correctly. _____________________________

92. Give an example of an angular dimension specified with plus and minus
tolerance values. __________________________

93. Give the basic rule for specify ing an angular dimension when only minutes or
seconds are used. _________________________
 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 383

94. Explain the basic function of the translation symbol. ____________

95. Explain the basic function of the continuous feature symbol. ________

96. What does a movable datum target symbol indicate? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

97. Identify how many degrees of freedom are found on every part, and identify
how many are translational and how many are rotational. _________

98. Describe datu m feature simulators. Include the term "simulated datums" in
your description and give three examples of datum feature simulators used in
manufacturing. __________________________

99. Identify five locations where a feature control frame can be placed on a drawing.
1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 ■

~rs1on 384 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

100. Give the proper abbreviation and definition for regardless of material boundary.

101. What is the datum feature requirement for the use of the MMB and LMB
symbols? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

102. Define average diameter. Identify how many measurements are taken to assure
the establishment of an average diameter. ________________

103. Define restrained condition. _____________________

104. Define restrain. __________________________

105. When specifying a part to be verified in a restrained condition, describe how the
necessary forces are established and how the drawing is created to represent the
desired specifications. ________________________

106. Define form tolerances. _______________________

107. Define perpendicularity. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

 ■

~rs1on Final Exam 385

108. Define tangent plane and describe the relationship between the actual surface,
the tangent plane, and the geometric tolerance. ______________

109. Define radial element and describe how a radial element specification is applied
to a drawing. ___________________________

110. Define parallelism. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

111. Define virtual condition. _______________________

112. Give the formulas for calculating virtual condition for internal and external
features.
Internal feature:

External feature:

113. Define concentricity. ________________________

114. Define runout. ___________________________

 ■

~rs1on 386 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

115. Explain the fundamental difference between how circular runout and total
runout are established. ________________________

116. What type of control is applied when positional tolerancing is used to control
symmetrical features? ________________________

117. What must occur with regard to material condition and datum precedence when
composite and two single-segment feature control frames are specified? Explain
what can be done when this requirement is not desired. __________

118. Describe the control established when a flatness geometric tolerance is applied to
a size dimension. _________________________

119. Explain limited length straightness and describe how it is displayed on a

drawing.

120. What is the difference between the circularity geometric tolerance and the
cylindricity geometric tolerance? ___________________
 .
~rs1on

Drafting Proble32
";/

General Information and Instructions

A variety of drafting problems are provided on the following pages. The
drafting problems vary in complexity and require different GD&T applications.
The drafting problems are presented as pictorial illustrations, 2D layouts, or rough
engineer's sketches. The GD&T applications are displayed on the problem or in
written instructions. Use the following instructions unless otherwise specified with
the problem.
• Use manual or computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) as specified by
your course requirements.
• Select a drawing scale that clearly displays the features and dimensions.
• Select drafting sheet sizes that avoid crowding and are in accordance with
standard practices such as drawing scale. The sheet size should allow
enough space for the number of views, dimensions and notes, and future
revisions.
• Prepare formal drawings using properly selected multiviews (orthographic
projection). The number of views needed depends on the requirements of
each drafting problem. This is to be determined by you.
• Use proper sectioning techniques as needed.
• Apply conventional dimensioning and geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing as specified in ASME Y14.5 and as instructed in this text.
• Use unidirectional dimensioning unless otherwise specified by your
instructor or other specific instructions.
• Prepare metric drawings in millimeters and inch drawings in inches, unless
directed by your instructor to convert millimeters to inches or inches to
millimeters.
• Use line standards as recommended in ASME Y14.2M.
• Place the following general notes in the lower-left corner (1/ 2" or 12.5 mm
each way from the corner) unless otherwise specified by your instructor:
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5-2009.
2. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN
MILLIMETERS. (or INCHES.)
3. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES.
4. OTHER NOTES AS NEEDED FOR PROBLEM REQUIREMENTS.

387
 ■

~rs1on 388 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Dimensions and Notes

Provide specified dimensions as given. Provide general title block tolerances for
unspecified dimensions as follows, unless otherwise specified by your instructor.
Inch Drawings
.x = ±.1
.xx= ±.01
.xxx = ±.005
ANGULAR = ±30'
FRACTIONAL = ±1/32
FINISH = 125µIN
Metric Drawings
Metric tolerancing is generally controlled by the ISO 2768-General Tolerances
standard developed by the International Organization for Standardization. A general
note that states the ISO 2768 class for general tolerances, such as ISO 2768-m, shall
be placed on the drawing. Use the general tolerances given in Example 1-6 of this
textbook for linear, radius, chamfer, and angular dimensions.
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 389

Drafting Problem 1
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame.
Name
FACE BLOCK
Material
MILD STEEL (MS)
 ■

~rs1on 390 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 2
Skill Level
Basic

Units
Inch

Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimension, feature control frames. The words
"FRONT SURFACE" and "BACK SURFACE" should not be placed on the drawing.

Name
GAUGE BLOCK

Material
SAE 4320, .315 IN. THICK
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 391

Drafting Problem 3
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Circularity and cylindricity. A full section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
VALVE PIN

Material
PHOSPHOR BRONZE

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on 392 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 4
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Unequally disposed profile of a surface, parallelism.
Name
INSERT

Material
SAE4640

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
~rs ion Drafting Problems 393

Drafting Problem 5
Skill Level
Basic

Units
Metric

Application
Profile between points, parallelism.

Name
SPRING CLIP
Material
SAE 1060, 10 mm THICK
Finish
ALL OVER O.SµM
 ■

~rs1on 394 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 6
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Inch
Application
Profile of an angled surface. A full section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
POSITION PIN

Material
SAE2330

Finish
ALL OVER 32µIN
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 395

Drafting Problem 7
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Zero positional tolerance at MMC for a pattern of holes.
Name
PLATE
Material
SAE 1020

A
 ■

~rs1on 396 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 8
Skill Level
Basic

Units
Metric

Application
Positional tolerance for coaxial holes of different size.

Name
BRACKET

Material
SAE 1030
~rs ion Drafting Problems 397

Drafting Problem 9
Skill Level
Basic

Units
Inch
Application
Projected tolerance zone.

Name
THREADED PLATE

Material
SAE 1020

Finish
ALL OVER 0.8µIN
 ■

~rs1on 398 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 10
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame, position
tolerances, profile tolerance.
Name
JAW INSERT
Material
SAE4330
Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
Instructions
The sketch below includes three alternative tolerance specifications for the upper surface
profile tolerance. Create three drawings using one of the alternative profile tolerance specifications
separately in each drawing, unless otherwise specified by your instructor. After completing
your drawings, use a word processor to prepare a report explaining and comparing the three
alternatives for the upper surface profile tolerance, unless otherwise specified by your instructor.
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 399

Drafting Problem 11
Skill Level
Basic

Units
Metric

Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame, different
position tolerances applied to a hole in each direction.

Name
TEE PLATE

Material
SAE 1018

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on 400 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 12
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame, position
tolerance, non-uniform profile tolerance zone.
Name
SHIM

Material
SAE4320

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 401

Drafting Problem 13
Skill Level
Basic
Units
Metric
Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame, position
tolerance, profile tolerance, free state application.
Name
JOURNAL BRACKET

Material
ASTMA366

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on 402 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 14
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Profile of coplanar surfaces, position, center plane datum. A full section is shown
here only for clarity.
Name
FLUSH PLATE

Material
SAE 1137
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 403

Drafting Problem 15
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Inclined datum feature, angularity, perpendicularity, position.
Name
STEERING ARM STOP

Material
SAE4815
 ■

~rs1on 404 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 16
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Axis p arallelism. A full section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
SHAFT BEAM

Special Instructions
Provide R.12 fillets.
Material
SAE 1070
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 405

Drafting Problem 17
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Circular runout to two datum diameters. A full section is shown here only for
clarity.
Name
VALVE PIN
Material
BRONZE
 ■

~rs1on 406 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 18
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Runout relative to a datum surface and diameter with form control specified. A
full section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
COVER

Material
SAE 1015
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 407

Drafting Problem 19
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Positional tolerance at LMC. A half section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
THRUST WASHER

Material
SAE5150
 ■

~rs1on 408 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 20
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerances for holes and slots, partial written instructions.
Name
MODULAR CHASSIS PLATE
Material
SAE 30308, 1.5 THICK
Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
Additional Instructions
1. Provide the note UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS LOCATING TRUE
POSITION ARE BASIC on the drawing.
2. The 6X 08 and 4X 05 holes shall have a positional tolerance of 0.25 at MMC to
Datums A, B, and C.
3. The 12 x 6 slots with full radius ends shall have a positional tolerance of 0.5 at
MMC applied to the 12 dimension and a positional tolerance of 0.25 at MMC
applied to the 6 dimension. Include the BOUNDARY reference.
Optional Instructions
This drawing may be done using rectangular coordinate dimensioning without
dimension lines depending on your course objectives and instructions.
~rs ion Drafting Problems 409

- -- - - - - - 2 3 0 - - - - - - - - i

A
80

060

6X <1>8

2X 6
260
4X 05 20
200 2X 12 40

--(I)

65 I
(1)- -(1)
I
25

"'jJ
25

90
B
170 30
 ■

~rs1on 410 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 21
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for symmetry, perpendicularity.
Name
STOP PIN
Material
SAE3240
 ■

~rs1on Draft ing Problems 411

Drafting Problem 22
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for holes, form, concentricity, orientation. A half section is
shown here only for clarity.
Name
HUB INSERT

Material
SAE 1045

Finish 3X 120-
A LL OVER l.6µM
 ■

~rs1on 412 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Draftin Problem 23
Skill Level
Intermediate

Units
Metric

Application
Positional tolerance with two single-segment feature control frame.

Name
KEYED STOP PLATE

Material
SAE 1045

Finish
ALL OVER O.SµM

HUB VIEW
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 413

Drafting Problem 24
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for coaxial features, zero geometric tolerance at MMC. A half
section is shown here only for clarity.
Name
MOUNTING PLATE

Material
SAE4140

Finish
ALL OVER 0.8µM
 ■

~rs1on 414 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 25
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for symmetry, perpendicularity.
Name
MOUNTING PLATE

Material
SAE 1095

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 415

Drafting Problem 26
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for holes with separate requirements.
Name
SPRING CLIP
Material
SAE 1085

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
~rs ion 416 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 27
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
LMC applied to a pattern of slots.
Name
SPLINE COLLAR
Material
SAE3140
Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
~rs ion Draft ing Problems 417

Drafting Problem 28
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance for the symmetry of tabs.
Name
LOCKING COLLAR

Material
SAE 1080

Finish
ALL OVER 0.2µM
 ■

~rs1on 418 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 29
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Irregular features, datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control
frame, position tolerance, profile tolerance.
Name
ADJUSTABLE END MOUNT

Material
6 GAUGE (.1943) MILD STEEL (MS)

Finish
ALL OVER 32µIN
 ■

~rs1on Draft ing Problems 419

Draftin Problem 30
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Irregular features datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control
frame, position tolerance, profile tolerance.
Name
CAM END PLATE

Material
SAE 1040
Finish
ALL OVER 32µIN

C
 ■

~rs1on 420 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 31
Skill Level
Intermediate
Units
Inch
Application
Datum feature symbols, basic dimensions, feature control frame, flatness
tolerance, position tolerance, perpendicularity tolerance.
Name
TABLE PIN HOUSING

Material
SAE 1020

Finish
ALL OVER 32µIN
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 421

Drafting Problem 32
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Inch
Application
Partial surface datum, positional tolerance for repetitive features, datum target
areas and line.
Name
EXTENSION SUPPORT

Material
ALUMINUM
 ■

~rs1on 422 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 33
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Inch
Application
Positional tolerance for coaxial holes of the same size. A full section is shown
here only for clarity.
Name
BEARING GUIDE

Material
SAE2340
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 423

Drafting Problem 34
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Inch
Application
Positional tolerances with two single-segment feature control frames for patterns
of features.
Name
CLUTCH PLATE

Material
As specified.
Finish
ALL OVER 63µIN
 ■

~rs1on 424 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Draftin Problem 35
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Metric
Application
Positional tolerance of nonparallel features, datum target symbols establishing
a datum axis, working from a rough engineering sketch. Sectioning methods are
recommended to avoid dimensioning to hidden features.
Name
OSCILLATOR

Material
PHOSPHOR BRONZE

Finish
ALL OVER 0.25µM

PERPENDICULAR lO
DATUM A BY 0.0G
A
 ■

~rs1on Drafting Problems 425

Drafting Problem 36
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Inch
Application
Multiple applications from written instructions.
Name
END BRACKET
Material
TITANIUM
Finish
63µIN
Additional Instructions
1. Label all datums.
2. Use the dimensions shown on the sketch, but not necessarily the placement
shown.
3. Provide an angularity tolerance of .005 to Datum C for the 70° angle on both
sides.
4. Hold a surface profile tolerance of .005 between Point X and Point Y at both
surfaces controlled by the Rl.25 dimension.
5. Position the 0.750+.005/-.002 hole and the 01.380 counterbore to Datums A, B,
and C by .003 at MMC.
6. The surfaces labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be held symmetrical with datum center
plane D by .004. (Note the numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 will not be shown on your
drawing.)
7. Provide a coaxial positional tolerance to locate the 0.187 holes with a tolerance of
0.002 at MMC relative to Datums A, B, and C where the holes (together) must lie.
Also, provide a coaxial positional tolerance of 0.001 at MMC where the axes of
the holes must lie relative to each other.
8. Provide reference to Datum E. Datum E is the surface labeled 1.
9. Provide a coaxial positional tolerance to locate the 0.86-.89 feature with a
tolerance of 0.005 at MMC relative to Datums E, A, and C where the holes
(together) must lie. Also, provide a coaxial positional tolerance of 0.002 at MMC
where the axes of the holes must lie relative to each other.
10. Establish Datum B perpendicular to Datum A by .002.
11. Establish Datum C perpendicular to Datum A and Datum B by .002.
~ rs iOn 426 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing
~rs ion Drafting Problems 427

Drafting Problem 37
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Metric
Application
Projected tolerance zone.
Name
TRANSMISSION COVER

Material
CAST IRON (CI)
 ■

~rs1on 428 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 38
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
Inch
Application
Applying geometric tolerances from w ritten instructions.
Name
SPACER
Material
PHOSPHOR BRONZE. Machine to .500 thickness.
Finish
63µIN
Additional Instructions
1. Surface "a" is Datum A.
2. The center of the pattern of the 2X 0.255-.260 holes is Datum B.
3. The outside perimeter of the part is controlled with a surface profile tolerance of
.05 relative to Datums A and B at MMB. All size dimensions associated with this
geometric tolerance are basic.
4. The 2X 0.255-.260 holes are located with basic dimensions and controlled with a
positional tolerance of 0.008 at MMC relative to Datum A.
5. The 0 .505-.510 holes are located with basic dimensions and controlled with a
positional tolerance of 0.010 at MMC relative to Datum A and Datum B at MMB.
6. The inside square is controlled with a surface profile of .03 relative to datum
feature A primary and datum feature B at MMB secondary.
~rs ion Drafting Problems 429

1--- - - - 3.5 0 0 - - - - - - - - - - <

4X R.500 1--- - - - 3.000 - - - - - - - - - , 4 x ¢.510

.505

R.125 I
BX R.250 1.500

I
--+-- ffi -1----'- 3.000

3 .500
Hall

4X .250

4X .500+- + - - - 2x 2.500 - - --
 ■

~rs1on 430 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Drafting Problem 39
Skill Level
Advanced
Units
As specified.
Application
Design project.
Name
As specified.
Material
As specified.
Instructions
Find a part from a product in your home, apartment, garage, shop, or barn. This
should be a part from a product that you can easily disassemble and then reassemble.
Then, use the following instructions to complete the problem.
1. Make multiview and sectional view sketches of the part as needed to provide
shape description.
2. Use calipers and micrometers as needed to take measurements from the part.
Sketch the measurements in the form of dimensions on the multiview sketch.
Be sure to take all size and location dimensions. Be sure to consider mating parts
when determining tolerances for related features.
3. Sketch your proposed geometric tolerancing applications based on what you
have learned through the study of this textbook. Provide the appropriate form,
profile, orientation, and location geometric tolerancing as needed.
4. Complete a formal drawing using ASME Y14.5-2009 standards. Use an
appropriate title block and border.
5. Give a print of your drawing to your instructor for checking.
6. Make any required or recommended corrections.
7. Submit the drawing for final approval.
 .
~rs1on

Prints for Print

Reading Exercis

General Information
The prints provided on the following pages are used in conjunction with
the end-of-chapter print reading exercises in this text. These prints are industry
drawings prepared using computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) equipment.
The print reading exercises in each chapter test concepts related to the geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing practices discussed in the chapter. The questions
require you to read specific dimensioning and tolerancing representations and
interpret the information provided.
The prints used are based on American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
standards. However, note that company standards can differ slightly. When reading
these prints, or any other industry prints, a degree of flexibility is required to
determine how individual applications correlate with the ASME standards.

Contents
SLEEVE-DEWAR REIMAGING print from FUR Systems, Inc. . 433
BRACKET print from Safety Marine .. . . . . . . . . . . . 434
HUB-STATIONARY, ATU print from FUR Systems, Inc. . . 435
PEDAL-ACCELERATOR print from Hyster Company .. . 436
MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER)-FRAME ASSY 3 AXIS HP
print from FUR Systems, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . 437
HYDRAULIC VALVE print from DIAL Industries .. .. . . 438
COVER, CAGE-INNER AZ DRIVE print from FUR Systems, Inc. . 439
DOUBLE V-BLOCK print from Britt Technologies .. .. . 440
PLATE-TOP MOUNTING print from FUR Systems, Inc. . 441
B.H.-TOP print from Bell Manufacturing . . .. . . . . . . 442
HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS print from FUR Systems, Inc. . 443
PLATE-BOTTOM WEDGED, ADJUSTABLE PARALLEL (HP)
print from FUR Systems, Inc. . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . 444
BRACKET ASSY-EL GIMBAL print from FUR Systems, Inc. . 445
FEMORAL A-P SAW GUIDE STD. print
from Wright Medical Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
FEMORAL BEVEL CUTTER print from Wright Medical Technology . . 447

431
 ■

trs1on 432 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

CEMENT RESTRICTOR print from Wright Medical Technology . . . . . . . . . . 448

SAW GUIDE FIXATION BLOCK print
from Wright Medical Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
STANDARD REAMER GUIDE print from Wright Medical Technology . 450
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s
-PROPRIETARY-
··-t:s DOC ..H,1L~1 ~"1) o,t..TA DISCLOS[O
1,L',:!,.1, 0',: -t!,.RlWITt! 1$ NOT ~0 BL
~W''l":>:.X.("L":>, USLO. OR Dl5C't.OSLD
•~ " "'OLL :,<,: '" Pl'RTTO N-1\0'!L
M~ ~;~iw:~Nc<
NOTES:
1. INTERPRET DRAW!NG IAW MIL-ST0- 100.
2. INTERPRET DIMENSIONS ANO TOLERANCES PER
ASME Y14.5-2009.
3 PART TO BE FREE Of' BURRS ANO SHARP EDGES.
4. VACUUM BAKE (10 - 4 TO 10 -S TORR). TEMP RISE
300" C/10 MIN TO 900 C. HOLD F'OR 15
1.4IN AT 900" C. COOL TO 500" C IN 10 MIN,
500" C TO 100' C IN 30 MIN, REMOVE ANO AIR > - - - - - 2.125 ------< C/'J
COOL TO ROOM TEMP (20" C).
[ //[.001[AI
~
& THREAD RELIEF .10 LONG MAX.
> - - - - 2.059 - i rr.l
6. IDENTIFY IAW MIL-STD-130 BY BAG
ANO TAG INCLUDE LATEST REV LEV£L. rr.l
fr.
8.
ELECTROLESS NICKEL Pl.ATE PER
MIL- C- 26074, CL 2 (.0001/.0002 THK).
DIMENSIONS TO APPLY AFTER FINISH.
f----1.914------l
<
rr.l
& GOLD PLATE INDICATED SURFACE PER
2X 45" X .010
I
MIL-G-45204, TYPE I, GRADE A, CLASS
OPTIONAL, THICKNESS TO BE LESS THAN
.0005 PER SURFACE.
0
30" 45· X .015 rr.l

01.274
0.674
~
::,::l
[ ♦ [0.028@[A[B[

-
IU l ~ 10[B o 660±002
-~------
l ♦ [ 0.014@)[A[BI
::,::l 'tl
I rr.l s-
;;;-
~ ~

-z~
.875-40 UNS-2A ~
R.005 MAX o. 107±.001 THRU a·
LJ0.218 TO FULL :,s,
OIAMETER FAR SIOE ONLY l!l
l ♦ I 0.028@[ A [ B I s:,..
G1 ::·
tT1
><
FRACTIONS ± 1/J2 STRAIGHTNESS &/OR
UNLESS OTHCRWIS[ SPECIREO
OIM[NSIONS ARE IN INCHES
AU. 011.t[NSIONS IN [ ] AR[ MM
PROJECT

OAAWN
PROJECT
f=cc---'==~=-1
O,.Tt
Plift fUR System• Inc.
16505 SW 72nd ,,_
Portlond Or 97224
";;;·
i'1
DECIMALS .XX ±.015 Fl..ATNESS: .005/IN
.xxx ± .005 THREADS:
HOLE ~ .XX ±.005 l >.Tll.t<.AL-CI ASS 2.'\
00 NOT SCALE ORA.WING

I"'"'""'- I I SLEEVE - DEWAR "

V,

r::....,-..,,..,...---+---<Cl64~691
.xxx +.003 \ 1Tl~N.'\~-C1..i,SS 2B
ANGLES 0"30' - .OOl ,','ICLLS,BL~DS,&:
I.IA.TCRW. .
KOVAR
-
REIMAGING ....
w
I~
BENDS ±2' l'fTLRSLCT O'lS:90"
PERPEND. ...L .003/IN V.ACHINLD SuRrACLS· EHGR w
CONCEN. 0 .003/IN ~ OR BETTER "'"" & ONG.'°
SAMPLES M ,<;1 8L APPl{OVLl) 8Y LNt:
PRIOR TO STARTING PRODUCTION .076 lb, SCALE 2:1 I PftlNT'£D: !SHEET 1 or 1
 ...-,
(/)
-·
0
:::::s
....
w
....
rp I
K ~
_l_
62 .53 ~
~
C
2X R. 12 j ;:;
~
....
;:;·
tl
in,
::s
4X 0.187±.003 ~ "'o·
l~l •.028@[ A[ B[ Cl ::s
~·

~I+-~ "'"'"'-
= ...
~
cl
,:l

~
::s
-":;;·
~
~f;-~ rr.l
~

P-.. JJ DATE:
20JUL
SCALE:
1 - 1
OR:
MJN
REV:
0
APPD:
C
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
SAFETY
◊
INCHES
ANO TOLERANCES FOR·

1 PLACE DIMS.; t ,1 MARINE

2 PLACE DIMS.;
J PLACE DIMS.;
:t .0 1
± .005
l, 1724 Marine Drive
Minneapolis, Minnesota

• ,o· NAME:
NOTES: ANGULAR; BRACKET
FRACTIONAL; ± 1/32
1. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES. PART NO:
FINISH: MIL- C- 5541-CLIA
2. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5-2009.
FIRST USED: SIMILAR TO: MATERIAL: 6061-16
Al ALY. .093 THICK
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s
- P"0PRI T~~i -

~~~~r ~i1~
.. ~~~T

7I
NOTES:
1. INTERPRET DRAWING LA.W MIL-ST0-100. 2X R
2. INTERPR(T DIMENSIONS ANO TOLERANCES ~
PER ASME Y14.5- 2009. 6X 375 MIN
3. PART TO BE f REE Of BURRS ANO SHARP EDGES.
&

-F:~.
IDENTIFY IAW M\.- ST0- 130, BY RUBBER
STAMP OR ~O w.RK, CONTRASTING
COlOR •. 12 HIGH GOTHIC SlYLE CHARACTERS. ~:~~~-----
INCLUDE l>,T[ST REV l [V[l; 64669- _ _ _REV_. --=- -
LOCAT£ APPROX AS SHOWN.

=
UNTOLERANCED DIMENSIONS LOCATING TRUE POSITION A.RE BASIC

VI EW A
~
SCALE: 2 :1

=I
r;n

~
-~
~
0
~
;;;·

...~ ...
0:-
0

1~
~
~ ~
!'::
~

[
~·
~
w
U1
 ■

trs1on 436 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

PEDAL-ACCELERATOR
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s
f - - - - - - - 5 . 8 5 0 - - - - - ---1
C

7io2Tc
♦l-002@IAlc l e

.2510 ±.0005 a:
1.1255

4X 6. 188 THRU
2X 45" X .25

"':r10
:::
j ♦j..001(v)jAjcjaj
4X 6.164- 32 UNC T.!>J5 LJ • .313 -;- 1.070 ~C!
l♦j,.001@IA j cj a l
5 .100
l+l•.oH@jAjcjej
>Z
::: ::j
tr.I z
•.875 THRU
l+l•.02e@jc I ,.,-1 ej > C')
(I}~
(I} ~
:~...........~~-i~-

~~
! !H!
~v~ ~:001 (lr ~I
Cl~
"' ~~ ~
~@)[fljr,.
> tr.I ;;;·

.250 l ;o ~
><-
~ C!
vl'
...
0

2.87
~
~-

=
(I} ~
~
~
~

-
tr.I ~
.162

4.52
~~ ~
5.350 ±.001 - - - - - J
I ::,
~ r,-;--------(5.600)------j iIT r,,
PROJECT, ~
REVI ECO HI APPR I DATE
@.
1~~PRP~A,s l~A~Elcls~s69 1 -~ lo
SHEET 1 OF 1 ]SCALE· 1:1
~
.!iQIES;
I tNce, 1i'i'i'C[
1. INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES >IS.
PER A.SUE Y14.5-2009 .. ·-· MOUNTING PLATE (UPPER) - w

'Lin , ,.
FRAME ASSY 3 AXIS HP
2,
ill
PART TO 8E FREE or BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
INK STAMP PART ~ - &: REV. LEVEL IN AREA INDICATED
ASSY s,,,,m, '" ' "
16505 SW 72rld Ave
NEXT ASSY PortJond Or 9 7224
 ...-,
(/)
0-·
-j ;;J REV I CHANGEI DATEI ECN :::::s
2X R.010 --""-J . CORRECT. H.T. I 7/23 I 22644 ....
w
UPDATED owe. I 8/30 I 4 1s11 00

C)
2X R.005 MAX
8
:!
...~
;:;·
1.000-20 UNEF'-2A
2X R.03 MAX SfCJIQN C-C ~ CJ
§'
C "'"'

45" X .030
.12 r
45· X .035
=
I■(
Cj
"'c·
"'
;;·
:::,

"':::...
~
l
YJf.YJ...h. :;;i

~
SCALE: 2:1 ;;;-

·,r
lll.961
.959 is

-
030 111.810
1.124
~ 10~~6;~·101 "'
~
lll l . 120 ("J

t'"'4
Lr ,-
_;:i •
I llll.050

l
{I -1
-l
.750
.9 40
.375

.477
0 .750
.753

101•£*1
1 n
~
~
r!1
1 MS 2427-3 ] 0.684 .687
"°''~~ lll .922
C 1 MS 2427-2 0.7 15 .718
1 MS 2427-1 0.550 .553
~
PART NO .I DIM . A
.mt...8.
SCALE: 4: 1
l 1.420
~01HD"""$($f'(Qflt:I)

INCHN<Jmwwocur011: ..~~ DIAL INDUSTRIES

J PLJ«OIIIS.;
.,~ E::?r!~:."i1t~ {s°{~~oy 1

& AFTER HEAT TREAT

4 SURrACL TRLAl !wl :..\Jl ·:-::~ 8 ~ - 8 ?
3 . HEAT TREAT,..jLN1: R>. n - 7 8 , .0 03- 0 1 ~ DLLP. (l)
2PtAC£ DIMS.;
JPV« DO.IS ,; :i:.~ io~'. A.c. ls~E:loAj~ALC- IAPPo:
MATERIAL: SAE 12 l1 5 0 1.125
2 . REMOV£ ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES.
1. INTERPRET DIMENSIONS ANO TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5-2009
- .,,,. "l" IHYDRAULIC VALVE
NOTES:
cl1'"'Ms 24271"2
 .....
ul
0-·
:::::s

't.,

SR7.500
(j

~ri'.1

\
/f~--
,
'

-·
/
I
A 32

'5.·
.?=I
(j

~ri'.1
JE215
-
l
,oo
(.052)
(8X .080)

.350
.052±.002
63

2X 0'-5" T
(<3.045)
-zz
I

ri'.1 ~
;;;·
~
l - - - t 3.045
.088J
1u1.oos1•1s1 0:-

> - - - - - - e 4.700 B > ...

0

2X R.015- R.005
N ""...
t:I ~::,:,
"t;
32

W I L: ~SLL>> 01 clLliWISL , PLi;II ILD

VIEW A
SCALE: 2X
.080

DO NOT SCALE DRAWING REVI ECO APPR l!lill

.,.,
-<
~

ri'.1
!:l
!::
::s

~
"'c1V)·
INTR[~ET OnAENSIONS ANO TOLrRANC[S PER AS~[ Y1 4.5- 2009.
INTERRO..ATED F£ATURES TO BE TRUE POSIOON .028 DIA. "1
~:...>.X1"1Ji,: V>TLQ:I,,>,_ COt.OITIOt.
All
FRACTIONS
U
D~~~~~:6~g l~Mi~~HES
± 1 32
1

STRAIGHTNESS&: OR
~2 ~0 D 64869f
SHEET 1 1 SCALE: 1:1
1
~
l.
•
ALL SHARP CORNERS .01 RADIUS M-0:. PERMISSABLE.
~:r TC ~l rl~tl rROY ~RS AtJ['i S HARP l PG~ DECIWJ...S .::x ±/t,o TH~rs: .005/IN 1-""'~"'----- '- --l TITLE:
& J;,,'(, irtfl Ff~~H~- PAR'I 1110, .>.ND RL~- LEVEL ON SURfACE HOLE •.X~~ !:88~ ~RR~-=-i~: 22: COVER, CAGE - ....
w
,L~n
001
6. PAINT ALL EXTERNAL SURFACES Wllll POI.ME ·r ANGLES 0"30' · ANCLES,BENDS.& AL ALY 6061-16 INNER AZ DRIVE <o
AS RCQUIR£D 8'f WORK ORDER, EXCEPT AS NOTED. BENDS ±2" INTERSECTIONS:!10'

& PERPEN0...1. .00:5/IN ACl-tlNEO SURFACES: FINISH: CHEM FILM FUR Systems Inc.
00 NOT PAINT.
PER MIL- C- 554 1,CLJ II ~~~;nd~r
72
r:
7 2~~e
 ...-,
(/)
-·
0
:::::s
IL52) ~"·" ....
....
C,
I ' ' R

~
(45" X 0.81)
i: !
~
34.92
44 4:,
~
1
60.32 ;(_/45' :!
~
n·
iii 1 l l a; ~/ CJ
§i
1.60 YIDLA "';:;
V>

~ SCALE: 2:1 s·
;:;
- 4 4 . 4 5 -:
~
t:J ;;·
SfCDONC-C
SCALE: 2:1
1

0 "';:;
I- 3◄ .92 __j C "'-c'l
001 ~
11--,rnJ
~ ,..,,
=
l'.""'4
t!1
1-"
;:i
;:;

1""7 ~ ' t
l+lo.os@lol
~
"
_::·
6X 09.52
I♦ 1¢o.os@IAlslcl
I,, i -
'°~
=
l'.""'4
0
41.28 (j
~

t.(J0.'8) YIEll'...6
SCALE: 4:1

®
¢ 12.70
12.65
1♦TO-@ I AIB l cl _,, ,_Ls.~ c,1l%1SL SPLC:1nLo BRITT
~~~~ir:o Q TECHNOLOGIES
- PiACL D tiS; :L2 Lo• Mgelu . Cclifomia
2 F1A:i:. OMS; ;t.0.2!:> DR: SCALE: DATE: APPO:
4. UNTOLERANCEO 00.4ENSIONS LOCATING TRUE POSITION ARE BASIC J F1A:!. DMS: :L0.100 R.A.C. 1: 1 7 -20
3. HEAT TREAT- CASE HARDEN ~ 58- 60, MIN. . 030 DEEP A\ GLIA~ :LIY:30" MATERIAL· 1018 STEEL
2 REMOVE All BURRS ANO SHARP EDGES NAME:
1. INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Yl4.5-2009. r, SH
,,.. I DOUBLE V-BLOCK
NOTES:
o 167 :s2 - B1 1·0
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s
NOTES
t,, n_-~~'\LT [>R.-'l~ t,,; l~\I' ~11L-STD-WO
~1 ..::~1,-,c.,..- :J~ f>li, Vill-T- 3 1000, r~r"' 3.6.4.

NlJ.\·~;;.~1 ~ l,ILNS10!-.S AND TOLL"W.(:LS

~L~ A~IIL ' '~ ':>-2X'9

,,
~ ~:1v.,< l.X:LS 00:>- ,:)2:, >J.O m t.LT R.020 H',X

~ f1;.';;~ ~~~ -Jlt1f~·1<~,.'.i\!~tfmiW.

12 HIGH GOTHIC S1'rt£ CHARACTERS. INCLUOE:
CURRENT REV LEVEL: 6.S69-_ _ REV_.
LOCATE A.Pf'flOX AS SHOWN.

117.400±.002
~
~
r-4
~
r!1
~
t6.750 ~
~
{ZifilQig

~
12xlol.01olAlo@I

g ~
::·
z
~
0:-
...c
3X 45· X .02 ~ ~
["
~ ~
~
~
3 suRF'ACES
=wA=A ;\
~·
DECIMALS .XX ± .XX
R.03 .XXX ±.XXX
HOLE 0 .XX ± .005 ~.• -,LS$ ~
.IID<.B. - ~ :,!__ •. :!',
SCAI..E:2/1 .xxx ~ :88T [.).-c;;:'JJ..L- :'.'. 1-1'.:-$ 2A
,,-"r,r-..,:,.-~. ,.\~~ .::~
~
ANGLES L. ±0"30' ,,,.,_:,. \l.~ 5_,:;:r,i.:LS·
BENDS ±T ii o:. s~··t.:,
 ...
ul
-·
0
:::::s
....
J .96 R1J.O it
C)
8
t.112X1 .75-6H
:!
T 25.4 ~
l ♦ l•<usl• I ~·
CJ
§
-J •l!l6E ~
"'s·
2X R0.8 1
11=
I I I 1
lo .25[AIB
,6.35 DOWEL PIN

=A
:::
~-
SCALE 2: 1
"':::
: :t' : .IIDl'...8. "'-

=
I • ,
SCALE 2:1
BRIDGEPORT R- 8
I
cl

=
I
I 1-"
I ;:i
I 134.70 :::
.:":·
I

~
I / 10.2slA I B
I 5.00
H ~ ~ - - - - - - - . - - -129.92
- 0
Rl.57 eJ1 . 75 ~
45' X J .O

f
I
3X M6X1-6H
l ♦ l•<usl, l• l cl
22.65 ITIJ]]
< __:::. l' I I
-i r9.J4
UNLESSOT1-£RW!SESPECIFlEll
MANUFACTURING
,60.J2 .
III§0---r-@
. I ,. . . . .
MIU.IMETERS
NIOlOI.ERANCES fCIII:
1 PLACE DIMS:
2Pl.ACE DIMS
±2
:t:0.25
D
OR:
72078 Roswell Rood
Atlanta, Georgie 30328
SCALE: DATE:
JPLACE DIMS· ±0.100 R.A.C. 1: 1 16NOV
J . USE e9.5 ENO MILL FOR INDEX INDENTATION. ANGULAR: :t:O""JO' MATERIAL: S.A.E. 41.30
2. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES.
1. INTERPRET DIMENSIONS ANO TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5-2009. FINISH: J.21-1 m
NAME B.H.- TOP
NOTES:
C Ir' MS 2 4 371"0
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s

NOTES:
1. INTERPRET ORAWING IAW MIL-ST0-100. ClASSIFICATION
PER MIL- T- J1000, PAA.A J.6.4. l+l•.ooJIAlelcj ~ ~ i
FLUSH WITHIN .005 ,:!,
2. OIMENSIONING AND TOlERANCING PER ASME
Y1 4.5 - 2009.
3, PART TO 8£ f"REE Of BURRS A.NO SHARP EDGES.

ffi~~~\.o~t'sEJi/L'&#i\t6~ti0rfEs~·it21~re:i~~R~CE .000,-
~(096)---c_ ~
--- I I \~ ~ ~· · 101 ' 1
.0005 MAX .0002 MIN.
5. BAG ITEMS AND IDENTIFY IAW MIL-STD-lJO, INCLUDE
CURREITT RCV LEVEL: 64869- ______ REV_.

=
~ 0
,112-40 UNC-2B TKRU
l:tl•.014jc!Al el
c::
2X R

2X .120
-3
I -
'-~ z~
~~: -~f o
I
!~~ ~
I
.£J
'
I ;-.,. X .15
r:J'l

I
0 0 ~
.824 -
992 _ r - - ; a
(.t2e)
(1,0l4) .926
tr.I
• - - - -,.1..8 . t--=(1.076) 1.076

Sil i;;-;;-...
(1.2112) "Cl
4)( 1.122 THRU
LJ • . 188 'f . 15
j ♦ l•.014@0 jAjcj I~ ~ ~ 45·x.20

1.128 0n ...C
..."Cl
[·
c::
r:J'l
:,:i
~
.000 T ~ =t::2:d !:,,
~
4X R,075 ~
A PL■ ~~!'" I
"';:(
TOLERAACES - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED : l : : 1 -T6 PliWI.Cl i;;·
DECIMALS .XX ± .0 1 PCRP ...1.. .OOJ/IN ~
.xxx ± .oos s·~wT~Lss - DV->;,.., ~t.. f'lLM PCR N'l'IIQYAI.S 1)1,.T( 1,.,....
HOLE ~ .xx CJ .005/1'< t,OL-C- ~~ 1 CL 3 ~ ... DRAWN DATE HOUSING-LENS, FOCUS

=~:;~~!~ :;~
±.005 'l AT.. ~SS
+ 00.3 -,-~LAC'S· i.w.ns OTIU',o~ ~N"a> Ctt.CX CHECKED DATE I ....
mGLES ·;x ~1~) "-'t~}ft;!fffl€ .Ji~~~ ~1t,~, ol648691owc t«J l~ 1
....
w
BENDS ±2" ~~ 0~ 9!J TLR c..i..c M -~ APPROVED DATE SCAU: 1 1 PIIWTm, SHEn 1......QE 1
 ...
ul
0-·
:::::s
2X <45" X .20
""'
:t
2X •s· 2X f. 1J6 l".65
2X • -188 THRU
LJ •. Jt25±.0050 'i" .210 1•1 -~_o;.@jAjBjc I
l•I ,.01•®!Alelcl 2X .164-J2UNC-28 "i".40 C)
g:
;cl
",:;-r;·
>~
.,g~
tl
i
""'
c~
V>

tf

2X f .1 88 THRO
l•I , .01•Ql) [Aje jcl
~=
C/lrr:I

1:1:j
~~
0
~·
""-
"'
:;'l
;.-
rr:I ~ ~
"';:;·
r,

, ~'1'° ~o
~~
L2.s200:1:.001s----l
~. :;--1 . j L LOO
>~
~ rr:I
f - - - - - - - 5 .6 0 - - - - - -
-21.t_ ~o
~'1
=P-i
=o
-

-
rr:I
...
NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
I 11: [ ::
1
>RWN; I I l) I 64869 I I6
~

1. INTERPRET OIMENSl()NS NIIO TOlERANCES PCR ASME Y\ 4.5- 2009

2. INTERREI.ATEO FEATURES TO & TRUE POSmON .028 OWAETCR
. R-
AT MAXIMUI.I MATtRW. CONDITION MATL:
AL, 6061-T6

,l·n '"' ,,.,.m, ,~

J. POO TO BE FREE FROM BURRS AND SHAAP EDGES.
& INK STAMP Bl.ACK, PART NO. A.NO REV. LEV'EL IN AREA INDICATED
ASSY FINISH·
l J' L!? ~INISf< Z 1 ~5SW72ndA_..
NEXT ASSY Mil STD 171 7.3.3 • Por11ond Or 97224
 .....
ul
0-·
:::::s
~ PART NO. I DESCRIPTION
BASE 1
!BRACKET
IMACH SCREW. 100' FLHD .. 086-56 X . 188 LG
THDLOCKING COMPOUND LOCTITE 222 AR
MACH SCREW, 100" FLHD,.086-56 ~__J___§_§_ LG 3
ITHDLOCKING COMPOUND(LOCTITE 222) I AR

3X 0.109~ :22iTHRU !3X .125!l -

~ >•s·I
~
<D V0.172 X 100'
c275 [_ 10
1 C20 t+ l ¢.028@lclDI
L_ /l2x ~
~ ~
t ~
.so (.30)___r-- - - ~ 7
2X R.06 .50
3X .086-56 UNC-28
2
.
38 - ri ~
~ 7 _c~_.,s ~
~ .25 MIN FULL THREADS
R.375
2X 0. 144 +.005 a:, BREAK THRU PERMISSIBLE 78 .25
-.001 C I
Js17'tr
I + I ¢ .010 IAIB I
l+!¢.0281f/)!A!B®I ~

R2.49
31J '" ' - 2 >
r.tl
0JL2:~ r.tl
R2.74
·~1
G)j ~
[¾ ! ¢ .028@!A!B@I (•.75 STK) "' rr.l "Cl
::i.
t""4

- "
i;;-
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 2X R
G1 ... C
1. INTERPRET DWG IAW DOD- STD- 100.
VIEW B ~'
< "Cl
~ ;:!.~-
2. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING
PER ASME Y14.5-2009. ITEM N0.2 ffi !',>_

A
~
3. PARTS TO BE FREE FROM BURRS AND VIEW
SHARP EDGES. :,:i
ITEM N0.1
ill_ IDENTIFY IAW MIL-STD-130, .12 HIGH ~
~
GOTHIC S1YLE CHARACTERS, COLOR BLACK
RUBBER STAMP OR HAND MARK. LOCATE SEE VIEW 8(2 1 ) SEE VIEW A t""4 ~
APPROX AS SHOWN.
& BRACKET ASSY r,-,

"'"'ii
APPLY ITEM N0.4, THD LOCKING COMPOUND TO THREADS.

& MATERIAL:
ITEM N0. 1: AL ALY 6061-16 OR -1651
UNSPECIFIED LIMITS
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 3 i;;·
ITEM N0.2: SST TUBE 300 SERIES
0 . 75 O.D. X .028 WALL .0Ec1
-:;: ~c-1::i<JS
MAJ...s .lx; 1/l2
\~5lo
.5. SH,i,IGl-f"-,.JLSS &1CI.
Tr1~t.Zt s~ss: ,oc,~i t,J ttCH~K~Dt'= ==i:=fr\S't\HciEE:'T:-'::"'O"-F~-=-:s..,Ce,A~L.-E"::,-'"'·"-''- -i
T ,T , ~-
~

& FINISH: HOLE • .XX ±.DOS L'JCT"LNNA-- CI .o.SS 2,1,,

·&x.:O, ±·85f ;\~~:~:•it~~tl5 28
, • . ...,
....
ITEM NO. 1: CHEM FILM PER MIL- C- 5541,CL3 ANGLES
....
G)&,.
ITEM N0.2: PASSIVATE PER ASTM A380

BREAK ALL EDGES .010-.030

- - - - - !BENDS

ASSY
±2"
?.j!,P7No. .L .DOJ<IN
'JTLR~LCTIO~S:9D"
",.,i,-;r, NLD SuRr,r..c u;:
5A1,i?LLS i.,uST BL APPRO\l!..D 8"I Li,JG.
FINISH:
SEE NOTE t;--
Pl~n
g
._._ ,,_, , ,.,,_,,, ,._
FllR Systems lne
16505 SW 72nd Ave
"1

NEXT ASSY ?RI': :;> -o STAITT!t.::.. FROS:UCTIQ-.J ~ • Portland Of" 97224

 ...-,
(/)
-·
0
:::::s
....
....
°'
C)
8
:!
~
"T.I ~-
r.r1
~
¢ .500 THRU

~ ~
C
1~1¢ Ol4@IAI BIC@I
!0 \J 0 "'"':,:s·
0 :,::, ;;·:,:
3/B-24 UN F - 2P
1~1¢ .0 14@ 1B I AIC@ I
>
~ "':,:
MINOR DIA "'-
3.00 + ~ cl
;.-
""d is

J
:,:
r:/'l "
_::·
2X 1.22

L ~
------------+--
G1
@.188u
I-- 1750 ~ ggg
,.H}~ C:
~

0
r.r1
2.058 ± .0 10
W~ GHT ~U C CAI Ti:CH~O.OGY PW!'RIETAl!Y
",;,S ''/.-E~>. -• . ,SC'.)'-;$ :)EtfD PRO-'f<:IE- AkV /\ND M J S- NOT BE COPIED OR
;--.-,.~.. ;-1:, ;-i;c1-•·1 W' II- "H:Mi.>SIC::N (,"'>t-W~ GHI UI-) CAL TECHNOLOGY'S
~
D~:·t ;,~~~:~.l.tf~El~~E;J'~,~-1 APPROVALS DATE
,::s~.,c- {:, :, E, ~lt-'NE, . OErArnA:'NT A, :, V UST !IE :;:ni;;;c"::D .~.FT::R USE

\t\lRJGI-IT. ___________ I ~
TC\C,Jo.NCES: ±.1 DRAWN DPM 9/22 ~ :o:. 5677 Air11ne Road A·I r,gtor, T N 38002
.XX :t..>l CHECKED DAM 9/22
NOTES: XXX
~~ULA.R
:: .I\'~
~ t~
1 f-::==-c:-:-:-t--;:;;;::---i TITLE
APPROVED DAS 9 /22
I. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5-2009. FEMORAL A - P SAW G UID E STD.
2. REMOVE A LL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES R.020 MAX THIRD ANGLE ,-~::·. ~•.;T .),\J M~~;~ A564 TYPE 630
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
3. HEAT TREAT H900 TO Re 42- 44.
-$-0 FINISH
GLASS BEAD
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
SIZE
B
CAGE CODE

1:1
OWGNO
1610004
SHEET 1 OF 1
REY
0
 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s

~--~-q,,.,.,,:
I
-~--~_"J_ ~ V;'; :i7:, X/,(r'
L
I_Ll;tJo5®.75IB@ I
"T.I
tr.I
~
.75 0
:;::I
.375± .010
>
r:-4
.493± .010
0:1
tr.I
~
+.000
<
tr.I
1.016 • .005 r:-4 ~
::·

l_L 3.00
1---- 1.125±.010
L. {.508)
("')
c::
~
~
0:-
...C
~
[

\'>'ilG"'" MEDICAi ffC •H•JDlOG~ UOPRIEIA ~Y:

tr.I
:;::I ~
"-
- , :S ~·, ~ l ~~ :... :s ;."::.), S ~E.:ED r i;:cP~ l:TA ~Y At-.D f.,1LST NOT BE COPED OR
[1-;5-[: [ \ :::[ F" '/,J-~ F[~l. 1))10\/ Of WPCHT f..\[DIC.~l TECHNOLOCY'S
?~E-\i:C: -1 1. Jf:VE.Of ME~ 1 DCPA~l,\.1ENT ,.,1,NC, ti.US[ [.E ::,,:.1?:::~rn :..,·::~ USE
,l
o~\L~\ ;~ifJ~~1~e1~~e~J~~-I
l•, v~ -~.',1,.• ES· ± .1
APPROVALS
DRAWN OPM
0A1e
9/ 22
WRJGt-fJ:.... • • _56_7_7'_.i-r1111_e_R_o_ad-A,-l c-g-,o-a-
, T-N-3-800-2
~
;\
v:·
NOTES: :~~X
ANGULAR ;- , :,
t~~i CHECKED
APPROVED
QAM
OAS
9/22
9 /22
TITLE ~
I. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Yl4.5-2009. THIRD A NG LE ''VI IFCTICN MATERIAL FEMORAL BEVEL C UTTER
lj,,.
2. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES R.020 MAX 1 - - ~ - - - - --l ASTM A564 TYPE 630
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 1---------+--~----~--------~---t
'ov
lj,,.

3. HEATTREAT H900 TO Re 42- 44.

FINOH GLASS BEAD l l 0046
S~ E CAGE CODE OWG NO
6 "
OO NOTSCALEDRAWING SCALE 1:1 SHEET 1 Of 1
 ...-,
(/)
-·
0
:::::s
....
....
Ot)

C)
8
0 :!
0 "::;-;,;·
tJ
>----------<~ > - - - - -- 0 i
":,:

"}"
(j "'s·
rr.l :,:

~
;;·
rr.l "':,:
z
~
"'-
cl
~
is
,::i :,:
"
rr.l _::·
(J'j

-
~
,::i
(j
~
A I 2 SURFACES 0
,::i
iH l::;HT MEDICAL lECH"CLOG ¥ FROPijiETA, ~"
1· S f,I ... T?L~-l iS CO NSID[~[ :.. r ?::>"S: r-A~~ ,',.'-ID V ll!,T t-10T I,[ CO PIED OR
!:ti- ~· : : E'.K EPT WITI- PEi'/,M C-N 0" •NRG,..." MED C,".L T=CH ,CLOGY'S
:.:cs=,-• c -s ~ l:Fv=1 QfW F~ DEPARTMENT ANO MUST BE DESTROYED AFTER USE.

D1~,j~:-:·;;~-t~~f1~El~~~~1f,~-I APPROVALS DATE 7WRIGl-fT.

· •\'.<ANCESc .I DRAWN DPM 9 / 22 I ~ .v; 5
_ 6_77_A-
iclin-e-Roa_d_A
- ,l-i
ng-to-n , -::-
TN- 3800
-:--:-:-:
2

.!~x ~ 11
1 \, CHECKED DAM 9/22 HllE

NOTES: ~ gULA\ ir: APPROVED DAS 9/22

THIRD ANGLE 11< :~·-. H:; t:C,N MATERIAL
C EMENT RESTRICTOR
I. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Yl4.5-2009. SILICONE ELASTOMER
2. ALL CORNERS SHOWN SHARP R.020 MAX UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
fi_c=J_ f lNISH S~E CAGE CODE OWG NO. l 84 l l Ol R~V

~ ~ DO NOT SCALEDRAWING SCALE J: 1 SHEET 1 QF I

 .....
ul
-·
0
:::::s

3/8-24 UNF - 2B Cl'J

l/4,1¢014@1,~ l15 lc@1
M l'\JQK'DIA
4X ¢ .193 ~:886 THRU
~
2
-
'-./ ¢,Ll'J X 82°
C I/4,l ;t.oi•@I EID Isl
2X INDIVIDIIALLY
¢.scx1~:~ti 0

-
I...Ll¢oo>'@IBI r!1
lor,I

><
-z
~
V IEW A -A
"Cl
~-
E I 2X INDIVIDUALLY 0 ;;;-
~

~ ~
[·
t""4
0 ~
2X INDIVIDUALLY
WRIG HT M.E:, CJ. L "fC~M~tOGV ~~OPt liTAtV:
THIS MA-:;:.~1 IS ~_.~ ._S CHD PC:.)Vi' ET.~.\'1' fa.ND MUST NOT 8E COPIED OR
~·-~=n· w•, r
n i:,._
;;·
~
EXHIBIT:::. 1 :,fi,,SSCN 0" 'l"\IC,I ll "1E~CAL TECHNOt.OGY'S
RESEAR::- , 5. :-:V~.0•";.::,· u~.~. ?'\ifh" AND ,;,u:;· ~- CESH:O'IED .~=-=r LSI:.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED APPROVALS DATE WRIGHT. ~

DIMErJl1~t:l:t~INCHES(IN.J
x ± .I
DRAWN DPM
1-----+----I ~ -
9/22 · ----------
56 77A r ineRoad Arli ngton,TN 38002
"§.
~~x !:;~<, 1-,-rn-,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
NOTES: :~~~ L.~.f: !:'.f'°
CHECKED
APPROVED
DAM
DAS
9/22
9/22
I . DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME YI 4.5-2009. THIRD AN<"i, ~ I 1,.(, 11-<:";TK>N MATERIAL SAW G UIDE FI XATIO N BLOCK
2. REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP EDGES R.020 MAX >I>.
1---------1 ASTM A564 TYPE 630 >I>.
- - - - - - - - r,cEcV--,
{W) G
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. tc,--
,N,--
SH- - - - - - - t - -s--
,."'"---,
c-, G
,.,,E""
c.,.
oo"',- ro,--w""'G-N-,-
o- <.o
3. HEAT TREAT H900 TO Re 42-44. - GLASS BEAD B 10 2 435 9 0
DONOTSCALEDRAWING SCALE 1 :1 SHEET 1 OF )
 ...-,
(/)
-·
0
:::::s

"Ir
....
<.Ji
C)

¢.422
I'1,lct.01,.(01 cl A@ le I C)
";:;
C

~
;:;·
r:J'J tl

~ i
~
z "'s·
"'
:,·
02.31 ~ "'"'"'-
o I.c: o@ o IB ~ cl
....
i:l
:-,:I "'
tr.I _:i" •
~ >
==:
tr.I
N :-,:I
G'1
c
"""4

1 - - - - - - - - 1.82 - - - - - ---,
WIIIGHT MEOIC:Al TECHNOLOG~ raor RIETAIIV·
THIS M,'. 1-1:'IAI L~ C01'.~ D-~HJ f'.;>J Pl:'IH ,W'f ,~NO MUST NOT BE COPIED OR
EXHISl ltD t XCt 'I w lrl ' tl?IYll5S ON or 'f/~IGH I MEDICAL IECHNOtOGY'S
0
RESEAH.'I I;. ):Y: LOHA : NT ) Er .J.~Ju b - ArJD •,;J51 !k Dtl"i'O~tD.~ ~lt f USE. tr.I
0 ~J-~~fJlt!::1~ E1~~~~~~~ -) APPROVA.LS DATE WRJGt-fT. ___________
Tot.lRANCES: ±.l DRAWN DPM 9/22 ~@ 567? A irline A::,a~ Arlington, TN 38002
:;~,. ! :~S DAM 9/22
NOTES: :~::~ L.:.~ 1;:<!50
C HECKED

APPROVED DAS 9/22

TITLE

I . DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5-2009. THIRD Ar,.;;_~ 1·,i;,::C

,---··TIO
-N MATERIAL
STANDARD REAMER GUIDE
2. REMOVE All BURRS AND SHARP EDGES R.020 MAX ASTM A564 TYPE 630

~G
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. FINISH SIZE CAGE CODE OWGNO l 600016 REV
3. HEATTREAT H900 TO Re 42-44. - ~~~~ B 0
DO NOTSCALE DRAWING SCALE 2: 1 SHEET I Of 1
 .
~rs1on
}.~Jj}_Jd i_~ ~
Applying GD&T
withCADD

Computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) has revolutionized all aspects of

design and drafting, including methods of applying and documenting geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing. CADD allows you to quickly and accurately place
and edit GD&T symbols. To add GD&T content to a CADD drawing, study the
CADD system you intend to use for proper technique, and refer to this textbook to
determine correct size, format, and use of ASME Y14.5-2009 symbols.
CADD drawings include representations of features drawn as objects or
extracted from CADD model data. Features typically appear on a drawing in a
nominal or basic state, with size and location parameters stored in a database. You
add dimensional information and GD&T symbols to represent specific dimensioning
and GD&T requirements. CADD automates the process of dimensioning and
tolerancing features, but you are responsible for using correct drafting practices and
the proper software tools and techniques.
The process of adding GD&T symbols to a CADD drawing varies depending
on the software, the tools and options used to generate symbols, and the purpose of
the symbols. You may have to select points or objects, type or choose values, or build
symbols from scratch. Basic CADD programs require that you construct symbols
using line, shape, and text tools. CADD software that is more powerful, such as
AutoCAD, includes specific tools for adding some GD&T symbols, such as feature
control frames. You must use other dimensioning tools and settings, object and text
construction methods, and symbol functions to fully describe GD&T information.
Mechanical design and drafting CADD systems such as Autodesk AutoCAD
Mechanical and Inventor, Dassault Systemes SolidWorks, PTC Pro/ ENGINEER, and
Siemens NX and Solid Edge provide more comprehensive GD&T tools and symbols.
Third-party add-ins with additional GD&T symbols are also available for some
programs.
The advantage of using CADD for geometric dimensioning and tolerancing
exists because GD&T symbols can be placed on a drawing in much less time than
it takes to manually draw the same symbol. The added advantage occurs when it is
necessary to revise or change a drawing. The process of making engineering changes
that often take many hours manually may be done in a few minutes using CADD. It
becomes a simple task to either remove or change symbols using the software and
then print or plot a new representation.
Though CADD and specialized GD&T tools and symbols significantly improve
accuracy and productiv ity, it is your responsibility to correctly apply drafting
practices and adhere to the ASME Y14.5 drafting standard. You may find that your
CADD system does not provide specific GD&T tools, or does not allow you to
easily apply certain GD&T symbols according to ASME Y14.5-2009. As a result, you
must set up or modify specific dimension styles, system standards, and variables.
Additionally, in order to document certain GD&T applications, you may have to
construct symbols, modify available symbols, or customize the software.

451
 ■

~rs1on 452 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendices Al, A2, and A3 introduce the use of AutoCAD, Inventor, and
SolidWorks to add GD&T symbols to drawings. Many other CADD systems include
similar GD&T tools and options. Consult with your instructor or supervisor for
additional information on using CADD to apply geometric dimensioning and
tolerancing on drawings.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 453

Appendix ~
Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD
AutoCAD allows you to add GD&T symbols to drawings using the TOLERANCE
tool. Accessing the TOLERANCE tool displays the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.
This is the primary method for adding feature control frames, geometric tolerancing
symbols, and datum feature symbols. You can connect a leader to GD&T symbols
using the QLEADER or MLEADER tool. The QLEADER tool provides a quick and
effective option for automatically attaching GD&T symbols to a leader.
Another option for placing GD&T symbols is to create your own blocks with
attributes. You can insert blocks into the drawing and adjust the attribute data as
needed. You can also add blocks to multileader lines using the Block multileader
content type. Draw GD&T symbols on a dimensioning layer so the symbols and text
can plot as objects that have the same thickness as extension and dimension lines
(.01" or 0.3 mm). The suggested text font is romans.shx. These practices correspond
with the standard ASME Y14.2M, Line Conventions and Lettering.

This appendix introduces the use of AutoCAD to add GD&T symbols to 20

drawings. All applications in this appendix are based on AutoCAD 2010. For
a comprehensive understanding of how to use AutoCAD, refer to AutoCAD
and Its Applications-Basics and Auto CAD and Its Applications-
Advanced, or Auto CAD and Its Applications-Comprehensive, published
by the Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.

Using the Tolerance Tool

Accessing the TOLERANCE tool opens the Geometric Tolerance dialog box,
which provides options for creating feature control frames. See Figure Al-1. Access
the TOLERANCE tool from the Dimensions panel of the Annotate ribbon tab, or type
TOLERANCE or TOL and press [Enter]. Areas divide the Geometric Tolerance dialog
box into groups of compartments that relate to the compartments found in a feature
control frame. Each area contains two levels to define a feature control frame.
The first, or upper, level allows you to create a single feature control frame.
The lower level allows you to create a double feature control frame. The dialog box
also provides options for displaying a diameter symbol and a modifying symbol.
In addition, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box allows you to display a projected
tolerance zone symbol and value and create a datum identifier for a datum feature
symbol.
 ■

~rs1on 454 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Enter a geometric Enter a geometric

Pick to select Enter a
tolerance v alue tolerance value
(single feature (double feature a material primary datum
condi lion symbol reference value
control frame) control frame)

Pick to select a
Pick to select t'3 material condition
a geometric symbol for the
characteristic datum reference
symbol

Projecied Tolerance Zone: ■

Pick to display
a diameter Pick to display
symbol '----!he projected
tolerance
zone symbol

Enter a height va lue Enter a datum-identifying

for the projected reference letter
tolerance zone

Figure Al-1. You can use the Geometric Tolerance dialog box to draw geometric
dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) symbols and feature control frames.

Selecting a Geometric Characteristic Symbol

You can access geometric characteristic symbols from the Sym area located at the
far left of the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. This area has two boxes that allow you
to display one or two geometric characteristic symbols. Pick one of the boxes in the
Sym area to display the Symbol dialog box. See Figure Al-2 . Pick a symbol to add the
symbol to the selected Sym box. After selecting, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box
returns. Pick the same box again to select a different symbol if necessary. To remove
a symbol, access the Symbol dialog box and pick the blank image in the lower-right
corner.

Pick the
desired
■■■l!I
--- ■ l!!!!I Pick to remove
liiil -
lliiil -
symbol
El Iii 111!1 .....---- athesymbol from
Sym area

Figure Al-2. Use the Symbol dialog box to select a geometric characteristic symbol for
use in a feature control frame.

Tolerance 1 Area
The Tolerance 1 area allows you to enter the first geometric tolerance value
applied to the feature control frame. If drawing a single feature control frame, enter
the desired value in the upper text box. If drawing a double feature control frame,
also enter a value in the lower text box. You can add a diameter symbol by picking
the box to the left of the text box. Pick the diameter box again to remove the diameter
symbol.
The box to the right of the text box adds a material condition symbol. Pick the
box to display the Material Condition dialog box shown in Figure Al-3. Pick the
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCA D 455

Old RFS
~ symbol

Pick the Pick to remove

desired symbol a selected symbol

Figure Al-3. The Material Condition dialog box. Notice that the symbol for regardless
of feature size (RFS) is available. ASME Y14.5-2009 does not use this symbol, but you
may need it when editing older drawings.

desired symbol to display it in the box you selected. To remove a material condition
symbol, pick the blank tile in the Material Condition dialog box. Figure A l-3 shows
the maximum material condition (MMC) and least material condition (LMC)
symbols. The ANSI Y14.5M-1982 standard uses the regardless of feature size (RFS)
symbol, but ASME Y14.5-2009 does not, because RFS is assumed unless otherwise
specified.
In Figure Al-4, the Sym image tile includes a position symbol, and a 0.5
tolerance value is entered in the upper text box in the Tolerance 1 area. A diameter
symbol precedes the tolerance value, and the MMC symbol follows. Remember that a
zero precedes metric decimals, but not inch decimals.

~ Geometric Tolerance ~
Sym To/e!<!lnce 1 Tole!11nce2 D11lu111 0-,t1JT12 011h.m 3

~ F!.I..E::] Ill ■ c=J ■ D■ D■ D■

The tolerance
value, d iameter · c=J • ■c=] ■ □ ■ □ ■ □ ■
symbol, and tlei<I< c=J Projc(:tcdlolc1411ec z one: ■
material condition Qch,• n ldertfier; c=J
symbol are
entered

Figure Al-4. The Geometric Tolerance dialog box with a d iameter symbol, geometric
tolerance value, and maximum material condition (MMC) symbol added to the
Tolerance 1area.

Tolerance 2 Area
The Tolerance 2 area allows you to add a second geometric tolerance to the
feature control frame. This is not a common application, but is appropriate in
some cases when there are restrictions on the geometric tolerance specified in the
first compar tment. For example, a second geometric tolerance value of 0.8 MAX
maintains the specification given in the first compartment, but indicates that it
cannot exceed 0.8.

Datum Areas
The Datum 1 area establishes the information needed for the primary datum
reference compartment. Like the Tolerance areas, this area offers two levels of
text boxes to create single or double feature control frames. You can also specify a
material boundary symbol for the datum reference by picking the box to the right of
the corresponding text box to open the Material Condition dialog box. The Datum 2
 ■

~rs1on 456 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

and Datum 3 areas allow you to specify the secondary and tertiary datum reference
information. Refer to Figure Al-5 to see how the datum reference and related
material condition symbols appear in the feature control frame.

I I 2H minimum I-~ 2H minimum

~ l©l0o.s@ IAI B1¢1:t

H =Letter height

Geometric chara~te;;,~~~
Y
Diameter symbol zone
descriptor, when used
;lj~
l-$- l</J 0.13@1A IB@ lcl
~ !LTertiary datum reference
L Material boundary symbol,
when used
Secondary datum reference
Geometric tolerance Primary datum reference
Material condition symbol

Figure Al-5. The order of elements in a feature control frame.

Projected Tolerance Zone Box and Height Text Box

You can pick the Projected Tolerance Zone: box to display a projected tolerance
zone symbol in the feature control frame. The Height: text box specifies the height of
the projected tolerance zone. Note that the resulting display of the projected tolerance
zone symbol by AutoCAD does not comply with ASME Y14.5-2009. Modifying a
feature control frame to d isplay the symbol correctly is discussed in the Specifying a
Projected Tolerance Zone section.

Datum Identifier Text Box

The Datum Identifier: text box is used to enter a datum-identifying reference
letter as an element of a datum feature symbol. Use an uppercase letter. Creating a
datum feature symbol with a connecting leader is discussed in the Drawing Datum
Feature Symbols section.

Completing the Tolerance Tool

After you enter the required information in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box,
pick the OK button and pick a point to place the symbol in the drawing. Figure Al-6
shows the feature control frame for the given example. The height of the feature
control frame is automatically set to twice the height of the text. Text on engineering
drawings is generally .12" (3 mm) tall, which makes the feature control frame height
.24" (6 mm). This complies with the ASME Y14.5 standard.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 457

Specified geometric Primary datum Secondary datum

tolerance reference referen ce

tl'9< ~ ProiectedTolefanceZone: ■

Q~vml~ ier: ~

Pick to accept the

specified values

I$ I00.s@ IA IB@ IcI

Feature Control Frame

Figure Al-6. This example shows primary, secondary, and tertiary datum references
added and highlighted, along with the geometric tolerance value. The resulting
feature control frame appears below the dialog box.

Attaching Feature Control Frames to Leaders

In many cases, a feature control frame connects to a leader. The QLEADER tool
allows you to draw leader lines and access the Geometric Tolerance dialog box used
to create feature control frames in one operation. This is the most effective technique
for creating a feature control frame automatically attached and associated with a
leader. You can create other GD&T symbols, such as datum feature symbols, more
effectively using different methods.

Using the Qleader Tool

The QLEADER tool allows you to place a leader and attach a feature control
frame in one operation. Access the QLEADER tool by typing QLEADER or LE
and pressing [Enter]. Dimension style settings control some of the leader line
characteristics, such as the arrowhead size. The Settings option of the QLEADER tool
controls other elements, such as the leader format and annotation style.

You can also use the LEADER tool to automatically attach GD&T symbols to
leaders. However, this tool does not provide the same convenience and ability
to comply with drafting standards as the QLEADER tool.
 ■

~rs1on 458 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

When you enter the QLEADER tool, use the Settings option to display the
Leader Settings dialog box, Figure Al-7. Select the Annotation tab, and then pick the
Tolerance radio button to display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box for creation of a
feature control frame w ith the leader line.

..i; Leader Settings rRJ

Arn:itation ile&del'LineL Alrow

Arn:,1;-,tionType MTe><toptlOl'l::

O MText ~PromplforJ::tdh

O C0P'!.vi 0biect Always_~liust~y

/
vi;;~:•=• framete,,;t

Amotation Reuse
0 !:!ooe
Q AeuseN~:.et
ReuseCi.,rrert

Toler~nce/
o ption
activated

Figure Al-7. The Leader Settings dialog box. Activate the Tolerance radio butto n to
place a feature control frame.

Next, select the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader Settings dialog box. Pick
the Straight radio button to create a leader with straight-line segments. When adding
a feature control frame to a leader line, you should set the maximum number of
vertices in the Maximum text box of the Number of Points area to 2. When you set
the maximum number of leader points to 2, you select the start and endpoints of the
leader line. Then the QLEADER tool stops drawing the leader, automatically places
the leader shoulder, and displays the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.
The Arrowhead area of the Leader Line & Arrow tab uses the default value
assigned to leaders within the current dimension style. To change the appearance of
the arrowhead, pick the drop-down list and select a terminator from the full range of
choices.
You can restrict the first two segments of the leader line to certain angles using
options in the Angle Constraints area of the Leader Line & Arrow tab. The options for
each segment are Any angle, Horizontal, 90°, 45°, 30°, and 15°. The current ortho mode
setting in AutoCAD overrides the angle constraints, so it is advisable to turn ortho
mode off while using this tool.
Pick the OK button to exit the Leader Settings dialog box. When asked to specify
the first leader point, pick the location where the arrowhead points. Then pick
the end of the leader line. If the maximum number of leader points is set to 2, the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box displays. Otherwise, press [Enter] to end the leader
line and display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. Specify the settings and values
for the feature control frame, and pick the OK button. The feature control frame
connects to the leader line, as shown in Figure Al-8.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 459

Pick the first

point of the 0 0 .2 A

\
leader

Pick the second

\
Feature control frame
automatically attaches to
point of the leader and is associated w ith
the leader

Figure Al-8. When you complete the QLEADER tool, the feature control frame
connects to the leader line.

Using the Mleader Tool

You can use the MLEADER tool to create leaders, but it does not have an option to
create a feature control frame at the same time. As a result, you must draw the leader
separately using the MLEADER tool and draw the feature control frame using the
TOLERANCE tool. Apply the None multileader content type when using this method.
You can draw the leader before or after drawing the symbol. See Figure Al-9.

Pick to locate the feature

control frame when prompted
to enter the tolerance location

First, use the leader Landing first

option to pick the location of
the leader shoulder

\ _L .037 A

Existing leader drawn

using the None multileader
content type
'
Second, pick the start
point o f the leader line

Leader added to existing feature

control frame using the None
multileader content type

Figure Al -9. Use the MLEADER tool to create a leader before drawing the feature
control frame using the TOLERANCE tool, or add the leader to an existing feature
control frame.

Specifying a Projected Tolerance Zone

AutoCAD specifies projected tolerance zones according to the ANSI Y14.5M-1982
standard. When following this standard, enter the desired geometric tolerance,
diameter symbol, material condition symbol, and datum reference in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box, as previously described. Pick the Projected Tolerance Zone:
box to display the projected tolerance zone symbol and enter the height in the
 ■

~rs1on 460 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Height: text box. See Figure Al-10. Place the feature control frame in the desired
location in the drawing. Notice that AutoCAD displays the projected tolerance zone
height in a separate compartment below the feature control frame, in accordance
with ANSI Y14.5M-1982.

Geornetrie Tder~e

SJ.'O Toler~e 1 Toler«JCe2 Datll'n 1 Datll'n2 D4tll'n3

~ia -,.,- - !lD ■ -- ■ •■ ,■ c■

■■ ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■
J:ieight· 24

Displayed
symbol

Projected tolerance
zone height

~,~=~ ~~f s@IAlslcl

Feature Control Frame

Figure Al-10. To add projected tolerance zone specifications in accordance with

ASME Y14.5M-1982, enter the projected tolerance zone height and symbol in the
dialog box.
Geometric Tolerance

To specify a projected tolerance zone according to ASME Y14.5-2009, create a

feature control frame with any modifier letters and the letter P after the tolerance
value. Type the height of the projected tolerance zone after the P, and leave one space
between each letter and the height value. See Figure Al-11. Then use the CIRCLE tool
to draw a circle around the modifier and the letter P. You can use the BLOCK tool
to create a block of the feature control frame and circles. This saves the symbol as a
block, which can then be inserted as needed for repeated applications requiring the
symbol. Creating a block "groups" the objects making up the block so that they are
selectable as a single object.

Drawing a Double Feature Control Frame

Several GD&T applications require that you double the feature control frame in
height, with two sets of geometric tolerancing values provided. These applications
include unit straightness and flatness, composite positional tolerancing, and
coaxial positional tolerancing. To draw a double feature control frame, use the
TOLERANCE tool to create the first level of the feature control frame in the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box as previously described. You can also use the
QLEADER tool if connecting the feature control frame to a leader line. Then, pick
the lower box in the Sym area. When the Symbol dialog box appears again, pick
another geometric characteristic symbol. This results in two symbols in the Sym
area. Continue specifying the needed information in the lower-level Tolerance and
Datum compartments. See Figure Al-12.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 461

Type letters for modifier

and projected tolerance zone
I

tl.,... c=] Projected Toler«iCe Zone: ■

Q.ot1,111ldentific1: c = J

Modifier Circles are drawn Projected tolerance

with the CIRCLE tool zone symbol

A B C
Projected tolerance
zone height

Feature Control Frame

Figure Al-11. Specifying a projected tolerance zone in accordance with

ASME Y14.5-2009.

:-- Geomet ric Tolerance ~

Syrn Tolerance l Toler1111Ce2 Dalt.ml Datlfll 2 Datum3

Pick to select aD m@:c:::rna ■ c:::::::::::: ■ EJ ■ ID ■ [] ■

a second FiJ E:::] ■ ■ c:::::::::::: ■ E] ■ [O ■ [] ■
geometric
characteristic tl.,...,c:::::::::::: ProiectedTolefonc:eZonc: ■
symbol
Q~~'""'"" c::::::::::::
DO~ ~

-$- ¢ 0. 5@ A B C
¢0.1 A B C
Figure Al-12. Specifying information for a double feature control frame in the
dialog box.
Geometric Tolerance

A composite frame forms when the symbols in the two Sym boxes are the same.
Refer to Figure Al -12. Some situations require the same geometric characteristic
symbol twice, one in the upper frame and another in the lower frame. To create t wo
single-segment feature control frames, draw two separate feature control frames and
create a block from them. If drawing a double feature control frame with different
geometric characteristic symbols for a combination control, the feature control frame
must have two separate compartments. See Figure Al-13.
 ■

~rs1on 462 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

-$- \2)0 .5@ A BC -$- \2)0 .5@ A B C II 0 .5 A

12)0 .1 @ A B -$- \2)0.3@ A B __l_0 .1B
Same Symbol for Create Separate Single Double Feature
Both Control Frames Control Frames to Control Frame with
Repeat Symbol Different Symbols

Figure Al-13. If you enter the same geometric characteristic symbol in both Sym
boxes of the Geometric Tolerance dialog box, only one symbol appears in the first
compartment of the feature control frame. Create two separate feature control frames
to display the same symbol in both frames. If you use two different symbols, they
appear in separate compartments.

Drawing Datum Feature Symbols

You can draw datum feature symbols using the TOLERANCE and MLEADER
or QLEADER tools. Usually, you must use a combination of the TOLERANCE and
MLEADER or QLEADER tools to draw an appropriate datum feature symbol. The
method used to draw a datum feature symbol depends on the feature the symbol
identifies. When you use the Geometric Tolerance dialog box to specify a datum
feature symbol, enter the datum reference letter in the Datum Identifier: text box.
See Figure Al-14.

~ Geometric Tolerance L8J

Sym Toletance 1 ToletMiCe2 Dai:lllll Dattm2 Dati..rn3

■ ■ i==i ■ ■ i==i ■ □ ■ □ ■ □ ■
■ ■ i==i ■ ■ c=:i ■ □ ■ □ ■ □ ■
Plojected Tolerance Zone: ■

Specified datum
reference letter

Figure Al-14. Using the Geometric Tolerance dialog box to enter a datum-identifying
reference letter. The letter creates the datum identifier.

Options for Drawing Datum Feature Symbols

The datum feature symbols shown in Figure Al-15 are drawn using the
TOLERANCE and MLEADER or QLEADER tools. One option is to use the TOLERANCE
tool first to place the datum identifier and then add a leader that connects the
feature to the identifier. The other option is to draw a leader first and then use the
TOLERANCE tool to add the datum identifier. This usually requires you to move the
datum identifier to the correct location using object snaps. Figure Al-16 shows both
methods.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 463

~
0--15
~1.125~

Figure Al-15. Examples of datum feature symbols created using a combination of

the TOLERANCE and MLEADER or QLEADER tools.

the tolerance location

tJ
Pick to locate the datum identifier
when prompted to enter
Use object snaps to move the
datum identifier to the
endpoint of the leader line
A

00
Datum Identifier Added to Existing (Vertical) Leader

First, pick the

0 start point of the

leader line A

Second, use object snaps

to locate the endpoint

□
of the leader line

Vertical Leader Added to Existing Datum Identifier

Figure Al-16. Use the MLEADER or QLEADER tool to add a leader before drawing a
datum identifier, or add the leader to an existing datum identifier.
 ■

~rs1on 464 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

When you use the MLEADER tool to add the leader, create a separate multileader
style with the Datum triangle filled arrowhead symbol, set the maximum leader
points to 2, do not include a landing, and use the None multileader content type.
When you use the QLEADER tool to add the leader, create a dimension style that uses
the Datum triangle filled arrowhead symbol, use the None annotation type, and set
the maximum leader points to 2. When a datum feature symbol requires a shoulder,
add the shoulder manually by picking a third point. This avoids shifting the angle of
the leader line.

Adding Datum Feature Symbols to Angled Surfaces

You must follow specific steps in order to add a datum feature symbol to an
angled surface, as shown in Figure Al-17. One option is to use the QLEADER tool.
Before adding the leader, create a dimension style that uses the Datum triangle filled
arrowhead symbol. Then enter the QLEADER tool and use the Settings option to
open the Leader Settings dialog box. Select the Annotation tab and pick the Tolerance
radio button. Select the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader Settings dialog box
and pick the Straight radio button. When adding a datum feature symbol to the
leader line, you should set the maximum number of vertices in the Maximum text box
of the Number of Points area to 3. This allows you to construct the leader shoulder
manually. If you let AutoCAD form the leader shoulder automatically, it shifts the
angle of the leader line.

Pick the second point

of the leader line
Pick the first
point of the
leader line \
Pick to draw the
leader shoulder
manually

Figure Al-17. Use the Tolerance annotation option of the QLEADER tool to add a
datum feature symbol to an angled surface.

Pick the OK button to exit the Leader Settings dialog box. Pick the leader start
point and then the next leader point. The second point must create a line segment
that is perpendicular to the angled surface. Pick the third point to define the length
of the leader shoulder. If the maximum number of leader points is set to 3, the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box d isplays. Otherwise, press [Enter] to end the leader
line and display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. Specify a value in the Datum
identifier text box and pick the OK button.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in AutoCAD 465

Drawing Basic Dimensions

Figure Al-18 shows a basic dimension. You can draw basic dimensions
automatically by setting a basic tolerance in the Tolerances tab of the Modify
Dimension Style d ialog box. Typically, you establish a separate dimension style for
basic dimensions because not all of the dimensions on a drawing are basic.

-
1 . ------jl 3 .250 1
- f--- --------
I

Figure Al-18. A basic dimension.

The height of the basic dimension rectangle is twice the height of the text, as
shown in Figure Al-19. Text on engineering drawings is generally .12" (3 mm)
tall, which makes the basic dimension rectangle height .24" (6 mm). As a result,
the distance from the text to the basic dimension rectangle should be equal to
half the text height. For example, if the height of the drawing text is .12", the space
between the text and the basic dimension rectangle should be .06" to result in a .24"
high frame. The Offset from dim line: setting in the Text tab of the New (or Modify)
Dimension Style dialog box controls the distance from the text to the basic dimension
rectangle. The setting also controls the gap between the dimension line and the
dimension text for linear dimensions. Picking the Draw frame around text check box
in the Text tab of the New (or Modify) Dimension Style d ialog box also activates the
basic tolerance method.

i ls3.sl f 4s#
H = Letter height

6X 145" 1
The number of times or places
can be applied to a basic dimension
by placement inside or outside of
the basic dimension symbol.

Figure Al-19. The height of the rectangle drawn around basic dimension text is twice
the text height by default.
 ■

~rs1on 466 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Editing Feature Control Frames

A feature control frame acts as one object. The entire object selects when you
pick any location on the frame. You can edit feature control frames using editing
tools such as ERASE, COPY, MOVE, ROTATE, and SCALE. The STRETCH tool only
allows you to move a feature control frame. This effect is similar to the results of
using the STRETCH tool with text objects.
You can edit the values inside a feature control frame using the DDEDIT tool.
Access the DDEDIT tool by typing DDEDIT or ED. When you enter this tool and select
a feature control frame, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box displays with the current
values. After you make changes, pick OK to update the feature control frame.
You can also use the DDEDIT tool to edit basic dimensions. Select the basic
dimension for editing to display the text editor. You can then edit the basic
dimension as you would any other dimension.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in Inventor 467

Appendix ~
Using GD&T Tools in Inventor

Inventor allows you to add GD&T symbols to drawings using standard

dimensioning tools and specific dimension styles. Tools are available for creating
feature control frames, datum feature symbols, and datum target symbols. Another
option for placing GD&T symbols is to create and save sketched symbols in the
Sketched Symbols folder of the Drawing Resources folder in the browser.

Feature Control Frames

Access the Feature Control Frame tool from the Symbols panel of the Annotate
ribbon tab to create a feature control frame. See Figure A2-1. Select a point or feature
to control. To locate the symbol at the selection, press [Enter] or right-click and select
Continue. To connect the symbol to a leader, pick a second point and press [Enter]
or right-click to select Continue. The Feature Control Frame dialog box, shown in
Figure A2-2, appears. This dialog box allows you to establish the contents of the
feature control frame.

Figure A2-l. Examples of feature control frames.

 ■

~rs1on 468 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Feature Control Frame ~

Q 0.8 Z
Tolerance

OO~~@J[©J~~El@JGJGJ0
000mm[«J[»J~@~~0
NotM

Figure A2-2. Placing a feature control frame using the Feature Control Frame dialog box.

The Sym area includes buttons that allow you to define the geometric
characteristic symbols for the first, second, and third lines of the feature control
frame. Select a button to pick a symbol from the symbols palette. Use the Tolerance
area to specify geometric tolerances. The Tolerance 2 text box is only available if
you pick the Allow Tolerance 2 check box in the Feature Control Frame Style area of
the Style and Standard Editor. The Tolerance 2 text box allows you to add a second
geometric tolerance. This is not a common application, but is appropriate in some
cases when there are restrictions on the geometric tolerance specified in the first
compartment. Use the Datum area to enter primary, secondary, and tertiary datums.
The Datum 2 text box is available only when you enter a value in the Datum 1 text
box, and the Datum 3 text box is available only when you enter a value in the Datum 2
text box. The Datum Identifier text box is only available if you pick the Datum ID check
box in the Feature Control Frame Style area of the Style and Standard Editor, and
allows you to reference a feature identifier symbol.
The Modifier buttons allow you to add GD&T symbols and information, such
as material condition symbols and tolerance zone descriptors. To use these buttons,
pick a location inside a text box, and choose the required symbol button. The symbol
appears in the selected text box. Use the Notes text box to add a note below the
feature control frame. Check All Around to add an all-around symbol on the leader,
next to the feature control frame. Pick the OK button to create the feature control
frame. Press [Esc], right-dick and select Done, or access a different tool to exit.

Editing Feature Control Frames

Right-click on a feature control frame and select Edit Feature Control Frame... to
make changes. You can also override the default units for a specific feature control
frame by right-clicking on the feature control frame and selecting Edit Unit Attributes.
You must deselect the Use Standards Notation check box in the Edit Unit Attributes
dialog box to override the default unit settings.

Datum Feature Symbols

Datum feature symbols connect to a triangular datum arrow that attaches to
a surface, an extension line, or a feature control frame. See Figure A2-3. Access the
Datum Identifier Symbol tool from the Symbols panel of the Annotate ribbon tab to
place a datum feature symbol. Select a point or feature representing the datum. To
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in Inventor 469

I. Pick the feature

ora point

2. Select the datum

feature symbol location

Figure A2-3. Examples of datum feature symbols.

locate the symbol at the selection, press [Enter] or right-click and select Continue. To
connect the symbol to a leader, as sh own in Figure A2-3, pick a second point and
press [Enter] or right-click to select Continue. The Format Text dialog box appears,
allowing you to add information to or modify the default datum value. The Format
Text dialog box a utomatically open s if you make three picks when placing the
symbol. Pick the OK button to create the datum feature symbol. Press [Esc], right-click
and select Done, or access a different tool to exit.

Datum Target Symbols

A datum target symbol conn ects to the related datum target point, line, or area
with a leader that typically does not terminate with an arrowhead. The top half of
the symbol is blank, unless indicating the size of a circular datum target area. The
bottom half of the datum target symbol identifies the related datum with the datum
reference letter and datum target number assigned sequentially to the datum, such
as Al, A2, and A3. See Figure A2-4.
Tools for placing datum target symbols are accessed from the Symbols panel of
the Annotate ribbon tab. The Datum Target - Leader tool allows you to place a datum
target symbol with a leader attached to the specified feature or point. The Datum
Target - Point tool is u sed to add a datum target symbol w ith a leader attached to a
point. The Datum Target - Line tool is u sed to add a datum ta rget symbol with a leader
attached to a target line, with points at the line ends. The Datum Target - Circle tool
allows you to place a datum target symbol w ith a leader attached to a circular datum
target area. The Datum Target - Rectangle tool allows you to place a datum target
symbol w ith a leader attached to a rectangular datum target area.
 ■

~rs1on 470 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Datum Target- Datum Target- Datum Target- Datum Target- Datum Target-
Leader Point Line Circle Rectangle

Figure A2-4. Examples of datum target symbols.

Once you access the correct tool, begin the process of picking points to create the
symbol. When using the Datum Target - Leader or Datum Target - Point tool, pick a
point or feature to target. When using the Datum Target - Line tool, pick the beginning
of the target line followed by the end. When using the Datum Target - Circle or Datum
Target - Rectangle tools, pick the center of the target area followed by the edge, or
radius, of a circular area, or the corner of a rectangular area.
Once you specify the target, pick to locate the symbol and then press [Enter] or
right-click to select Continue. The Datum Target dialog box, shown in Figure A2-5,
appears. This dialog box allows you to specify the datum target values. The
Dimension text box is available when creating each type of datum target symbol, but
is usually only appropriate for specifying the diameter of a circular target area. Type
%%c before a circular target area diameter to include the diameter symbol. Specify
the datum in the Datum text box. Pick the OK button to create the symbol. Press [Esc],
right-click and select Done, or access a different tool to exit.

Datum forget ~I

!I.__ _....

Figure A2-5. The Datum Target dialog box.

Editing Datum Target Symbols

Right-click on a datum target symbol and select Edit Datum Target... to make
changes. You can override the default units for a specific datum target symbol by
right-clicking on the symbol and selecting Edit Unit Attributes. You must deselect the
Use Standards Notation check box in the Edit Unit Attributes dialog box to override
the default unit settings. You can also attach another datum target symbol to the
existing symbol by right-clicking on the symbol and selecting Attach Balloon.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks 471

Appendix ~
Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks
SolidWorks provides annotation tools for adding GD&T symbols to drawings.
Tools are available for creating feature control frames, datum feature symbols, and
datum target symbols. Other options for placing GD&T symbols are to create blocks
or insert blocks from the Design Library.

This appendix focuses on applying GD&T to drawing views in SolidWorks

drawing files generated from parts and assemblies. GD&T symbology can
also be applied to SolidWorks part models using the DimXpert dimension
tools for parts (part files). The DimXpert dimension tools are used to
dimension models in accordance with ASME Yl4.41 Digital Product Definition
Data Practices and are typically used in tolerance analysis applications.

Feature Control Frames

The Geometric Tolerance tool is used to create feature control frames. See
Figure A3-1. The Geometric Tolerance tool is accessed from the Annotation tab of
the Command Manager. When this tool is activated, a default frame is attached to the

~ -$ (,2) 0 .06 A BC

Figure A3-1. Examples of feature control frames.

 ■

~rs1on 472 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

cursor in the drawing area and the Properties dialog box is displayed. See Figure A3-
2. This dialog box is used to select geometric characteristic symbols, modifier
symbols, and other items for placement in the feature control frame. The Geometric
Tolerance Property Manager is also displayed on the left side of the screen when
the Geometric Tolerance tool is activated and allows you to control style options for
leaders, frames, and text. The Geometric Tolerance Property Manager is discussed in
the next section.

L. 0.15 A

Properll~s 11](81
Geometnc Toler5'1Ce

Syn1bd Tolerance I 0 Toietance2 Pl'mary Secondary Terti,ry Ff,wnu

c_.15A- -··
~ G@O C=:l EJ GD GD GE:'
□B C- C- D· ·r-=:J· '

Figure A3-2. Specifying items in a feature control frame using the Properties dialog box.

As you specify values in the Properties dialog box, results are shown in the
image preview area and the symbol updates in the drawing area. The options in the
rows above the image preview area control the contents of each row of the feature
control frame. The text boxes in the Symbol area allow you to specify geometric
characteristic symbols. Pick the drop-down button next to one of the text boxes to
select a symbol from the symbol menu. Specifying a geometric characteristic symbol
in the second row enables the Composite check box. Checking this check box creates
a composite feature control frame. You can leave this check box unchecked to create a
single-segment feature control frame or a double feature control frame with different
geometric characteristic symbols.
The Tolerance 1 area is used to specify geometric tolerances. Position the cursor
in the text box and enter the tolerance. Checking the Tolerance 2 check box enables
the Tolerance 2 area. The Tolerance 2 area allows you to add a second geometric
tolerance. This is not a common application, but is appropriate in some cases when
there are restrictions on the geometric tolerance specified in the first compartment.
The modifier buttons above the text boxes allow you to add modifying symbols,
such as material condition symbols and tolerance zone descriptors. To use these
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks 473

buttons, pick a location inside a text box, and select the required symbol button. The
symbol appears in the selected text box. Selecting the Projected Tolerance symbol
button enables the Height text box and allows you to specify a projected tolerance zone.
The Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary areas are used to add datum references.
Enter letters in the text boxes as needed. Picking the drop-down button next to a text
box displays a menu containing material boundary symbols. Also provided are text
boxes for adding reference letters to establish a combined reference.
The Frames area allows you to add additional rows to the feature control frame.
The spinner buttons in the upper text box are used to establish rows and switch
between rows. The row number in the text box identifies the row to which values in
the other text boxes are applied.
The Between Two Points text boxes allow you to designate a partial tolerance
zone between two points or features. Entering labels in these text boxes identifies
the two points and places a specification with the between symbol under the feature
control frame.

Specifying Style Settings

The Geometric Tolerance Property Manager appears on the left side of the screen
when you access the Geometric Tolerance tool. See Figure A3-3. You can make

~ 11:rl
@&tfitMMIGi4flli4--j
.,,
•I• v
)(
Pick to
expand
t style
l eader

IZ)~~~
f2JE) r' ~
661®
1---.. Lvl
h:Mt
-!!..
<Gtol>

1..., I
-
leader style
0 Use doc:unent d,spl.!iy
•
;;::=;
"·"

-
fra~5tyie

0 Usedocunent: displ.!iy
•
~

-
....... •
DI"·"'° I'::
~il
~ mat •I
~ yer
•I

Figure A3-3. Specifying style settings for a feature control frame using the Geometric
Tolerance Property Manager.
 ■

~rs1on 474 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

settings in both the Properties dialog box and the Geometric Tolerance Property
Manager when using the Geometric Tolerance tool. The Geometric Tolerance
Property Manager is used to adjust leader settings and style options for items in
the feature control frame. The Style rollout is used to create or access a geometric
tolerance style. A geometric tolerance style is similar to a dimension style. You can
set a geometric tolerance style current and also apply the settings of a given style to a
selected symbol. The style name in the text box identifies the current style. By default,
<NONE> is displayed, which means that no user-defined styles exist. The Leader
rollout allows you to attach a leader to the feature control frame using a selected
leader type. By default, the Auto Leader option is selected. This option allows you to
place the feature control frame without a leader or select an entity and drag to attach
a leader. The drop-down list below the leader type options provides options for
arrowhead types and other terminators.

Default style options for feature control frames, leaders, and text, such as
linetype style, line thickness, leader type, and text font, are stored in the
document options for the current file and can be accessed in the Document
Properties dialog box. The default document settings are based on the current
drafting standard in use. To display the Document Properties dialog box,
select Options from the Tools pull-down menu and select the Document
Properties tab when the System Options dialog box is displayed. Select
Geometric Tolerances under the Annotation branch in the Drafting Standard
area to access the geometric tolerance document options. The document
settings apply to the current file only.

The Text rollout allows you to place additional annotation text with the feature
control frame. The default display in the text box is <Gtol>, which represents the
symbol defined in the Properties dialog box. Selecting the More ... button displays
the Symbols dialog box, which can be used to select a dimensioning or modifying
symbol for placement in the text.
The Leader Style rollout allows you to adjust the linetype style and line
thickness settings used for leaders. The Frame Style rollout allows you to adjust
the same settings for the lines making up the feature control frame. By default, the
Use document display check box is checked in each rollout. When this check box is
checked, the default document settings are used.
The Angle rollout allows you to enter a rotation angle for the feature control
frame. The default 0° angle specifies a horizontal orientation. The Format rollout
allows you to specify a font for text. The default document font setting is used when
the Use document font check box is checked. The Layer rollout allows you to assign
the feature control frame to a layer.
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks 475

Placing the Feature Control Frame

After making settings in the Properties dialog box and the Geometric Tolerance
Property Manager, pick a location on screen to place the feature control frame. If you
are including a leader, pick once to place the leader and then pick a second point to
place the symbol. You can place additional symbols by picking other points. When
using the Geometric Tolerance tool, the Properties dialog box and the Geometric
Tolerance Property Manager remain open, allowing you to make content changes
when placing additional feature control frames. To end the tool, pick OK in the
Properties dialog box or press [Esc].

Editing Feature Control Frames

Double-click on a feature control frame to make changes in the Properties dialog
box. You can also right-dick on the feature control frame and select Properties... to
make changes. Picking on the feature control frame and dragging allows you to drag
it to a new location.

Datum Feature Symbols

Datum feature symbols can be created using the Datum Feature tool. See
Figure A3-4. The Datum Feature tool is accessed from the Annotation tab of the
Command Manager. After activating this tool, a default datum feature symbol

Figure A3-4. Examples of datum feature symbols.

 ■

~rs1on 476 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

attaches to the cursor on screen and the Datum Feature Property Manager is
displayed. See Figure A3-5. The settings available are similar to those used in the
Geometric Tolerance Property Manager. The Style rollout is used to create or access
a geometric tolerance style. The Label Settings rollout is used to enter a datum
reference letter for the symbol. By default, the letter A is displayed. The Leader
rollout is used to specify the leader type used for the triangular datum attachment.
The default document leader type is used when the Use document style check box
is checked. The Text, Leader Style, Frame Style, and Layer rollouts serve the same
functions as those used in the Geometric Tolerance Property Manager.

lllllJl'.Y l
FI-M@#ilii·
..,..
•
*
~~
~>

....
V

, ..._. ~
A
E l
........ *~
[3Use doafflef'lt styte

.J.. (!]0[!)
....
.....,, ~~

L•Ytt *
fiJ 1.....- . - y

Figure A3-5. Specifying settings for a datum feature symbol using the Datum Feature
Property Manager.

To place the datum feature symbol, select a dimension, a feature control frame,
or a feature representing the datum. Selecting a cylindrical datum surface or an
inclined surface aligns the triangular datum attachment w ith the selected object
and establishes a leader with a shoulder. After selecting the datum location, drag
the cursor to establish the length of the leader. Pick additional points to create other
sy mbols as needed. Locating additional symbols automatically increments the value
in the Label Settings rollout in the Datum Feature Property Manager. To end the
Datum Feature tool, pick OK (represented by the green check mark) in the Datum
Feature Property Manager or press [Esc].
 ■

~rs1on Using GD&T Tools in SolidWorks 477

Default style options for datum feature symbols are stored in the document
options for the current file and can be accessed in the Document Properties
dialog box. These settings are based on the current drafting standard in use. To
access the settings, select Datums under the Annotation branch in the Drafting
Standard area of the Document Properties dialog box. The document settings
provide an option to display datum feature symbols in accordance with the 1982
ANSI standard. The document settings apply to the current file only.

Datum Target Symbols

Datum target symbols can be created using the Datum Target tool. See Figure A3-6.
The Datum Target tool is accessed from the Annotation tab of the Command Manager.
After activating this tool, a default datum target symbol attaches to the cursor on
screen and the Datum Target Property Manager is displayed. See Figure A3-7.
The options in the Datum Target Property Manager allow you to specify the
symbol format and type of target. The option buttons at the top of the Settings
rollout allow you to locate the size of the target area inside or outside the symbol
when defining a datum target area. Selecting the No Target Symbol option allows
you to place a target point or target area without attaching the circular target
symbol. The option buttons in the second row allow you to specify the datum target
as a point or area. Selecting the Do Not Display Target Area option places a circular
target symbol and leader without a target point or area specification. The Target
Area Size text boxes are used to specify the diameter for a circular datum target
area and the width and height for a rectangular datum target area. The Datum
Reference(s) text boxes are used to specify the datum reference letter and datum
target number. You can include up to three references. The options in the Leader
rollout allow you to specify the leader type. The Settings and Layer rollouts serve the
same functions as those discussed previously.

Datum Target Circular Rectangular

Point Target Area Target Area

Figure A3-6. Examples of datum target symbols.

 ■

~rs1on 478 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

lll!Ji:'.1'1
fi·MMW
., )(
I
.....

e @'.]~
X ~~'aID
: b6o_
l a)'fl' *
€J .---~----

Figure A3-7. Specifying settings for a datum target symbol using the Datum Target
Property Manager.

After making the appropriate settings in the Datum Target Property Manager,
pick a point, line, or face to place the target. Then, drag the cursor and pick to place
the symbol. Pick additional points to create other symbols as needed. The Datum
Target Property Manager remains open, allowing you to make content changes when
placing additional symbols. To end the tool, pick OK (represented by the green check
mark) in the Datum Target Property Manager or press [Esc].

Editing Datum Target Symbols

Pick once on a datum target symbol to make changes in the Datum Target
Property Manager. Picking on the symbol attachment and dragging allows you to
drag it to a new location. This moves the symbol attachment only. Picking on the
datum target point or datum target area and dragging moves the point or area
separately from the symbol attachment.
 .
~rs1on
}.~Jj}_J d i_~ ~
Symbol
Specifications

Appendix ~
Dimensioning Symbols

60~

I.SH 0\R SR S0- CR - x--¾

~ arneter Radius Spherical Spherical Controlled Places j
Radius Diameter Radius or By

Symmetry Counterbore Spotface Countersink Square

Line Shape

1.5Hlli _dr0.3H
1~ )
0.3Hj I
Arc Depth Dimension Reference
Length or Deep Origin

O.SH--1 r
~cr:; ¾-Z
_L_ O.SH~ ~ T\
Taper Slope All All
Around Over
H = Letter height

479
 ■

~rs1on 480 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Datum Feature and Datum Target Symbols

Optional shoulder \
~ Identification letter

I "---- Filled Unfilled

f
Datum Feature Symbol

Target area size, when used

0.8H

3.SH

J L0.3H

Datum Target number Movable Datum

Target Symbol
Datum Target Symbol

<90°--y
Xl
Target Target Target
Point Line Area

H ~ Letter height
 ■

~rs1on Symbol Specifications 481

Appendix ~
Material Condition and Material
Boundary Symbols
Symbol Meaning
@ At maximum material condition (MMC)
w hen applied to a tolerance value. At
maximum material boundary (MMB) w hen
applied to a datum feature.

At least material condition (LMC) w hen

applied to a tolerance value. At least
material boundary (LMB) when applied
to a datum feature.

IL ~
t ~
H = Letter height
~rs ion 482 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Feature Control Frame

I• ,I 2H minimum M 2H minimum

~ l~l00.s@IA IBl 9f
H = Letter height

Symbol Specifications

-$- 0 0 . 13 @ A B@ C
Geometric characteristic
symbol
~ I I ~L Tertiary datum reference
Material boundary symbol,
Diameter symbol zone w hen used
descriptor, when used Secondary datum reference
Geometric tolerance - - - ~ Primary datum reference
Material condition symbol - - - - - ~
Order of Elements
 ■

~rs1on Symbol Specifications 483

Appendix ~
Geometric Characteristic Symbols

I.SH ~ m,f-
lt 1.2H

H
O.SH

Concentricity Position Symmetry

Straightness Circularity Flatness Cylindricity

i 2H I.SH 0.6H

7/\
I

~ 30°
1~ l.SH

T =T T L 60°
Perpendicularity Angularity Parallelism

, tJ
T
Profile of Profile of Circular
£L.._1.SH
Total
a Surface a Line Runout Runout

* May be filled or unfilled

H = Letter height
 ■

~rs1on 484 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Geometric Tolerancing Symbols

l_ ;==-~
--I' ,,__
- _--,,.
- >, 0 <H j r...,__
- _-__,-} ~ 0.8H
1.5H [ ) (J) (8) ~) (~
T Free
State
Tangent
Plane
Projected
Tolerance
Independency Unequally
Disposed
Zone Profile

~3H~1
O.SH-1 J- il
T [> ◄ ►
3X 1.5H =:j""- 0~
Translation Between

_ q~ -5H _ q~ -5H
1.5H ST 0.8H 1.5H Cf=:: 0.8H
-r;, -r;,
Statistical Continuous
Tolerance Feature

H =Letter height
 .
~rs1on
}.~Jj}_Jd i_~ ~
Reference
Material

Appendix ~
Decimal Equivalents and Tap Drill Sizes
11£ LS. S1MRETTCOIIPANl'~GREREST100UIMERSIAIHCI. IIASSM:IIISET1S01331 u.&A.

~H!H{~j Ill

.
FAACTION OR DRILL SIZE E~~~
... PIIECISIONTOOLS
,

TN'SlZE
·,-.,,11••• !.Ill•

FRACnONORDAILL SIZE E~~~ TAPSIZE

l<MlER BO .0135 39 .0995

~ 79 .0145 38 .10 15 5-40
..1.. .0156 37 .1040 5-44
64 78 .0160 36 .1065 6-32
77 .0180 L .1094
76 .0200 64 35 .1100
75 .0 210 34 .1110
74 .0225 33 .1130 6-40
73 .0240 32 .1160
72 .0250 l 31 .1200
71 .0260 .1250
70 .0280 8 30 .1285
69 .0292 29 .1360 8-32, 36
68 .0310 28 .1405
..L _ .0312 _lL .1406
32 67 .0320 64 27 .1440
66 .0330 26 .1470
65 .0350 25 .1495 10-24
64 .0360 24 .1520
63 .0370 ..o_ ~ .1540
62 .0380 .1562
61 .0390 32 22 .1570
60 .0400 21 .1590 10-32
59 .0410 20 .16 10
58 .0420 19 .1660
57 .0430 18 .1695
.0465 _1l_
56 .17 19
i .0469 o-ao 64 17 .1730
64
55 .0520 16 .,no 12-24
54 .0550 15 .1 800
.0595 1-64, 72 14 .1820 12- 28
..L ~ .0625 .1850
16 52 .0635 i ~ .1875
16
51 .0670 12 .1890
50 .0700 2- 56, 64 11 .19 10
49 .0730 10 .1935
48 .0760 9 .1960
..o_ .0781 8 .1990
64 47 .0785 3--48 7 .2010 1/4--20
46 .0810 ..u. .2031
64
45 .0820 3--56 6 .2040
44 .0860 5 .2055
43 .0890 4--40 4 .2090
.0935 4--48 3 .2130 1/4--28
i ~ .0938 _]_ _ .2188
32 32
41 .0960 2 .2210
40 .0980 lrnlSR 1 .2280
DRffiA .2340

Courtesy of The L.S. Starrett Company

(Continued)
485
 ■

~rs1on 486 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Decimal Equivalents and Tap Drill Sizes (Cont.)

-L&---~--.uu. ID

FRN::TIONORDRILLSl2E
E~ ~ N T
TAP S12E FRACTlON OR DRILL SIZE
E~:fNT TAP SIZE

~ .2344 .1J!. .5938

64
:m~
...1.._ ~
.2380
.2420
.2460
~

&
64
64 21.
32 .6094
.6250
.6406
.2500 2 .6562 3/4-10
4 F .2570 5/16-18 .!:!. .6719
G .2610 64 .6875 3/4-16
11. .2656 & .7031
64 64 .zl.
H .2660 .7188
I .2720 5/16-24 .il. .7344
64 .7500
J .2770
K .2810 ft .7656 7/S--9
.]__ .2812 64 ~ .7812
32 2
.fil_
L .2900 .7969
M .2950 64 .8125 7/S--14
.1J!. .2969 ~ .8281
64
N .3020 64 gz.. .8438
-5... .3125 3/S--16 .& .8594
16 0 .3160 64 .8750 1-8
p .3230 J,]_ .8906
~ 64 N
64 .3281 .9062
Q .3320 3/8-24 .all 2 .9219 1-12
A .3390 64 .9375
1.1. .3438 61 .9531
32 64 _31_
s .3480 .9688
T .3580 ~ 2 .9844 11/8-7
1.:1. .3594 64 1.0000
64
u .3680 7/16-14 13/64 1.0469 11/8-12
.L .3750 17/64 1.1094 11/4-7
8
V .3770 1.1250
w .3860 1.1719 1 1/4-12
.25. .3906 7/ 16-20 1.2188 1 3/S-S
64 X .3970 1.2500
y .4040 1.2969 1 3/8--12
fl.
.4062 1.3438 1 1/2-6
32
z .4130 1.3750
2L .4219 1/2- 13 127/64 1.4219 11/2- 12
64 .4375 1.5000
22. .4531 1/2-20
64 15 .4688 THREAD DRILL THREAD DmLL
_31_ 2 .4844 9/1S-12 1/a-27 1½ •11 ½
A 147/64
64 .5000 27/32.
¼ -18 7/1 6 1 -11 ½
.aa. .5156 9/ 16-18 3/s- 18 37/&4 2 ½ -8 2s/a
64 .1L .5312 5/8--1 1 23/32 3-8 31/4
½ - 14
~ 2 .5469 59/54 31/2 -8 33/,
64 1-11 ½
.5625 15/32 4- 8 4¼
R 1¼-11½ 1½
.5781 5/S--18
64

Courtesy of The L.S. Starrett Company

 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 487

Appendix ~
Decimal, Fractional, Letter, Wire Gage, and
Millimeter Equivalents

/
EQUIVALENTS
of Regular Sizes including Decimal, Fractional, Letter, "
Wire Gage, and Millimeter Sizes
Dec- r,\/ire8 Dec- r,\/ire& Dec- Wire& Dec- Wire&
Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M
.0059 97 .15 .0250 72 .0670 51 .1220 3.1
.0063 96 .16 .0256 .65 .0689 1.75 1/8 .1250 3.17
.0067 95 .17 .0260 71 .Q700 50 .1260 3.2
.0071 94 .18 .0276 .7 .0709 1.8 .1280 3.25
.0075 93 .19 .0280 70 .0728 1.85 .1285 30
.0079 92 .20 .0292 69 .0730 49 .1299 3.3
.0083 91 .21 .0295 .75 .0748 1.9 .1339 3.4
.0087 90 .22 .0310 68 .0760 48 .1360 29
.0089 1/32 .0312 .79 .0768 1.95 .1378 3.5
.0091 89 .23 .0315 .8 5164 .0781 1.98 .1405 28
.0094 .24 .0320 67 .0785 47 9/64 .1406 3.57
.0095 88 .0330 66 .0787 2. .1417 3.6
.Q100 87 .25 .0335 .85 .0807 2.05 .1440 27
.0102 .26 .0350 65 .0810 46 .1457 3.7
.Q105 86 .0354 .9 .0820 45 .1470 26
.0106 .27 .0360 64 .0827 2.1 .1476 3.75
.01 10 85 .28 .0370 63 .0846 2.15 .1495 25
.01 14 .29 .0374 .95 .0860 44 .1496 3.8
.0115 84 .0380 62 .0866 2.2 .1520 24
.0118 .30 .0390 61 .0886 2.25 .1535 3.9
.0120 83 .0394 1. .0890 43 .1540 23
.0125 82 .0400 60 .0906 2.3 5132 .1562 3.97
.0126 .32 .0410 59 .0925 2.35 .1570 22
.0130 81 .0413 1.05 .0935 42 .1575 4.
.0134 .34 .0420 58 3/32 .0938 2.38 .1590 21
.0135 80 .0430 57 .0945 2.4 .1610 20
.0138 .35 .0433 1.1 .0960 41 .1614 4.1
.0142 .36 .0453 1.15 .0965 2.45 .1654 4.2
.0145 79 .0465 56 .0980 40 .1660 19
.0150 .38 3/64 .0469 1.19 .0984 2.5 .1673 4.25
1/64 .0156 .397 .0472 1.2 .0995 39 .1693 4.3
.0157 .4 .0492 1.25 .1015 38 .1695 18
.0160 78 .0512 1.3 .1024 2.6 11/64 .1719 4.37
.0165 .42 .0520 55 .1040 37 .1730 17
.0173 .44 .0531 1.35 .1063 2.7 .1732 4.4
.0177 .45 .0550 54 .1065 36 .1770 16
.Q180 77 .0551 1.4 .1083 2.75 .1772 4.5
.0181 .46 .0571 1.45 7/64 .1094 2.78 .1800 15
.0189 .48 .0591 1.5 .1100 35 .181 1 4.6
.0197 .5 .0595 53 .1102 2.8 .1820 14
.0200 76 .0610 1.55 .1110 34 .1850 13
.0210 75 1/16 .0625 1.59 .1130 33 .1850 4.7
.0217 .55 .0630 1.6 .1142 2.9 .1870 4.75
.0225 74 .0635 52 .1160 32 3/16 .1875 4.76
.0236 .6 .0650 1.65 .1181 3. .1890 4.8
.0240 73 .0669 1.7 .1200 31 .1890 12

'--
Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

(Continued)
 ■

~rs1on 488 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Decimal, Fractional, Letter, Wire Gage, and
Millimeter Equivalents (Cont.)

r EQUIVALENTS
of Regular Sizes including Decimal, Fractional, Letter,
Wire Gage, and Millimeter Sizes
Dec- Wire& Dec- Wire& Dec- ~ire& Dec- Wire&
Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M Inch imal Letter M/M
1910 11 .2677 6.8 .3622 9.2 41/64 .6406 16.28
1929 4.9 .2717 6.9 .3642 9.25 .6496 16.5
1935 10 .2720 I .3661 9.3 21/32 .6562 16.67
.1960 9 .2756 7. .3680 u .6693 17.
1969 5. .2770 J .3701 9.4 43/64 .6719 17.07
1990 8 .2795 7.1 .3740 9.5 11/16 .6875 17.46
2008 5.1 .2810 K 3/8 .3750 .6890 17.5
2010 7 9/32 .2813 7.14 .3770 V 45/64 .7031 17.86
13/64 2031 5.15 .2835 7.2 .3780 9.6 .7087 18.
2040 6 .2854 7.25 .3819 9.7 23/32 .7188 18.26
2047 5.2 .2874 7.3 .3839 9.75 .7283 18.5
2055 5 .2900 L .3858 9.8 47/64 .7344 18.65
2067 5.25 .2913 7.4 .3860 w .7480 19.
.2087 5.3 .2950 M .3898 9.9 3/4 .7500 19.05
2090 4 .2953 7.5 25/64 .3906 49/64 .7656 19.45
2126 5.4 19/64 .2969 7.54 .3937 10. .7677 19.5
2130 3 5.41 .2992 7.6 .3970 X 25/32 .7812 19.84
2165 5.5 .3020 N .4040 y .7874 20.
7/32 2187 5.56 .3031 7.7 13/32 .4062 51/64 .7969 20.24
2205 5.6 .3051 7.75 .4130 z .8071 20.5
2210 2 5.61 .3071 7.8 .4134 10.5 13/16 .8125 20.64
2244 5.7 _31rn 7.9 27/64 .4219 .8268 2 1.
.2264 5.75 5/16 .3125 7.94 .4331 11 . 53/64 .8281 21.03
2280 1 5.79 .3150 8. 7/16 .4375 27/32 .8438 2 1.43
2283 5.8 .3160 0 .4528 11.5 .8465 21.5
2323 5.9 .3189 8.1 29/64 .4531 55/64 .8594 2 1.83
2340 A .3228 8.2 15/32 .4688 .8661 22.
15/64 .2344 5.95 .3230 p .4724 12 . 7/8 .8750 22.22
2362 6. .3248 8.25 31/64 .4844 .8858 22.5
2380 B .3268 8.3 .4921 12.5 57/64 .8906 22.62
2402 6.1 21/64 .3281 8.33 1/2 .5000 .9055 23.
2420 C .3307 8.4 .5118 13. 29/32 .9062 23.02
2441 6.2 .3320 a 33/64 .5156 59/64 .9219 23.42
2460 D .3346 8.5 17/32 .5312 .9252 23.5
2461 6.25 .3386 8.6 .5315 13.5 15/16 .9375 23.81
.2480 6.3 .3390 R 35/64 .5469 .9449 24.
1/4 2500 E 6.35 .3425 8.7 .5512 14. 61 /64 .9531 24.21
2520 6.4 11/32 .3438 8.74 9/16 .5625 .9646 24.5
2559 6.5 .3445 8.75 .5709 14.5 31/32 .9688 24.61
2570 F .3465 8.8 37/64 .5781 .9843 25.
2598 6.6 .3480 s .5906 15. 63/64 .9844 25.01
2610 G .3504 8.9 19/32 .5938 1 1.000C 25.4
2638 6.7 .3543 9. 39/64 .6094 1.003£ 25.5
2656 6.75 .3580 T .6102 15.5 1-1/64 1.015E 25.8
2657 6.75 .3583 9.1 5/8 .6250 1.023E 26.
2660 H 23/64 .3594 9.13 .6299 16. 1-1/32 1.031, 26.19
\.
Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.
 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 489

Appendix ~
Tap Drill Sizes
/
TAP DRILL SIZES "
BASED ON APPROXIMATELY 75% FULL THREAD

THREAD DRILL THREAD DRILL

#0-80 3/64 1-3/4-5 1-35/64
#1-64 No.53 1-3/4-12 1-43/64
#1-72 No.53 2-4-1 /2 1-25/32
#2-56 No.SO 2-12 1-59/64
#2-64 No.SO 2-1 /4-4-1/2 2-1/32
#3-48 No.47 2-1 /2-4 2-1 /4
#3-56 No.46 2-3/4-4 2-1 /2
#4-40 No.43 3-4 2-3/4
#4-48 No.42
#5-40 No.38 TAPER PIPE
#5-44 No.37 1/16-27 D
#6-32 No.36 1/8-27 Q
#6-40 No.33 1/4-18 7/ 16
#8-32 No.29 3/8-18 9/16
#8-36 No.29 1/2-14 45/64
#10-24 No.25 3/4-14 29/32
#10-32 No.21 1-11-1/2 1-9/64
#12-24 No.16 1-1 /4-11-1/2 1-31 /64
#12-28 No.14 1-1 /2-11-1/2 1-47/64
1/4-20 No. 7 2-11-1/2 2-13/64
1/4-28 No.3 2-1 /2-8 2-5/8
5/16-18 F 3-8 3-1 /4
5/16-24 I 3-1 /2-8 3-3/4
3/8-16 5/ 16 4-8 4-1 /4
3/8-24 Q 5-8 5-9/32
7/16-14 u 6-8 6-11 /32
7/16-20 25/64
1/2-12 27/64 STRAIGHT PIPE
1/2-13 27/64
1/2-20 29/64 1/16-27 1/4
9/16-12 31/64 1/8-27 s
9/16-18 33/64 1/4-18 29/64
5/8-11 17/32 3/8-18 19/32
5/8-18 37/64 1/2-14 47/64
3/4-10 21 /32 3/4-14 15/16
3/4-16 11 /16 1-11-1/2 1-11 /64
7/8-9 49/64 1-1 /4-11-1/2 1-33/64
7/8-14 13/ 16 1-1 /2-11-1 /2 1-3/4
1-8 7/8 2-11-1/2 2-7/32
1-12 59/64 2-1 /2-8 2-21 /32
1-14 15/ 16 3-8 3-9/32
1-1 /8-7 63/64 3-1 /2-8 3-25/32
1-1/8-12 1-3/64 4-8 4-9/32
1-1 /4-7 1-7/64 5-8 5-11 /32
1-1/4-12 1-11/64 6-8 6-13/32
1-1 /2-6 1-11/32
1-1/2-12 1-27/64
' Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.
 ..,(/)....
-·
0
:::::s
....
<,:,
c::,
I
METRIC TAP DRILL SIZES
RECOMMENDED METRIC DRILL CLOSEST RECOMMENDED INCH DRILL ~
C
MCI Ml\, PROBABLE PROBABLE
TAP DRILL
INCH HOLE PROBABLE DRILL INCH HOLE PROBABLE ;:;
SIZE SIZE
mm EQUIVALENT SIZE
(Inches)
PERCENT
OFTHREAD
SIZE EQUIVALENT SIZE PERCENT
OFTHREAD ~
(Inches) ;:;·
M1.6X0.35 1.25 0.0492 0.0507 69 - - - - tl
M1.8X0.35 1.45 0.0571 0.0586 69 - - - - in,
M2X0.4 1.60 0.0630 0.0647 69 #52 0.0635 0.0652 66
M2.2X0.45 1.75 0.0689 0.0706 70 - - - -
"'"o·
M2.5X0.45 2.05 0.0807 0.0826 69 #46 0.0810 0.0829 67
~ > "
:,·
M3X0.5
M3.5X0.6
2.50
2.90
0.0984
0.1142
0.1007
0.1168
68
68
#40
#33
0.0980
0.1130
0.1003
0. 1156
70
72 ....... ""O
tO
....n
M4X0.7
M4.5X0.75
3.30
3.70
0.1299
0.1457
0.1328
0.1489
69
74
#30
#26
0.1285
0.1470
0.1314
0. 1502
73
70
""O
tt) ""'"'-
cl
M5X0.8
M6X1
4.20
5.00
0.1654
0.1968
0.1686
0.2006
69
70
#19
#9
0.1660
0.1960
0.1692
0.1998
68
71
~ 6..... ....
,:l

"":::·
M7X1 6.00 0.2362 0.2400 70 15/64 0.2344 0.2382 73
M8X1.25 6.70 0.2638 0.2679 74 17/64 0.2656 0.2697 71
""O ><
M8 X1 7.00 0.2756 0.2797 69 J 0.2770 0.2811 66

~
.... -1•
M10X1.5 8.50 0.3346 0.3390 71 Q 0.3320 0.3364 75
M10X1 .25 8.70 0.3425 0.3471 73 11/32 0.3438 0.3483 71
M12X1 .75 10.20 0.4016 0.4063 74 y 0.4040 0.4087 71
r
::;:.
M12X1.25
M14X2
10.80
12.00
0.4252
0.4724
0.4299
0.4772
67
72
27/64
15/32
0.4219
0.4688
0.4266
0.4736
72
76
"" M14X1.5 12.50 0.4921 0.4969 71 - - - - N
5. M16X2 14.00 0.5512 0.5561 72 35/64 0.5469 0.5518 76 tO
Cl)
~ M16X1.5 14.50 0.5709 0.5758 71 - - - -
2. M18X2.5 15.50 0.6102 0.6152 73 39/64 0.6094 0.6144 74
"'0.
:; M18X1.5 16.50 0.6496 0.6546 70 - - - -
M20X2.5 17.50 0.6890 0.6942 73 11/16 0.6875 0.6925 74
M20X1.5 18.50 0.7283 0.7335 70 - -
{q
- -

M22X2.5 19.50 0.7677 0.7729 73 49/64 0.7656 0.7708 75

M22X1.5 20.50 0.8071 0.81 23 70 - - - -
M24X3 21.00 0.8268 0.8327 73 53164 0.8281 0.8340 72
/")
0 M24X2 22.00 0.8661 0.8720 71 - - - -
'5' M27X3
~ M27X2
24.00
25.00
0.9449
0.9843
0.9511
0.9913
73
70
15/16
63/64
0.9375
0.9844
0.9435
0.9914
78
70 _ /
['
 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 491

Appendix ~
Area, Temperature, Weight,
and Volume Equivalents

Area Equivalents

e t31 'g
I

4~

I area = radius2 x 3.1416 or diameter x .7854

I circumference= diameter x 3.1416 or diameter+ .3183
2 when the area of a circle & square are equal, D = S x 1.128
2 w hen the area of a circle & sauare are eaual, S = D x .8862
3 side of inscribed square = diameter x .7071
3 diameter of circumscribing circle= S x 1.1412
4 s urface area of a sphere = diameter x circumference
4 volume of a sphere= diameter' x .5236

Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

Equivalents
Fahrenheit a nd Celsius
0
f = (J.8 X 0 C) + 32
°C = (°F - 32) + 1.8
Weieht
1 gram= .03527 oz (av.)
1 oz = 28.35 grams
1 kilogram = 2.2046 pounds
1 pound = .04536 kilograms
1 metric ton = 2,204.6 pounds
1 ton (2000) lbs = 907.2 kg.
Volume
1 U.S. quart= 0.946 liters
1 U.S. gallon = 3.785 liters
I liter = 1.0567 U.S. jjuarts
1 liter = .264 U.S. ga on
'
Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.
 ■

~rs1on 492 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Length and Square Area Conversions

LENGTH CONVERSIONS
multiply by to obtain
Inches 25.4 Millimeters
Feet 304 .8 Millimeters
Inches 2.54 Centimeters
Feet 30.48 Centimeters
Millimeters .03937008 Inches
Centimeters .3937008 Inches
Meters 39.37008 Inches
Millimeters .003280840 Feet
Centimeters .03280840 Feet
Inches .0254 Meters

Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

SQUARE AREA CONVERSIONS

multiply by to obtain
Millimeters .00001076391 Feet
Millimeters .00 155003 Inches
Centimeters .1550003 Inches
Centimeters .001076391 Feet
Inches 645.1 6 Millimeters
Inches 6.4516 Centimeters
Inches .00064516 Meters
Feet .09290304 Meters
Feet 929.0304 Centimeters
Feet 92,903.04 Millimeters

Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 493

Appendix ~
Natural Trigonometric Functions
Degree Sine Cosine Tangent Cotangent

0 .00000 1.0000 .00000 ~

1 .01745 .9998 .01745 57.2900

2 .03490 .9994 .03492 28.6363
3 .05234 .9986 .05241 190810
4 .06976 .9976 .06993 14.3010
5 .08716 .9962 .08749 11.4300
6 .10453 .9945 .10510 9.5144
7 .12187 .9925 .12278 8.1 443
8 .13920 .9903 .14050 7.1 154
9 .15640 .9877 .15840 6.3138
10 .17360 .9848 .17630 5.6713
11 .19080 .9816 .19440 5.1 446
12 .20790 .9781 .21260 4.7046
13 .22500 .9744 .23090 4.3315
14 .24190 .9703 .24930 4.0108
15 .25880 .9659 .26790 3.7321
16 .27560 .9613 .28670 3.4874
17 .29240 .9563 .30570 3.2709
18 .30900 .951 1 .32490 3.0777
19 .32560 .9455 .34430 2.9042
20 .34200 .9397 .36400 2.7475
21 .35840 .9336 .38390 2.6051
22 .37460 .9272 .40400 2.4751
23 .39070 .9205 .42450 2.3559
24 .40670 .9135 .44520 2.2460
25 .42260 .9063 .46630 2.1 445
26 .43840 .8988 .48770 20503
27 .45400 .8910 .50950 1.9626
28 .46950 .8829 .53170 1.8807
29 .48480 .8746 .55430 1.8040
30 .50000 .8660 .57740 1.7321
31 .51500 .8572 .60090 1.6643
32 .52990 .8480 .62490 1.6003
33 .54460 .8387 .64940 1.5399
34 .55920 .8290 .67450 1.4826
35 .57360 .8192 .70020 1.4281
36 .58780 .8090 .72650 1.3764
37 .60180 .7986 .75360 1.3270
38 .61570 .7880 .78130 1.2799
39 .62930 .7771 .80980 1.2349
40 .64280 .7660 .83910 1.1 918
41 .65610 .7547 .86930 1.1 504
42 .66910 .7431 .90040 1.1106
43 .68200 .7314 .93250 1.0724
44 .69470 .7193 .96570 1.0355
45 .70710 .7071 1.00000 1.0000
46 .71930 .6947 1.03550 .9657
47 .73140 .6820 1.07240 .9325
48 .74310 .6691 1.11060 .9004
49 .75470 .6561 1.15040 .8693

(Continued)
 ■

~rs1on 494 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Natural Trigonometric Functions (Cont.)

Degree Sine Cosine Tangent Cotangent

50 .7660 .64280 1.1918 .8391
51 .7771 .62930 1.2349 .8098
52 .7880 .61570 1.2799 .7813
53 .7986 .60180 1.3270 .7536
54 .8090 .58780 1.3764 .7265
55 .8192 .57360 1.4281 .7002
56 .8290 .55920 1.4826 .6745
57 .8387 .54460 1.5399 .6494
58 .8480 .52990 1.6003 .6249
59 .8572 .51500 1.6643 .6009
60 .8660 .50000 1.7321 .5774
61 .8746 .48480 1.8040 .5543
62 .8829 .46950 1.8807 .5317
63 .8910 .45400 1.9626 .5095
64 .8988 .43840 2.0503 .4877
65 .9063 .42260 2.1445 .4663
66 .9135 .40670 2.2460 .4452
67 .9205 .39070 2.3559 .4245
68 .9272 .37460 2.4751 .4040
69 .9336 .35840 2.6051 .3839
70 .9397 .34200 2.7475 .3640
71 .9455 .32560 2.9042 .3443
72 .9511 .30900 3.0777 .3249
73 .9563 .29240 3.2709 .3057
74 .9613 .27560 3.4874 .2868
75 .9659 .25880 3.7321 .2680
76 .9703 .24190 4.0108 .2493
77 .9744 .22500 4.3315 .2309
78 .9781 .20790 4.7046 .2126
79 .9816 .19080 5.1446 .1944
80 .9848 .17360 5.6713 .1763
81 .9877 .15640 6.3138 .1584
82 .9903 .13920 7.1 154 .1405
83 .9925 .12187 8.1443 .1228
84 .9945 .10453 9.5144 .1051
85 .9962 .08716 11.4301 .0875
86 .9976 .06976 14.3007 .0699
87 .9986 .05234 19.0811 .0524
88 .9994 .03490 28.6363 .0349
89 .9998 .01745 57.2900 .0175
90 1.0000 .00000 ~ .0000
 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 495

Appendix ~
Standard Gage Sheet Steel
,
Manufacturers Standard Gage for Sheet Steel '
Std. Inch Lbs. Per Std. Inch Lbs. Per Std. Inch Lbs. Per Std. Inch Lbs. Per
Gage# Thick Sq. Ft. Gage# Thick Sq. Ft. Gage# Thick Sq. Ft. Gage# Thick Sq. Ft.
3 .2391 10.00 12 .1046 4.3570 21 .0329 1.375 30 .0120 .50000
4 .2242 9.375 13 .0897 3.7500 22 .0299 1.250 31 .0105 .43750
5 .2092 8.750 14 .0747 3.1250 23 .0269 1.125 32 .0097 .40625
6 .1943 7.500 15 .0673 2.8125 24 .0239 1.000 33 .0090 .37500
7 .1793 6.875 16 .0598 2.5000 25 .0209 .8750 34 .0082 .34375
8 .1644 6.250 17 .0538 2.2500 26 .0179 .7500 35 .0075 .31250
9 .1495 5.625 18 .0478 2.0000 27 .0164 .6875 36 .0067 .28125
10 .1345 5.000 19 .0418 1.7500 28 .0149 .6250 37 .0064 .26562
\. 11 .1196 4.375 20 .0359 1.5000 29 .0135 .5625 38 .0060 .250 .,/

Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

 ■

~rs1on 496 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Triangle Solutions
/ \
SOLUTIONS TO TRIANGLES
A+B+C;180' Obli~
Ri~ B
8 ;a+b+ c A b 90 C A b C
2

Formulas for Formulas for

Have Want Right Oblique

A tan A; alb 1/2A; ✓(s - b)(s - c)/bc

B 90' -A or cos B ; ale sin 1/2B ; ✓(s - a)(s - c)/a x c
abc
C 90° sin 1/2C ; ✓(s - a)(s - b)/a x b
Area a x b/2 ✓s x (s- a)(s-b)(s- c)
B 90° -A 180° - (A+ C)
b a cot A a sin B/sin A
aAC
C a/sin A a sin Gi sin A
Area (a' cot A)/2 a' sin B sin C/2 sin A
A sin A = a- c sin A ; a sin Cl e
B 90° -A or cos B; ale 180° - (A + C)
ace
b ~ c sin Bi sin C
Area 1/2a ✓c' - a' 1/2 ac sin B
A tan A ; alb tan A ; a sin C/b-a cos C
B 90° - A or tan B ; b/a 180° - (A+ C)
abC
C v'a'+b' ✓a' + b' - 2ab cos C

\. Area ax b/2 1/2ab sin C

Rutland Tool and Supply Co., Inc.

 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 497

Appendix ~
Metric Coordinate to Positional
Tolerance Conversion
This chart allows you to make an approximate conversion from conventional
coordinate tolerance location dimensions to a positional tolerance. To make a
conversion, find the conventional coordinate tolerance along the horizontal scale at
the bottom of the chart, such as the 0.1 tolerance shown with an arrow. Follow the
line up to the colored diagonal line and then follow the colored arc to the positional
tolerance value found along the vertical scale at the left. The positional tolerance for
the 0.1 coordinate tolerance is 0.14, as displayed with the arrow at the left.
0.84
0.80

0.76

0.72
ti,
... 0.68
~
(II

:§
~(II
u
...=
OS
(II

;§
-;
._=
g
·;;;
0
~

"'0 l!)
0

Conventional Coordinate Tolerance

(Millimeters)

.....
0
 ■

~rs1on 498 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Appendix ~
Inch Coordinate to Positional
Tolerance Conversion
This chart allows you to make an approximate conversion from conventional
coordinate tolerance location dimensions to a positional tolerance. To make a
conversion, find the conventional coordinate tolerance along the horizontal scale at
the bottom of the chart, such as the .005 tolerance shown with an arrow. Follow the
line up to the colored diagonal line and then follow the colored arc to the positional
tolerance value found along the vertical scale at the left. The positional tolerance for
the .005 coordinate tolerance is .007, as displayed with the arrow at the left.
.042

.040

.038
.036

.034

-;, .032
"'<.J
..c: .030
i::
e .028
"'i::
<.J

...OS
"'
;§
iii
i::
0
:-s
<I)
0
l:l.

0 0
N
C, 8

Conventional Coordinate Tolerance

(Inches)
 ■

~rs1on Reference Material 499

Appendix ~
Positional Tolerance Zone Analysis
(B)
0.5

(A)
(F) True position
Positional
tolerance zone at LMC --------..._

J
(G)
Bonus tolerance

0.5

(E)
00.7 Positional
tolerance zone at MMC

(C)
• Possible hole locations
This positional tolerance zone analysis correlates with Examples 7-2 through 7-9
in this text and the related discussion. The following provides an analysis of items
(A) through (G) in the drawing on this page.
A) Original theoretical true position, defined by a coordinate tolerance s ystem.
B) Coordinate tolerance zone based on ±0.25 location dimension tolerance.
C) Restricted design intent of a typical coordinate tolerance zone that may not be
exceeded.
D) Diagonal of 0.5 coordinate tolerance zone. Calculated using 1.414 x 0.5 = 0.7.
E) 00.7 positional tolerance zone at MMC. The diameter is equal to the length of
the diagonal calculated in (D).
F) Positional tolerance zone at LMC = the difference between the upper and lower
limits of the hole diameter.
G) Bonus tolerance. The positional tolerance increases equal to the increase in hole
size from MMC. The maximum positional tolerance increase is at the LMC size
of the hole.
Numbers 1 through 5 in the drawing represent the following possible hole
locations.
1. A hole center/ axis located here is well within the boundary of the coordinate
tolerance zone.
2. A hole center/ axis located here is within the boundary of the coordinate
tolerance zone.
3. A hole center/ axis located here is outside of the coordinate tolerance zone, but
inside of the diameter positional tolerance zone at MMC.
4. A hole center/ axis located here is outside of the positional tolerance zone at
MMC, but acceptable because it is inside the diameter positional tolerance zone
at LMC. It is within the bonus tolerance.
Drawing and discussion concept courtesy David L. King.
 ....
ul
o·
:::::s
Geometric Tolerances Quick Reference "'
g
Applic,1bility 11f h•,lturt• Applicabilitv 1if Datum
Typt.• of \1odifk.•rs (Rf'S A'>..wmt'<.-1 \fodifit'f'> (R\.18 As~unwd Type of Tolcrann·
Chamckristic Symbol Datum Rt•krl·nc1.·s Typt"' of Control

~~
TQkrance Uni,·,~ \.1\.tC or l.\1C 1~ Unit·,~ \.1\.18 or D,1B b Zom:

Str,1ightncs.s (line
Applit•d) Applit-d)
G'1
clement)
-- No Not allowed NIA Surface 20 ti)
0 ::;-
Straightness (axis) No Not allowed NIA Axis 30
a
ti)
;i
Aatncss (surface)
0 No Not allowed NIA Surface 30
::;- ~
Fo,m
Flatness (median
plane) 0 No Not allowed NIA Median plane 30
....
n > "'
[f
d ""O ;;·
Circularity
0 No Not allowed NIA Surfacl' 20
g. ""O "'::s
Cylind ricity
II No Not allowed NIA Surface 3D
ti)
"1
~
ti)
...
,..,
"-
cl
= ~·><
!(j -~-
Yes (if datum is a feature Q.. -
~
Axis, median plane, or
Angularity
L Yes (if feature has size) Required
of size) surface
JD (see Note 1)

n ::s

~
Orientation Pt°'rpendicularity
_l_ YC's (if feature has s iu) Required
Yes (if datum is a fC'ature
ofsiZC')
Axis, median plane, or
surfacc-
JD (see NolC' l)

Parallelism
II Yes (if feature has siz e) Required
Yes (if datum is a feature
of size)
Axis, median plane, or
surface
JD (see Note 1)

Position
-$- Yes Required (see Note 2)
Yes (if datum is a fc-atu re
of size)
Axis, median plane, or
s urface boundary
3D ,:: vl
Location Concentricity (g No Required No Opposing median points 3D
::;·
~
--- -
~
Symme try No Required No Opposing mt.'liian points 30

Profile (sce Note3)

Profile of a line
n No Required (see Note 2)
Yes (if datum is a feature
of size)
Yes (if datum is a feature
Surface 2D
;-,

I
Profile of a
s urface 0 No Required (see No te 2)
of size)
Surface 30

Runout (see Note 3 )

Circular ru nout
/ No Required No Surface 2D

Total runout
L/ No Required No

Notes: 1. Angularity, perpendkularity, and parallelism may be made 2D by noting LINE ELEM ENTS beneath the feature control frame.
Surface 3D

2. Thc-re arc- spedal cases where position, profile of a line, and profile of a s urface rrmy not rc-quire datums.
3. Profile and runout tolerances can control form, orientation. and location.
 .
~rs1on

A ASME Y14.5M "Rule 1": A rule that states

the limits of size of a feature controls
Actual size: The measured size of a the amount of variation in size and
feature or part after manufacturing. geometric form. See limits
Actual local size: Any cross-sectional of size.
measurement of a part at any two ASME Y14.5M "Rule 2": A rule that
adjacent points. states RFS applies with respect to the
Actual mating envelope: The smallest size individual geometric tolerance, and
that can be contracted about an external RMB to the datum reference, when
feature or the largest size that can be no material condition or boundary
expanded within an internal feature. condition symbol is specified.
Actual mating size: The smallest distance Attitude variation: The amount a hole
between two parallel planes within axis inclines within the tolerance zone.
which the actual surface features are Average diameter: The average of several
contained. measurements across a circular or
All around symbol: A symbol used to cylindrical feature.
specify that a profile tolerance or other Axis geometric control: The control (using
specification applies to surfaces all a geometric tolerance) of an axis of a
around the true profile in the view to feature or object. The feature control
which the leader points. frame is placed with the diameter
All over symbol: A symbol used to specify dimension of the related object or
that a surface profile tolerance or other feature.
specification applies all over the three- Axis straightness: A tolerance specified
dimensional profile of the part to which by placing the feature control frame
the leader points. below the diameter dimension and
Allowance: The intentional difference placing a diameter symbol in front of
between the maximum material limits the geometric tolerance to specify a
of mating parts. cylindrical tolerance zone.
Angularity: The condition of a surface,
center plane, or axis at any specified
angle from a datum plane or axis.
B
Angularity tolerance: A tolerance Baseline dimensioning: A system of
established by two parallel planes or dimensioning where each dimension
cylindrical zones at any specified basic originates from a common point, line,
angle, other than 90°, to a datum plane, plane, or axis.
a pair of datum planes, or an axis. Basic dimension: A dimension that is
Arc length symbol: A symbol placed above considered theoretically perfect. Basic
a dimension value to specify an arc dimensions are the basis for variations
length measured on a curved outline. that are established by other tolerances.

501
 ■

~rs1on 502 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Between symbol: A symbol used to Composite positional tolerancing:

indicate that a tolerance or other A tolerancing method used when it
specification applies to a limited is desirable to permit the location of
segment of a surface or feature between a pattern of features to vary within
designated ends or across multiple a larger tolerance than the positional
features. tolerance specified for each feature.
Bilateral tolerance: A tolerance permitted to Composite profile tolerance:
vary in both the + and - directions from A tolerance that provides for the
the specified dimension. location of a profiled feature and, at
the same time, the control of form and
orientation.
C Concentricity: The condition where the
Chain dimensioning: A system of axes of all cross-sectional elements of
dimensioning where dimensions are a cylindrical surface are common with
placed one after the other from one the axis of a datum feature.
feature to the next across the part. Continuous feature symbol: A symbol
Chart dimensioning: A type of used to indicate that a group of two or
dimensioning that uses a chart to more interrupted coplanar features are
display dimensions of the changing considered as a single feature.
values of a feature. Controlled radius: A radius applied when
Circularity: A form tolerance that is the limits of the radius tolerance zone
characterized by any given cross section must be tangent to the adjacent surfaces.
taken perpendicular to the axis of a Conventional dimensioning: As used in
cylinder or cone, or through the common this text, dimensioning without the use
center of a sphere. of geometric tolerancing.
Circular runout: A type of runout that Conventional tolerancing: As used in
provides control of single circular this text, applying a degree of form
elements of a surface. and location control by increasing or
Circularity tolerance: A tolerance formed decreasing the tolerance.
by a radius zone creating two concentric Coplanar profile tolerance: A tolerance
circles within which the actual surface used when it is desirable to treat two or
must lie. more separate surfaces that lie on the
Clearance: The loosest fit or maximum same plane as one surface.
intended difference between mating Counterbore: A cylindrical flat-bottomed
parts. hole machined below the surface to
Clearance fits: A group of fits generally enlarge another hole.
the same as running and sliding fits. Countersink: A conical hole machined
With clearance fits, a clearance exists below the surface to enlarge another
between the mating parts under all hole in order to recess a conical head
tolerance conditions. fastener.
Coaxial: A condition where two or more Cylindricity: A form tolerance identified
cylindrical shapes share a common axis. by a radius tolerance zone establishing
Coaxial positional tolerance: two perfectly concentric cylinders within
A tolerance used to control the which the actual surface must lie.
alignment of two or more holes that
share a common axis.
Collet: A cone-shaped chuck used for
D
holding cylindrical pieces in a lathe or Datum: A plane, point, line, or axis, or
inspection machine. a combination thereof. A datum is
theoretically exact, and is derived from
the theoretical datum feature simulator.
 ■

~rs1on Glossar 503

Datum axis: The center axis established Diameter: The distance across a circle
when a cylindrical datum feature is measured through the center.
used. Dimension: A numerical value indicated
Datum center plane: The plane that splits on a drawing and in documents to
a symmetrical feature, such as a slot or define the size, location, or orientation
tab. of a feature.
Datum feature: An actual feature on a Dimension origin symbol: A symbol used
part, such as a surface, that is used to to indicate that a toleranced dimension
establish the datum reference frame. between two features originates from
Datum feature simulator: A perfect the feature where the symbol is placed.
theoretical boundary or a physical Direct dimensioning: A type of
boundary used to establish a datum dimensioning applied to control the
or simulated datum from a specified specific size or location of one or more
datum feature. specific features.
Datum feature symbol: A symbol used
to identify an object feature specified
as a datum and referred to as a datum
E
feature. Equal bilateral tolerance: A tolerance
Datum plane: The theoretically exact where the variation from the specified
plane established by the simulated dimension is the same in both the + and
datum of the datum feature. - directions.
Datum precedence: The precedence Extreme attitude variation:
that is established by the order of A condition where the hole axis is at
placement in the feature control frame. an extreme angle inside the positional
The primary datum is given first, tolerance zone.
followed by the secondary datum and Extreme form variation: The variation
then the tertiary datum. of the form of the feature between the
Datum reference frame (DRF): upper limit and lower limit of a size
The "frame" created by three datum dimension.
features that are perpendicular to each Extreme positional variation:
other and used for layout purposes. A condition where the hole axis is at the
Datum target: A point, line, or area of extreme side of the position tolerance
contact on a part used to establish a zone.
datum when it is not possible to use a
surface. F
Datum target point: Used to identify
datum planes, it is established on Fair curve: A smooth curve without sharp
the drawing using basic or tolerance changes in direction over any portion of
dimensions. its length.
Datum target symbol: A symbol used to Fastener: A hardware device that
identify the characteristics of a datum mechanically joins two or more objects.
target. The symbol is drawn as a circle Feature: The general term applied to
with a horizontal line through the describe a physical portion of a part or
center. object.
Degrees offreedom: The number of Feature control frame: A symbol used
coordinates it takes to exclusively to define the geometric tolerancing
control the position of a part. characteristics of a feature. The
Depth symbol: A symbol placed in front of feature control frame is divided into
a dimension value to specify how deep compartments with the geometric
a feature is machined below the surface. characteristic symbol contained in the first
compartment followed by the geometric
tolerance in the second compartment.
 ■

~rs1on 504 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Feature of size: One cylindrical or H

spherical surface, a circular element,
or a set of two opposed elements or High points: Points of contact between
opposed parallel plane surfaces, each datums and datum feature simulators.
of which is associated with a size
dimension.
Feature-relating control: In a composite
I
positional tolerance, the lower entry of Independency symbol: A symbol used to
the feature control frame that specifies indicate that perfect form of a feature of
the smaller positional tolerance for the size is not required at MMC or LMC.
individual features within the pattern. Interference fits: Fits that require the mating
Feature without size: A feature that parts to be pressed or forced together
cannot be associated with a size under all tolerance conditions.
dimension. Irregular feature of size: Either a directly
Fixed fastener: A fastening situation toleranced feature or a collection
where one of the parts to be assembled of features that may contain, or
contains a threaded hole for a bolt or be contained by, an actual mating
screw, or an unthreaded hole for a envelope.
stud, located in the second part to be
assembled.
Flatness tolerance: A tolerance that
L
establishes the distance between two Least material boundary (LMB):
parallel planes within which the surface The limit defined by a tolerance or
must lie. combination of tolerances that exists on
or inside the material of a feature(s).
Floating fastener: A fastening situation
where two or more parts are assembled Least material condition (LMC):
with fasteners such as bolts and nuts The condition where a feature of size
and all parts have clearance holes for contains the least amount of material
the bolts. within the stated limits.
Force fits (FN): A special group of Limit dimensioning: A system of
interference fits characterized by dimensioning where the upper and
maintenance of constant pressure. This is lower limits of the tolerance are
where two mating parts must be pressed provided and there is no specified
or forced together. Force fits range from dimension given.
FN 1 (light drive) to FN 5 (force fits Limits: The largest and smallest
required in high stress applications). numerical values possible for the
Form tolerance: A tolerance that controls feature within the tolerance specified.
the straightness, flatness, circularity, or Limits of size: The amount of variation
cylindricity of a geometric shape. in size and geometric form of a feature
Free state condition: The distortion of control. The limits of size is the
the part after removal of forces applied boundary between maximum material
during manufacturing. condition (MMC) and least material
condition {LMC).
Locating tolerance zone: In a composite
G profile tolerance, the top half of the
Geometric characteristic symbols: feature control frame that locates the
Symbols used in geometric dimensioning feature from datums.
and tolerancing to provide specific Location tolerances: Tolerances used for
controls related to the form of an object, the purpose of locating features from
the orientation of features, the outlines of datums, or for establishing coaxiality or
features, the relationship of features to an symmetry.
axis, or the location of features.
 ■

~rs1on Glossan 505

Locational fits: A group of fits intended to boundary and a least material

determine only the location of mating boundary defined in a CAD file or by
parts. basic dimensions that encompasses
the true profile, and phantom lines
to indicate the tolerance zone. The
M term "NON-UN IFORM" replaces the
Material condition symbols: Symbols tolerance value within the feature
that establish the rela tionship between control frame.
the size of the feature within its Normal: Term used to describe a feature
given dimensional tolerance and the that is perpendicular to a plane surface
geometric tolerance. Often referred to as and radial to a curved surface.
modifying symbols.
Maximum boundary condition : The
combined maximum material condition 0
and geometric tolerance. Order of precedence: The order in which
Maximum material boundary (MMB): the datums appear in the last three
The limit defined by a tolerance or compartments of the feature control
combination of tolerances that exists on frame. The primary datum is given
or outside the material of a feature(s). first, followed by the secondary datum
Maximum material condition (MMC): and then the tertiary datum.
The condition where a feature contains Orientation tolerances: Tolerances that
the maximum amount of m ate rial control the relationship of features to one
within the stated limits. another. When controlling orientation
Movable datum targets: Datum targets tolerances, the feature is related to one or
that are not fixed at their basic location, more datum features.
and are free to translate.
Movable datum target symbol: p
A symbol used to indicate that
Parallelism: The condition of a surface or
the datum ta rget is not fixed
center plane equidistant from a datum
at its basic location a nd is free to
plane or axis.
translate.
Parallelism geometric tolerance:
Multiple datum reference: A datum
A tolerance established by two parallel
reference that is established by two
planes or cylindrical zones that are
datum features, such as an axis
parallel to a datum pla ne, and between
established by two datum diameters.
which the surface or axis of the feature
When a multiple datum reference is
must lie.
used, all applicable datum reference
letters, separated by a dash, are placed in Pattern-locating control: In a composite
a single compartment after the geometric positional tolerance, the upper part of
tolerance. the feature control frame that specifies
the larger positional tolerance for the
pattern of features as a group.
N Perfect flatness: The condition of a surface
Nominal size: A dimension used for where all of the elements a re in one
general identification, such as stock size plane.
or thread diame ter. Perfect form boundary: The true
Nonrigid parts: Parts that may have geometric form of the feature at MMC.
dimensional change due to thin w all Perfect symmetry: A condition that occurs
characteristics. when the center planes of two or more
Non-uniform profile tolerance: A related symmetrical features line up.
uniquely shaped maximum material
 ■

~rs1on 506 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Perpendicularity: The condition of a Projected tolerance zone: A tolerance

surface, center plane, or axis at a right zone that is established at true position
angle (90°) to a datum plane or axis. and extends away from the primary
Perpendicularity tolerance: A tolerance datum. A projected tolerance zone
established by a specified geometric is recommended when variations in
tolerance zone made up of two parallel perpendicularity of threaded or press-
planes or cylindrical zones that are a fit holes could cause the fastener to
basic 90° to a given datum plane or axis, interfere with the mating part.
and within which the actual surface or
axis must lie. R
Plus-minus dimensioning: A system of
dimensioning that provides a nominal Radial element: A line element on the
dimension and an amount of allowable contour of a radial surface.
variance from that dimension. May Radius: The distance from the center of a
appear similar to 24.5±0.5. circle to the outside.
Polar coordinate dimensioning: Rectangular coordinate dimensioning
A dimensioning system where angular without dimension lines: A type of
dimensions are combined with other baseline dimensioning providing only
dimensions to locate features from extension lines and numbers. All dimension
planes, centerlines, or center planes. lines and arrowheads are omitted.
Positional tolerance: A tolerance used to Reference dimension: A dimension,
define a zone in which the center, axis, usually without a tolerance, used for
or center plane of a feature of size is information purposes only. A reference
permitted to vary from true position. dimension is shown on a drawing
Primary datum: The primary datum enclosed in parentheses.
reference established in the datum Regardless offeature size (RFS): The
reference frame. The primary datum is term used to indicate that a geometric
first in the order of precedence. tolerance applies at any increment of size
Profile: The outline of an object of the feature within its size tolerance. RFS
represented either by an external view is assumed for all geometric tolerances
or a cross section through the object. unless otherwise specified.
Profile form and orientation tolerance Regardless of material boundary (RMB):
zone: In a composite profile tolerance, The term used to indicate that a datum
the bottom half of the feature control is established from a datum feature
frame that establishes the limits of size, simulator that progresses from the
form, and orientation of the profile maximum material boundary (MMB)
related to the locating tolerance zone. toward the least material boundary
(LMB) until it makes maximum
Profile of a line tolerance: A two- contact with the farthest points of the
dimensional or cross-sectional feature. RMB is assumed for all datum
geometric tolerance that extends along
references unless otherwise specified.
the length of the feature.
Regular feature of size: Either one
Profile of a surface tolerance:
cylindrical or spherical surface, a
A geometric tolerance that controls the circular element, or two parallel
entire surface of a feature or object as a opposed elements or opposed parallel
single entity. surfaces, each of which is associated
Profile tolerance: A tolerance that with a directly toleranced dimension.
specifies a uniform boundary along the Restrained condition: A condition where
true profile within which the elements a part is restrained or held on its datum
of the surface must lie. features to simulate the function or
interaction with other features or parts,
as in an assembly.
~rs ion Glossar 507

R11nning and sliding/its (RC): Specified dimension: The part of the

A group of fits that provide a running dimension from where the limits are
performance with suitable lubrication calculated.
allowance. Running fits range from RCl Spherical radius: The distance from the
(close fits) to RC9 (loose fits). surface of a spherical feature to its
R11no11t: A combination of geometric center point.
tolerances used to control the Spot/ace: A cylindrical flat-bottomed hole
relationship of one or more features of a machined below the surface to enlarge
part to a datum axis. another hole.
Stacking: Accumulation that occurs
s when the tolerance of each individual
dimension builds on the next. Also
Secondary dat11m: The secondary datum known as tolerance buildup.
reference established in the datum
reference frame. The secondary datum Statistical process control (SPC): A
is second in the order of precedence. method of monitoring a manufacturing
process by using statistical signals
Shrink fits: A special group of interference to either leave the process alone or
fits characterized by maintenance of change it as needed to maintain the
constant pressure. (Also known as force quality intended in the dimensional
fits.) This is where two mating parts tolerancing.
must be pressed or forced together.
Statistical tolerancing: Assigning
Sim11lated dat11m: A point, axis, line, or tolerances to related dimensions in an
plane consistent with or resulting from assembly based on the requirements of
processing or inspection equipment, statistical process control (SPC).
such as a surface plate, inspection table,
gage surface, or a mandrel. Stock size: A commercial or
premanufactured size, such as a
Sim11lated dat11m axis: The axis of a particular size of square, round, or hex
perfectly cylindrical inspection device steel bar.
that contacts the datum feature surface.
Straightness: The measure of how closely
Simulated datum center plane: The an element of a surface or an axis is to a
center plane of a perfectly rectangular perfectly straight line.
inspection device that contacts the
Straightness tolerance: A tolerance that
datum feature surface.
specifies a zone within which the
Single composite pattern: A group of required surface element or axis
features located relative to common must lie.
datum features not subject to size
S11rface geometric control:
tolerance, or to common datum features
of size specified on an RFS basis. The connection of the feature control
frame with either a leader to the surface
Single limits: Limit dimensions used of the object or feature or extended
when the specified dimension cannot from an extension line from the surface
be any more than the maximum or of the object or feature.
less than the minimum given value.
The abbreviation for minimum (MIN) Surface straightness tolerance:
A tolerance represented by connecting
or maximum (MAX) follows the
the feature control frame to the surface
dimension value.
with a leader, or by connecting the
Specific area flatness: A tolerance that feature control frame to an extension
defines a portion of a surface where the line in the view where the surface to be
tolerance applies, used when a large controlled is shown as an edge.
cast surface must be flat in a relatively
small area. Symbols: Graphic representations used
to describe specific information that
would otherwise be difficult and time-
consuming to duplicate in note form.
 ■

~rs1on 508 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Symmetry line: Used as an axis of Two single-segment feature control

symmetry for a partial view. It is used frame: A feature control frame that has
when representing partial views and two position symbols, each displayed
partial sections of symmetrical parts. in a separate compartment, and a two-
Symmetry tolerance: A center plane datum reference in the lower half of the
relationship of the features of an object feature control frame.
establishing a median point to center
plane control.
u
Unequal bilateral tolerance:
T A tolerance where the variation from
Tabular dimensioning: A type of baseline the specified dimension is not the same
dimensioning where size dimensions in both directions.
for holes are given in a table. Unequally disposed profile tolerance:
Tangent plane: A plane that contacts the Indicates that the tolerance is in the
high points of the specified feature direction allowing additional material
surface. to be added to or taken away from the
true profile.
Tertiary datum: The tertiary datum
reference established in the datum Unequally disposed profile symbol:
reference frame. The tertiary datum is A symbol used to specify a unilateral or
third in the order of precedence. unequal bilateral profile tolerance.
Tolerance: The total amount that a specific Unilateral profile: A profile where the
dimension is permitted to vary. entire tolerance zone is on one side of
the true profile.
Tolerance buildup: Accumulation that
occurs when the tolerance of each Unilateral tolerance: A tolerance where
individual dimension builds on the the variation is permitted to increase or
next. Also known as stacking. decrease in only one direction from the
specified dimension.
Total rzmout: A type of runout that
provides a combined control of surface Unit flatness: A specification used when
elements. it is desirable to control the flatness
of a given surface area as a means of
Transition fits: Fits that may result in
controlling an abrupt surface variation
either a clearance fit or an interference
within a small area of the feature.
fit due to the range of limits between
mating parts. Unit straightness: A straightness per unit
of measure specification applied to a
Translate: To move uniformly without
part or feature in conjunction with a
rotation.
straightness specification over the total
Translation symbol: A symbol used to length.
indicate that a datum feature simulator
is not fixed at its basic location and shall
be free to translate. V
True position: The theoretically exact Virtual condition: The combined
location of a feature. maximum material condition and
True profile: The actual desired shape of geometric tolerance.
the object.
 .
~rs1on

ch art dimensioning, 32, 37 established with datum target

A circular patterns, composite symbols, 106-109
acceptance boundary, 181 positional tolerancing applied, placement of datum feature
accumulation, 31 252-254 symbol for datum axis,
actua l local size, 18 circular runout 345-346 103-104
actual mating envelope, 79 circula rity, 189 simulated datum axis, 104
actual m ating size, 18 circularity geo metric tolerance, 189 datum center plane, simulated,
actual produced size, 133 circularity tolerance for sphere, 190 112-113
actual size, 18 clea rance, 30 datum feature, 79-82
all around symbol, 52 clearance fit, 28-29 geometric control of datum
all over symbol, 52 coaxial, 105, 330 surface, 82
allowance, 29 coaxia l datum features, 105 datum feature simulator, 64, 79, 151
allowances and tolerances for fits, 28 coaxial features, 255 datum features specified
alternate d imension practices, 32 coaxiality, 345 individually, 88
angular dimensions, 16 coaxial positional tolerance, 259-260 datum feature symbol, 55, 78-79
angularity, 220 definition, 259 datum plane, 80
of an axis, 222-223 collet, 345 datum precedence, 154
of a center plane and single composite positional tolerance, and material condition, 154-157
element control, 223 248-250 datum reference frame (ORF), 82
of a surface, 220-221 applied to circular patterns, datum reference frame concept,
angularity geometric tolerance, 220 252-254 82-88
angularity tolerance, 220-223 material condition datum features specified
arc length symbol, 52 requirements, 255 individually, 88
attitude variation, 148 composite profile tolerance, 330-333 degrees of freedom, 86-87
average diameter, 192 concentricity, 300 multiple d atum reference
axis control, concentricity tolerance, 300-301 frames, 87
m aximum material condition, conica l features, profile, 330 datum reference order, 82
145-146 continuous feature symbol, 63 datums, 55, 77-132
regardless of feature size contoured surface as datum feature, applying translation modifier
(RFS), 142-144 using, 116-117 to d atum reference, 114-115
axis geometric control, 142 controlled radius, 20 center of pattern of features as
axis parallelism, 205-207 controlled radius symbol, 52 datum axis, 113
axis straightness, 180 conventional dimensioning, 14 coplanar surface datums,
conventional tolerancing, 14, 234 99-101
coplanar profile tolerance, 328 d atum axis, 102-108
coplana r surface datums, 99-101 d atum center pla ne, 111-113
B coplanar surfaces, 99, 328 datum feature, 79-82
baseline dimensioning, 31 counterbore, 53 datum feature symbol, 78-79
basic dimensions, 17, 61,231 counterbore symbol, 53 datum reference frame
specifying in a note, 335 countersink, 53 concept, 82-88
basic dimension symbol, 61 counte rsink symbol, 53 d atum target symbols, 88-98
between symbol, 63 cylindricity, 194 definition, 78
bilateral tolerance, 23 cylindricity tolerance, 194-195 movable datum target symbols
by symbol, 52 a.nd datum target po ints,
108-109
D movable d atum target symbols
C datum axis, 102-108 a.nd datum target spheres,
CADD/CAM, 38 coaxial datum features, 105 109-110
center of pattern of features as datum axis of screw thread s, part ial datum surface, 99
datum axis, 113 gears, and splines, 105 using contoured surface as
chain dimensioning, 31 defin ition, 102 d a tum feature, 116-117
cha in line, 348
509
 ■

~rs1on 510 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

datum target areas, 96-97 internal screw thread
datum target lines, 98
F representations, 283
datum target points, 92-95 fair curve, 20 International System of Units (51), 14
datum targets, 56, 88 fasteners, 282-292 irregu lar of size, 136
datum target symbols, 56-57, 88-98 definition, 282
datum target areas, 96-97 fixed fastener, 286-291
datum target lines, 98 fixed fastener application, 292
datum ta rget points, 92-95 float ing fastener, 284 L
degrees of freedom, 86-87 feature, 19, 135 least material boundary (LMB), 134
degrees symbol (0 ), 53 featu re control frame, 59-61 least material condition (LMC),
depth symbol, 53 definition, 59 25-26, 147-150
diameter, 19 w ith datum references, 60 limit dimension ing, 23
diameter symbol, 53 with order of elements, 61 limits,23
dimension, 19 featu re of size, 19, 135 limits and fits between mating
dimension and tolerancing featu re-relating control, 248 parts, 28
templates, 54-55 featu res of size, 135-137 limits of size, 27, 138-139
dimension origin symbol, 54 feature without size, 19, 135 LMC and MMC, comparison,
dimensioning and tolerancing., fits of mating parts, 28 148-149
13-50 fixed fasteners, 286-291 locating mu ltiple features, 244-255
allowance, 29 flatness tolerance, 185-189 composite positional
alternate dimensioning flatness applied to size tolerance, 248-250
practices, 32-37 dimension, 187 in patterns with separate
baseline dimensioning, 31 independency symbol, 186 requirements, 247
basic fits of mating parts, 28 specific area flatness, 187-188 positional tolerance specified
chain d imensioning, 31 flatness tolerance zone, 185 individually, 248
clearance, 30 floating fasteners, 284-285 single composite pattern, 246
clearance fit, 29 force fits (FN), 28, 30 locating tolerance zone, 331
definitions related to form tolerances, 177-200 location tolerances, 231-280
tolerancing, 18-20 applying form control to definition, 231
dimensioning units, 14-16 datum feature, 195-196 locating multiple features,
d irect dimensioning, 32 circularity tolerance, 189-190 244-255
extreme form variation, 27 cylindricity tolerance, 194-195 locating slotted featu res,
force fit, 30 definition, 177 262-265
fundamental dimensioning flatness tolerance, 185-189 positional tolerance, 232-244
rules, 16-18 free state variation, 190-194 positional tolerancing of
least material condition straightness tolerance, 178-185 coaxial features, 255-260
(LMC), 25-26 free state, 64 positional tolerancing of
maximum material cond ition free state condition, 17 nonparallel holes, 261-262
(MMC), 24-25 free state symbol, 64 positional tolerancing of
single limits, 24 free state variation, 190-194 spherica I features, 266
tolerancing fundamentals, circularity of features to be location tolerances (Part IT) and
21-24 restrained, 193-194 virtual condition, 281-314
dimensioning and tolerancing concentricity tolerance,
templates, 54 300-301
dimensioning rules, 16-18
G fasteners, 282-292
dimensioning symbols, 52-54 gage, 288 positional tolerancing for
dimensioning u nits, 14-16 geometric characteristic symbols, 58 coaxiality, 301-303
direct dimensioning, 32 geometric control of datum surface, 82 projected tolerance zone,
disposed, 316 geometric dimensioning and 292-295
tolerancing for CADD/CAM, 38 symmetry, 304-306
geometric tolerances, combination., 351 virtual condition, 295-299
E location tolerancing, 231
equal bilateral tolerance, 23 locational fits, 28
equally disposed bilateral
H
tolerance, 316 high points, 86
extreme attitude variation, 238
extreme conditions, 240, 295 M
extreme form variation, 27, 138 material boundary symbols, 58, 133
extreme positional variation, 238 in ch dimension, 16 material condition and material
independency symbol, 64 boundary, 133-176
interference fit, 28 conventional tolerance, 138
datum precedence and
material condition, 154-157
 ■

~rs1on Index 511

least material condition positional tolerancing, 231

(LMC), 147- 150
0 applying different positiona l
limits of size, 138-139 o rder of precedence, 85 tolerances to same feature,
material boundary calculation orientation tolerances, 201-230 261-262
examples, 159-162 angularity tolerance, 220-223 for coaxiality, 301-303
material condition analysis at RFS, MMC, a nd zero locating symme trical features,
and applications, 158-159 tolera nce at MMC, 223-224 305-306
maximum material condition combination of parallelis m of coaxial features, 255-260
(MMC), 144-146 a nd pe rpendicularity of nonparallel holes, 261-262
perfect form boundary, tolerances, 219 prima ry datum, 82
140-141 definition, 202 primary datum plane, 92
placing MMB value in featu re parallelism tolerance, 202-209 profile, 315
control frame, 157-158 perpendicularity tolerance, profile form and orientation
primary datum feature, RMB, 210-218 tolerance zone, 331
151- 153 profile geometric tolerances, 315
RFS and RMB, 141 profile of a line tolerance, 316
secondary and tertiary datum p profile of a sharp corner, 326
feature, RMB, 153-154 profile of a surface, 323
material condition applications, parallelism, 202 profile of a s urface all around or all
158-159 parallelism a nd perpendicularity over, 325
material condition symbols, 58, 133 tolerances, combination, 219 profile of a s urface between two
maximum boundary condition, 157 paralle lism geometric tolerance, 202 points, 324
maximum material boundary, parallelism of line e lements, 208 profile of a s urface tolerance, 323
features of size, 135-137 parallelism tolerance, 202-209 profile of feature to be restrained,
maximum material boundary axis parallelism, 205-207 334
(MMB), 133 parallelis m of line e lements, profile of plane surfaces, 329
maximum material condition 208 profile tolerances, 315-342
(MMC), 24-25, 133, 144-146 parallelism of radial e lements, combination of geometric
maximum material condition 209 tolerances, 335
(MMC) of a feature, 239 surface parallelism, 203 definition, 315
med ian, 300 tangent plane, 203-204 non-uniform profile tolerance
metric dimensions, genera I partial datum s urface, 99 zone, 327-334
to lerances, 22 pattern-locating control, 248 profile of a line all around, 318
millimeter dimensions, 15-16 perfect flatness, 185 profile of a line between two
MMB and LMB defined, 157- 158 perfect form boundary, 140-141 points, 316-318
MMB value in feature control perfect form boundary, LMC, 147 profile of a line, 316
frame, placing, 157-158 perfect symmetry, 305 specify ing basic dimensions
modifiers, 58 perpendicula rity, 210 in a note, 335
modifying symbols, 58 perpendicularity tolerance, 210-218 unilateral/ unequally disposed
movable datum targets, 88 axis, 212-215 profile of a line, 318-323
movable datum target symbol, 56 center plane, 216 projected tolerance zone symbol, 64
movable datum target symbols and definition, 210 projected tolerance zone, definition,
datum target points, 108-109 line elements, 216-217 292
multiple datum reference, 60 radial e lements, 218 projected tolera nce zone, 292-295
multiple datum reference frames, 87 surface, 210-211
physical datum feature simulator, 79
pitch diameter, 283
places symbol, 54 R
N plane surfaces, profile, 329 radial element, 209
nominal s ize, 19 plus/minus symbol (±), 54 radius, 20
nonrigid, 190 plus-minus dimens ion, 23 radius symbol, 54
nonrigid parts, 18 plus-minus dimensioning, 23 rec tangular coordinate dimension,
non-uniform profile, 327 polar coordinate dimens ioning, 246 244
non-uniform profile tolerance zone, positional tolerance, 232-244 w ithout dimension lines, 32, 34
327-334 based on surface of hole, 240 reference dimension, 20
composite profile tolerance, between conventional reference symbol, 54
330-333 tolerancing and pos itio nal regardless of feature size (RFS), 141
profile of conical features, 330 tolerancing, 234-238 regardless of material bo undary
profile of coplanar s urfaces, zero positional to leranci.ng at (RMB), 141
328-329 MMC,241 regular feature of size, 135
profile of plane surfaces, 329 positional tolerance restrain, 193
normal, 108 at LMC, 242-244 restrained condition, 193
at MMC, 239-240 RFS, MMC, and LMC, comparison,
at RFS, 242 150
 ■

~rs1on 512 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

rotational, 86 s urface straightness applied total runout, 347
Rule 1 of ASME Y14.5, 352 using independency transition fit, 28
Rule 2 in ASME Y14.5, 134 symbol, 180-181 transition fits, 28
running and sliding fits (RC), 28 unit straightness, 181-183 translate, 56
runout,343 surface control, regardless of trans lational, 86
runout tolerances, 343-358 feature size (RFS), 141- 142 trans lation modifier to datum
applying runout control to surface geometric control, 141 reference, applying, 114-115
datum,350 surface parallelism, 203 translation symbol, 64
applying runout to datum surface straightness tolerance, 178 true position, 231, 305
surface and datum axis, 349 symbols, 52 true profile, 315
applying runout to portion of symbols and terms, 51-76 two single-segment feature control
surface and two datum references, 348 additional symbols, 62-63 frame, 251
circular runout, 345-346 basic dimensions, 61
combination of geometric
tolerances, 351
datum feature symbols, 55
dimensioning and tolerancing u
specifying independency, 352 templates, 54 unequal bilateral tolerance, 23
total runout, 347 dimensioning and tolerancing unequally disposed bilateral
templates, 54-55 tolerance, 316
unequally disposed profile, 326-327
s dimensioning symbols, 52-54
feature control frame, 59-61 unequally disposed profile symbol,
secondary datum, 82 geometric characteristic 64
secondary datum plane, 92 symbols, 58 unilateral or unequally disposed
shrink fits, 28 material condition and profile of a surface, 326
simulated datum, 80 material boundary unilateral profile, 318
simulated datum axis, 104 symbols, 58-59 unilateral tolerance., 24
simulated datum plane, 80 symmetry, 304-306 unit flatness, 188
single composite pattern, 246 positional tolerancing locating unit straightness, 181-183
single limits, 24 symmetrical features, 305
slope symbol, 54 zero positional tolerance at
slotted features, locating, 262-265 MMC for symmetrical V
specific area flatness, 187-188 objects, 306 virtual condition, 240, 295-299
specified dimension, 23 symmetry line, 54 zero positional tolerance at
spherical d iameter symbol, 54 symmetry tolerance, 304 MMC,299
spherical features, positional
tolerancing, 266
sphe rical radius, 20 T w
spherical radius symbol, 54 tabular dimension, 32 working zone, 295
spotface, 54 tabular dimensioning, 32, 35-36
spotface symbol, 5
square symbol, 54
tangent plane, 81, 203-204
tangent plane symbol, 64 z
stacking, 31 taper symbol, 54 zero positional tolerance at MMC,
standard ANSI fits, 28 tertiary datum, 82 241-242, 299
standard ANSI/ISO fits, 28 tertiary datum plane, 92 for symmetrical objects, 306
statistical process control, 64 theoretical datum feature with clearance hole at virtual
statistical tolerance symbol, 64 s imulator, 79 condition, 299
statistical tolerancing, 64 thread note, 283
stock size, 20 thread symbol, 283
straightness, 178 three degrees of rotation, 86
straightness tolerance, 178-185 three degrees o f translation, 86
definition, 178 tolerance, 21
flat surface, 184 tolerance buildup, 31
limited length, 185 tolerances for metric dimensions, 22
straightness on noncylindrical tolerancing fundamentals, 21-24
features, 183-184 tolerancing, definitions, 18-20